Facilities Construction, Renovation & Repair Contract No ...

State System of Higher Education Commonwealth of Pennsylvania

Contract Manual and

Invitation for Bids

Work Order Contracts for Construction

Facilities Construction, Renovation & Repair

Contract No. KUFR-0033

KUFR-0033.1 – General Construction KUFR-0033.2 – HVAC Construction

KUFR-0033.3 – Plumbing Construction KUFR-0033.4 – Electrical Construction

Issuing Office Kutztown University

Facilities Project Services Kutztown, PA 19530

November 16, 2020

Solicitation for Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 Table of Contents Solicitation No. KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 2

KUTZTOWN UNIVERSITY STATE SYSTEM OF HIGHER EDUCATION COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Solicitation for Construction: Special Instructions to Bidders General Instructions to Bidders Bid Form (Blank) Bid Bond Form (Blank) Contractor’s Qualification Form (Blank)

Contract Form: Standard Form of Contract Contract Bond Form (Blank) General Conditions Insurance Rider Exhibit A, Individual Work Order Template

Technical Specifications: 011000 Summary 012200 Unit Prices 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management & Coordination 013119 Project Meetings 013200C Construction Progress Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 013500C Safety & Health Requirements 014500 Quality Control 015000B Temporary Facilities & Controls 016000 Product Requirements 016200 Product Options 017123 Field Engineering 017329 Cutting & Patching 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 O & M Data 017836 Warranties 017839 Project Record Documents 024100 Demolition 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 040000 Masonry 055000 Metal Fabrications 055200 Metal Railings 061000 Rough Carpentry 062000 Finish Carpentry 075700 Coated Foamed Roofing 099000 Painting & Coating 220000 Plumbing

Solicitation for Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 Table of Contents Solicitation No. KUFR-0033 Page 2 of 2

Technical Specifications (continued): 230000 HVAC 230553 Identification for HVAC Piping & Equipment 230700 HVAC Insulation 232200 Steam & Condensate Piping & Pumps 260000 Electrical 260553 Identification for Electrical Systems 270000 Communications 310000 Earthwork 311100 Clearing & Grubbing 312333 Trenching & Backfilling 321216 Asphalt Paving 321313 Concrete Paving 329000 Planting 329219 Seeding 329223 Sodding 334000 Storm Drainage Utilities

Authorized Document Source: Invitations for Bids including any specifications, plans, and drawings for this solicitation must be obtained from the authorized and official Kutztown University source. Due to the possible inaccuracies in documents obtained from other sources, and the potential for an incomplete understanding of the scope of work, bids submitted by firms who obtain these documents from any other source but the authorized source will be considered non-responsive and will be rejected.

Solicitation for Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 Special Instructions to Bidders Solicitation No. KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 3

STATE SYSTEM OF HIGHER EDUCATION COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA

SPECIAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, WORK ORDER CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

CONTRACT INFORMATION

Contract Title: Facilities Construction, Renovation, and Repair

Contract No: KUFR-0033

Contract Scope: Unit-priced work order contract for construction, against which Individual Work Orders will be issued. Kutztown University requires performance of work described herein. Work to consist of non-capital construction, renovation, repair, and maintenance of facilities, buildings, building systems, and utilities. Work shall include all labor, superintendence, materials, tools and equipment, and performing all work necessary to complete projects. The work will be performed under separate prime contracts for construction which will include General Construction, HVAC Construction, Plumbing Construction, and Electrical Construction.

Location: Kutztown University

Directions: https://www.kutztown.edu/campusmap

Contract Term/Duration: See Standard Form of Contract, Work Order Contract for Construction

Contract Value: $750,000 (Not-to-Exceed) $500,000 (Not-to-Exceed) $500,000 (Not-to-Exceed)

KUFR-0033.1 Gen. Const. KUFR-0033.2 HVAC KUFR-0033.3 Plumbing KUFR-0033.4 Electrical $500,000 (Not-to-Exceed)

Individual Work Orders:

Prevailing Wages:

Liquidated Damages:

See Standard Form of Contract, Work Order Contract for Construction

The Prevailing Minimum Wage Determination for this Solicitation is 20-06302, dated October 12, 2020.

See Standard Form of Contract, Work Order Contract for Construction

https://www.kutztown.edu/campusmap


BIDDING INFORMATION Issuing Office: Facilities Project Services Kutztown University 15200 Kutztown Road P.O. Box 730 Kutztown, PA 19530 Contracting Officer: Matthew Delaney Vice President for Finance and Facilities Kutztown University 15200 Kutztown Road P.O. Box 730 Kutztown, PA 19530 Bids Due Date/Time: December 15, 2020 by 2:00 PM Method of submission

of bids for this IFB: By upload of electronic documents to eProcurement Exchange. (see Sections 1 and 7 of the General Instructions to Bidders) Pre-bid Conference Date/Time: A pre-bid conference will not be offered for this Invitation for Bids. Pre-Bid Questions: All questions prior to bid submission must be submitted in writing. Submit

Pre-Bid Questions by posting them at the Questions Tab on the eProcurement Exchange. Questions must be received no later than December 4, 2020 at 2:00 PM. Answers will be provided in addenda to be issued prior to the bid due date.

REAAs for Small Diverse Business (SDB) proactive solicitation: None


Bid Security Required: 5% of bid price. Bid Security Allowed: Bid Bond only. Bid Period: Bids shall be valid for not less than 60 days. Items Required to be Submitted with the Bid: Bid Form Bid Bond

Contractor’s Qualification Statement Organization Chart

Additional Bid Submission Requirements: The following are special requirements for this contract. Failure to meet any

of the special requirements or failure to submit required documentation may result in the rejection of your bid.

In order to ensure responsiveness of Bidders, and in the best interest of the

University, the Bidder must be located within fifty (50) miles of the University. This is calculated “as the road drives” not “as the crow flies” and is determined by using Map Quest (shortest time). Bidders located outside of the fifty (50) mile distance will not be considered.

In order to ensure a Bidder has the ability to perform required work and to

demonstrate that the Bidder possesses the staffing, supervision, and administrative support required to efficiently and effectively provide required services, the Bidder must submit an Organization Chart showing the organization of the home office, branch offices, joint venture offices, subcontractors, and staff that the Bidder expects to utilize in response to this Invitation for Bids.

Contract Award: Lowest qualified, responsible bidder submitting a responsive bid. Multiple

contracts may be awarded. Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds: See Standard Form of Contract, Work Order Contract for Construction

Solicitation for Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 General Instructions to Bidders Solicitation No. KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 8


GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

FOR WORK ORDER CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

1. PASSHE eProcurement Exchange The System uses the eProcurement Exchange web-based platform for public notice for Invitations for Bids (IFBs). Specific instructions related to the eProcurement Exchange for any one specific IFB will be posted under that IFB on the eProcurement Exchange website, and/or in the Special Instructions to Bidders for that IFB. Any such specific instructions will take precedence.

Submission and acceptance of bids for an IFB in conjunction with the eProcurement Exchange may occur in one of three methods: (1) submission of hard copy bids by mail or in person, (2) upload of electronic documents to the eProcurement Exchange, or (3) upload of electronic documents, and entry of on-line bid prices, to the eProcurement Exchange. Each IFB may use a different method. The bidder should be sure to ascertain the method being used for each specific IFB. The method used for the IFB will be identified in the Special Instructions to Bidders for the IFB. Detailed information about submission and acceptance of bids is addressed in Section 7 below.

2. Responsibility of the Bidder It is the responsibility of the bidder by careful personal examination of the Contract Documents to satisfy himself as to the nature and location of the Work, as well as all environmental conditions that may affect performance of the Work. All bidders should visit the site to thoroughly familiarize themselves with the existing conditions. If any discrepancies should be found between existing conditions and the Contract Documents, prospective bidders shall report these discrepancies to the System for clarification prior to submitting a bid. Requests for interpretation of the Work to be performed shall be submitted in writing to the System or the System's designated representative. Failure of the bidder to visit the site, recognize and take into account in their bid site conditions that affect the Work, shall not be considered sufficient cause for any increase in the agreed-upon contracted amount. If subsurface drilling or other exploration has been performed at the Project site, information resulting from such drilling and/or exploration and provided to the System in forms and/or subsurface drilling reports is included in the Technical Plans and Specifications.

3. Incurring Costs The System is not liable for any cost or expenses incurred by bidders or prospective bidders in the preparation of their bids or for attendance at any conferences, meetings, or site visits related to this IFB.

4. Restriction of Contact From the issue date of this IFB until a final contract award has been made, all contacts with Commonwealth personnel concerning this IFB must be made only through the Issuing Office or other specific representatives identified on the eProcurement Exchange.

5. Addenda to the IFB If it becomes necessary to revise any part of this IFB, Addenda will be issued. If Addenda are issued, all terms and conditions that are not changed remain. Bidders shall acknowledge on the Bid Form all Addenda,


identified by the numbers and dates of those Addenda. Bidders are responsible for ensuring they are aware of all Addenda prior to submitting their bid.

6. Questions and Answers to the IFBThe eProcurement Exchange provides for on-line questions and answers. The System will post answers to questions, as applicable. If there are a significant number of questions and/or complex questions/answers, the answers may be consolidated and provided in an Addenda. Posted answers shall be considered official, as if included in an Addenda. Answers will be posted in a timely-enough manner for bidders to be able to adequately consider them. Bidders are responsible for ensuring they are aware of all posted answers prior to submitting their bid.

7. Submission and Acceptance of BidsBids shall be entered on the Bid Form provided elsewhere in this IFB. The completed Bid Form shall be scanned in PDF format, and uploaded to the eProcurement Exchange not later than the bid due date and time to be considered as responsive to the bid requirements. Bidders submitting bids for more than one separate prime contract shall prepare, scan, and upload separate Bid Forms.

All other items required to be submitted with the bid shall be scanned in PDF format and uploaded to the eProcurement Exchange in the same manner and at the same time as the Bid Form. Items may be separate PDF files, or combined into one PDF file; or may be combined into one PDF file with the Bid Form. If separate PDF files are used, however, they must be gathered into a Zip file for uploading. Bidders submitting bids for more than one separate prime contract shall prepare, scan, and upload separate items for each separate prime contract.

The apparent low bidder may be asked to submit one (1) original hard copy of their Bid Form, and one (1) original hard copy of their bid security, if required for the IFB, with all entries in ink or typewritten and with original signatures, within 48 hours of bid opening date and time. Other items required to be submitted with the bid may also be required to be submitted as original hard copies.

The System will not be responsible if the bidder is not able to upload their scanned PDF Bid Form if the problem is not associated with a failure of the eProcurement Exchange itself. Uploaded Bid Forms and other documents which are not readable when accessed by the System from the eProcurement Exchange will be rejected as non-responsive.

To be considered, bids must be a complete response to the IFB, and must contain all elements required to be submitted with the bid. An omission of prices requested on the Bid Form may be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire bid as non-responsive.

Bidders may submit modifications to their bids at any time before the bid due date and time. Modifications to bids shall be accomplished by uploading a new PDF file. Otherwise, all bids shall be unconditionally accepted without alteration or modification except as authorized in this IFB.

Bids may be withdrawn up to the time of bid opening.

Requests for withdrawal of bids after bid opening based on an erroneous bid and/or a mistake in the bid, in accordance with the Commonwealth Procurement Code 62 P.S. 512(f), must be made within two (2) working days after the date of bid opening.

8. Bid SecurityIf a bid security is required, each bid must be accompanied by a certified check, bank cashier's check, or Bid Bond. Specific bid security required, and the type, for the solicitation is identified in the Special Instructions to Bidders. Failure to submit bid security, if required, will result in the rejection of the bid as non-responsive. If a check is allowed, it shall be drawn to the order of the System. If a Bid Bond is used as the security, it must be submitted on the System-furnished Bid Bond form, complete with all signatures,


seals, and certificate of power of attorney. Failure to use the System Bid Bond form for a bid bond will result in the rejection of the bid as non-responsive. The Bid Bond form is located elsewhere in this IFB.

The bid security will be forfeited if a bid or any part thereof is accepted by the System and the bidder fails to furnish approved performance and payment bonds, if required, and execute the contract within the time frame stated in the Notice of Award.

All bid security not forfeited, except for the two lowest responsive, responsible bidders, shall be released on or before the thirtieth (30th) day after the bid opening. The bid security of the two lowest responsive, responsible bidders, except where forfeiture is involved, will be returned, or released, as appropriate, upon execution of the performance and payment bonds and/or the contract by the lowest responsive, responsible bidder. In the event no contract is awarded by the System, the bid security of the two lowest responsive, responsible bidders will be returned, or released, as appropriate, on or about sixty (60) days after the bid opening, unless an extension is agreed upon.

9. Business Certification The Bid Form contains a Bidder Business Certification section that bidders must complete.

If the bidder is incorporated or organized in a state other than Pennsylvania, the bidder must be registered to do business in Pennsylvania. If the bidder is operating under an assumed or fictitious name, the bidder must have registered that name in Pennsylvania. No contract will be awarded to a foreign (non-Pennsylvania) corporation, LLC, LLP, or LP, or to an assumed or fictitious name, unless the bidder has complied with the registration requirements of Pennsylvania statutes.

Information on business registration in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania is available from the Pennsylvania Department of State, Bureau of Corporations and Charitable Organizations, 206 North Office Building, Commonwealth Avenue & North Street, Harrisburg, PA 17120.

10. Submission of Small Diverse Business (SDB) Participation Information If applicable, bidders must submit with their bid the required SDB participation information. The SDB Requirements Instructions, and the required SDB Solicitation Form, are located elsewhere in this IFB.

11. Selection for Award The System intends to award a contract or contracts resulting from this IFB to the responsible bidder(s) who submitted a responsive bid(s) which represents the lowest price to the System based on the bid evaluation plan.

If unit-priced bid items are included on the Bid Form, the System reserves the right to make an award on any item for a quantity less than the estimated quantity offered.

If the Bid Form includes multiple Bid Items, the System reserves the right to make multiple awards if, after considering the additional administrative costs, it is in the System's best interest to do so.

12. Tie Bids When two or more low bids are equal in all respects, a recognized simple "game of chance" will be used to determine which equally-eligible bidder is to be awarded the contract. For two equally-eligible bidders, a coin flip or a drawing of straws or lots may be used. For three or more equally-eligible bidders, a drawing of straws or lots will be used. Equally-eligible bidders will have the opportunity to witness the process, if applicable.


13. Unbalanced Bids The System may reject a bid as nonresponsive if it is materially unbalanced as to prices for the basic requirement, any unit prices, and/or any options. Unbalanced pricing exists when, despite an acceptable total evaluated price, the price of one or more Bid Form line items is significantly overstated or understated. A bid may be rejected if the System determines that the lack of balance poses an unacceptable risk to the System.

14. Apparent Clerical and Other Mistakes on the Bid Form For the purpose of initial evaluation of bids, the following will be utilized in resolving arithmetic discrepancies found on the face of the Bid Form as submitted by the bidder:

a. Obviously misplaced decimal points will be corrected.

b. For a discrepancy between a unit price and its extended price, the unit price will govern.

c. Apparent errors in extension of unit prices will be corrected.

d. Apparent errors in addition of lump-sum and extended prices will be corrected.

In the case of a discrepancy between written words and numbers, the written words will govern.

15. System's Right to Reject Bids The System reserves the right to reject any bid if it shows any omission, alteration, addition, or deduction not called for; if it contains substitutions or exceptions; if it is conditional or represents an uninvited alternate bid; or if it contains irregularities of any kind. The System reserves the right, however, to waive technical defects or minor irregularities. Additionally, in the event a bidder fails, refuses, or neglects to provide any requested information or documents within the time stated in this IFB or upon the System's request, the System will have the right to reject their bid as non-responsive.

The System reserves the right to reject at any time all bids received.

16. Anti-Bid-Rigging The bids of any bidder or bidders who engage in collusive bidding shall be rejected. Any bidder who submits more than one bid in such manner as to make it appear that the bids submitted are on a competitive basis from different parties shall be considered a collusive bidder. The System may reject the bids of any collusive bidder upon bid openings of future projects. By submitting a bid, a bidder is certifying that they are not engaged in collusive bidding or bid rigging relative to this bid. Nothing in this section shall prevent a bidder from superseding a bid by a subsequent bid delivered prior to bid opening which expressly revokes the previous bid.

17. Reciprocal Limitations Act Requirements The Reciprocal Limitations Act (62 P.S. 107) is applicable to contracts of $10,000 and greater.

The Reciprocal Limitations Act requires the System to give bidders a preference against a nonresident bidder from any state that gives or requires a preference to bidders from that state. The amount of the preference shall be equal to the amount of the preference applied by the state of the nonresident bidder. The following is a list of the states which have been found by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania to have applied a preference for in-state bidders and the amount of the preference:

Arizona 5% (construction materials from Arizona resident dealers only)

Montana 3%


West Virginia 2.5% (for the construction, repair, or improvement of any buildings)

Wyoming 5%

The Reciprocal Limitations Act also requires the System to give preference to those bidders offering supplies produced, manufactured, mined, or grown in Pennsylvania against those bidders offering supplies produced, manufactured, mined, or grown in any state that gives or requires a preference to supplies produced, manufactured, mined, or grown in that state. The amount of the preference shall be equal to the amount of the preference applied by the other state for that particular supply. The following is a list of states which have been found by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania to have applied a preference for in-state supplies and the amount of the preference:

Alaska 7% (applies only to timber, lumber, and manufactured lumber products originating in the state)

Arizona 5% (construction materials produced or manufactured in the state only)

Hawaii 10%

Louisiana 10% (steel rolled in Louisiana)

7% (all other products)

Montana 5% (for residents offering in-state goods, supplies, equipment, and materials)

3% (for non-residents offering in-state goods, supplies, equipment, and materials)

New Mexico 5%

Oklahoma 5%

Washington 5% (fuels mined or produced in the state only)

Wyoming 5%

The Reciprocal Limitations Act also requires the System to not specify, use, or purchase supplies which are produced, manufactured, mined, grown, or performed in any state that prohibits the specification for, use of, or procurement of such supplies in or on its public buildings or other works when such supplies are not produced, manufactured, mined, or grown, or performed in that state. The following is a list of the states which have been found by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania to have prohibited the use of certain out-of-state supplies:

Georgia forest products only

Indiana coal

New Jersey various products, to include but not limited to: chain link fence, portable sanitation units, glass, glazier supplies, carpet and cushion, shades, upholstery materials and supplies, room air conditioning, electrical supplies, plumbing supplies, hardware supplies, fasteners, lumber, building supplies, audio/visual equipment, fire extinguishers, fire hose, motor oils, fuel oil, Venetian blinds, and drapes

New Mexico construction

The above lists and amounts of preferences are those related to construction contracts only. The complete list of preferences for all contracts, supplies, and services is available from the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Department of General Services.

18. Nondiscrimination The System is an equal opportunity employment agency with nondiscrimination/sexual harassment requirements, as contained in the General Conditions for the Construction Contract. It is the policy of the System to award and administer contracts for goods and services in a nondiscriminatory manner, to promote the affirmative participation of minority-owned and women-owned businesses in procurement


activities and awards, and to integrate into procurement processes the necessary practices and procedures for the procurement of all goods and services for the System to effectively implement the policy.

19. Debarred Contractors Contractors currently under suspension or debarment by the Commonwealth, any other state, or the Federal government, are not eligible for award of any contract for this Project. By submitting a bid, a bidder is certifying that they are not currently under suspension or debarment by the Commonwealth, any other state, or the Federal government. Additionally, contractors shall not contract with or employ any subcontractors, suppliers, or individuals that are currently under suspension or debarment. A current list of suspended or debarred contractors is available by contacting the Department of General Services, Office of General Counsel, North Office Building Room 603, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania 17125.

20. Delinquent Payments By submitting a bid, a bidder is certifying that, to the best of their knowledge, they are not delinquent in the payment of taxes or other levies to the Pennsylvania Department of Revenue, the Pennsylvania Department of Labor & Industry, or any other Commonwealth Agency or entity.

21. Submission of Contractor Qualification and/or Financial Information Upon request, or if specifically required by the terms of this IFB, the apparent low bidder may be requested to submit a contractor's qualification and/or financial statement within ten (10) calendar days of the bid date, with financial information current within twelve (12) months prior to the bid date, of which statements shall be certified to be true and correct by an affidavit sworn to or affirmed before a notary public or other officer empowered to administer oaths or affirmations.

22. Financial Requirements To be deemed a responsible bidder, the bidder may be required to demonstrate, in relation to the bid price, adequate financial and other resources in order to be able to successfully prosecute the work. Additional information may be requested by the System whenever, in its judgment, such information is necessary to determine the responsibility of the bidder.

23. Contractor Performance Evaluation Systems The System may utilize a contractor performance evaluation system or tool established by the Department of General Services or by another Commonwealth agency, entity, or instrumentality to obtain past performance information on the bidder. Such information may be used in a determination of the bidder's responsibility.

24. Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Contractor Responsibility Program (CRP) The System may utilize the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania CRP System, as provided for under the Governor's Office's Management Directive 215.9 Amended, Contractor Responsibility Program, dated October 25, 2010, to ensure that the System contracts only with responsible contractors.

25. References and Past Performance The System reserves the right to contact any and all references provided by the bidder, as well as any of the bidder’s past or current clients and/or customers, to glean information on the bidder’s past performance and experience. Such information may be used in a determination of the bidder’s responsibility.


26. Award of Contract The System may, solely at its own discretion, award a contract within sixty (60) days from the date of bid opening. Multiple contracts may be awarded.

A time extension may be made by written consent of the lowest responsive responsible bidder. Award will be consummated by a Notice of Award letter mailed to the Contractor.

As a result of this IFB, the System contemplates award of a no-value contract, under which individual work orders (IWOs) may be issued. The contract into which the parties anticipate entering is the System's Standard Form of Contract, Work Order Contract for Construction (WOCC), located elsewhere in this IFB.

The System will provide to the contractor the completed contract for signature with the Notice of Award letters. The contract will not become effective until executed by all necessary Commonwealth officials as provided by law.

27. Notice to Proceed (NTP) There is no NTP associated with the contract itself. NTPs are associated with IWOs issued under the contract.

28. Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds Should Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds be required, the System will provide to the Contractor the blank System Contract Bond form. The Contractor's surety company must be authorized to do business in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and must successfully demonstrate in writing prior to award that the amount of bond or reinsurance or other security has been obtained in conformance with the Pennsylvania Insurance Company law of 1921, 40 P.S. 832. If specifically required by the terms of this IFB, as indicated in the Special Instructions to Bidders, the Contractor’s surety company may be required to be rated at a specific level or better by A.M. Best and Company. Failure of the Bidder to execute any required Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds within a timely manner may result in the System not awarding the contract, not issuing an IWO, and/or terminating an already-awarded contract. In such cases, the System shall have the right to award the contract to the next lowest responsive responsible bidder.

29. PA E-Verify The Commonwealth of Pennsylvania enacted Act 127 of 2012, known as the Public Works Employment Verification Act (‘the Act’), which requires all public work contractors and subcontractors to utilize the Federal Government’s E-Verify system (EVP) to ensure that all employees performing work on public work projects are authorized to work in the United States. The Department of General Services’ (DGS) Public Works Employment Verification Compliance Program is responsible for the administration, education, and enforcement of the Act. Information on the Act and DGS' program are available on DGS' web site.

IWOs resulting from this solicitation will fall under the Act and the associated DGS compliance program. Contractors will be required to sign and submit to the university, as a pre-condition of being awarded an IWO, the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Public Works Employment Verification Form (the Form). The Form is available on DGS' web site and/or through the university.

30. Investment Activities in Iran The Commonwealth of Pennsylvania enacted Act 149 of 2014, which prohibits entities which engage in certain investment activities in Iran from entering into a contract with the Commonwealth. Contractors may be required to sign and submit to the university, as a pre-condition of being awarded a contract and/or an IWO, a certification stating that they are not on the Department of General Services' list of entities whom the Department determined are engaged in investment activities in Iran, as described in Act 149.


31. News Releases News releases and media contacts regarding this Contract, and any IWO issued under this Contract, will be made by the System only, unless the System directs otherwise in specific instances. In such instances, the System shall receive prior review and approval of such releases. In any case, Contractors shall not use the name of the System or any University for promotional or marketing purposes without the System’s prior written approval.

32. Pennsylvania Right-to-Know Law Effective January 1, 2009, all responses to this procurement opportunity are subject to the Pennsylvania Right-to-Know Law, 65 P.S. §67.101 et seq., (Act 3 of 2008). The Right-to-Know Law permits any requestor to inspect and/or copy any record prepared and maintained or received in the course of the operation of a public office or agency that is not subject to the enumerated exceptions under the law. If a bidder’s/proposer’s response to the procurement opportunity contains a trade secret or confidential proprietary information, the bidder/proposer should include with their response a separate signed written statement to that effect. Should the response become the subject of a Pennsylvania Right-to-Know Law request, the bidder/proposer will be notified by the procurement office to identify all trade secrets or confidential and proprietary information that is included in your response. The agency will then determine whether the claimed trade secret or confidential and proprietary information is subject to disclosure.

33. Right to Protest A bidder or prospective bidder or prospective contractor who is aggrieved concerning the solicitation or award of a contract may protest, as provided for in the Commonwealth Procurement Code, 62 Pa C.S. 1711.1. Protests shall be made in writing by submitting the protest to the Office of the Chancellor, State System of Higher Education, 2986 North Second Street, Harrisburg PA 17110. A copy of the protest shall be mailed simultaneously to the Contracting Officer identified for the solicitation on eProcurement Exchange. All protests must be received within seven (7) calendar days after the protestant knew or should have known of the facts giving rise to the protest. If a protest is submitted by a prospective bidder, the protest must be received prior to the bid opening date/time. If a protestant fails to file a protest or files an untimely protest, the protestant shall be deemed to have waived its right to protest the solicitation or award of the contract in any forum. Untimely filed protests will be disregarded. A protest must state all grounds upon which the protestant asserts the solicitation or award of the contract was improper. The protestant may submit with the protest any documents or information it deems relevant to the protest. Upon receipt and evaluation of the protest, the Office of the Chancellor will render a written decision, in accordance with the procedures outlined within the Commonwealth Procurement Code.

The right to protest is not applicable to the issuance or non-issuance of IWOs under the contract.

Solicitation for Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 Bid Form Solicitation No. KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 15


BID FORM

BID FOR: Contract No. Title of Contract Location BID FROM: Firm Name Federal ID No. Address Telephone Fax E-mail Name of Contact for this Bid The Proposer agrees to perform the work specified in the Contract Documents, under the terms and conditions specified in the Contract Documents, without exceptions or substitutions, and under any required additional certifications and conditions attached hereto, for the prices proposed on this Bid Form. The Proposer additionally certifies that requirements in the Instructions to Bidders are met. The Proposer acknowledges the Addenda hereinafter enumerated, which have been issued during the period of bidding, and agrees that contents of said Addenda shall become incorporated into the Contract. Addenda No. Date Issued


The estimated quantities listed on this Bid Form are estimated and approximate, and are presented solely for the purpose of determining the Total Base Bid. The System may increase or decrease the quantities to be performed without any adjustment in the unit prices quoted on this Bid Form. If accepted by the System, the unit prices quoted on this Bid Form will become the Contractual unit prices, and they shall be the only payment that the Contractor will receive for completed Work. Unless otherwise called for, all unit prices must be fully encumbered to include all labor burdens, and must include overhead and profit. In order to receive payment for bid items consisting of a percent markup, instead of a unit price, the Contractor may be required to provide supporting documentation of the actual cost of materials, equipment, and/or subcontractors. Any classification (labor, materials, and/or equipment) not included in the listed unit prices on the Bid Form, but required under an individual work order, shall be negotiated with the System. The Contractor may be required to submit supporting documentation. Subcontracted work is subject to prior approval by the System. The unit prices and extended unit prices as called for should be submitted in the spaces provided below. An omission of prices for any unit-price item called for will be sufficient cause for rejection of the bid as being incomplete and non-responsive. Specification Section 012200, Unit Prices, provides detailed descriptions of bid items. The Bidder is hereby notified that this work is subject to the provisions, duties, obligations, remedies and penalties of the Prevailing Wage Act. All unit rates must be based upon the rates listed in the Prevailing Wages Project Rates incorporated herein. All unit rates must be fully encumbered to include (FICA, SUI, FUTA, Worker’s Comp, Liability Insurance, Health & Welfare, Fringes, etc.), and must also include all overhead and profit.


FACILITIES CONSTRUCTION, RENOVATION & REPAIR UNIT PRICE BID I. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION A. LABOR:

Estimated Unit Extended Item No. Description Quantity Unit Price Price 1a Bricklayer & Mason 100 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 1b Bricklayer & Mason 20 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 1c Bricklayer & Mason 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift) 2a Carpenter, Drywall Hanger, 2,000 Hours $____________ $____________ Framer, Soft Floor Layer (Day shift) 2b Carpenter, Drywall Hanger, 50 Hours $____________ $____________ Framer, Soft Floor Layer

(Middle shift) 2c Carpenter, Drywall Hanger, 10 Hours $____________ $____________ Framer, Soft Floor Layer

(Night shift) 3a Cement Finisher 100 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 3b Cement Finisher 20 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 3c Cement Finisher 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift) 4a Glazier 20 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 4b Glazier 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 4c Glazier 5 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift)


Estimated Unit Extended Item No. Description Quantity Unit Price Price 5a Iron Worker 20 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 5b Iron Worker 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 5c Iron Worker 5 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift) 6a Laborer 2,000 Hours $____________ $____________

(Day shift)

6b Laborer 100 Hours $____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

6c Laborer 50 Hours $____________ $____________ (Night shift)

7a Operator 50 Hours $_____________ $____________

(Day shift)

7b Operator 10 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

7c Operator 5 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)

8a Painter 200 Hours $_____________ $____________

(Day shift)

8b Painter 20 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

8c Painter 10 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)

9a Roofer 20 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Day shift)

9b Roofer 10 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

9c Roofer 5 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)

10a Roofer (Shingle) 20 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Day shift)

10b Roofer (Shingle) 10 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

10c Roofer (Shingle) 5 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)


Estimated Unit Extended Item No. Description Quantity Unit Price Price 11a Sign Maker & Hanger 20 Hours $_____________ $____________

(Day shift)

11b Sign Maker & Hanger 10 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

11c Sign Maker & Hanger 5 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)

12a Truck Driver 20 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Day shift)

12b Truck Driver 10 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

12c Truck Driver 5 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)

13a Superintendent 50 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Day shift)

13b Superintendent 10 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

13c Superintendent 5 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)

14a Working Foreman 50 Hours $_____________ $____________

(Day shift)

14b Working Foreman 10 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

14c Working Foreman 5 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)

TOTAL OF All EXTENDED LABOR PRICES $


B. EQUIPMENT: Item Estimated Unit Extended No. Description Quantity Unit Price Price 1 Backhoe 20 Days $ $ 2 Truck 20 Days $ $

3 Dump Truck 40 Days $ $

4 Excavator 20 Days $ $

5 High Lift (30 ft) 20 Days $ $

6 Skid Loader 10 Days $ $

7 Trencher 10 Days $ $

TOTAL OF All EXTENDED EQUIPMENT PRICES $ GENERAL CONSTRUCTION: TOTAL BASE BID (A + B) Dollars $ (In words) (In numbers) ************************************************************************************************************************


II. HVAC CONSTRUCTION A. LABOR:

Estimated Unit Extended Item No. Description Quantity Unit Price Price 1a Asbestos & Insulation Worker 20 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 1b Asbestos & Insulation Worker 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 1c Asbestos & Insulation Worker 5 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift) 2a Boilermaker 20 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 2b Boilermaker 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 2c Boilermaker 5 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift) 3a HVAC Technician 1,500 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 3b HVAC Technician 100 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 3c HVAC Technician 50 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift) 4a Laborer 200 Hours $____________ $____________

(Day shift)



5a Operator 20 Hours $_____________ $____________

(Day shift)




Estimated Unit Extended Item No. Description Quantity Unit Price Price 6a Sheet Metal Worker 1,000 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 6b Sheet Metal Worker 20 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 6c Sheet Metal Worker 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift)

7a Steamfitter 50 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 7b Steamfitter 20 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 7c Steamfitter 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift)

8a Superintendent 40 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Day shift)




(Day shift)











TOTAL OF All EXTENDED EQUIPMENT PRICES $ HVAC CONSTRUCTION: TOTAL BASE BID (A + B) Dollars $ (In words) (In numbers) ************************************************************************************************************************


III. PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION

A. LABOR:

Estimated Unit Extended Item No. Description Quantity Unit Price Price

1a Asbestos & Insulation Worker 20 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift)

1b Asbestos & Insulation Worker 10 Hours $____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

1c Asbestos & Insulation Worker 5 Hours $____________ $____________ (Night shift)

2a Laborer 50 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift)



3a Operator 20 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Day shift)



4a Plumber 1,000 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Day shift)

4b Plumber 50 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

4c Plumber 20 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)

5a Sprinklerfitter 50 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Day shift)

5b Sprinklerfitter 10 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Middle shift)

5c Sprinklerfitter 5 Hours $_____________ $____________ (Night shift)



6a Superintendent 40 Hours $_____________ $____________

(Day shift)




(Day shift)









7 Trencher 10 Days $ $ 8 Sewer Camera 10 Days $ $ 9 Sewer Vacuum Truck 10 Days $ $

TOTAL OF All EXTENDED EQUIPMENT PRICES $ PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION: TOTAL BASE BID (A + B) Dollars $ (In words) (In numbers)


IV. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION A. LABOR:

Estimated Unit Extended Item No. Description Quantity Unit Price Price 1a Communications/Data Tech 200 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 1b Communications/Data Tech 20 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 1c Communications/Data Tech 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift)

2a Electric Lineman 20 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 2b Electric Lineman 10 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 2c Electric Lineman 5 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift)

3a Electrician 1,000 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift) 3b Electrician 100 Hours $____________ $____________

(Middle shift) 3c Electrician 50 Hours $____________ $____________

(Night shift)

4a Laborer 800 Hours $____________ $____________ (Day shift)



5a Operator 20 Hours $_____________ $____________

(Day shift)





6a Superintendent 40 Hours $_____________ $____________

(Day shift)




(Day shift)




B. EQUIPMENT: Item Estimated Unit Extended No. Description Quantity Unit Price Price 1 Backhoe 10 Days $ $ 2 Dump Truck 5 Days $ $





TOTAL OF All EXTENDED EQUIPMENT PRICES $ ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION: TOTAL BASE BID (A + B) Dollars $ (In words) (In numbers)


BIDDER'S BUSINESS CERTIFICATION TYPE OF BUSINESS (check one of the three options below, and circle the correct entries within)

The Bidder is a Pennsylvania Corporation, LP, LLP, or LLC (circle one), organized and existing

under the laws of Pennsylvania, and so is authorized to do business in Pennsylvania by the

Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended.

The Bidder is a Foreign Corporation, LP, LLP, or LLC (circle one), organized and existing under the

laws of the state of (enter the name of the state), and has or has not (circle

one) been granted a certificate of authority, or is or is not (circle one) registered, to do business in

Pennsylvania as required by the Pennsylvania Business Corporation Law of 1988, as amended.

The Bidder is an Individual, Proprietorship, Partnership, or other (circle one), trading under a

fictitious or assumed name, and has or has not (circle one) registered under the Pennsylvania Fictitious

Names Act of 1982, as amended.

RESIDENCY (complete one of the two options below)

Does your firm have a street address in Pennsylvania at which it was transacting business when the

Notice to Contractors for this contract was issued?

If "Yes", insert the address, or insert "same as address on page 1." If "No," insert the address of the office responsible for this bid, or insert "same as address on page 1." (In either case, provide a street address in lieu of a post office box.)


BID SIGNATURE PAGE CERTIFICATIONS The person(s) signing below certifies that:

− he/she(they) is(are) authorized to represent the Bidder and bind the Bidder to this bid,

− and, the information contained in or with this bid is true and correct, and that this information is material and important and will be relied upon by the System in awarding the contract for which this bid is submitted.

If the Bidder is an Individual, Proprietorship, or Partnership: (one signature and one witness signature required) (Signature) (Witness) (Date) If the Bidder is a Corporation, LP, LLP, or LLC: (two signatures required) (President/Vice President) (Secretary/Treasurer) (Date) (CORPORATE SEAL)

Solicitation for Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 Bid Bond Solicitation No. KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 2


BID BOND

(Bid Bond must be submitted on this form; all blanks must be completed) Bond No. Amount $ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, (hereinafter called the "Principal") as Principal and a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State/Commonwealth of , and authorized to transact business in Pennsylvania, as Surety, (hereinafter called the "Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the State System of Higher Education, Pennsylvania (hereinafter called the "Obligee"), in the sum of Dollars ($ ) for the payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we, the said Principal, and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, our administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally firmly by these presents. Sealed with our seals and dated this day of , WHEREAS the Principal has submitted a bid upon Contract No. for NOW, THEREFORE, the conditions of these obligations are such that if the Principal shall not withdraw its bid prior to the expiration of the award period after the opening of the bids; and shall comply with all requirements set forth in the "Invitation For Bids", in the "Instructions to Bidders", and on the "Bid Form"; and if the said contract be awarded to the Principal and the Principal shall, within such time as may be specified, enter into the contract in writing, and give bond, with Surety acceptable to the Obligee, covering the faithful performance of the said contract, payment of claims for labor, material, and equipment rental, comply with the warranty provisions, and the remedy of defective workmanship or material for one year after the date of completion, all of which shall be supplied on the forms as specified by said Obligee; or if the Principal shall fail to do so, pay to the Obligee the lesser of the following amounts: 1) the amount of this bond as hereinabove set forth, or 2) the difference between the amount specified in the Principal's bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid including the administrative cost to effect such contract, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.

Solicitation for Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 Bid Bond Solicitation No. KUFR-0033 Page 2 of 2

If the Bidder is an Individual, Proprietorship, or Partnership: (one signature and one witness signature required) (Signature) (Witness) (Date) If the Bidder is a Corporation, LP, LLP, or LLC: (two signatures required) (President/Vice President) (Secretary/Treasurer) (Date) (CORPORATE SEAL) SURETY (include title of Signatory) (SURETY SEAL) INSTRUCTIONS FOR BID BOND: The names of the Principal and the Surety on the front page must include a street address. The Surety must attach to the Bid Bond a Power-of-Attorney, which must be dated to match the date of the Bid Bond, and showing that the person signing the Bid Bond for the Surety has current authority to do so.

Form FPS-CS-6-M Rev. 11/19 Contractor’s Qualification Form – KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

KUTZTOWN UNIVERSITY

Contractor’s Qualification Form NAME: ADDRESS: PRINCIPAL OFFICE (if different from address above): TYPE OF ORGANIZATION (check appropriate category): ☐ Corporation ☐ Partnership ☐ Individual FEDERAL ID NO: TELEPHONE NO: FAX NO: WEBSITE ADDRESS (URL): POINT OF CONTACT NAME: Title: Email Address: IS YOUR COMPANY A DGS VERIFIED SMALL DIVERSE BUSINESS (SDB)? IF YES, CHECK THE APPROPRIATE CATEGORY: ☐ Minority-Owned Business Enterprise (MBE) ☐ Women-Owned Business Enterprise (WBE) ☐ Veteran-Owned Business (VB) ☐ Service-Disabled-Veteran-Owned Business (SDVB)


TYPE OF WORK (check all that apply): ☐ General Construction

☐ HVAC Construction

☐ Plumbing Construction

☐ Electrical Construction

☐ Other (specify): ORGANIZATION

1. Number of years your company is in business as a contractor?

2. Number of years your company is in business under its current name? a. What other or former names has your company used?

3. If your company is a corporation: a. Date of incorporation: b. State of incorporation: c. President’s name: d. Vice-president’s name: e. Secretary’s name: f. Treasurer’s name:

4. If your company is a partnership: a. Date of organization: b. Type of partnership (if applicable): c. Name(s) of general partner(s):

5. If your company is individually owned: a. Date of organization: b. Name of owner:

6. If the form of your company is other than those listed above, describe it and name the principals:


LICENSING

1. List jurisdictions and trade categories in which your company is legally qualified to do business, and indicate registration or license numbers.

2. List jurisdictions in which your company’s partnership or trade name is filed. EXPERIENCE

1. List the categories of work that your organization normally performs with its own workforce.

2. Claims and Suits. (If the answer to any of these questions is yes, provide details). a. Has your company ever failed to complete any work awarded to it?

b. Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or suits pending or outstanding against your company or its officers?

c. Has your company filed any law suits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts with the last five years?

3. Within the last five years, has any officer or principal of your company ever been an officer or principal of another company when it failed to complete a construction contract? (If the answer is yes, attach details).


4. List major construction projects your company has in progress, giving the name of the project, owner, architect, contract amount, percent complete and scheduled completion date. (Use a separate sheet if necessary).

a. State total worth of work in progress and under contract:

5. List the major projects your company has completed in the past five years, giving the name of the project, owner, architect, contract amount, date of completion and percentage of the cost of the work performed with your own workforce. (Use separate sheet if necessary).

a. State average annual amount of construction work performed during the past five years: REFERENCES

1. Trade References:

2. Bank References:


3. Surety: a. Name of bonding company:

b. Name and address of agent: CERTIFICATION

I state that (name of Bidder): understands and acknowledges that the above representations are material and important, and will be relied on by the State System of Higher Education in awarding the contract(s) for which this bid is submitted. I understand, and my firm understands, that any misstatement shall be treated as fraudulent concealment from the State System of Higher Education of the true facts relating to the submission of this bid. Signature: Signatory's Name: Signatory's Title: Sworn to and subscribed before me this day of , . Notary Public My commission expires:

Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 Standard Form of Contract Contract No. KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5


STANDARD FORM OF CONTRACT,

WORK ORDER CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

BETWEEN THE SYSTEM AND THE CONTRACTOR

This Contract is made and entered into this ______ day of __________, 20_____, in Berks County, Pennsylvania, by and between

Kutztown University

15200 Kutztown Road Kutztown, PA 19530

of the State System of Higher Education Commonwealth of Pennsylvania hereinafter called the "System"

and

---Contractor's Name---

---address--- ---address---

a corporation/LP/LLP/LLC/partnership/etc. organized in the state of _______ ___

Federal I.D. No. ___________, hereinafter called the "Contractor."

CONTRACT DESCRIPTION Contract No. KUFR-0033

Contract Name Facilities Construction, Renovation, and Repair

University/Location Kutztown University

The Contract is an indefinite quantity, indefinite delivery contract against which Individual Work Orders (IWOs) for specific construction services may be issued by the System.

EFFECTIVE DATE OF CONTRACT The parties, hereto, intending to be legally bound, hereby agree that this Contract shall not be effective until executed by all necessary Commonwealth officials as required by law.

CONTRACT TERM The term of this Contract shall be one (1) year from the Effective Date of this Contract. With mutual agreement of the System and Contractor, this Contract may be renewed for up to four (4) consecutive renewals of one (1) year each. The term of this Contract may not exceed a total of five (5) years. There is no guarantee that any Renewals will be offered by the System.


CONTRACT TIME Notices to Proceed are associated with IWOs only. Contract Time is associated with IWOs only. IWOs issued prior to the expiration of this Contract will continue in force until completed or terminated.

CONTRACT VALUE The Contract has no specific dollar value associated with it. The Contract dollar value will be determined by the dollar values of the IWOs issued by the System. There is no guarantee that any IWOs will be issued by the System; therefore, the Contract has no minimum value.

The total price of all IWOs issued in any contract year shall not exceed five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000). These limits may be exceeded only with written approval of the Office of the Chancellor.

UNIT PRICES AND ESCALATION The unit prices on the Contractor's Bid Form shall be the Contractual unit prices for the first year of the Contract. The Contractual unit prices are attached as Exhibit B.

For subsequent years of the Contract, Contractual unit prices will be subject to escalation. The basis for any escalation (increase or decrease) shall be The Consumer Price Index For All Urban Consumers (CPI-U), US City Average, as published by United States Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics. Contractual unit prices will be subject to escalation only at each Contract Renewal. The base CPI-U for this Contract is that for [---insert the month and year---]. It will be compared with the most recently-available CPI-U when any Contract Renewal is prepared.

INDIVIDUAL WORK ORDERS The System will issue IWOs to the Contractor for Work to be performed under the Contract. An IWO Form template is at Exhibit A.

Each IWO will establish the scope of work, the time, and the price for the Work for that IWO. The IWO price, as issued, will be based on estimated quantities for the Work and the Contractual unit prices for that Work. If an IWO includes Work not provided for under one of the Contractual unit prices, but which is still within the general scope of work of the Contract, the scope of work and unit price of that Work shall be negotiated.

The Contractor shall, within seven (7) days of receipt of an IWO from the System, sign and return the IWO to the System.

Payments to the Contractor are limited to the extent of the actual quantities, in accordance with the scope of work outlined in the IWO. The Contractor and the System shall be in agreement as to the actual quantities before final payment is made.

Upon completion and acceptance of the Work, if the actual/final quantities are greater than the original estimated quantities, a change order to the IWO will be issued to reflect the final/actual quantities, and the corresponding final price for the IWO. However, if the actual/final quantities are less than the original estimated quantities, the Contractor shall submit an application for payment, marked final, for the actual/final quantities, and no change order will be issued.

If, during prosecution of the Work, it becomes known to the Contractor and/or the System that the required quantities will be significantly greater than the original estimated quantities, the Contractor and the System will agree upon a change order to reflect the revised estimated quantities, and execute that change order during the prosecution of the Work.


SELECTION OF CONTRACTORS FOR INDIVIDUAL WORK ORDERS If multiple contracts are held for this work, a process determined by the System for selection of a Contractor to receive a work order will be followed.

The System may issue Requests for Proposals for specific projects to one or more contracted Contractors. As a precursor to the issuance of an RFP for a specific project and for the purpose of narrowing the field of firms that will respond to the RFP, the System may solicit firms for the submission of a Letter of Interest that will express statements of interest for doing the specific work and provide brief statements of qualifications regarding the specific work.

The over-riding factor in deciding which Contractor to use for a particular work order is to select the Contractor that will be most beneficial to the System in terms of expertise, experience, past performance, cost, quality of work, and timely performance.

CONTRACT BOND The Contractor is not initially required to provide a performance and payment bond upon issuance of a contract. Upon receipt of the first Individual Work Order (IWO) under this contract, the Contractor must submit a performance and payment bond in the amount of $100,000 (100%) for the remaining term of the contract. When any single Individual Work Order (IWO), or a combination of IWOs exceeds a total of $100,000, the Contractor will be required to provide additional performance and payment bonding (amount to be determined). The Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of any required bonds.

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Liquidated Damages (LDs) are associated with IWOs only. IWOs may or may not contain LDs.

PREVAILING WAGE This Contract is subject to the Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act, 43 P.S. § 165-1 et seq, as amended. The Prevailing Minimum Wage Determination for this Contract is serial number: 20-06302, dated: October 12, 2020, classification: Building. The Determination will apply to all IWOs.

ACT 127, PA eVERIFY This Contract is subject to Pennsylvania Act 127 of 2012, known as the Public Works Employment Verification Act. IWOs may or may not be subject to Act 127.

NOTICE Unless otherwise specifically identified by any provision of this Contract, a notice shall be deemed sufficient if given in writing and delivered personally or sent by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, postage prepaid, or delivered by a nationally-recognized express mail service, charges prepaid, receipt obtained, to the persons signing this contract and at the addresses captioned on Page 1 of this Standard Form of Contract, or to such other persons or addresses as are specified by similar notice.


CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

The terms, conditions, requirements, and considerations of this Contract are specified in the Contract Documents.

The Contract Documents include this Standard Form of Contract plus the following:

Contract Bond consisting of __ pages

General Conditions for the Work Order Contract for Construction consisting of 34 pages

Insurance Rider for the Work Order Contract for Construction consisting of 3 pages

Exhibit A, IWO Form Template consisting of 3 pages

Exhibit B, Contractual Unit Prices consisting of __ pages

Specifications and Drawings (incorporated by reference) Table of Contents attached

The following are also incorporated as part of the Contract by reference:

Contractor’s completed Bid Form, dated _____________, submitted for this Contract

Addenda: ____, dated ___________________

____, dated ___________________

____, dated ___________________

Any Amendments to the Contract properly executed after the Effective Date of the Contract.

Any Renewals to the Contract properly executed after the Effective Date of the Contract.

Any IWOs under the Contract properly issued after the Effective Date of the Contract.

The terms, conditions, requirements, and considerations of the Contract Bond, the General Conditions for the Work Order Contract for Construction, and the Insurance Rider for the Work Order Contract for Construction shall also be applicable to IWOs.


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Standard Form of Contract has been executed and delivered as of the date set forth in the caption hereof;

FOR THE CONTRACTOR

FOR THE COMMONWEALTH

If the Contractor is an Individual, Proprietorship, or Partnership

Kutztown University of Pennsylvania, State System of Higher Education

_______________________________________ Individual or Partner date _______________________________________ printed name

_______________________________________ Matthew Delaney date VP of Finance & Facilities Contracting Officer _______________________________________ Matthew Assad date Comptroller Fiscal Officer

If Contractor is a Corporation, LP, LLP, or LLC

APPROVED AS TO FORM AND LEGALITY

_______________________________________ President or Vice President date _______________________________________ printed name

_______________________________________ University Legal Counsel date State System of Higher Education

_______________________________________ Secretary or Treasurer date _______________________________________ printed name

_______________________________________ Office of General Counsel date Commonwealth of Pennsylvania

______________________________________ Office of Attorney General date Commonwealth of Pennsylvania

• If the Contractor is an Individual, Proprietorship, or Partnership, one signature is required. • If the Contractor is a Corporation, LP, LLP, or LLC, two signatures are required. One must be the

President or Vice President. The second must be the Secretary or Treasurer. • The Contractor can delegate signatory authority to other individuals by means of a certified Board

Resolution presented with this Standard Form of Contract.

Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 Contract Bond Contract No. KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 4


CONTRACT BOND

(Contract Bond must be submitted on this form; all blanks must be completed)

Bond Number ________________________ KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS, that we the undersigned (Contractor) (Address) as Principal, and (Surety) (Address) a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State/Commonwealth of , and authorized to transact business in Pennsylvania, as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the State System of Higher Education as hereinafter set forth, in the full and just several sums of:

(A) Dollars ($ ), equal to [---100%---] of the contract amount, for faithful performance of the Contract as designated below;

(B) Dollars ($ ), equal to [---100%---] of the contract amount, for payment for labor, material, equipment rental, and public utility services as designated below; and

(C) Dollars ($ ), equal to [---10%---] of the contract amount, for maintenance as designated below;

lawful money of the United States of America, to be paid to the State System of Higher Education, its successors or assigns, to which payment well and truly to be made and done, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. Sealed with our respective seals and dates this day of , 20 . WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal has entered into the Contract with University of Pennsylvania of the State System of Higher Education for the Project known as (Contract Number and Name) upon certain terms and conditions in said Contract more particularly mentioned; and WHEREAS, it is one of the conditions of the award of the State System of Higher Education pursuant to


which said Contract is about to be entered into, that these presents be executed; NOW, THEREFORE, the joint and several conditions of this obligation are such: A. That if the above bounden Principal as Contractor shall well and faithfully do and perform the things agreed by it to be done and performed according to the terms of said Contract and general provisions, including the plans and specifications therein referred to and made part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said plans and specifications as therein provided, and which are hereby made part of this bond the same as though they were fully set forth herein, and shall indemnify and save harmless the State System of Higher Education and all of its officers, agents, and employees from any expense incurred through the failure of said Contractor to complete the work as specified and for any damages growing out of the manner of performance of said Contract by said Contractor or its subcontractors, or its or their agents or servants including but not limited to patent, trademark, and copyright infringements, then this part of this obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect. B. That if the above bounden Principal shall and will promptly pay or cause to be paid all sums of money which may be due by the Principal or any of its subcontractors to any person, co-partnership, association, or corporation for all material furnished and labor supplied or performed in the prosecution of the work, whether or not the said material or labor entered into and became component parts of the work or improvements contemplated, and for rental of equipment used, and services rendered by public utilities in, or in connection with, the prosecution of such work, then this part of this obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect. C. That, if the above bounden Principal shall remedy without cost to the State System of Higher Education any break of warranty and/or defects which may develop during a period of one (1) year from the date of final completion and acceptance of all the work performed under said Contract; provided, in the judgment of the State System of Higher Education or its successor having jurisdiction in the premises, such defects are caused by defective or inferior materials or workmanship, then this part of this obligation shall be void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect. The duties and responsibilities incurred by the Principal pursuant to said Maintenance Bond shall in no way qualify or limit any right of the State System of Higher Education arising pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Performance Bond or absolve the Principal of any duty, responsibility, or obligations vested in the State System of Higher Education. D. It is further agreed that any alterations which may be made in the terms of the Contract or in the work to be done, or materials to be furnished, or labor to be supplied or performed, or equipment to be rented, or public utility services to be rendered, or the giving by the State System of Higher Education of any extension of time for the performance of the Contract, or the reduction of the retained percentage as permitted by the Contract, or any other forbearance on the part of either the State System of Higher Education or the Principal to the other, shall not in any way release the Principal and the Surety or Sureties or either or any of them, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, from their liability hereunder; notice to the Surety or Sureties of any such alterations, extension, or forbearance being hereby waived. E. The Principal and Surety hereby jointly and severally agree with the obligee herein that every person, co-partnership, association, or corporation who, whether as subcontractor or as a person otherwise entitled to the benefits of this Bond, has furnished material or supplied or performed labor or rented equipment used in the prosecution of the work as provided and any public utility who has rendered services, in, or in connection with, the prosecution of such work, and who has not been paid in full therefore, may sue in assumpsit on this bond in his/her, their, or its name and prosecute the same to final judgment for such sum or sums as may be justly due him/her, them, or its, and have execution thereon; provided, however, that the State System of Higher Education shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of such suit to a third party under any theory of law of equity.


F. Recovery by any persons, co-partnership, association, or corporation hereunder shall be subject to the provisions of the Act of December 20, 1967, P.L. 869, Act No. 385 (8 P.S. 191 et seq.), as amended, which Act is incorporated herein and made a part hereof, as fully and completely as though its provisions were fully and at length herein recited, except that where said Act refers to the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania or a Department thereof, it shall be deemed to refer to the State System of Higher Education. G. In addition to the above, at the sole election of the State System of Higher Education, the State System of Higher Education may notify the Surety of the State System of Higher Education’s intent to declare a Principal in default and request and attempt to arrange a conference with the Principal and Surety to be held not later than 15 days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Contract. If the State System of Higher Education, the Principal and the Surety agree, the Principal shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the State System of Higher Education’s right, if any, subsequently to declare the Principal in default. If after such notification and conference, the Owner declares the Principal in default and formally terminates the Principal’s right to complete the Contract, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense, take one of the following actions:

a. Arrange for the Principal, with consent of the State System of Higher Education, to perform and complete the Contract; or

b. Undertake to perform and complete the Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors; or

c. Obtain bids or negotiate proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the State System of Higher Education for contract for performance and completion of the Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the State System of Higher Education and the contractor selected with the State System of Higher Education’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Contract, and pay to the State System of Higher Education the amount of damages it incurs in excess of the balance of the Contract Price incurred by the State System of Higher Education resulting from the Principal’s default including the cost for correction of defective work and completion of the Contract, additional legal fees, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Principal’s default and liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Contract, actual damages caused by delay performance or non-performance of the Principal. If the Surety does not proceed as provided herein with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this bond 15 days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this bond and the State System of Higher Education shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to it.


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have duly executed this Bond under seal the day and year above written. If the Bidder is an Individual, Proprietorship, or Partnership: (one signature and one witness signature required) (Signature) (Witness) (Date) If the Bidder is a Corporation, LP, LLP, or LLC: (two signatures required) (President/Vice President) (Secretary/Treasurer) (Date) (CORPORATE SEAL) SURETY (include title of Signatory) (SURETY SEAL) INSTRUCTIONS FOR BOND:

The names of the Principal and the Surety on the front page must include a street address.

The Surety must attach to the Bond a Power-of-Attorney, which must be dated to match the date of the Bond, and showing that the person signing the Bond for the Surety has current authority to do so.

Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 General Conditions Contract No. KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 34


GENERAL CONDITIONS

FOR THE WORK ORDER CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

ARTICLE TITLE PAGE ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS 2 ARTICLE 2 GENERAL PROVISIONS 3 ARTICLE 3 THE SYSTEM 3 ARTICLE 4 THE CONTRACTOR 5 ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 9 ARTICLE 6 CHANGES IN THE WORK 10 ARTICLE 7 TIME 11 ARTICLE 8 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK 12 ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS 14 ARTICLE 10 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK 16 ARTICLE 11 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 18 ARTICLE 12 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT 19 ARTICLE 13 DISPUTES 20 ARTICLE 14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS AND LEGAL MATTERS 23


ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS

1.1 As used in these General Conditions, and in the Contract Documents, the following terms are defined herein, unless the context clearly dictates otherwise.

a. Contract means the Contract for construction, of which these General Conditions are made a part. The documents comprising the complete Contract Documents are defined in the Standard Form of Contract.

b. Contract Sum, or Contract Price, is the dollar amount stated in the Standard Form of Contract, including any changes authorized by fully-executed Change Orders, and is the total amount payable by the System to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract.

c. Contract Time is the time allowed for substantial completion of the Work, including any changes authorized by fully-executed Change Orders.

d. Amendment is a written order to the Contractor, signed by the System and by all necessary Commonwealth officials as provided by law, and issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the terms and conditions of the Standard Form of Contract and/or the General Conditions, and/or any other Contract Documents providing terms and conditions. The Contract terms and conditions may be changed only by Amendment.

e. Change Order is a written order to the Contractor, signed by the System, and issued after the execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order.

f. Contractor shall be the entity with whom the System has entered into this Contract to construct the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents.

g. Separate Prime Contractors are the entities with whom the System enters into contracts to construct the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents, in accordance with Act 104/Public Law 155 of 1913. "Separate Prime Contractors" is typically differentiated from "Contractor" to indicate contractors other than the specific Contractor with whom the System has entered into the Contract at hand.

h. Subcontractor is a person or entity who has contracted to furnish labor or materials, or has contracted to furnish labor, for a contractor or another subcontractor in connection with the Project.

i. Supplier is a person or entity who is providing materials or equipment, or construction equipment or machinery, but not labor, for a contractor or a subcontractor in connection with the Project.

j. System means the State System of Higher Education, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania; the Office of the Chancellor of the State System of Higher Education; University or Universities of the State System of Higher Education; or any authorized representative of any of them, entering into the Contract.

k. Substantial Completion is when the Work is sufficiently completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, changed as authorized by fully-executed Change Orders, and certified by the System, so that the Project can be used, occupied, and/or operated for its intended use. In no event shall the project be certified as Substantially Complete until at least ninety percent (90%) of the Work on the Project is complete.

l. Project is the total effort of construction, renovation, improvement, addition to, and/or repair of a facility. The total effort is comprised of one or more construction contracts, one of which is the Contract, plus other necessary contracts, agreements, and purchases for design, management, and equipment, and possibly for furniture and furnishings.


m. Work means all labor, materials, and equipment, along with the necessary supervision, required and incorporated to complete the construction, renovation, improvement, addition to, and/or repair of a facility specified in, and according to, the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 2 - GENERAL PROVISIONS 2.1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2.1.1 The Contract Documents are defined in the Standard Form of Contract.

2.1.2 The Contract can be changed by either: (1) an Amendment, or (2) a Change Order. The Contract may be changed only after the Contract has been properly executed by all necessary Commonwealth officials as provided by law. Changes within the scope of the Contract may be ordered by the System. Changes not within the general scope of the Contract must be agreed upon by both parties.

2.1.3 The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by any one of the Contract Documents shall be binding as if required by all. Work not covered under any heading, section, branch, class, or trade of the specifications need not be supplied unless it is required elsewhere in the Contract Documents or is reasonably inferable therefrom as being necessary to produce the intended results. Work shown on the drawings is required even if not covered under a specification section. If there is a conflict between the drawings and the specifications, the specifications shall prevail. Words that have well-known technical or trade meaning are used herein in accordance with such recognized meanings. Where the Work is shown in complete detail on only half or a portion of a drawing or there is an indication of continuation, the remainder being shown in outline, the Work drawn out in detail shall be understood to apply to other like portions of the Project.

2.1.4 The intent of the Contract Documents is to describe a functionally complete Project composed of functionally completed systems. Any Work, materials or equipment that may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the intended result of a completed system shall be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for.

2.1.5 No additions to the Contract Sum will be approved for any labor, equipment, and/or materials to perform Work hereunder unless it can be clearly shown to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications and to be absolutely essential to the proper execution of the Work.

2.1.6 All drawings, specifications, and copies thereof furnished by the System are and shall remain the property of the System. They are not to be used on any other project, without permission of the System, and, with the exception of one Contract set for each party to the Contract, are to be returned to the System upon request at the completion of the Work.

ARTICLE 3 - THE SYSTEM

3.1 RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the

Contract Documents, or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the System may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the System to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the System to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity.


3.2 RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor fails to satisfactorily carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract

Documents or fails to perform any provision of the Contract, the System may, after three (3) working days written notice to the Contractor, and without prejudice to any other remedy the System may have, make good such failures. In such case, an appropriate change order shall be issued deducting from the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such failures, including the cost for the additional services by the Professional or any of the other representatives of the System made necessary by such failure. If the payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor and/or the Contractor's Surety shall pay the difference to the System.

3.3 RIGHT TO AWARD CONTRACTS The System reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with other portions of the

Project under similar conditions of this Contract. 3.4 REPRESENTATIVES 3.4.1 Representatives designated by the System will have the authority to enforce the Contract, to

include inspecting the Work and rejecting all Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. The System's Representatives may be System staff, the Professional, a Construction Manager, and/or other individuals or parties retained for such purpose.

3.4.2 Only those representatives so designated have authority to change, modify, or alter the Work or incur or cause to be incurred additional obligations beyond the Contract provisions.

3.4.3 The System may retain and designate other representatives, to include but not limited to Inspection and Testing firms, Commissioning Agents, and special consultants, to act as representatives for the System in the administration of specific aspects of the Contract. They may perform functions as determined by their agreements with the System.

3.4.4 In the event the System retains and designates more than one representative, and that directions, instructions, or interpretations given by those representatives are in conflict, the Contractor shall, within three (3) days but before any Work addressed in the conflicting directions, instructions, or interpretations is performed, bring the conflict to the attention of those representatives for resolution. In the event those representatives do not resolve the conflict, the Contractor shall bring the conflict to the attention of the System for resolution.

3.5 THE PROFESSIONAL 3.5.1 If retained and so designated by the System, a Professional architect or engineer may act as

representative for the System in the administration of the Contract and may perform any or all of the functions herein, as determined by the Professional’s agreement with the System.

3.5.2 The Professional has the authority to visit the Project site to review progress in accordance with the Contract drawings and specifications, attend job conferences, make progress reports to the System, review and accept/reject the Contractor's Schedule of Values, approve the Contractor's applications for payment, interpret technical aspects of the Contract Documents, reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents, review and approve submittals, review and provide an evaluation of the Contractor's Quality Control program, prepare drawings and specifications for change orders, review and accept the Contractor’s proposals for change orders, prepare punchlists, participate in punchlist and completion inspections, and review and approve operating and maintenance instructions, warranties, and related documents required by the Contract.


3.5.3 The Professional may have additional authorities and perform additional functions as determined by the System necessary to protect the System's interest.

3.6 THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER 3.6.1 If retained and so designated by the System, a Construction Manager may act as a

representative for the System in the administration of the Contract and may perform any or all of the functions stated herein, as determined by the Construction Manager’s agreement with the System.

3.6.2 The Construction Manager may perform any of the same actions the Professional has the authority to perform, either independent of or in conjunction with the Professional.

3.6.3 If given the responsibility by the System, the Construction Manager may perform any of the functions of System staff, except those functions expressed reserved for the Contracting Officer.

3.6.4 If given the responsibility by the System, the Construction Manager may assist in coordination of the activities of the various Separate Prime Contractors, as well as any other contractors, all of whom shall cooperate with him/her. Such coordination may include participation in the development, review, revision, and/or maintenance and updating of the Project construction schedule. Unless expressly provided for in Specification Section 013200, Construction Progress Documentation, the Construction Manager will not have control over or be responsible for the Project construction schedule itself, nor for the execution of the Work in accordance with the approved Project construction schedule, nor over construction means and methods.

ARTICLE 4 - THE CONTRACTOR

4.1 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS 4.1.1 The Contractor shall perform the Work according to good quality industry standards, practices,

and procedures, and in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved submittals.

4.1.2 The Contractor shall accept all conditions as found upon examination of the site, and take field measurements and verify field conditions and compare carefully such measurements and conditions with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. If the Contractor, in the course of construction, finds any conflict, error, or discrepancy on or among the Contract Documents, such conflict, error, or discrepancy shall be immediately referred to the System in writing.

4.1.3 On all Work of a remodeling nature or installation within existing facilities, the actual situation at the site controls any information given which may affect the quantity, size, and quality of materials required for a satisfactorily completed Contract, whether or not such information is indicated on the drawings or within the specifications.

4.1.4 If subsurface exploration, drilling, and/or testing was performed at the Project site, and if information resulting from that exploration, drilling, and/or testing was available to the Contractor by its inclusion in the Technical Plans and Specifications, then the following applies. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the Contract Documents, and notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in the subsurface exploration, drilling, and/or testing reports themselves, such subsurface exploration, drilling, and/or testing reports provided are for informational purposes only, and nothing contained in them shall be deemed to be a representation or warranty with respect to the condition of the Project site and/or any Work required to be performed in connection with the excavation thereof.


4.2 SUPERINTENDENCE AND MANAGEMENT 4.2.1 Unless Specification Section 011000, Summary, of this Contract contains other requirements

for superintendence and/or management, the Contractor shall comply with the provisions below.

4.2.2 Superintendence. At all times during performance of the Work at the Project site, and until the Work is completed and accepted, the Contractor shall have on site a duly authorized and competent superintendent who shall directly supervise the Work. Direct supervision shall be required any time that the Contractor or any of its subcontractors are carrying out Work on the site. Communications given by the System at the Project site to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. If the Contractor has more than one Separate Prime Contract, the Contractor shall provide a separate superintendent for each Separate Prime Contract. The superintendent shall be acceptable to the System. The System may require the submission of a resume or statement of qualifications for the proposed superintendent. The Contractor shall not change the assigned superintendent without approval of the System. Such approval shall not be unreasonably withheld.

4.2.3 Management. For the duration of the Contract, and until all Contract requirements are completed and final payment is made, the Contractor shall have a duly authorized and qualified project manager for the Contract. The project manager shall be the primary point of contact between the Contractor and the System, and between the Contractor and the design Professional. The project manager shall have the full authority to make decisions and approve Contract changes for the Contractor. If the Contractor has more than one Separate Prime Contract, the Contractor shall provide a separate project manager for each Separate Prime Contract. The project manager shall be acceptable to the System. The System may require the submission of a resume or statement of qualifications for the proposed project manager. The Contractor shall not change the assigned project manager without the approval of the System. Such approval shall not be unreasonably withheld.

4.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 4.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work using the Contractor's best skill and

attention to complete the Work in an acceptable manner and in accordance with the Project Schedule (see Article 4.7 Project Schedule). The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the Work performed and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work, unless the Contract Documents give other instructions.

4.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for the acts and omissions of all of its employees, all subcontractors and their agents and employees, and all other persons performing portions of the Work under an agreement with the Contractor.

4.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 4.4.1 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order and conduct among its employees

and other persons carrying out the Work. Every employee shall be fit and skilled in the performance of tasks assigned to them. The Contractor shall comply with reasonable directives given by the System, or by its representatives, concerning interaction with System employees and students, and with the general public.

4.4.2 This Contract may be subject to the provisions, duties, obligations, remedies, and penalties of the Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act (43 P.S. § 165-1, et seq.), as amended, which is incorporated herein by reference as if fully set forth herein.

4.4.3 The System anticipates the Contractor will provide products (i.e., products, materials, and equipment as defined in Specification Section 016100, Common Product Requirements) to be incorporated into the Work. Products shall meet or exceed the quality specified in the Contract


Documents, and shall be new, undamaged, and unused at the time of installation, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents or authorized by the System as a substitution after the Effective Date on this Contract. The Contractor shall produce, upon request, evidence supporting the source of materials used in the Work. The burden of proof of quality for all products provided rests with the Contractor. The costs incurred for substantiating quality shall be borne by the Contractor. If the System accepts substituted products of a lesser quality than specified, the System shall be entitled to a credit equal to the difference in cost of the products specified and the products provided, to include any difference in the cost of delivery, storage, handling, and installation. For any substituted products, the Contractor shall fully warrant and guarantee for the benefit of the System the effectiveness, fitness for the purpose intended, quality, and merchantability of the substituted product. Specification Section 016200, Product Options, provides requirements for requests for substitutions.

4.5 TAXES Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes as required by law. Since

the System is an instrumentality of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, the sale at retail to or use by a construction contractor of certain building machinery and equipment and services thereto that are transferred to the System may possibly be excluded from some or all of such taxes. Forms and directions on the manner of obtaining exclusions from sales taxes may be obtained from the Pennsylvania Department of Revenue.

4.6 UNIFORM CONSTRUCTION CODE; PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES 4.6.1 Under the Pennsylvania Uniform Construction Code (UCC), all System facilities fall under the

jurisdiction of only the Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry (L&I) for plan review and inspection. Local authorities have no jurisdiction for building permits on System facilities. The System through its Professional is responsible for obtaining the Building Permit. A copy of the Building Permit, which includes a list of the required inspections, is available from the System or its Professional.

4.6.2 The Contractor shall become familiar, and is responsible for complying, with all aspects of the UCC. For purposes of UCC inspections, the Contractor shall be deemed the “owner” as described in the UCC. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall include in the Project Schedule the UCC inspections applicable to their Work. Each Contractor shall be responsible to contact L&I to schedule the required inspections in accordance with the inspection procedures outlined in the Building Permit. Each Contractor shall notify the System of all scheduled inspections and shall inform the System in writing of the results of all inspections.

4.6.3 The Contractor shall complete in a timely manner all Contract requirements necessary for the Project to receive a Certificate of Occupancy.

4.6.4 Unless otherwise called for by the Contract, the System will obtain any required zoning or land use permits from the local municipality having jurisdiction.

4.6.5 Unless otherwise called for by the Contract, the System will obtain any required storm water or other environmental permits from the governmental agency having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall comply with any and all requirements of those permits. The Contractor also may be required to be a Transferee/Co-Permittee on the NPDES permit.

4.6.6 The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all other permits, licenses, and certificates required by Law and/or any public authority for the proper execution and completion of its Work. The Contractor shall furnish proof of payment for all such permits, licenses, and certificates, or proof that no permits, licenses, or certificates are required.

4.6.7 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable Laws, ordinances, regulations, rules, and orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If the Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents is at variance therewith in any


respect, it shall promptly notify the System in writing. If the Contractor performs any Work knowing it to be contrary to such applicable laws, ordinances, regulations, rules, or orders, and without such written notice to the System, the Contractor assumes full responsibility therefor and shall bear all costs attributable thereto.

4.6.8 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. It shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the System harmless from loss on account thereof. The System shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, process, or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the design, process, or product specified is an infringement on a patent, it shall be responsible for such loss unless it promptly gives such information to the System.

4.7 PROJECT SCHEDULE 4.7.1 The Contractor shall comply with the Project Schedule requirements specified in Specification

Section 013200, Construction Progress Documentation. If a Section 013200 is not provided, the Contractor shall comply with the provisions below.

4.7.2 Within seven (7) days following receipt of Notice to Proceed, the Lead Prime Contractor (see Specification Section 011000, Summary) shall furnish to the System and to any and all other Separate Prime Contractors a practicable schedule of the proposed prosecution of the Work, and the planned dates on which salient features of the Work will start and complete. The Project Schedule shall be coordinated with and accepted and signed by any and all other Separate Prime Contractors, and submitted to the System for review and approval not later than fourteen (14) days after Notice to Proceed.

4.7.3 The Contractor shall complete portions of the Work in such order of time as may be stated in the Contract Documents or as required in the approved Project Schedule. If the Contractor fails to process the Work according to the approved Project Schedule, the System may require the Contractor to take necessary steps to recover and maintain the Project Schedule, at no additional cost to the System. Necessary steps may include, but are not limited to, additional resources, additional shifts, or overtime operations. If the Contractor refuses or fails to proceed as directed by the System, the System has the right to carry out the Work, and may find the Contractor in breach of its Contract and/or declare the Contractor in default.

4.8 SUBMITTALS 4.8.1 The Contractor shall prepare and process, in accordance with Specification Section 013300,

Submittal Procedures, submittals, consisting of the necessary shop drawings, coordination drawings, product data, samples, and other information required to identify the proposed equipment and materials, to support the proposed installation methods, and to establish standards by which the Work will be judged. The preparation and processing of submittals shall not delay the Project or require a time extension to the Contract Time, unless agreed to by the System.

4.8.2 The System's review and approval of a submittal is for conformance with the information given in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project. Approval does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for compliance with Contract requirements or with statutory or regulatory requirements. Moreover, the Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, details and connections, fabrication, construction methods, and coordination of trades required for satisfactory construction of all Work.

4.8.3 No portion of the Work requiring a submittal shall be commenced until the submittal has been approved by the System. Any Work commenced by the Contractor prior to approval of the submittal is performed by the Contractor at its own risk.


4.9 JOB CONDITIONS 4.9.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances,

permits, and the Contract Documents, and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with any materials or equipment, unless otherwise permitted by the System. The Contractor shall at all times keep the work site free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish created by its operations.

4.9.2 The site of the Work is defined by the Limit of Contract line shown on the drawings. The Contractor may only extend its Work beyond this line as may be necessary to satisfy requirements of all permits and to make utility and service connections. Before starting any Work beyond the Limit of Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the System a description of the proposed Work for their review and approval.

4.9.3 The Contractor shall cooperate in the arrangements of the Work, as necessary, to least affect the administration or operation of any present facility. Existing utility services roads and access ways shall not be interrupted without prior approval by the System. The Contractor shall comply with the System's prescribed times for acceptable outage periods.

4.9.4 The Contractor shall at all times afford other contractors reasonable access to the site and material storage areas, and shall perform its Work so as not to interfere with the work of other contractors.

4.9.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary heat, light, and water as necessary to execute and protect the Work, and shall maintain adequate ventilation of the work site to ensure proper air quality for human breathing and safe equipment operations. Specific requirements may be provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to, Specification Section 015000, Temporary Facilities and Controls.

4.9.6 The Contractor shall protect the Work and stored materials. Specific requirements may be provided elsewhere throughout the Contract Documents.

4.10 CONTRACTOR EVALUATIONS The Contractor, by entering the Contract, consents to the evaluation of its performance by the

System, or its representatives, and the Contractor understands that any such evaluation may be used in future procurements to determine the Contractor's responsibility. The System, or its representatives, shall provide the Contractor with notice of any unsatisfactory evaluations and the reasons therefore. In such cases, the Contractor shall be entitled to submit a reply.

ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS

5.1 SUBCONTRACTS 5.1.1 Subcontractors employed by the Contractor are solely responsible to the Contractor, and shall

have no contractual relationship with the System.

5.1.2 All Work performed for the Contractor by a subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between the Contractor and the subcontractor. All agreements between Contractors and subcontractors shall contain provisions requiring all of the following rights and responsibilities:

a. Preserving and protecting the rights of the System under the Contract with respect to the Work to be performed under the subcontract, so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights.

b. Requiring that the Work be performed in accordance with the terms, conditions, and requirements of the Contract Documents.


c. Requiring that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, or otherwise, with respect to subcontracted portions of the Work, be submitted to the Contractor in the manner provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the System.

d. Requiring that each subcontractor and/or supplier fully warrant and guarantee for the benefit of the System as purchaser the effectiveness, quality, and merchantability of any item provided and/or installed by such subcontractor.

e. Requiring that the subcontractor is without privity of Contract to the System and that it agrees by signing the subcontract that it neither acquires nor intends to acquire any rights against the System on a third party beneficiary theory or any others.

5.1.3 The Contractor shall not sublet any part of this Contract without written approval of the System. Within thirty (30) days after contract award, or within seven (7) days after Notice to Proceed, whichever is sooner, the Contractor shall furnish to the System, for approval, a list of all subcontractors and suppliers it proposes to use under the Contract.

5.1.4 A Contractor may not, except with the consent of the System, have a financial interest in any other contractor, subcontractor, or supplier providing services, labor, or material on this Project. Failure to disclose the names of such subcontractors and/or suppliers shall be sufficient grounds for termination of this Contract. Such failure may also be grounds for the initiation of civil or criminal proceedings.

5.1.5 The System has the right to direct the Contractor to replace any subcontractor to which the System objects for any of the following reasons:

a. The subcontractor has failed to work in accordance with the Contract provisions, rules, and regulations regarding Contractor performance, Contract Compliance, or good order and conduct of its employees.

b. The subcontractor has defaulted or failed to perform on previous System projects.

c. The subcontractor has been suspended or debarred from doing business with the Commonwealth.

ARTICLE 6 - CHANGES IN THE WORK

6.1 CHANGE ORDERS 6.1.1 The System, without invalidating the Contract, and without notice to the Sureties, may, by

written order, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract, consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions. All such changes shall be implemented by a Change Order.

6.1.2 Change Orders shall adjust the Contract Sum and Contract Time accordingly, as they relate to the cost of the Work and the cost of any impacts to the Work, and to the impact on timely completion of the Work. Costs and impacts shall include any and all costs associated with acceleration, stacking, and re-sequencing of the Work required to maintain the Project Schedule. If it is not possible to complete the Work in accordance with the Project Schedule and/or the Contract Time by the acceleration, stacking, or re-sequencing, the Contractor may request an extension of time. Adequate information and proper submission must be provided to validate such a request.

6.1.3 The Contractor agrees that payment under any method noted within this Contract shall be the exclusive compensation for such addition, deletion, or other revision to the original Contract, and that by signing a Change Order, the Contractor agrees to release and waive any and all claims related to that Change Order or the Work contained therein.

6.1.4 When the System and the Contractor are not in total agreement on the terms of a Change Order, or when the amount or extent of the Work related to the Change Order is not known,


the System may issue a unilateral change order, or a Construction Change Directive, directing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work. In such cases, the Contractor must proceed with the Work but shall have the right to request an adjustment to the Contract Sum and Contract Time. In such cases, requests for adjustment to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time must be accompanied by supporting documentation of incurred costs/time.

6.1.5 Minor changes in the Work not affecting the Contract Sum or Contract Time, consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents, may be directed by the System without additional compensation or time extension.

6.2 REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL COST OR TIME 6.2.1 If the Contractor desires an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice shall be given to the

System before proceeding to execute any Work which is the subject of the desired increase. Such request shall be in accordance with Specification Section 012600, Contract Modification Procedures, or other similar formal System procedures.

6.2.2 If the Contractor desires an increase in Contract Time, written notice shall be given to the System, including an estimate of the probable impact on the timely completion of the Work and of any cost associated with that impact.

6.3 CONCEALED OR UNKNOWN CONDITIONS 6.3.1 If conditions are encountered which are: (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical

conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then the Contractor shall give written notice to the System promptly, and before conditions are disturbed, and in no event later than seven (7) days after first observance of the conditions.

6.3.2 The System will promptly investigate such conditions. If conditions differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the System will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents, no change in the terms of the Contract is justified. No adjustment shall be made to the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, however, for concealed conditions encountered during cutting and patching of Work.

ARTICLE 7 - TIME

7.1 CONTRACT TIME 7.1.1 Time is of the essence. The Contractor shall prosecute the Work diligently and substantially

complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Time specified in the Standard Form of Contract.

7.1.2 No on-site Work may take place until Notice to Proceed is issued by the System.

7.1.3 If the System issues a Binding Letter of Intent to Contract prior to Notice to Proceed, the Contractor may rely on the letter to prepare to start Work to the extent authorized by the letter and incur costs in preparation for performance of the Contract.

7.1.4 The Contract Time anticipates inclement and/or adverse weather, and the Contractor shall plan accordingly. Inclement or adverse weather, including but not limited to cold or freezing weather, shall not be considered an excuse for non-performance of Work under this Contract. The


Contractor shall use such methods of protection as may be necessary to continue to work throughout the period of inclement or adverse weather.

7.2 ADJUSTMENTS TO THE CONTRACT TIME 7.2.1 A time extension for an ordered change in the Work will depend upon the extent, if any, by

which the change causes delay in completion of the various elements of construction. Normally a time extension will be granted if the changed Work impacts a Work item on the critical path of the Project Schedule and the scheduled completion date is impacted. For an ordered change in the Work that can reasonably be done concurrent with other Contract Work, without significant addition of labor or equipment, no time extension will be granted.

7.2.2 A change order granting a time extension may provide that the Contract Time will be extended only for those specific elements related to the changed Work and that the remaining Contract Time for all other portions of the Work will not be changed.

7.3 NO-FAULT TIME EXTENSIONS 7.3.1 If delays in completing the Work arise from unforeseen causes beyond the control and without

the fault or negligence of either the Contractor or the System, the System may, in its sole discretion, grant a time extension for any such delays by extending the time for completion of the Work, which extension shall constitute the exclusive remedy between the parties. Examples of such causes include, but are not limited to, acts of God, acts of or protection against a public enemy, acts of the Commonwealth in its sovereign capacity, changes in any controlling law or policy of any governmental entity, acts of another contractor in its performance of an agreement with the System, strikes, embargoes, and unusually severe weather. Any such time extension must meet the criteria under Article 7.2.

7.3.2 If unusually severe weather is the basis for Contractor's request for additional time, such request shall be documented by data from a recognized weather authority substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period and could not have been reasonably anticipated. The Contractor shall also substantiate that the unusually severe conditions had an adverse impact on the scheduled completion date.

ARTICLE 8 - SUSPENSION OF THE WORK

8.1 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK 8.1.1 The System may order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay, or interrupt all or any part

of the Work for such period of time as it may determine to be appropriate for the convenience of the System.

8.1.2 If the performance of all or any part of the Work is, for an unreasonable period of time, suspended, delayed, or interrupted:

a. by an act of the System in the administration of this Contract, or

b. by the System's failure to act within the time specified in this Contract, or within a reasonable time if not specified,

an adjustment shall be made for any increase in the cost of performance of this Contract (excluding profit) necessarily caused by such unreasonable suspension. The Contract shall be modified in writing accordingly. No adjustment shall be made under this clause for any suspension to the extent that performance would have been so suspended by any other cause, including the fault or negligence of the Contractor, or for which an equitable adjustment is provided for or excluded under any other provision of this Contract.


8.1.3 No claim under this clause shall be allowed unless the claim, in an amount stated, is asserted in writing as soon as practicable after the termination of such suspension. The claim may not be asserted later than the date of final payment.

8.1.4 The provisions of this Article 8.1 do not apply under conditions enumerated in Article 8.2 or Article 8.3.

8.2 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK DUE TO UNFAVORABLE CONDITIONS 8.2.1 If, in the judgment of the System, the Contractor is taking undue risk of damage to any part of

a structure or installation by proceeding with the Work during unfavorable weather or other conditions, then the System may suspend the Work temporarily, either wholly or in part for such periods as are necessary. In case of such suspension, the System may, in its sole discretion, grant a time extension for any such delays by extending the time for completion of the Work, which extension shall constitute the exclusive remedy between the parties. The failure of the System to suspend the Work does not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

8.2.2 The System may require a suspension of the Work if, in its opinion, unforeseen conditions warrant such stoppage. When the System directs resumption of the Work, the Contractor shall resume full operations within a period of seven (7) days after the date of written notice to do so. The System is not liable for any damages, lost overhead, or anticipated profits on account of the Work being suspended.

8.2.3 Any Work done by the Contractor during the period of suspension is its own responsibility. The Contractor shall receive no payment for the Work unless the Work is subsequently resumed and Work done during the suspension can be utilized in the resumed Work.

8.2.4 Suspensions of Work as outlined above shall not in themselves operate to extend the Contract date of completion. Requests for extensions of time shall be submitted in writing by the Contractor, setting forth its reasons for the extension.

8.3 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK FOR FAULT OF THE CONTRACTOR Should the Contractor fail to comply with the orders of the System relative to any particular

parts of the Work, the System may suspend Work on any or all parts of the Work until its orders respecting the particular parts are complied with. In case of such suspension, which shall be considered due to the fault of the Contractor, no extension of time shall be given and no allowance will be made for the expenses incurred by the Contractor during the suspension period.

8.4 SUSPENSION OF THE WORK FOR FAULT OF OTHER SEPARATE PRIME CONTRACTORS

If the performance of all or any part of the Work is, for an unreasonable period of time, suspended, delayed, or interrupted by an act of another Separate Prime Contractor, or by another Separate Prime Contractor's failure to act within the time specified in this Contract, or within a reasonable time if not specified, the System may, in its sole discretion, grant a time extension for any such delays by extending the time for completion of the Work, which extension shall constitute the exclusive remedy between the parties. Otherwise, Disputes with other Separate Prime Contractors is addressed in Article 13.5.


ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS

9.1 PAYMENTS 9.1.1 Performance by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents

shall entitle the Contractor to payment by the System. Normally, payment for the Work will be made upon substantial completion and acceptance of the Work. However, when a contract exceeds $25,000 and upon written request, partial payments may, at the discretion of the System, be made after completion of portions of the Work.

9.1.2 The System shall pay the Contractor according to the provisions of this Article for all items that appear on the application for payment and have been satisfactorily completed. Applications for payment will not be considered to be acceptable unless they meet all the requirements specified in Specification Section 012900, Payment Procedures, and as outlined elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

9.1.3 Before any application for payment can be submitted and/or approved, the Contractor shall submit to the System for its approval a detailed breakdown of the costs indicating a schedule of quantities and values for the items of Work included in the Contract, as required in Specification Section 012900, Payment Procedures.

9.1.4 The Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by an application for payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the System upon the receipt of such payment, free and clear of all terms, claims, security interests, or encumbrances. Such warrant and guarantee shall not relieve the Contractor from the sole responsibility for all material and Work upon which payments have been made, or the restoration of damaged Work, or waive the right of the System to require the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract.

9.1.5 The System may decline to approve any application for payment, or portion thereof, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent inspections which may nullify the whole or part of any application for payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary to protect the System from loss because of:

(1) defective Work not remedied,

(2) failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to subcontractors or for labor, materials, and equipment,

(3) reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum,

(4) reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay, or

(5) unsatisfactory execution of the Work by the Contractor.

9.2 RETAINAGE 9.2.1 To ensure proper performance of the Contract, the System may retain from all partial payments

an amount not to exceed ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Contractor until fifty percent (50%) of the Contract is completed. When the Contract is fifty percent (50%) completed, one half of the amount retained by the System shall be returned to the Contractor. However, the System or their representative must approve the reduction in retainage. The Contractor must be making satisfactory progress, and there must be no specific cause for greater withholding. The sum to be withheld from the Contractor after the Contract is fifty percent (50%) completed shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the value of the completed Work based on monthly progress payment requests. All money retained by the System may be withheld from the


Contractor until substantial completion.

9.2.2 In the event a dispute arises between the System and any Separate Prime Contractor, which dispute is based upon increased costs claimed by one Separate Prime Contractor occasioned by delays or other actions of another Separate Prime Contractor, additional retainage in the sum of one and one-half times the amount of any possible liability may be withheld until such time as a final resolution is agreed to by all parties directly or indirectly involved, unless the Contractor causing the additional claim furnishes a bond satisfactory to the System to indemnify the System against the claim.

9.2.3 In absence of sufficient reason, within 20 days of receipt of payment of retainage, the Contractor shall pay all subcontractors with which it has contracted their earned share of the retainage payment the Contractor received.

9.3 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENTS FOR DEFICIENCY ITEMS 9.3.1 A deficiency item is Work performed but which the System, one of the System's

representatives, the Contractor, or another authorized inspector will not certify as being completed according to the Contract Documents.

9.3.2 The System may withhold from any and all partial payments, in addition to retainage identified in Article 9.2, a reasonable amount for a deficiency item. If the System withholds money for a deficiency item, the System shall notify the Contractor of the deficiency item within the timeframe specified in the Contract or 15 calendar days of the date that the application for payment is received.

9.3.3 The Contractor may similarly withhold money from any subcontractor who is responsible for any deficiency item, and must similarly notify the subcontractor, and the System, of the reason within 15 calendar days after receipt of the notice of the deficiency item from the System.

9.4 PROMPT PAYMENT 9.4.1 The System shall make payment, less any applicable retainage and withholdings, to the

Contractor within 45 days of receipt of a proper application for payment. If payment is not made within 45 days, the System shall pay to the Contractor interest on the amount due in accordance with Commonwealth Code.

9.4.2 For the purposes of this Article, a contract between the Contractor and a subcontractor is presumed to incorporate the terms of the Contract between the Contractor and the System. When a subcontractor has performed in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, a Contractor shall pay to the subcontractor, and each subcontractor shall in turn pay to its subcontractors, the full or proportioned amount received for each such subcontractor’s work and material, 14 days after receipt of a progress payment. Neither the System nor any of its representatives shall have any obligation to pay or to see the payment of any monies to any subcontractor except as may be otherwise required by law.

9.4.3 The System shall make a substantial completion inspection within 30 days of receipt of a request by the Contractor for such inspection. If the Work is substantially complete, the System shall issue a certificate of substantial completion and, upon receipt of a proper application for payment, make payment in full within 45 days except as provided for in Article 9.2, less only one and one-half times the amount required to complete any then-remaining uncompleted minor items, which amount shall be certified by the System and, upon receipt by the System of any guarantee bonds which may be required, in accordance with the Contract, to ensure proper workmanship for a designated period of time. The certificate of substantial completion given by the System shall list in detail each uncompleted item and a reasonable cost of completion. Upon completion of the uncompleted items listed in the certificate of substantial completion, final payment of any amount withheld for the completion of the minor items shall be paid upon receipt of a proper application for payment.


ARTICLE 10 - COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK

10.1 ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK 10.1.1 An application for progress payment, a progress payment, or any partial or entire use or

occupancy of the Project by the System shall not constitute an acceptance of any Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

10.1.2 The System may occupy or use any completed or partially-completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is so designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer, and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the System and the Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, security, maintenance, heat, insurance, etc. Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the System and the Contractor shall jointly inspect the area in order to determine and record the condition of the Work, and agree to the period for correction of this Work and as to the commencement of warranties.

10.2 NO ESTOPPEL OR WAIVER OF LEGAL RIGHTS 10.2.1 Neither the System nor its representatives shall be precluded or estopped by the

measurements or approved applications for payment made or given by any of them or by any of their agents or employees, at any time, either before or after the completion and acceptance of the Work and payment thereof, from showing the true and correct amount and character of the Work performed and materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor. The System and/or its representatives may show at any time, that any such measurements or approved applications for payment are untrue or incorrectly made in any particular; or that the Work or materials, equipment or any parts thereof do not conform to the Contract Documents.

10.2.2 The System shall have the right to reject the whole or any part of the aforesaid Work or materials and equipment should the said measurements or approved applications for payment be found or be known to be inconsistent with the terms of the Contract, or otherwise improperly given. The System shall not be precluded or estopped, notwithstanding any such measurements or approved applications for payment in accordance therewith, from demanding and recovering from the Contractor or its Surety, or both, such damages as it may sustain by reason of the Contractor's failure to comply with the terms of the Contract Documents, or on account of any over-payments made on any approved applications for payment.

10.2.3 Neither the acceptance by the System or by any of its representatives, nor any certificate approved for payment of money, nor any payments for, nor acceptance of the whole or any part of the Work by the System, nor any extension of time, nor any position taken by the System or its employees, shall operate as a waiver of any portion of the Contract or any power herein reserved by the System or any right to damages. A waiver of any breach of the Contract will not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach.

10.3 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE OR NON-CONFORMING WORK 10.3.1 Work performed under the Contract is subject to inspection by the System. The Contractor

shall promptly correct all Work rejected by the System as defective or as failing to conform to the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after substantial completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. All defective or non-conforming Work shall be promptly removed from the site. The Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such rejected Work, including any additional costs incurred by the System or its representatives and there shall be no extension of the Contract Time for correcting such rejected Work.


10.3.2 The Contractor shall bear the cost of making good all Work of other Separate Prime Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or correction.

10.3.3 If the Contractor does not remove such defective or non-conforming Work within the time fixed by written notice from the System, the System may, in accordance with Article 3.2, The System's Right to Carry Out the Work, remove it and may store the materials or equipment at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the cost of such removal and storage within ten (10) days thereafter, the System may, upon ten (10) additional days written notice, sell such Work at auction or at private sale and, after deducting all the costs that should have been borne by the Contractor pursuant to the provisions of this Article, shall account for the net proceeds of the sale. If such proceeds of sale do not cover all costs that the Contractor should have borne, the difference shall be charged to the Contractor and an appropriate change order shall be issued. If the payments then or thereafter due to Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor and/or the Contractor's Surety shall pay the difference to the System.

10.3.4 The obligations of the Contractor under this Article are in addition to and not in limitation of any obligations imposed upon the Contractor by special guarantees required by the Contract Documents or otherwise prescribed by law. Correction of defective Work in no way reduces or eliminates the Contractor's responsibilities under the Warranty provisions of the Contract.

10.4 UNCOVERING OF WORK 10.4.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the request of the System, it must, if required by

the System, be uncovered for its observation, and replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in Contract Time.

10.4.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the System has not specifically requested to observe prior to being covered, the System may request to see such Work, and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, the cost of uncovering and replacement shall be charged to the System. If the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Work shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor, within the period specified by the System by written notice, at no additional cost to the System. The System may, upon failure by the Contractor to replace the nonconforming Work, have the Work removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.

10.5 ACCEPTANCE OF NON-CONFORMING WORK If the System elects to accept non-conforming Work, it may do so instead of requiring its

correction or removal and replacement. If nonconforming Work is accepted, a change order shall be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the Contract Sum to reflect the actual cost reduction to the Contractor of the change in the Work, or, if the amount is determined after final payment, it shall be paid by the Contractor and/or its Surety. In any event, any costs of uncovering and recovering the Work shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

10.6 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION

10.6.1 In addition to any other warranties in this Contract, the Contractor shall warrant, except as provided in Article 10.6.6, that Work performed under this Contract conforms to the Contract requirements and is free of any defect in equipment, material, design furnished, or workmanship performed by the Contractor or any of its subcontractors or suppliers at any tier.


10.6.2 This warranty shall be for a period of one (1) year starting at the date of substantial completion of the Work. If the System takes possession of any part of the Work prior to substantial completion, this warranty shall be for a period of one (1) year starting at the date the System takes possession, unless the System and the Contractor agree to another one-year period, or different one-year periods for different portions of the Work.

10.6.3 The Contractor shall remedy at the Contractor's expense any defect in the Work or failure to conform to Contract requirements. In addition, the Contractor shall remedy at the Contractor's expense any damage to System-owned or -controlled real or personal property, when that damage is the result of any defect or failure. In fulfilling the terms and conditions of this Article, the Contractor shall restore any Work damaged. And in doing so, the Contractor's warranty with respect to Work repaired or replaced will run for one (1) year from the date of repair or replacement.

10.6.4 The System shall notify the Contractor, in writing, within a reasonable time afterward, of the discovery of any failure, defect, or damage. If the Contractor fails to remedy any failure, defect, or damage within a reasonable time after receipt of notice, the System shall have the right to replace, repair, or otherwise remedy the failure, defect, or damage at the Contractor's expense.

10.6.5 With respect to all warranties, express or implied, from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers for Work performed and materials furnished under this Contract, the Contractor shall obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice, require all warranties to be executed in writing, and enforce all warranties for the benefit of the System, if directed by the System. In the event the Contractor's one-year warranty has expired, the System may bring suit at its expense to enforce a subcontractor's, manufacturer's, or supplier's warranty.

10.6.6 Unless a defect is caused by the negligence of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors or suppliers at any tier, the Contractor shall not be liable for the repair of any defect in System-furnished material or design, nor for the repair of any damage that results from any defect in System-furnished material or design.

10.6.7 This warranty shall not limit the System's rights with respect to latent defects, gross mistakes, or fraud.

ARTICLE 11 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

11.1 SAFETY AND HEALTH 11.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety and

health precautions and programs required under the Contract and relative to its portion of the Work. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety and health of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent injury or illness to, all employees on the Work, and all other persons who may be affected thereby. The Contractor shall erect and maintain as required by existing conditions and progress of the Work, until the acceptance of the completion of its portion of the Project, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety and health regulations, and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities.

11.1.2 The Contractor shall comply with Federal OSHA regulations and other applicable safety and health regulations. The most stringent standard shall prevail.

11.1.3 The Contractor shall designate a qualified member of its organization at the site who shall be responsible for the safety and health program.

11.1.4 The Contractor shall comply with Specification Section 013500, Special Procedures, if that Section is included as a part of this Contract.


11.2 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY The Contractor shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent the loss of or damage to

property, including but not limited to:

(1) any completed Work,

(2) all the materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, whether in storage on or off the site, under the care, custody, or control of the Contractor or any of its subcontractors, and

(3) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, buildings, parts of buildings, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction.

11.3 PROTECTIVE ACTION In any emergency affecting the safety or health of persons or the damage to or loss of property,

the Contractor shall act, at its discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, illness, or loss, and report immediately such incidences to the System. Any additional compensation or extension of time requested by the Contractor because of emergency work shall be determined as provided for elsewhere in these General Conditions.

ARTICLE 12 - TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT

12.1 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE 12.1.1 The System may, at any time and for any reason, terminate this Contract for the convenience

of the System.

12.1.2 Such termination shall be effective in the manner and at the time specified in such notice and shall be without prejudice to any claims that the System may have against the Contractor. Upon receipt of such notice from the System, the Contractor shall immediately discontinue all Work and the placing of all orders for materials, equipment, facilities, and supplies in connection with the performance of this Contract. The Contractor shall cancel promptly all existing orders and terminate Work under all subcontracts so far as such orders and Work are chargeable to this Contract. The Contractor shall take such measures for the protection of the property of the System as may be directed by the System.

12.1.3 Upon termination of this Contract, as provided by this Article, full and complete adjustment and payment of all amounts due the Contractor arising out of this Contract, as determined by an audit conducted by or for the System, as soon as practicable after such termination, shall be made as follows.

a. The System shall reimburse the Contractor for all costs incurred to date of termination, including reasonable overhead and expenses incurred in the performance of this Contract, less amounts previously paid.

b. The System shall also reimburse the Contractor for all costs to which the Contractor has been subjected or is legally liable for by reason of the termination of this Contract, including reasonable costs related to cancellation of orders, termination of subcontracts, etc.

c. The System shall also reimburse the Contractor for the reasonable cost of providing protection of the property of the System as directed by the notice of termination.

d. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for any loss of anticipated profits associated with the unfinished portion of the Contract.


e. The sum total of the payments made under Article 12.1.3 shall not exceed the total Contract Sum, less payments previously made.

f. Title to all property accruing to the System by reason of the termination of this Contract shall immediately vest in the System, and the Contractor shall execute and deliver to the System all papers necessary to transfer title.

g. The System or its representative shall be afforded full access to all books, correspondence, data, and papers of the Contractor relating to this Contract in order to determine the amount due.

h. Disputes as to the sum payable to the Contractor shall be settled in accordance with Article 13.

12.2 TERMINATION FOR DEFAULT OF THE CONTRACTOR 12.2.1 If the Contractor persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly-skilled

workmen or proper materials, or persistently disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of the System or of any public authority having jurisdiction, or fails to proceed as directed by the System, or performs the Work unsuitably, or neglects or refuses to remove materials or replace rejected Work, or fails to make satisfactory progress toward timely completion of the Work, or discontinues the prosecution of the Work without approval of the System, or otherwise is guilty of a substantial violation of a provision of the Contract, then the System may, without prejudice to any of its other rights or remedies, give the Contractor and its Surety written notice that the Contractor has seven (7) days from the date of the System's notice to cure the default set forth in the notice.

12.2.2 The discretion to declare the Contractor in default is solely the System’s, and no party, whether bound by agreement to the System or attempting to raise a third party relationship, which this Contract specifically precludes, has standing to raise the failure of the System to exercise its discretion, if default is the basis of a claim against the System.

12.2.3 Should the Contractor fail to cure said default within the specified time, the System may terminate the Contract between the System and the Contractor and may take possession of the site and of all completed Work and any materials for which the System has already paid, and may finish the Work by whatever method it may deem expedient.

12.2.4 The Contractor is not entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. In any case the Contractor shall be entitled to payment for Work satisfactorily completed by the date of termination, and for any materials already on site and for which the System has taken possession. However, if the unpaid balance of the Contract sum is less than the cost of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Professional's additional services, reasonable and necessary costs of reprocurement, and any other damages which the System has incurred in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor or the Surety or both shall be liable to the System for the difference. Disputes as to the sum payable or due shall be settled in accordance with procedures in Article 13.

12.2.5 In the event the System wrongfully terminates the Contract, as determined by procedures in Article 13, such termination shall be considered a Termination for Convenience.

ARTICLE 13 - DISPUTES

13.1 DISPUTES BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND THE SYSTEM 13.1.1 This Article applies to any dispute, disagreement, question, or other matter between the

Contractor and the System arising under or by virtue of this Contract. Such matters shall be initiated as a written claim, meaning a written demand or assertion seeking, as a matter of right,


interpretation of the Contract terms, conditions, or requirements, or adjustment of the Contract Sum and/or Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the Contract.

13.1.2 Claims shall be processed as called for in this Article, until resolved or waived.

13.1.3 The Contractor shall diligently carry on the Work and maintain the progress schedule during the Disputes process, including Board of Claims proceedings, if any, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by the Contractor and the System.

13.1.4 At any step in the System's process, the Contractor’s failure to submit a timely written request for the next step shall constitute the Contractor’s waiver of the claim.

13.1.5 The Disputes processes in this Article, and claims introduced under them, shall survive Contract termination.

13.2 PROCEDURES 13.2.1 Step 1, Project Manager's Determination

Contractor’s Written Request. The Contractor shall submit, in writing to the University Project Manager, a request for a determination on a claim. The request must be submitted not later than 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim, or not later than 21 days after the Contractor first recognizes the condition giving rise to the claim, whichever is later.

Project Manager’s Written Determination. The University Project Manager will render the University’s Initial Written Determination within 14 days. If this Determination is not acceptable to the Contractor, the Contractor may proceed with Step 2. If the University Project Manager fails to issue an Initial Written Determination within 14 days, the request for a determination on the claim shall be deemed denied and the Contractor may proceed with Step 2.

13.2.2 Step 2, Contracting Officer's Pre-Claim Conference and University’s Final Written Determination

Contractor’s Written Request. The Contractor shall submit, in writing to the University Contracting Officer, a request for a University's Final Written Determination on the claim. The request must be submitted not later than 7 days after receipt of the University's Initial Written Determination, or deemed denial of the Initial Written Determination, whichever is later.

Pre-Claim Conference. The University Contracting Officer will hold a Pre-Claim Conference with the Contractor to discuss the claim within 21 days of receipt of the request for the University’s Final Written Determination. If the University Contracting Officer fails to hold a Pre-Claim Conference within the time frame set forth in this Article, the request shall be deemed denied and the Contractor may proceed with Step 3.

University Final Written Determination. The University Contracting Officer will render the University’s Final Written Determination within 14 days after the Pre-Claim Conference. If this Determination is not acceptable to the Contractor, the Contractor may proceed with Step 3. If the University Contracting Officer fails to issue a Final Written Determination within 14 days of the Pre-Claim Conference, the request shall be deemed denied and the Contractor may proceed with Step 3.

13.2.3 Step 3, Agency Claim Review and Hearing and Agency Final Decision Contractor’s Written Request. The Contractor shall submit, in writing to the System’s Office of

the Chancellor, Director of Construction Management, a request for an Agency Claim Review by the Office of the Chancellor. The request must be submitted not later than 7 days after receipt of the University's Final Written Determination, or deemed denial of the request for the University’s Final Written Determination, whichever is later.


Agency Claim Review and Hearing. An Agency Claim Review Panel will conduct a review of the claim. The Panel will review the information and arguments and determine if a Hearing is warranted. If conducted, the Hearing will be administered by the Panel and will allow both parties to present their respective cases.

Mediation Option. At any time throughout the Step 3 process, the Agency Claim Review Panel may recommend to the Contractor and the University that the claim be submitted to mediation under the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, Office of General Counsel, Disputes Resolution Program. Mediation must be mutually agreed upon by the parties.

Agency Final Decision. If the claim is not resolved by mutual agreement of the parties, the Office of the Chancellor will, within 120 days after receipt of the Contractor's request for an Agency Claim Review, issue a written Agency Final Decision formulated by the Agency Claim Review Panel. The Decision will state the basis for the decision and inform the Contractor of the right to administrative and judicial review. A copy of the Agency's Final Decision will be delivered to the Contractor by certified, return-receipt-requested mail. The Agency's Final Decision issued by the Office of the Chancellor represents the final order of the Purchasing Agency. If the Agency's Final Decision is not issued within 120 days after the request for the Agency Claim Review was submitted, then the Claim shall be deemed denied. The 120-day period may be extended with the written consent of both the Office of the Chancellor and the Contractor.

Contractor's Appeal. The Contractor shall have all appeal rights as set forth in the Commonwealth Procurement Code (62 P.S. § 101, et seq.).

13.3 ADMINISTRATIVE AND JUDICIAL REVIEW RIGHTS 13.3.1 Board of Claims. The Board of Claims has the exclusive jurisdiction for claims under this

Contract, as provided in the Commonwealth Procurement Code (62 P.S. § 101, et seq.).

13.3.2 Commonwealth Court. If either the Contractor or the System is aggrieved by the decision of the Board of Claims, they may appeal to the Commonwealth Court under the Commonwealth Judicial Code (42 P.S. § 763(a)(1)) (relating to direct appeals from government agencies) within 30 days after certification of the Board's decision.

13.4 DISPUTES BY THE SYSTEM AGAINST THE CONTRACTOR The System reserves its right to assert a claim against the Contractor in a court of proper

jurisdiction.

13.5 DISPUTES BETWEEN CONTRACTORS 13.5.1 The System shall have no obligation to any third parties for any claim, nor be a party to any

claims, disputes, or actions between Separate Prime Contractors, or between Separate Prime Contractors and subcontractors; nor shall such claims, disputes, or actions be subject to Board of Claims proceedings.

13.5.2 Should the Contractor, either directly or by the Contractor's subcontractors, or their respective agents, servants, or employees, cause damage or injury to the property or Work of any other Separate Prime Contractor, or their subcontractors, or by failing to perform the Contractor's Work (including the Work of the Contractor's subcontractors) hereunder with due diligence, delay any other Separate Prime Contractor, who shall suffer additional expense or damage thereby, the parties involved in such dispute shall settle by agreement or arbitrate said dispute by referring same to the American Arbitration Association. Said dispute shall be determined pursuant to the construction industry arbitration rules of the American Arbitration Association then in effect. Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other Separate Prime Contractors and with either the Northeast Regional Office of the American


Arbitration Association, and a copy shall be filed with the System. The demand for arbitration shall be made within a reasonable time after the dispute has arisen.

13.5.3 Disputes between Separate Prime Contractors shall not delay completion of the Work, which shall be continued by the parties, subject to the rights herein before provided. The intent of this clause is to benefit the other Separate Prime Contractors on the Project or related projects and to serve as an indication of the mutual intent of the System and the Contractor that this clause raise such other Separate Prime Contractors to the status of third party beneficiaries only as to the terms and conditions of this Article. These provisions are provided as a benefit to the Contractor and they specifically exclude claims against the System for delay or other damages.

ARTICLE 14 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS AND LEGAL MATTERS

14.1 INTEGRATION This Contract contains all the terms and conditions agreed to by the parties hereto, and no

other agreements, oral or otherwise, regarding the subject matter of this Contract exist.

14.2 APPLICABLE LAW This Contract shall be governed by and interpreted and enforced in accordance with the laws

of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania (without regard to any conflict of laws' provisions).

14.3 LEGISLATIVE AND POLICY UPDATES It may be necessary from time to time to modify the provisions of this Contract to comply with

legislative or policy changes, including updates to policies of the System. In such cases, the System will notify the Contractor of the necessary changes, and the changes will be incorporated into the Contract by Amendment.

14.4 ASSIGNMENT This Contract shall be binding on the parties hereto, their heirs, executors, administrators,

successors, and assigns, but it may not be assigned by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the System.

14.5 ASSIGNMENT OF ANTITRUST CLAIMS The Contractor and the System recognize that in actual economic practice, overcharges by the

Contractor's suppliers, resulting from the violations of State or Federal anti-trust laws are, in fact, borne by the System. As part of the consideration for the award of this Contract, and intending to be legally bound, the Contractor assigns to the Commonwealth all rights, title and interest in and to any claims the Contractor now has, or may hereafter acquire, under State or Federal anti-trust laws relating to the goods or services which are the subject of this Contract.

14.6 LIENS 14.6.1 In accordance with applicable Pennsylvania Mechanics’ Lien Law of 1963, as amended, (49

P.S. § 1303), the parties hereto hereby specifically waive the right to file any mechanics or other lien or claim for Work done or material furnished in or about the performance of this Contract, and it is hereby expressly agreed that no such claim or claims shall be filed by anyone and that the Contractor shall not file nor permit any subcontractor, material man, mechanics or


other person under him to file, nor shall any such contractor, subcontractor, material man or other person file, any mechanics or other lien or claim for Work done or material furnished in or about the performance of this Contract against the System, the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, and/or the ground upon which the structure or Work herein provided for is erected or done, or against any structure thereon erected or to be erected, or against any structure or property whatsoever covered by the Contract.

14.6.2. Any person, co-partnership, association, or corporation furnishing labor, material, equipment or renting equipment or rendering public utility services in connection with performance of this Contract shall have a right of action to recover the cost thereof from the Contractor and the Surety on the bond given to secure the payment for such labor, material, equipment or equipment rental and services rendered by public utility as though such person or corporation had been named as obligee in such bond; subject to the provisions of the Commonwealth Procurement Code, as amended.

14.7 NO THIRD PARTY RIGHTS The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the System and the Commonwealth of

Pennsylvania against any costs incurred by the System or the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania (including without limitation amounts paid pursuant to judgments or settlements and as counsel fees) in consequence of any claim by a third party against the System or the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, including without limitation any claim by an employee of the System, the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, the Contractor, or a subcontractor, and any claim by a subcontractor or another contractor, whether filed before or after final payment, based on actual or alleged damage to or destruction of property or injury to persons allegedly caused by the Contractor, or any subcontractor, or by their respective employees, in connection with the Work. The System shall promptly notify the other party of the assertion of any claim against which the System or the Commonwealth is held harmless pursuant to this condition, shall give such other party the opportunity to defend any such claim, and shall not settle any such claim without the approval of the indemnifying party.

14.8 HOLD HARMLESS 14.8.1 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the System, and their agents and

employees, from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, including any and all design work performed by or for the Contractor, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or expense: (1) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of the Contractor, any subcontractor, any one directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or any one for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder.

14.8.2 In any and all claims against the System, or against any of their agents or employees, by any employee or the Contractor, any subcontractor, any one directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or any one for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligations shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or any subcontractor under workmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts.

14.8.3 The obligations of the Contractor under this Article shall not extend to the liability of the Construction Manager, the Professional, or any other representative of the System, or any of their agents or employees, arising out of: (1) the preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, change orders, designs, or specifications, or (2) the giving of, or the failure to give, directions or instructions by the Construction Manager or the Professional, or their agents or employees, provided such giving, or failure to give, is the primary cause of the


injury or damages.

14.9 TAX LIABILITY AND OFFSET 14.9.1 The Contractor, by execution of this Contract, certifies that it has no outstanding tax liability to

the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania; authorizes the Department of Revenue to release information related to its tax liability to the System; and authorizes the Commonwealth to set off any State and local tax liabilities of the Contractor or any of its subsidiaries, as well as any other amount due to the Commonwealth from the Contractor, not being contested on appeal by the Contractor, against any payment due to the Contractor under an agreement with the Commonwealth.

14.9.2 The certification of no outstanding tax liability is a material representation of fact upon which reliance is placed by the System in entering the Contract. If it is later determined that the Contractor knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, the System may find the Contractor in default and terminate the Contract. Such erroneous certification may also be grounds for initiation of civil or criminal proceedings.

14.10 AUDIT OF RECORDS The System may request to, at reasonable times and places, audit the books and records of

the Contractor related to this Contract. The Contractor shall maintain books and records related to this Contract for a period of three (3) years from the date of final payment. The Contractor shall include a requirement in all agreements with subcontractors and suppliers that requires the subcontractor or supplier to maintain its records for the same length of time.

14.11 DEBARMENT OR SUSPENSION The System shall recommend debarment or suspension action against the Contractor

whenever there is substantial evidence that a cause for debarment or suspension under the provisions of the Commonwealth Procurement Code and the provisions of this Contract have occurred. The Contractor shall be notified of such action and given reasonable opportunity to be heard by the System. The System shall determine debarment or suspension actions appropriate for the offense in accordance with the provisions of the Commonwealth Procurement Code.

14.12 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY 14.12.1 The Contractor certifies that it is not currently under suspension or debarment by the

Commonwealth, any other state, or the federal government, and if the Contractor cannot so certify, then it agrees to submit along with the bid proposal a written explanation of why such certification cannot be made.

14.12.2 If the Contractor enters into any subcontracts or employs under this Contract any subcontractors/individuals who are currently suspended or debarred by the Commonwealth or the federal government or who become suspended or debarred by the Commonwealth or the federal government during the term of this Contract or any extensions or renewals thereof, the Commonwealth shall have the right to require the Contractor to terminate such subcontracts or employment.

14.12.3 The Contractor agrees to reimburse the Commonwealth for the reasonable costs of investigation incurred by the Office of Inspector General for investigations of the Contractor’s compliance with the terms of this or any other agreement between the Contractor and the Commonwealth which results in the suspension or debarment of the Contractor. Such costs shall include, but not be limited to, salaries of investigators, including overtime; travel and


lodging expenses; and expert witness and documentary fees. The Contractor shall not be responsible for investigative costs for investigations that do not result in the Contractor’s suspension or debarment.

14.12.4 The Contractor may obtain the current list of suspended and debarred contractors by contacting the Department of General Services, Office of General Counsel, North Office Building Room 603, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania 17125, Phone: 717-783-6472, fax: 717-787-9138.

14.13 NONDISCRIMINATION/SEXUAL HARASSMENT 14.13.1 The Contractor agrees in the hiring of any employee(s) for the manufacture of supplies,

performance of work, or any other activity required under the Contract or any subcontract, the Contractor, each subcontractor, or any person acting on behalf of the Contractor or subcontractor shall not discriminate in violation of the Pennsylvania Human Relations Act (PHRA) and applicable federal laws against any citizen of this Commonwealth who is qualified and available to perform the work to which the employment relates.

14.13.2 Neither the Contractor nor any subcontractor nor any person on their behalf shall in any manner discriminate in violation of the PHRA and applicable federal laws against or intimidate any employee involved in the manufacture of supplies, the performance of work, or any other activity required under the contract.

14.13.3 The Contractor and each subcontractor shall establish and maintain a written nondiscrimination and sexual harassment policy and shall inform their employees of the policy. The policy must contain a provision that sexual harassment will not be tolerated and employees who practice it will be disciplined. Posting this Nondiscrimination/Sexual Harassment Clause conspicuously in easily-accessible and well-lighted places customarily frequented by employees and at or near where the contract services are performed shall satisfy this requirement.

14.13.4 The Contractor and each subcontractor shall not discriminate in violation of PHRA and applicable federal laws against any subcontractor or supplier who is qualified to perform the work to which the Contract relates.

14.13.5 The Contractor and each subcontractor represents that it is presently in compliance with and will maintain compliance with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations relating to nondiscrimination and sexual harassment.

14.13.6 The Contractor and each subcontractor further represents that it has filed a Standard Form 100 Employer Information Report (“EEO-1”) with the U.S. Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (“EEOC”) and shall file an annual EEO-1 report with the EEOC as required for employers subject to Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, as amended, that have 100 or more employees and employers that have federal government contracts or first-tier subcontracts and have 50 or more employees. The Contractor and each subcontractor shall, upon request and within the time periods requested by the Commonwealth, furnish all necessary employment documents and records, including EEO-1 reports, and permit access to their books, records, and accounts by the Commonwealth for purpose of ascertaining compliance with provisions of this Nondiscrimination/Sexual Harassment Clause.

14.13.7 The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Nondiscrimination/Sexual Harassment Clause in every subcontract so that those provisions applicable to subcontractors will be binding upon each subcontractor.

14.13.8 The Contractor’s and each subcontractor’s obligations pursuant to these provisions are ongoing from and after the effective date of the Contract through the termination date thereof. Accordingly, the Contractor and each subcontractor shall have an obligation to inform the Commonwealth if, at any time during the term of the Contract, it becomes aware of any actions or occurrences that would result in violation of these provisions.

14.13.9 The Commonwealth may cancel or terminate the Contract and all money due or to become due under the Contract may be forfeited for a violation of the terms and conditions of this


Nondiscrimination/Sexual Harassment Clause. In addition, the System may proceed with debarment or suspension and may place the Contractor in the Contractor Responsibility File.

14.14 CONTRACTOR INTEGRITY 14.14.1 It is essential that those who seek to contract with the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania

(“Commonwealth”) observe high standards of honesty and integrity. They must conduct themselves in a manner that fosters public confidence in the integrity of the Commonwealth contracting and procurement process.

14.14.2 For purposes of these Contractor Integrity provisions, the following terms shall have the meanings found in this Section:

a. “Affiliate” means two or more entities where (a) a parent entity owns more than fifty percent of the voting stock of each of the entities; or (b) a common shareholder or group of shareholders owns more than fifty percent of the voting stock of each of the entities; or (c) the entities have a common proprietor or general partner.

b. “Consent” means written permission signed by a duly authorized officer or employee of the Commonwealth, provided that where the material facts have been disclosed, in writing, by prequalification, bid, proposal, or contractual terms, the Commonwealth shall be deemed to have consented by virtue of the execution of this contract.

c. “Contractor” means the individual or entity that has entered into this contract with the Commonwealth.

d. “Contractor Related Parties” means any affiliates of the Contractor and the Contractor’s executive officers, Pennsylvania officers and directors, or owners of five percent or more interest in the Contractor.

e. “Financial Interest” means either:

(1) Ownership of more than a five percent interest in any business; or

(2) Holding a position as an officer, director, trustee, partner, employee, or holding any position of management.

f. “Gratuity” means tendering, giving, or providing anything of more than nominal monetary value including, but not limited to, cash, travel, entertainment, gifts, meals, lodging, loans, subscriptions, advances, deposits of money, services, employment, or contracts of any kind. The exceptions set forth in the Governor’s Code of Conduct, Executive Order 1980-18, the 4 Pa. Code §7.153(b), shall apply.

g. “Non-bid Basis” means a contract awarded or executed by the Commonwealth with Contractor without seeking bids or proposals from any other potential bidder or offeror.

14.14.3 In furtherance of this policy, the Contractor agrees to the following:

a. The Contractor shall maintain the highest standards of honesty and integrity during the performance of this Contract and shall take no action in violation of state or federal laws or regulations or any other applicable laws or regulations, or other requirements applicable to the Contractor or that govern contracting or procurement with the Commonwealth.

b. The Contractor shall establish and implement a written business integrity policy, which includes, at a minimum, the requirements of these provisions as they relate to the Contractor activity with the Commonwealth and Commonwealth employees and which is made known to all Contractor employees. Posting these Contractor Integrity provisions conspicuously in easily-accessible and well-lighted places customarily frequented by employees and at or near where the contract services are performed shall satisfy this requirement.

c. The Contractor, its affiliates, agents, and employees, and anyone in privity with Contractor shall not accept, agree to give, offer, confer, or agree to confer or promise to confer, directly or

http://www.portal.state.pa.us/portal/server.pt/gateway/PTARGS_0_2_785_708_0_43/http;/pubcontent.state.pa.us/publishedcontent/publish/global/files/executive_orders/1980___1989/1980_18.pdf


indirectly, any gratuity or pecuniary benefit to any person, or to influence or attempt to influence any person in violation of any federal or state law, regulation, executive order of the Governor of Pennsylvania, statement of policy, management directive, or any other published standard of the Commonwealth in connection with performance of Work under this Contract, except as provided in this Contract.

d. The Contractor shall not have a financial interest in any other contractor, subcontractor, or supplier providing services, labor, or material under this contract, unless the financial interest is disclosed to the Commonwealth in writing and the Commonwealth consents to Contractor’s financial interest prior to Commonwealth execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall disclose the financial interest to the Commonwealth at the time of bid or proposal submission, or if no bids or proposals are solicited, no later than Contractor’s submission of the Contract signed by Contractor.

e. The Contractor certifies to the best of its knowledge and belief that within the last five (5) years the Contractor or Contractor Related Parties have not:

(1) been indicted or convicted of a crime involving moral turpitude or business honesty or integrity in any jurisdiction;

(2) been suspended, debarred or otherwise disqualified from entering into any contract with any governmental agency;

(3) had any business license or professional license suspended or revoked;

(4) had any sanction or finding of fact imposed as a result of a judicial or administrative proceeding related to fraud, extortion, bribery, bid rigging, embezzlement, misrepresentation, or anti-trust; and

(5) been, and is not currently, the subject of a criminal investigation by any federal, state, or local prosecuting or investigative agency, and/or civil anti-trust investigation by any federal, state, or local prosecuting or investigative agency.

If the Contractor cannot so certify to the above, then it must submit along with its bid, proposal, or contract a written explanation of why such certification cannot be made and the Commonwealth will determine whether a contract may be entered into with the Contractor. The Contractor’s obligation pursuant to this certification is ongoing from and after the effective date of the Contract through the termination date thereof. Accordingly, the Contractor shall have an obligation to immediately notify the Commonwealth in writing if at any time during the term of the Contract it becomes aware of any event which would cause the Contractor’s certification or explanation to change. The Contractor acknowledges that the Commonwealth may, in its sole discretion, terminate the Contract for cause if it learns that any of the certifications made herein are currently false due to intervening factual circumstances, or were false or should have been known to be false when entering into the Contract.

f. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Lobbying Disclosure Act (65 Pa.C.S. §13A01 et seq.) regardless of the method of award. If this Contract was awarded on a Non-bid Basis, the Contractor must also comply with the requirements of Section 1641 of the Pennsylvania Election Code (25 P.S. §3260a).

g. When the Contractor has reason to believe that any breach of ethical standards as set forth in law, the Governor’s Code of Conduct, or these Contractor Integrity provisions has occurred or may occur, including but not limited to contact by a Commonwealth officer or employee which, if acted upon, would violate such ethical standards, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Commonwealth contracting officer or the Office of the State Inspector General in writing.

h. The Contractor, by submission of its bid or proposal and/or execution of this Contract, and by the submission of any bills, invoices, or requests for payment pursuant to the Contract, certifies and represents that it has not violated any of these Contractor Integrity provisions in


connection with the submission of the bid or proposal, during any contract negotiations or during the term of the Contract, to include any extensions thereof. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Commonwealth in writing of any actions for occurrences that would result in a violation of these Contractor Integrity provisions. The Contractor agrees to reimburse the Commonwealth for the reasonable costs of investigation incurred by the Office of the State Inspector General for investigations of the Contractor’s compliance with the terms of this or any other agreement between the Contractor and the Commonwealth that results in the suspension or debarment of the Contractor. The Contractor shall not be responsible for investigative costs for investigations that do not result in the Contractor’s suspension or debarment.

i. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Office of the State Inspector General in its investigation of any alleged Commonwealth agency or employee breach of ethical standards and any alleged Contractor non-compliance with these Contractor Integrity provisions. The Contractor agrees to make identified Contractor employees available for interviews at reasonable times and places. The Contractor, upon the inquiry or request of an Inspector General, shall provide, or if appropriate, make promptly available for inspection or copying, any information of any type or form deemed relevant by the Office of the State Inspector General to the Contractor's integrity and compliance with these provisions. Such information may include, but shall not be limited to, the Contractor's business or financial records, documents, or files of any type or form that refer to or concern this Contract. The Contractor shall incorporate this paragraph in any agreement, contract, or subcontract it enters into in the course of the performance of this contract solely for the purpose of obtaining subcontractor compliance with this provision. The incorporation of this provision in a subcontract shall not create privity of contract between the Commonwealth and any such subcontractor, and no third party beneficiaries shall be created thereby.

j. For violation of any of these Contractor Integrity provisions, the Commonwealth may terminate this and any other contract with Contractor, claim liquidated damages in an amount equal to the value of anything received in breach of these provisions, claim damages for all additional costs and expenses incurred in obtaining another contractor to complete performance under this Contract, and debar and suspend the Contractor from doing business with the Commonwealth. These rights and remedies are cumulative, and the use or non-use of any one shall not preclude the use of all or any other. These rights and remedies are in addition to those the Commonwealth may have under law, statute, regulation, or otherwise.

14.15 COVENANT AGAINST CONTINGENT FEES The Contractor warrants that no person or selling agency has been employed or retained to

solicit or secure this Contract upon an agreement or understanding for a commission, percentage, brokerage or contingent fee (excepting bona fide employees or bona fide established commercial or selling agencies maintained by the Contractor for the purpose of securing business). For breach or violation of this warranty, the System shall have the right to annul this Contract without liability or, in its discretion, to deduct from the Contract Price or consideration, or otherwise recover, the full amount of such commission, percentage, or contingent fee.

14.16 AMERICAN WITH DISABILITIES ACT 14.16.1 Pursuant to federal regulations promulgated under the authority of the Americans with

Disabilities Act (28 C.F.R. 35.101 et seq.), no individual with a disability shall, on the basis of the disability, be excluded from participation in this Contract or from activities provided for under this Contract. As a condition of accepting and executing this Contract, the Contractor agrees to comply with the General Prohibitions Against Discrimination (28 C.F.R. 35.130), and all other regulations promulgated under Title II of the Americans with Disabilities Act which are applicable to the benefits, services, programs, and activities provided by the System through contracts with outside contractors.


14.16.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and the System, and their respective officers and employees, from all losses, damages, expenses, claims, demands, suits, and actions brought by any party against any of the foregoing as a result of the Contractor’s failure to comply with the provisions of Article 14.16.1.

14.17 RECYCLED MATERIALS 14.17.1 In accordance with Section 108, Recycled Materials, of the Commonwealth Procurement Code

(62 P.S. § 108), all insulation products incorporated into the Project shall contain the following minimum percentages, by weight, of postconsumer recovered paper or recovered material: Cellulose Loose-Fill and Spray-On 75 % Postconsumer Recovered Paper Perlite Composite Board 23% Postconsumer Recovered Paper Plastic Rigid Foam, Polyisocyanurate/Polyurethane materials: Rigid Foam 9% Recovered Material Foam In-Place 5% Recovered Material Glass Rigid Foam 6% Recovered Material Phenolic Rigid Foam 5% Recovered Material Rock Wool 50% Recovered Material

“Postconsumer Recovered Paper” is defined as “any paper, paperboard, and fibrous wastes from retail stores, office buildings, homes, and so forth, after they have passed through their end-usage as a consumer item including: used corrugated boxes; old newspapers; old magazines; mixed waste paper; tabulating cards and used cordage; as well as all paper, paperboard, and fibrous wastes that enter and are collected from municipal solid waste.”

“Recovered Materials” is defined as “waste material and byproducts which have been recovered or diverted from solid waste, but such term does not include those materials and byproducts generated from, and commonly reused within, an original manufacturing process.”

14.17.2 The Contractor may be required to provide to the System documentation of such content.

14.18 RECIPROCAL LIMITATIONS ACT 14.18.1 The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Reciprocal Limitations Act (62 P.S. §

107). The Act requires the System to not specify, use, or purchase supplies which are produced, manufactured, mined, grown, or performed in any state that prohibits the specification for, use of, or procurement of such supplies in or on its public buildings or other works when such supplies are not produced, manufactured, mined, or grown, or performed in that state.

14.18.2 The following is a list of the states which have been found by the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania to have prohibited the use of certain out-of-state supplies: Georgia (forest products only) New Jersey (various products, to include but not limited to: chain link fence, portable

sanitation units, glass, glazier supplies, carpet and cushion, shades, upholstery materials and supplies, room air conditioning, electrical supplies, plumbing supplies, hardware supplies, fasteners, lumber, building supplies, audio/visual equipment, fire extinguishers, fire hose, motor oils, fuel oil, Venetian blinds, and drapes)

New Mexico construction

The above preferences are those related to construction contracts only. The complete list of preferences for all contracts, supplies, and services is available from the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Department of General Services.


14.19 TRADE PRACTICES ACT 14.19.1 The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Trade Practices Act (71 P.S. §

773.101, et seq.). The Act prohibits the System from specifying, purchasing, or permitting to be furnished or used, in any public works, aluminum or steel products made in a foreign country which has been determined as "discriminating" by the Commonwealth.

14.19.2 Aluminum or Steel Products means aluminum or steel products rolled, formed, shaped, drawn, extruded, forged cast, fabricated, or otherwise similarly processed, or processed by a combination of two or more of such operations, from aluminum or steel not made in the United States.

14.19.3 The countries of Brazil, South Korea, Spain, and Argentina have been found to discriminate against certain aluminum and steel products made in Pennsylvania. Therefore, the purchase or use of those countries' products, as listed below, is not permitted:

Brazil: Welded carbon steel pipes and tubes; carbon steel wire rod; tool steel; certain stainless steel bar; stainless steel wire rod and cold-form stainless steel bar; pre-stressed concrete steel wire strand; hot-rolled carbon steel plate in coil; hot-rolled carbon steel sheet, and cold-rolled carbon steel sheet.

Spain: Certain stainless steel products, including stainless steel wire rod, hot-rolled stainless steel bars and cold-formed stainless steel bars; pre-formed stainless steel bars; pre-stressed concrete steel wire strand; certain steel products including hot-rolled steel plate, cold-rolled carbon steel plate, carbon steel structural shapes, galvanized carbon steel sheet, hot-rolled carbon steel bars, and cold-formed carbon steel sheet.

South Korea: Welded carbon steel pipes and tubes hot-rolled carbon steel place; hot-rolled carbon steel sheet and galvanized steel sheet.

Argentina: Carbon steel wire rod and cold-rolled carbon steel sheet.

14.20 STEEL PRODUCTS PROCUREMENT ACT 14.20.1 The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Steel Products Procurement Act (73

P.S. 1881, et seq.). The Steel Products Procurement Act requires that any steel products being used or supplied in the performance of the Contract must be "steel products" as defined in the Act.

14.20.2 Steel Products are considered to be products rolled, formed, shaped, drawn, extruded, forged, cast, fabricated, or otherwise similarly processed, or processed by a combination of two or more of such operations, from steel made in the United States by the open hearth, basic oxygen, electric furnace, Bessemer, or other steel making process.

a. Includes cast iron products.

b. Includes machinery and equipment listed in United States Department of Commerce Standard Industrial Classification 25 (furniture and fixture), 35 (machinery; except electrical), and 37 (transportation equipment) and made of, fabricated from, or containing steel components.

c. Does not include steel products which will not be incorporated into the Project (i.e., tools – hammers/wrenches); scaffolding used to construct the Project and removed after completion; and trailers used as offices by contractors and removed after completion of the Project.

d. Transportation equipment shall be determined to be a United States steel product only if it complies with Section 165 of Public Law §§ 97-424 (96 Stat. 2136).

e. System vs. Product. Each "product" in the system is identified as a separate and distinct steel product.


When the System’s design specifies trade names, catalog numbers, and manufacturers for materials and equipment, they are provided for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality, performance, and appearance, and for establishing a standard of competitive bidding. The use of such descriptive information will not relieve the Contractor with compliance with all respects of the Act.

14.20.3 Origin of Steel.

a. If the product contains 100 percent United States manufactured steel, it is a "steel product" under the Act, no matter where the non-steel components of the product are manufactured.

b. If the product contains 100 percent steel manufactured in a foreign country, its acquisition is prohibited.

c. If the product contains both foreign and United States manufactured steel (no matter how little or how much of each), the product shall be determined to be a United States steel product if at least 75 percent of the total cost of the articles, materials, and supplies have been mined, produced, or manufactured in the United States.

14.20.4 If 100 percent of the steel product is identifiable (i.e., stamped United States Steel), then the Contractor shall submit certification documentation. If the steel product is unidentified, the Contractor shall provide documentation including, but not limited to: invoices, bills of lading, and mill certification. The System is authorized to withholding payments until the documentation or certification has been provided. If payments have been made but should not have been made because of noncompliance, the System or the Commonwealth Attorney General may recover the payments directly from the Contractor, subcontractor, or manufacturer who did not comply. Additionally, any person who willfully violates the Act shall be prohibited from submitting bids or performing work for the Commonwealth for five years.

14.20.5 The Steel Products Procurement Act requirement may be waived by the System when the System determines that steel products are not produced in the United States in sufficient quantities to meet the requirements of the Contract and/or when the product appears on the Department of General Services' annual Final List of Exempt Machinery and Equipment Steel Products.

14.21 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY CONTROL 14.21.1 All Prime Contractors and their subcontractors shall perform the Work in a manner that shall

minimize the possibility of air, water, land, and noise pollution.

14.21.2 Each Prime Contractor shall comply with all statutes and regulations, as amended, concerning environmental quality control administered by the Department of Environmental Protection, including but not limited to Clean Streams Law, Pennsylvania Sewage Facilities Act, Air Pollution Control Act, Surface Mining Conservation and Reclamation Act, Bituminous Coal Open Pit Mining Conservation Act, Dams and Encroachments Act, Water Well Driller's Act, Water Works Act, and the Atomic Energy Act. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for securing all required permits and for any violations.

14.21.3 Storage, collection, transportation, processing, and final disposal of solid waste shall be in accordance with regulations and standards of the Commonwealth Department of Environmental Protection (DEP). Immediately upon notice of award of the Contract the Contractor shall apply for the necessary permits from DEP. A copy of this permit must be submitted to the System before commencing waste disposal.

14.22 PA E-VERIFY 14.22.1 The Commonwealth of Pennsylvania enacted Act 127 of 2012, known as the Public Works

Employment Verification Act (‘the Act’), which requires all public work contractors and subcontractors to utilize the Federal Government’s E-Verify system (EVP) to ensure that all


employees performing work on public work projects are authorized to work in the United States. The Department of General Services’ (DGS) Public Works Employment Verification Compliance Program is responsible for the administration, education, and enforcement of the Act. Information on the Act and DGS' program are available on DGS’ web site.

14.22.2 This Contract falls under the Act and the associated DGS program. Contractors shall comply with all requirements of the Act, and also require each of their subcontractors to comply.

14.22.3 Subcontracts between a public works contractor and its subcontractors shall contain notification of the applicability of the Act, information regarding the use of the EVP, and reference to DGS’ website to obtain a copy of the required Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Public Works Employment Verification Form (the Form). Additionally, Contractors shall require each of their subcontractors to sign and submit to the System, prior to that subcontractor performing work at the project site, the Form. The Form is available on DGS' web site and/or through the university.

14.23 RIGHT TO KNOW LAW 14.23.1 Unless otherwise determined by a Pennsylvania appellate court subsequent to the execution

of this Contract, the Pennsylvania Right-to-Know Law, 65 P.S. §§ 67.101-3104 (“RTKL”), applies to this Contract.

14.23.2 Unless the Contractor provides the System, in writing, with the name and contact information of another person, the System shall notify the Contractor if the System needs the Contractor’s assistance in connection with a request made under the RTKL. The Contractor shall notify the System in writing of any change in the name or the contact information within a reasonable time prior to the change.

14.23.3 Upon notification to the Contractor that the System has received a request for the Contractor’s records under the RTKL (the “Requested Information”), the Contractor agrees to assist the System in responding to the request. Such assistance shall include providing the System, within three (3) days, with copies of any Requested Information in the Contractor’s possession that the Contractor deems a Public Record, as that term is defined in the RTKL, or otherwise notify the System that the Requested Information is not a Public Record. If the Contractor is unable to provide the Requested Information within three (3) days for one of the reasons specified in the RTKL, the Contractor agrees to timely notify the System that it will need up to an additional twenty-five (25) days, and must provide in writing the reason the additional time is needed. If the Contractor makes a determination the Requested Information is within the scope of the RTKL but fails to provide the Requested Information to the System within the period specified in this provision, the failure shall be considered an event of default and the Contractor shall pay, indemnify, and hold the System harmless for any damages, penalties, detriment, or harm that the System may incur as a result of the Contractor’s failure.

14.23.4 The Contractor’s determination as to whether the Requested Information is a Public Record is dispositive of the question as between the parties. The Contractor agrees to provide information and/or to appear before the Office of Open Records or Pennsylvania Courts in support of the System’s denial of access to a record the Contractor determined was not a Public Record. The Contractor agrees to indemnify the System for any court costs, attorneys' fees, or civil penalties awarded against the System under the RTKL in connection with the Contractor's denial of access to Requested Information.

14.23.5 If in the course of this Contract, the System is provided with information the Contractor clearly identifies as a Trade Secret or Confidential Proprietary Information, as those terms are defined by the RTKL, the System agrees to abide by the terms of Section 707 of the RTKL and timely provide the Contractor with notice of a request for this information and allow the Contractor the ability to respond, as provided by the RTKL. The Contractor reserves all rights and remedies as allowed by law relating to the System’s unauthorized disclosure of the Contractor’s Trade Secret or Confidential Proprietary Information. This provision shall not be construed to limit the


sovereign immunity of the System.

14.23.6 The System will reimburse the Contractor for any costs associated with complying with this provision only to the extent allowed under the fee schedule established by the Office of Open Records or as otherwise provided by the RTKL if the fee schedule is inapplicable.

14.23.7 The Contractor agrees to abide by any decision to release a record to the public made by the Office of Open Records after timely appeal to the Pennsylvania Courts.

14.24 ALTERNATIVE ENERGY PORTFOLIO STANDARDS ACT (PA ACT No. 2004-213) The System shall retain the rights to any and all possible Demand-Side Management Alternative Energy Credits, and any and all possible Distributed Generation System Alternative Energy Credits, as provided for under Pennsylvania's Alternative Energy Portfolio Standards Act, or under any other similar Pennsylvania or United States laws, statutes, regulations, or policies, which may be realized as a result of the Work under this Contract.

14.25 TAX CREDITS OR TAX DEDUCTIONS FOR ENERGY EFFICIENCY PROJECTS The Contractor shall not apply for, without prior written approval of the System, any tax credits or deductions for energy efficient building property installed as part of this Contract, as the person primarily responsible for designing or installing the property, in lieu of the System, as allowed by the United States Energy Policy Act of 2005, by Section 179D of the United States Internal Revenue Service (IRS) code, or by any other similar laws, statutes, regulations, or provisions. Under such System approval, the value of the resultant tax savings shall be shared by the Contractor with the System, at a percent agreed upon when the System's approval is provided. The System's share of the savings shall be credited to the System under this Contract, or alternately shall be paid to the System as a separate payment. This Article is subject to regulations promulgated by the United States Department of Energy and the IRS.

14.26 NON-APPROPRIATION OF FUNDS

The System’s obligation to make payments during any Commonwealth fiscal year succeeding the current fiscal year shall be subject to availability and appropriation of funds. When funds (System, State and/or Federal) are not appropriated or otherwise made available to support continuation of performance in a subsequent fiscal year period, the System shall have the right to terminate the Contract and/or any work order or purchase order issued under it. The Contractor shall be reimbursed for the reasonable value of any nonrecurring costs incurred but not amortized in the price of the supplies or services delivered under the Contract. Such reimbursement shall not include loss of profit, loss of use of money, or administrative or overhead costs. The reimbursement amount may be paid from any appropriations available for that purpose.

____________________________________________________________________________________ Work Order Contract for Construction 2018K112 Insurance Rider Contract No. KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 3


INSURANCE RIDER

FOR THE WORK ORDER CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION

1.1 GENERAL 1.1.1 All policies shall be issued by insurance companies authorized to conduct such business under

the laws of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, and which have been issued a Financial Strength Rating of A- or better by A.M. Best Company, Inc.

1.1.2 Coverage shall be in place prior to any Work taking place on site, and shall be maintained without interruption until the time specified for each type of insurance in the following paragraphs, or unless termination of coverage is approved by the System.

1.1.3 If the Contractor fails to maintain, at any time, the requirements of this Rider, the System may terminate or suspend the Work of the Contractor, according to the provisions of the General Conditions for the Construction Contract.

1.2 REQUIRED DOCUMENTATION 1.2.1 Prior to Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish to the System a Certificate of Insurance

indicating the existence of the insurance required under this Article, the amount of coverage of such insurance, and the amount of the deductible. The Certificate shall cite the applicable project, contract, or site location. The Certificate shall contain a provision stating that coverages will not be canceled or changed prior to the expiration date without giving 30-day prior written notice to the System. The System shall be expressly endorsed as a cancellation notice recipient.

1.2.2 The System shall be named as an Additional Insured on the liability policies. The coverage shall be primary and non-contributory. A copy of the policy's Additional Insureds endorsement shall be provided with the Certificate.

1.2.3 Renewal Certificates shall be provided to the System prior to the expiration date shown on the Certificate.

1.2.4 Upon request, the Contractor shall submit a certified copy of the entire policy to the System.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 1.3.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect the Contractor from

claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Coverage shall provide for:

a. claims under Workers Compensation and other similar employee benefit laws, with coverage of at least the Pennsylvania-mandated minimums;

b. claims for damages because of bodily injury to, occupational sickness or disease of, or death of the Contractor's employees, and claims insured by usual personal injury coverage;

c. claims for damages because of bodily injury to, sickness or disease of, or death of any person other than the Contractor's employees, and claims insured by usual personal injury coverage;


d. and claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property including loss of use resulting therefrom.

1.3.2 The Contractor's general liability insurance shall be written for not less than $1,000,000 for each occurrence, and for not less than $3,000,000 general aggregate.

1.3.3 The Contractor's automobile insurance shall be written for not less than $1,000,000 combined single limit.

1.3.4 The Contractor may have umbrella liability insurance to meet the required aggregate limits for the general liability, automobile, and Workers Compensation insurances.

1.3.5 The Contractor's liability insurances shall also provide for:

a. completed operations and products liability coverage;

b. contractual liability coverage as necessary to meet the Contractor's obligations under Article 14.7, No Third Party Rights, and Article 14.8, Hold Harmless, of the General Conditions for the Construction Contract;

c. and, if required by the Contract Special Conditions or Technical Specifications, special property damage liability coverage commonly referred to as XCU (explosion, collapse, and underground damage), and/or adequate protection against special hazards when required (i.e. blasting, etc.).

1.3.6 The Contractor's liability policies shall contain a waiver of subrogation in favor of the System.

1.3.7 The Contractor's liability insurances shall remain in force for at least three (3) years after Substantial Completion.

1.4 SUBCONTRACTORS' LIABILITY INSURANCE 1.4.1 The Contractor shall either require each of its subcontractors to procure and to maintain during

the life of its subcontract Workers Compensation, general liability, automobile liability, and property damage liability insurance of the type and in the same amounts as specified in this Article, or insure the activity of its subcontractors in its own insurance policies.

1.4.2 The Contractor shall submit to the System, prior to any subcontractors or sub-subcontractors commencing any on site work, evidence that the subcontractors or sub-subcontractors are covered by insurance as required herein.

1.4.3 The Contractor shall require all subcontractors' liability policies to contain a waiver of subrogation in favor of the System.

1.5 PROPERTY INSURANCE 1.5.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance for all insurable Work included

in the Contract, in the amount of the original Contract Sum as well as subsequent changes thereto. The property insurance may be in the form of Builder's Risk insurance or an Installation Floater, as appropriate.

1.5.2 The property insurance shall be on an all-risk policy form, and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage due to, without duplication of coverage, windstorm and other weather, as well as due to theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, falsework, testing and startup, temporary facilities, and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for the services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss and incurred by the System, the System's Professional, and any of the System's agents. The Contractor shall submit to the System for its approval all items deemed to be uninsurable.


1.5.3 The property insurance shall be in the names of the System and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear, in full 100% of the insurable value thereof, and shall fully protect the interests of the System, the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, the Contractor, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall be responsible for paying policy deductibles.

1.5.4 The Contractor's property insurance shall remain in force until the acceptance of the completed Work by the System. The Contractor shall maintain adequate property insurance to cover any materials and temporary facilities remaining after acceptance of the completed Work.

1.5.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Article 10.1.2 of the General Conditions for the Construction Contract shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise.

1.5.6 If expressly required elsewhere in the contract documents, the Contractor may be required to obtain insurance, or additions to the property insurance, to insure against the perils of flood, earthquake, sinkhole, and/or other such risks.

«IWO_OrderNumber» Page 1 of 3

INDIVIDUAL WORK ORDER FOR THE

WORK ORDER CONTRACT

This Individual Work Order (IWO), IWO Number «IWO_OrderNumber» is being issued on 9/11/2020, by and between Kutztown University, of the State System of Higher Education, Commonwealth of Pennsylvania (hereinafter called the “System”) and

«ContractorVendorName» «Address»

«CSZ»

(hereinafter called the Contractor) SUMMARY OF CONTRACT This IWO is issued against Work Order Contract, Contract Number «ContractNumber» between the System and the Contractor executed on «Date_NTP». All terms, requirements, conditions, and considerations of that Contract are hereby referenced and made a part hereof. The Contractor, for and in consideration of the terms, conditions, and requirements of this IWO, agrees to furnish all labor, materials, and equipment, along with the necessary supervision, to perform the Work agreed upon for this IWO. The specific terms, conditions, and requirements of this IWO are described herein, and shall supplement the terms, conditions, and requirements of the Contract. PROJECT INFORMATION Project Number: «IWO_ProjectNumber» Project Name: «WorkOrderDesc» Project Location: Kutztown University System’s Point of Contact: «FirstName» «LastName», «Position», «PhoneNumber». IWO SCOPE OF WORK «WorkOrderDesc». Work to include but not be limited to the work as defined in the Request for Proposal and in the «Attachment_Content» dated «Date_Attachment» which is attached to this IWO and consists of «Attachment_Pages» page(s).


IWO ESTIMATED QUANTITIES, UNIT PRICES, AND SUM The System has estimated the quantities in each unit-priced item required for the Work for this IWO, and, using the Contractual unit prices, has calculated the estimated IWO Sum to be $«ThisIWOAmount». IWO EFFECTIVE DATE AND TIME The effective date of this IWO is the date of the Contracting Officer’s signature. The date of commencement of the Work under this IWO is the date of the Notice to Proceed. The Notice to Proceed will be issued by the System in a separate letter or notice. The Contractor shall prosecute the Work diligently and substantially complete the Work (Substantial Completion) not later than «Date_WorkToBeCompleted». LIQUIDATED DAMAGES If the Contractor fails to complete the Work within the IWO Time specified in this IWO, including any and all approved extensions or adjustments thereto that are properly executed under the procedures outlined by the IWO and/or the Contract, the Contractor shall pay liquidated damages, not as a penalty, to the System in the amount of _____ dollars for each calendar day of delay until the Work is substantially completed and accepted. PENNSYLVANIA STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS This IWO is/is not subject to the Pennsylvania Prevailing Wage Act, 43 P.S. § 165-1 et seq. If applicable, the Contract contains the Prevailing Wage Determination. This IWO is/is not subject to Pennsylvania Act 127 of 2012, the Public Works Employment Verification Act. The Contractor shall submit to the System the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania Public Works Employment Verification Form, and shall require each of their subcontractors working under this IWO to submit a form. SPECIAL CONDITIONS None. ATTACHMENTS

The following Attachments are incorporated into, and are a part of, this IWO:

«Attachment_Content» FOR THE CONTRACTOR: FOR THE COMMONWEALTH:


If Contractor is an INDIVIDUAL, PROPRIETORSHIP, or PARTNERSHIP: ___________________________ ________________________________ Owner or Partner Date University Contracting Officer Date Kutztown University of Pennsylvania State System of Higher Education If Contractor is a CORPORATION, LP, LLP, or LLC: ______________________________ President or Vice President Date ______________________________ Secretary or Treasurer Date

2018K112 Section 011000 - Summary KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 011000 SUMMARY

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Work consists of, but is not necessarily limited to, non-capital construction, renovation, repair, and maintenance of facilities, buildings, building systems, and utilities.

B. Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, furnishing all labor, superintendence, materials, tools, and equipment, and performing all work necessary to complete work at the satisfaction of and subject to approval of the University.

C. Since it is not the intent to delineate or describe every detail and feature of work, the Contractor

shall perform all work shown in contract drawings and not expressly mentioned in the specifications, and all work not specified and not shown on the drawing but obviously necessary to the proper execution of same.

D. No additions to a project will be approved for any materials, equipment, and/or labor to perform

work hereunder unless it can be clearly shown to be beyond the scope and intent of the drawings and specifications and absolutely essential to the proper execution of the Work.

1.02 MULTIPLE CONTRACT SUMMARY

Work shall be accomplished by Separate Prime Contractors according to Pennsylvania statute. The Lead Prime Contractor shall be the General Construction contractor. Specific instructions for coordination and responsibilities of the Lead Prime Contractor are contained in Section 013100, Project Management and Coordination, and elsewhere throughout the Contract Documents. Work included in each Separate Prime Contract shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

A. General Construction (KUFR-0033.1)

Work includes but is not necessarily limited to; General Carpentry, Painting, Drywall, Masonry, Insulation, Concrete, Flooring, Windows, Iron Working, Roofing, Signage, Tile and Marble. Also included are various site restorations such as lawn repair and site cleanup as required.

B. HVAC Construction (KUFR-0033.2) Work includes but is not necessarily limited to: General HVAC Work, Heating Systems, Air Handling Systems, Heat Pumps, Chillers, Central Boiler Plant, Sheet Metal, Steam Systems, and associated systems. Also included are various site restorations such as lawn repair and site cleanup as required.

C. Plumbing Construction (KUFR-0033.3) Work includes but is not necessarily limited to: General Plumbing Work, Piping Systems, Pumps, Fixtures, Sprinklers, and associated systems. Also included are various site restorations such as lawn repair and site cleanup as required.

D. Electrical Construction ( KUFR-0033.4) Work includes but is not necessarily limited to: General Electrical Work, Switchgear, Distribution Panels, Transformers, Lighting, Wiring, Communications/Data Work, and associated systems. Also included are various site restorations such as lawn repair and site cleanup as required.


1.03 DESCRIPTION OF BASE BIDS

A. Unit Price Bid I - General Construction (KUFR-0033.1): Unit Price Bid shall consist of all General Construction Work as shown in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to the items described in Work Covered by Contract Documents in this section, and as outlined in Section 012200, Unit Prices.

B. Unit Price Bid II - HVAC Construction (KUFR-0033.2): Unit Price Bid shall consist of all HVAC Construction Work as shown in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to the items described in Work Covered by Contract Documents in this section, and as outlined in Section 012200, Unit Prices.

C. Unit Price Bid III - Plumbing Construction (KUFR-0033.3):

Unit Price Bid shall consist of all Plumbing Construction Work as shown in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to the items described in Work Covered by Contract Documents in this section, and as outlined in Section 012200, Unit Prices.

D. Unit Price Bid IV - Electrical Construction (KUFR-0033.4): Unit Price Bid shall consist of all Electrical Construction Work as shown in the Contract Documents, including, but not limited to the items described in Work Covered by Contract Documents in this section, and as outlined in Section 012200, Unit Prices.

1.04 WORK SEQUENCE Not applicable. 1.05 SUPERINTENDENCE AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. Superintendence.

1. The superintendence requirements in Article 4.2.2 of the General Conditions shall be the requirements for this Contract.

B. Project Management

1. The project management requirements in Article 4.2.3 of the General Conditions shall be the requirements for this Contract.

1.06 WORK BY OWNER

A. The University will perform certain operations and/or award independent contract(s) for

performance of construction-related operations at the Project site. These operations will be conducted simultaneously with the Work under this Contract. All Separate Prime Contractors are expected to cooperate fully with other independent contractors so that work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with, or delaying, the Work under this Contract. The following operations will either be performed by the University or under independent contracts(s):

B. The University may undertake or award other contracts for work unrelated to this Project, but

which may be at or near the site(s) of the Work under this Contract. The Contractor, other contractors, and University employees, shall cooperate with each other and shall adapt


scheduling and performance of their work to reasonably accommodate each other, heeding any direction that may be provided by the University. The Contractor shall report to the University any interferences or conflicts immediately, whether committed or experienced.

C. The University will provide the following items:

1. The Contractor shall designate the required delivery dates of University-furnished items in the Project Schedule. The University will schedule deliveries in accordance with the Project Schedule.

2. The University will arrange and pay for delivery of University-furnished items. The

Contractor shall receive, unload, and handle University-furnished items at the site. The University and the Contractor shall jointly inspect deliveries for damage.

3. If, as a result of delivery, University-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing,

the University will arrange for replacement.

4. Once the University-furnished items are on site, the Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the items from damage, including damage from exposure to the elements and from the Contractor's operations. The Contractor shall be responsible to repair or replace items damaged once under his control.

5. The University will arrange for manufacturers' field services, and the delivery of

manufacturers' warranties, operating manuals, spare parts, and special tools, as applicable, to the Contractor.

1.07 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Existing Facilities, Infrastructure, and Occupancy.

1. Take all precautions necessary to protect University property and personnel during construction. Repair damaged caused by construction operations.

2. Activities and normal operating hours will be maintained by the University in areas surrounding a construction project. Difficulties of working near an existing operational building are recognized; however, the Contractor must cooperate to keep noise, dirt, and other interferences to a minimum. The contractor shall give notice to all building occupants of any disruption.

3. The Contractor shall maintain adequate emergency egress at site locations warranted. B. Hazardous Materials.

1. There is a possibility that hazardous materials not identified in the Contract Documents

may be discovered on this Project site. Should hazardous or suspicious materials be encountered, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in that area and notify the University. The University will be responsible for investigating the suspicious material, and if it is found to be hazardous, for having it removed. The University will consider an extension of time for delays related to such testing and removal if the work was impacted.

2. Asbestos: There is no known asbestos on this Project. All known asbestos-containing

material has been removed from the building as part of an asbestos abatement project.

3. Mercury: All fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lamps containing mercury and which are intended for disposal shall be removed from campus and properly recycled or disposed of by the Contractor, in accordance with statutory and/or regulatory requirements.


4. PCBs: Ballasts found to contain PCBs and which are intended for disposal shall be

removed from campus and properly recycled or disposed of by the Contractor, in accordance with statutory and/or regulatory requirements.

5. Lead: No information is available for lead-containing material.

C. The general and special conditions contained herein are not all inclusive. Special conditions

identified in the Technical Specifications and on the Drawings take precedence. D. The Contractor shall provide a reasonable individual to accept deliveries of materials and

equipment, and provide labor and equipment to unload delivery trucks. The University will not accept or sign for deliveries of materials or equipment to the Contractor, and the University will not handle or store materials or equipment for the Contractor.

E. The Contractor shall make suitable prior arrangements with the University for the delivery of

large equipment or materials in large vehicles to the Project site. The intent is to avoid such deliveries at time of peak commuter traffic to the University. The University will determine if other University entities, such as University Police, need to be involved.

F. Staging and storage areas are identified on the Drawings. The Contractor may not use any

other campus locations for use as staging or storage areas without prior approval of the University. Any additional storage or work areas needed for operations shall be off campus and shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for protection and safekeeping of products stored in staging and storage areas on campus. Stored products that interfere with operations of the University or other contractors shall be moved. Roofing materials and bulk materials, of any type and for any contractor, shall not be stored or stockpiled overnight on new or existing roofs.

G. Loading the structure with weight that will endanger the structure is not permitted. Ductwork,

conduit, ceiling systems, lighting fixtures, or any other miscellaneous equipment shall not be suspended from new or existing metal roof decks. These components shall be suspended from the structural members, or from a suspension system supported by the structural members. All concentrated loads must be approved by the University. If concentrated loads are not approved, the Separate Prime Contractor furnishing the equipment must provide acceptable means of distributing the load.

H. The Contractor shall make a reasonable attempt to arrange its on-site work to minimize

interference with normal University business activities, particularly those activities not directly related to the actual Work or the operation thereof. The Contractor shall develop, with University approval, a schedule for all Work. The Contractor shall maintain that schedule, and shall update or revise the schedule as necessary. In no event shall the Contractor change approved work schedules without the prior consent of the University.

I. Contractors are authorized to work whatever hours are required to complete the Work by the

specified Contract completion date. The University will normally be providing quality assurance coverage from 7:30 AM to 4:00 PM, Monday through Friday, holidays excepted. Contractors are required to notify the University in writing at least five (5) working days in advance of any work that is planned for outside of the normal coverage hours for the University. Contractors shall not perform any testing or cover-up work outside the normal coverage hours for the University without the prior written approval of the University. The University's failure to approve an expanded work-hour schedule or work on holidays shall not be grounds for a claim against the University.


J. The Contractor shall comply with all University personnel identification and vehicle registration requirements while on the campus.

K. Contractor employees shall park privately-owned vehicles in an area designated by the

University. Contractor employee parking shall not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of the University. If employee parking is on a grassed area, the Contractor shall be responsible for restoration and re-grassing of the area at the end of the Project.

L. The Contractor shall keep fire hydrants adjacent to the Project accessible at all times. No

materials or obstructions shall be placed within twenty (20) feet of any such hydrant, or within any other distance as required by law or ordinance.

M. The Contractor shall keep driveways and entrances servicing the campus and adjacent

buildings clear and available to the University and to emergency vehicles at all times. Such areas shall not be used for parking or storage of materials. Deliveries shall be scheduled to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment.

N. The Contractor shall maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent

occupied or used facilities. The Contractor shall not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from the University.

O. The Contractor shall provide protection for all existing roads, walkways, pavement, buildings,

appurtenances, ground structures, signs, trees, landscaping, grass, etc., scheduled to remain. The Contractor shall provide means to protect such items from damage and shall repair any damage caused by its operations, at no cost to the University. The Contractor shall return the premises to like-original condition and/or to match adjacent areas that were not affected by the work, subject to approval by the University. Any restoration of the site shall include replacement of landscaping with "like" plants of the same species, size, and shape. Grass remediation shall be by "sod" method rather than seeding. All work shall be approved by the University.

P. At the end of each day, the Contractor shall clean the Project site of scraps, packaging

containers, and other trash, and have it removed from the campus. This shall include waste and packaging that has blown outside of the Project site.

Q. Smoking and other use of tobacco products are prohibited in University buildings, including

buildings under construction. Contractors and their employees working on University property are prohibited from smoking in University buildings.

R. Alcoholic beverages and controlled substances shall not be carried, consumed, or stored on

University property. S. Open fires or burning are not permitted on University property. T. Burying of waste materials on site, to include materials from clearing and grubbing operations,

is prohibited without written permission of the University. The Contractor shall remove any such material from the Project site and recycle or dispose of it in a legal manner.

U. The Contractor shall not plan for any blasting operations without prior written approval of the

University. V. The Contractor is responsible for the behavior of its employees and shall immediately remove

from the site any employee engaging in racial or sexual harassment, whether by work or deed. This includes "catcalls" and inappropriate language. The University will require any Contractor's, subcontractor's, or supplier's personnel to be removed from the job site in the event of misconduct or improper interaction with University students or staff.


W. Regardless of the proximate cause, in the event of any damage occurring to University or

private property by any Contractor activity during the life of the contract, the Contractor shall promptly advise the University and participate in a joint assessment of the damage with University personnel. It is essential that the Contractor take all actions necessary to avoid claims by third parties.

X. The University shall have first right of refusal on all removed equipment. Existing pieces of

equipment and materials that are to remain the property of the University will be tagged by the University prior to the start of work. Such items shall be moved and/or stored by the Contractor where directed by the University. Equipment shall be stored as complete units with all associated accessories and auxiliary equipment. Equipment shall be disconnected and carefully removed and shall be transported to the storage areas as directed. Equipment shall be stored in a neat and workmanlike manner, tagged, and identified for future use.

Y. Projects are subject to the statutes, rules and regulations of the United States and the

Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, and Work must be carried out in compliance with these statutes, rules, and regulations. Although the University and/or its Designer of Record may have contacted authorities having jurisdiction for information necessary for the preparation of Contract Documents, the Contractor is responsible for compliance with these statutes, rules, and regulations, and should directly contact authorities having jurisdiction, as necessary, for information or clarification of requirements.

Z. The Contract’s General Conditions outlines the Contractor’s responsibilities for Permits, Fees, and Notices. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, and certifications required by Law and/or any public authority for the proper execution of its Work. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable Laws, ordinances, regulations, rules, and orders of any public authority bearing on the performance of its Work. The Contractor shall also pay all royalties and license fees.

AA. The University has or will obtain the necessary UCC building permit from the Commonwealth

Department of Labor & Industry. Inspections required under this permit are the responsibility of each Separate Prime Contractor. A schedule of required inspections will be supplied. Additional fees charged for re-inspections due to failure of work performed by the responsible Separate Prime Contractor will be the responsibility of that Contractor.

BB. The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by Law, Ordinances,

Permits, and the Contract documents. Unreasonable encumbrance to the site with materials and equipment is not permitted. Portions of the site beyond areas on which work is indicated shall not be disturbed unless approved by the University.

CC. Before ordering any materials or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements

at the site. No compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual measurements and dimensions shown. The University shall be notified in writing of any differences for consideration before beginning work.


1.08 WORK RESTRICTIONS, EXISTING BUILDINGS

A. The University will maintain activities, operations, and normal office hours in the building during the course of the Work.

B. If the Contractor is provided keys to the building or portion of the building, the Contractor shall

be subject to the University's regulations and policies on key control and access. C. Upon completion of any portion of Work related to this Contract, the Contractor shall ensure

that the building, other than any improvements and changes inherent in the Work, are reasonably maintained and/or are returned to their prior condition.

D. The Contractor shall protect the building and its occupants during the Work, taking all

necessary precautions. The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions to keep the operational part of the building safe, weather tight, and dust free at all times, and shall cooperate to keep noise, dirt, and other interferences to a minimum. The Contractor shall repair damage caused by construction operations.

E. The Lead Prime Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to maintain a weather tight

envelope during sequence of operations on alteration work of the existing building. F. Existing Elevators Contractor may only use existing elevators upon prior approval by the

University. G. All existing finishes to remain, including, but not limited to, floor coverings, wall finishes,

ceilings, fixtures, etc., shall be adequately protected by the Contractor. Any damage to such finishes shall be repaired by the Contractor causing the damage, at no cost to the University.

H. The Contractor shall not use any University property, such as desks, beds, chairs, etc., as

ladders, work benches, etc., in performing the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection from damage or loss of any furniture, furnishings, or equipment remaining in the building.

I. The Contractor shall keep public areas, such as hallways, stairs, elevator, lobbies, and toilet

rooms, free from accumulation of waste, rubbish, or construction debris. J. Use of Restrooms, Sanitary Facilities, and/or Cleanup Facilities: Section 015000, Temporary

Facilities and Controls, outlines requirements for Temporary Sanitary Facilities. If use of existing University restrooms, sanitary facilities, and/or cleanup facilities is authorized, misuse of facilities, such as clogging lines, unkempt conditions, failure to clean up, etc., will result in the withdrawal of privileges and back charges for damages.

K. The Contractor shall cooperate with the University, and with those in authority for the existing

building, to prevent the entrance and exit of all workers and/or others whose presence is forbidden or undesirable.

1.09 PROJECT UTILITY SOURCES

A. The location of existing utilities and equipment is shown on the Drawings in an approximate way only and has not been independently verified by the University. The Contractor shall determine the location of all utilities and equipment, including those overhead and underground, before commencing Work, and shall take all necessary precautions to prevent injury or damage during the performance of the Work. The Contractor agrees to be fully responsible for any and all items at no cost to the System.


B. The Contractor, when performing excavation or demolition work, shall fully comply with the requirements of P.L. 852, Act 287, December 10, 1974, as amended, relative to protection of underground utilities, which shall include, but not be limited to, the following actions:

1. Ascertain the approximate location and type of utility lines at the site by inspecting drawings

or by obtaining a list of utility companies' lines on the site from the county Recorder of Deeds and then contacting the utility companies.

2. A minimum of five (5) working days before excavation or demolition, request from the utility

companies the steps contractors should take to avoid any damage. 3. Inform the responsible supervisor or foreman and each equipment operator of the

information obtained in 1. and 2. above. 4. Report to the utility company and the University any damage to a utility line made or

discovered in the course of the work. 5. Alert the University and occupants of premises as to any emergency created or discovered

in the course of the work. 6. Provisions of 1., 2., and 3. above do not apply in an emergency. An emergency is any

condition constituting a clear and present danger to life or property by escaping gas, exposed wires, or other utility line breaks or defects.

C. Once underground facility owners have responded to the PA One Call locate request and have

located and marked their underground utilities, it shall be the responsibility of the requesting contractor/excavator to make all reasonable efforts to maintain those location markings. Should the requesting contractor/excavator fail to maintain location markings, resulting in multiple locate calls for the same location, the requesting contractor/excavator shall be responsible for any and all costs incurred for the additional locate efforts.

D. The Contractor shall locate, identify, shut-off, and disconnect utility services that are indicated

for removal or replacement. The Contractor shall also locate and identify utility services that are not indicated for removal or replacement. If the utility services that are not indicated for removal or replacement must be shut down during construction, the Contractor shall provide bypass connections, as necessary, to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of buildings and the campus. All switching, securing, and disconnection of University utility services shall be performed in the presence of a knowledgeable University technician or utility representative.

E. During excavation around underground utilities, when the Contractor reaches a point

approximately three feet from the estimated location of any underground utility, machine excavation shall be stopped and hand excavation shall be used to uncover the utility line. In the case of utilities as shallow as 12 inches below the surface, hand digging shall begin at the surface or immediately below any pavement. The Contractor is liable for the repair of any utility lines cut, broken, or otherwise damaged, at no additional cost to the University.

F. If a utility line is broken or damaged, or if service is interrupted in any way, the Contractor must immediately notify the University (or the Campus Police outside of normal working hours) and the appropriate utility company. The Contractor shall take immediate action to restore the utility to full service.

G. For any planned utility service interruptions, the Contractor shall furnish a request to the

University for approval at least five (5) working days in advance, or as specified by the University. The request shall identify the affected buildings and the duration of the planned


outage. The University will coordinate with affected tenants and customers, as applicable. If the discontinued service is due to any emergency breakdown, the Contractor shall notify the University as soon as possible, and the University will notify those affected tenants and customers, as applicable. Power outages that involve portions of buildings may have to be scheduled for off-hours or weekends.

1.10 PROJECT PHOTOGRAPHS

Not applicable.

1.11 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract. Such standards are made a part of the Contract by reference.

B. Where the date of issue of a referenced standard is not specified, standards in effect as of date

of Contract shall be in force. C. The quantity or quality levels shown or specified shall be the minimum and/or maximum

provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum or exceed the minimum, within reasonable limits, if not detrimental to the Work. Uncertainties should be referred to the University for a decision before proceeding.

D. If two or more specified standards provide differing or conflicting minimum and/or maximum

levels of quantity or quality, the University shall be consulted for a decision as to the differing or conflicting levels before proceeding.

E. Each entity engaged in the Work on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards

applicable to that entity's construction activity. F. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of the Work, the Contractor shall obtain

copies directly from the publication source. Although copies of standards needed for enforcement of requirements may be included as part of required submittals, the University reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit additional copies, as necessary, for enforcement of requirements.

G. Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where

such acronyms or abbreviations are used in the Technical Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-generating organization, authority having jurisdiction, or entity applicable to the context of the provision.

1.12 DISSEMINATION OF PLANS AND SPECS

Not applicable.


1.13 ADDITIONAL CONTRACT AND CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. The work of each Individual Work Order (IWO) shall be completed by a reasonable completion date as set forth in the IWO. This date will be set by the University prior to requesting a proposal for a particular project.

B. For routine or scheduled maintenance/repair or construction, no work may begin until a written

Notice to Proceed (NTP) is issued by the University.

C. Emergency Work: Emergency work is defined as work required to provide or restore adequate mission essential service to a facility, to eliminate hazards to life or health (safety), or to protect valuable property. The goal for work of this nature is that it is required to be addressed immediately. In the event of an emergency, the University may give the Contractor a verbal notice to proceed based upon a contractors not-to-exceed cost estimate. The contractor must follow-up with a written cost proposal within 48 hours of the initial request for emergency service.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 011000

_______________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 012200 - Unit Prices KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 012200

UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Unit Price: An amount proposed by a bidder as a price per unit of measurement for a material or

service. B. Estimated Quantity: The anticipated amount of work in the units of measurement for a material

or service. C. Extended Price: The arithmetic product of the Unit Price and the Estimated Quantity. D. Unit Price Schedule: A portion of the Bid Form that includes Unit Prices for Estimated Quantities

of work for materials or services, and Extended Prices. 1.02 PROCEDURES

A. The purpose of unit prices is to establish prices for work for which the specific quantity is not

known at the time of bid. B. A unit price shall include all costs for material, labor, equipment, overhead, insurance, taxes,

delivery fees, and any other costs associated with the work, as well as profit. C. A unit price may be for work fully-anticipated to be part of the contract, but for which the actual

quantity is not known at the time of bid. This type of unit price has an estimated quantity of one (1) or more. The estimated quantity represents the University’s best estimate of the amount of that particular work to be required. The Extended Price will be included as part of bid evaluation, and the Unit Price will be part of the contract price at time of contract award.

D. For Unit Prices identified in paragraph 1.02 C. above, the following apply.

1. If on the bid form submitted by the Contractor there is a discrepancy in correlation between a unit price and an extended price, the unit price shall govern.

2. The Contractor will be paid for unit price work on the basis of actual measured quantities

of work satisfactorily performed. Quantities of work different than the estimated quantity shall be ordered in writing by the University.

E. In all cases, the following apply.

1. The University reserves the right to reject the Contractor's measurement of work associated with unit priced work, and may have the work measured by an independent agent acceptable to the Contractor at the University's expense.

2. Refer to Technical Specification sections for methods of measurement and payment for unit

priced work, if applicable.


F. Work is subject to the provisions, duties, obligations, remedies and penalties of the Prevailing Wage Act. All unit price labor rates must be fully burdened to include (FICA, SUI, FUTA, Worker’s Compensation, Liability Insurance, Health & Welfare, Fringes, etc.), and must include all overhead and profit.

G. Projects may be done either on a Time & Material basis, or on a Not-to-Exceed Lump Sum Price, whichever is clearly more advantageous for the University.

H. Should the Contractor be asked to perform work for which there is not a contracted unit price rate

(labor or equipment), the University shall pay the Contractor their cost plus 10% markup. However, if a unit price is listed in the Contract, the Contractor shall only be paid at the Contract rate with no markup. Subcontracted work is also subject to prior approval by the University. Should the Contractor be asked to perform work, for which there is not a unit rate, and a subcontractor is used, the University shall reimburse the Contractor the cost of the subcontracted labor plus 10% markup. Small tools (under $1,000) are considered overhead and property of the contractor and will not be reimbursable.

I. Material Unit Price Schedule: Material to be paid on a cost plus 10% calculation. A copy of

contractor’s paid invoices must be submitted with payment applications for any material line item when the cost to the contractor is $500 or greater. Percentage markup shall be applied to the total material cost of each project/work order.

J. The Contractor is required to get prior written approval from the University Project Manager for

the use of any equipment not listed in the Contract Unit Price Schedule.

1.03 A Unit Price Schedule for this Contract is included as an attachment to this Section.

A. The Contractor understands that the quantities are estimates and approximate, and are presented solely for the purpose of determining a total base bid. The Contractor understands and agrees that the University may increase or decrease the quantities of work to be done, without any adjustment in the unit price quoted. If the Contractor’s bid proposal is accepted by the University, the unit price quoted is the only payment that the Contractor will receive for completed work as described in contract documents.

B. Definitions of Labor Rate Descriptions are based upon the PA Department of Labor & Industry for Prevailing Wage projects, which may be viewed on the PA Department of L&I website.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012200 Attachment: Unit Price Schedule


Unit Price Schedule _______________________________________________________________________________________ For the following, the Contractor proposes to furnish all labor, material, and equipment to perform the work, complete as described in the Contract documents, at the unit prices quoted in the bid proposal. The Contractor understands that the quantities are estimates and approximate, and are presented for the purpose of determining the total base bid and evaluating bids. The Contractor will be paid for unit price work on the basis of actual measured quantities of work satisfactorily performed. Quantities of work different than the estimated quantity shall be ordered in writing by the University.

I. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION - LABOR Item Estimated No. Description Quantity Units 1a Bricklayer & Mason (Day shift) 100 Hours 1b Bricklayer & Mason (Middle shift) 20 Hours 1c Bricklayer & Mason (Night shift) 10 Hours 2a Carpenter, Drywall Hanger, Framer, Soft Floor Layer (Day shift) 2,000 Hours 2b Carpenter, Drywall Hanger, Framer, Soft Floor Layer (Middle shift) 50 Hours 2c Carpenter, Drywall Hanger, Framer, Soft Floor Layer (Night shift) 10 Hours 3a Cement Finisher (Day shift) 100 Hours 3b Cement Finisher (Middle shift) 20 Hours 3c Cement Finisher (Night shift) 10 Hours 4a Glazier (Day shift) 20 Hours 4b Glazier (Middle shift) 10 Hours 4c Glazier (Night shift) 5 Hours 5a Iron Worker (Day shift) 20 Hours 5b Iron Worker (Middle shift) 10 Hours 5c Iron Worker (Night shift) 5 Hours 6a Laborer (Day shift) 2,000 Hours 6b Laborer (Middle shift) 100 Hours 6c Laborer (Night shift) 50 Hours 7a Operator (Day shift) 50 Hours 7b Operator (Middle shift) 10 Hours 7c Operator (Night shift) 5 Hours 8a Painter (Day shift) 200 Hours 8b Painter (Middle shift) 20 Hours 8c Painter (Night shift) 10 Hours 9a Roofer (Day shift) 20 Hours 9b Roofer (Middle shift) 10 Hours 9c Roofer (Night shift) 5 Hours 10a Roofer (Shingle) (Day shift) 20 Hours 10b Roofer (Shingle) (Middle shift) 10 Hours 10c Roofer (Shingle) (Night shift) 5 Hours 11a Sign Maker & Hanger (Day shift) 20 Hours 11b Sign Maker & Hanger (Middle shift) 10 Hours 11c Sign Maker & Hanger (Night shift) 5 Hours 12a Truck Driver (Day shift) 20 Hours 12b Truck Driver (Middle shift) 10 Hours 12c Truck Driver (Night shift) 5 Hours


Item Estimated No. Description Quantity Units 13a Superintendent (Day shift) 50 Hours 13b Superintendent (Middle shift) 10 Hours 13c Superintendent (Night shift) 5 Hours 14a Working Foreman (Day shift) 50 Hours 14b Working Foreman (Middle shift) 10 Hours 14c Working Foreman (Night shift) 5 Hours

GENERAL CONSTRUCTION – EQUIPMENT

Estimated Item No. Description Quantity Unit 1 Backhoe 20 Days 2 Truck 20 Days 3 Dump Truck 40 Days 4 Excavator 20 Days 5 High Lift (30 ft) 20 Days 6 Skid Loader 10 Days 7 Trencher 10 Days

II. HVAC CONSTRUCTION – LABOR

Item Estimated No. Description Quantity Units 1a Asbestos & Insulation Worker (Day shift) 20 Hours 1b Asbestos & Insulation Worker (Middle shift) 10 Hours 1c Asbestos & Insulation Worker (Night shift) 5 Hours 2a Boilermaker (Day shift) 20 Hours 2b Boilermaker (Middle shift) 10 Hours 2c Boilermaker (Night shift) 5 Hours 3a HVAC Technician (Day shift) 1,500 Hours 3b HVAC Technician (Middle shift) 100 Hours 3c HVAC Technician (Night shift) 50 Hours 4a Laborer (Day shift) 200 Hours 4b Laborer (Middle shift) 20 Hours 4c Laborer (Night shift) 10 Hours 5a Operator (Day shift) 20 Hours 5b Operator (Middle shift) 10 Hours 5c Operator (Night shift) 5 Hours 6a Sheet Metal Worker (Day shift) 1,000 Hours 6b Sheet Metal Worker (Middle shift) 20 Hours 6c Sheet Metal Worker (Night shift) 10 Hours 7a Steamfitter (Day shift) 50 Hours 7b Steamfitter (Middle shift) 20 Hours 7c Steamfitter (Night shift) 10 Hours


Item Estimated No. Description Quantity Units 8a Superintendent (Day shift) 40 Hours 8b Superintendent (Middle shift) 20 Hours 8c Superintendent (Night shift) 10 Hours 9a Working Foreman (Day shift) 40 Hours 9b Working Foreman (Middle shift) 20 Hours 9c Working Foreman (Night shift) 10 Hours

HVAC CONSTRUCTION – EQUIPMENT

Estimated Item No. Description Quantity Unit 1 Backhoe 10 Days 2 Truck 10 Days 3 Dump Truck 20 Days 4 Excavator 20 Days 5 High Lift (30 ft) 20 Days 6 Skid Loader 20 Days 7 Trencher 10 Days

III. PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION – LABOR

Item Estimated No. Description Quantity Units 1a Asbestos & Insulation Worker (Day shift) 20 Hours 1b Asbestos & Insulation Worker (Middle shift) 10 Hours 1c Asbestos & Insulation Worker (Night shift) 5 Hours 2a Laborer (Day shift) 50 Hours 2b Laborer (Middle shift) 20 Hours 2c Laborer (Night shift) 10 Hours 3a Operator (Day shift) 20 Hours 3b Operator (Middle shift) 10 Hours 3c Operator (Night shift) 5 Hours 4a Plumber (Day shift) 1,000 Hours 4b Plumber (Middle shift) 50 Hours 4c Plumber (Night shift) 20 Hours 5a Sprinkler fitter (Day shift) 50 Hours 5b Sprinkler fitter (Middle shift) 10 Hours 5c Sprinkler fitter (Night shift) 5 Hours 6a Superintendent (Day shift) 40 Hours 6b Superintendent (Middle shift) 20 Hours 6c Superintendent (Night shift) 10 Hours 7a Working Foreman (Day shift) 40 Hours 7b Working Foreman (Middle shift) 20 Hours 7c Working Foreman (Night shift) 10 Hours


PLUMBING CONSTRUCTION – EQUIPMENT

Estimated Item No. Description Quantity Unit 1 Backhoe 20 Days 2 Truck 20 Days 3 Dump Truck 40 Days 4 Excavator 20 Days 5 High Lift (30 ft) 10 Days 6 Skid Loader 10 Days 7 Trencher 10 Days 8 Sewer Camera 10 Days 9 Sewer Vacuum Truck 10 Days

IV. ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION – LABOR

Item Estimated No. Description Quantity Units 1a Communications/Data Tech (Day shift) 200 Hours 1b Communications/Data Tech (Middle shift) 20 Hours 1c Communications/Data Tech (Night shift) 10 Hours 2a Electric Lineman (Day shift) 20 Hours 2b Electric Lineman (Middle shift) 10 Hours 2c Electric Lineman (Night shift) 5 Hours 3a Electrician (Day shift) 1,000 Hours 3b Electrician (Middle shift) 100 Hours 3c Electrician (Night shift) 50 Hours 4a Laborer (Day shift) 800 Hours 4b Laborer (Middle shift) 50 Hours 4c Laborer (Night shift) 20 Hours 5a Operator (Day shift) 20 Hours 5b Operator (Middle shift) 10 Hours 5c Operator (Night shift) 5 Hours 6a Superintendent (Day shift) 40 Hours 6b Superintendent (Middle shift) 20 Hours 6c Superintendent (Night shift) 10 Hours 7a Working Foreman (Day shift) 40 Hours 7b Working Foreman (Middle shift) 20 Hours 7c Working Foreman (Night shift) 10 Hours


ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION – EQUIPMENT

Estimated Item No. Description Quantity Unit 1 Backhoe 10 Days 2 Dump Truck 5 Days 3 Excavator 5 Days 4 High Lift (30 ft) 10 Days 5 Skid Loader 10 Days 6 Trencher 5 Days

_______________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 012600 – Contract Modification Procedures KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS

Changes to the Work, consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions within the general scope of the Contract, involving an adjustment to the contract price or contract time, will be issued on the System’s Construction Change Order Form, or on another form acceptable to, or prescribed by, the University.

1.02 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. Changes may be proposed or directed by the University. In doing so, the University will provide

to the Contractor a detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised drawings and specifications, as necessary. The University also will request from the Contractor a proposal for any change in Contract price and time. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall have fourteen (14) days from receipt of the University’s request to submit his proposal for price and time.

B. Changes may be proposed or requested by the Contractor. If the Contractor encounters a

condition or situation which he believes requires adjustment to the Contract price or time, he may notify the University and submit a recommended detailed description of the proposed change. The Contractor shall also submit a proposal for change in the Contract price and time. The Contractor's notification and proposal shall be submitted within fourteen (14) days of encountering the condition or situation. Unless otherwise requested, the University will have seven (7) days from receipt of the Contractor’s request to respond, by either accepting the request and initiating a Change Order, rejecting the request and stating the reasons for such rejection, or revising the proposed change and requesting from the Contractor a proposal for that revised change.

C. All Change Orders shall address Contract price, Contract time, and impacts. D. A Change Order shall not be effective until signed by the Contracting Officer or their authorized

representative. The Contractor should not stop work in progress, or initiate work on a change, until a Change Order is signed by the Contracting Officer or their authorized representative.

E. The signature of the Contracting Officer or their authorized representative on the Change Order constitutes a notice to proceed, unless the Change Order designates otherwise.

F. The university project manager is the only University representative that is authorized to request

changes to the project. 1.03 CONTRACTOR PROPOSALS

A. Any proposal submitted by the Contractor in relation to a Change Order shall address change in

the contract price, change in the contract time, and any impacts. B. Unless the price is properly covered in the Unit Price Schedule or as an Item in the Schedule

of Values, the Contractor’s proposal shall adequately document and address in detail the costs of labor, materials, equipment, overhead, profit, bond, and any other costs associated with the change. The proposal shall be broken down to contain separate sections detailing labor, materials, equipment, and subcontractors. Copies of subcontractors’ proposals supporting the


Contractor’s proposal shall contain similar detail.

1. CCD or CCO Proposal Form (FPS037)

2. Labor Rate Breakdown Form (FPS038) 3. Labor.

a. For each labor classification listed, the breakdown shall include the classification

description, the number of workers in that classification, the total labor hours (H) for all workers in that classification, the hourly base wage rate (BR) for each classification, the hourly total wage rate (WR) for each classification, the base wage rate cost (H x BR) for each classification, and the total wage rate cost (H x WR) for each classification.

b. The hourly base wage rate (BR) is defined as the rate of wages paid by the employer

directly to the employee. The hourly total wage rate (WR) is defined as the total rate of wages paid by the employer including wages paid on behalf of the employee. It is acknowledged that in certain situations, the base wage rate (BR) and the total wage rate (WR) may be equivalent.

c. The breakdown shall also include the total of all base wage rate costs for all

classifications (TBR), and the total of all total wage rate costs for all classifications (TWR).

d. The Contractor may include a labor burden markup. Labor burden may include Social Security, Medicare, Federal unemployment insurance, state unemployment insurance, workmen’s compensation insurance, and public liability insurance, as appropriate. Labor burden shall be calculated on the total of all of the base wage rate costs (TBR), and not on the total of all of the total wage rate costs (TWR).

e. The total of all of the total wage rate costs (TWR), plus the labor burden amount, is the pre-markup cost total for labor.

4. Materials.

a. For each material item used, the breakdown shall include the material description, the

unit used to detail the quantity, the quantity showing the total number of units, the unit cost, and the total cost for that individual material item.

b. State sales taxes, in accordance with the provisions of PA Act 45 of 1998, may be included with applicable materials items.

c. Any freight charges for specific materials listed shall be included in the unit cost for that

material. The University will not acknowledge or honor any separate line items for freight charges.

d. The breakdown shall also include the total of all total costs for all individual material items. This total is the pre-markup cost total for materials.

5. Equipment.

a. For each type of equipment used, the breakdown shall include the description of that

type of equipment, the quantity of that type of equipment, the duration (hours, days, etc.) of work for that type of equipment, the rental rate for that type of equipment for a unit of the duration, and the total cost for that type of equipment.

b. State sales taxes paid on rental equipment may be included, if documented.


c. The breakdown shall also include the total of all total costs for all individual types of equipment. This total is the pre-markup cost total for equipment.

d. The University expects the Contractor to procure/provide the most economical rental rate

available over the duration of the work performed.

e. The University will not pay equipment costs for any piece of equipment not specifically identified, or for any tools, such as hand tools, used in the everyday performance of work.

4. Subcontractors’ proposals supporting the Contractor’s proposal shall contain similar detail. In some cases, a subcontractor's lump sum cost quotation may be acceptable, if it appears on the subcontractor's letterhead and contains a detailed description of the scope of work it represents.

5. Markups. b. Standard Markups.

i. 10% on labor costs

ii. 10% on materials costs

iii. 10% on equipment costs

iv. 10% on subcontractor costs

c. Overhead markups shall represent general and administrative overhead costs, and shall not include general conditions costs.

d. Project management shall be part of general and administrative overhead costs.

Project management hours shall not be itemized on Change Orders. However, on significant Change Orders, a limited number of project management hours may be negotiated.

e. The method of application of markups shall be consistent for all Change Orders

throughout the duration of the Contract.

f. The Contractor may add a markup for an additional marginal bond cost for Change Orders. The Contractor may be asked to submit information supporting their bond costs, and, in particular, their marginal bond cost.

C. The Contractor’s proposal shall address contract time. If the proposal includes a request for a

change in the contract time, the proposal shall adequately address in detail the Project Schedule, and how the change to the Project Schedule impacts the Contract time.

D. The Contractor’s proposal shall address other impacts and impact costs. If the proposal includes

a request for other impacts and impact costs, the proposal shall adequately address, in detail, those impacts and impact costs.

1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES

A. When the University and the Contractor are not in total agreement on the terms of a Change

Order, or when the amount or extent of the work related to the Change Order is not known, the Contracting Officer may issue a Construction Change Directive, directing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.


B. The Construction Change Directive will be issued on the System’s Construction Change Order Form, or on another form acceptable to, or prescribed by, the University. The Construction Change Directive will be signed by the Contracting Officer, and will not require acceptance, or a signature, by the Contractor. A Construction Change Directive shall not be effective until signed by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer’s signature on the Construction Change Directive constitutes a notice to proceed, unless the Construction Change Directive designates otherwise.

C. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in the work,

or of the known work, and will designate the method to be followed to determine the final change in the contract price, contract time, and/or impacts. The Construction Change Directive will also set a schedule and/or a time frame for the required actions to work toward, and achieve, that determination of final change in price, time, and/or impacts.

D. The Construction Change Directive will designate a not-to-exceed cost for work related to the

Construction Change Directive. The Contractor shall monitor his costs of doing the work, and, before he exceeds the not-to-exceed cost, inform the University of the anticipated date that he will exceed this cost if he continues work. The Contractor shall also inform the University of how much more he anticipates it will cost to complete the work. If the University concurs that the Contractor may properly incur costs related to the work that exceeds the designated not-to-exceed cost, the Contracting Officer will either initiate a Change Order to incorporate the final price of the work, issue a subsequent Construction Change Directive to increase the not-to-exceed cost, or issue a directive to stop the work.

E. The Contractor shall be required to maintain and submit to the University detailed documentation

supporting the labor, material, and equipment used related to the Construction Change Directive. The Contractor may be required to document labor, material, and equipment used on a form or in a format prescribed by the University. When performing work under a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor is expected to prosecute the work in an expeditious and efficient manner, and the University may disallow any costs that the University determines are not reasonable and necessary.

F. When the work related to the Construction Change Directive is complete, or when the amount or

extent of the work related to the Construction Change Directive is known, the University and the Contractor shall agree to the actual cost of the work, and a Change Order shall be issued that addresses any final change in the contract price, the contract time, and any impacts.

1.05 ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS

A. For Change Orders involving Work that is identified in the Unit Price Schedule or as an Item in

the Schedule of Values, the pricing in the Unit Price Schedule or in the Schedule of Values should be taken into consideration as a basis of the Change Order pricing. If that pricing does not represent a fair and reasonable price, detailed cost and pricing information shall be used to establish a fair and reasonable Change Order price.

B. If the Schedule of Values includes an Item for General Conditions, the following shall apply.

1. For a Change Order that does not include a time extension, any cost included in the Item for General Conditions shall not be an itemized cost on the Change Order. 2. For a Change Order that includes a time extension, and if the Contractor is due compensation for that time extension, the basis for that compensation shall normally be based on the Item for General Conditions.

C. For a Change Order that results in an adjustment to the contract price that is a credit to the University, the following shall apply.


1. The Change Order pricing shall be based on the difference in cost to the Contractor. All

applicable costs of materials, labor, equipment, delivery, taxes, and other associated direct costs shall be considered.

2. Standard markups for overhead and profit shall be included in the Change Order pricing,

considering the following:

a. If the credit arises from changed work or a minor deletion of work, the Contractor shall not be entitled to lost overhead or profit.

3. The Change Order shall consider contract time, and specifically any reduction in contract

time, if applicable.

4. The Change Order shall consider other impacts, if applicable, whether positive or adverse to the Contractor.


_______________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 012900 – Payment Procedures KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 012900

PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS

While this Section shall govern, the Contractor shall comply with supplemental administrative procedures which may be issued by the University at the Pre-Construction Conference.

1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Each Contractor shall establish a detailed breakdown of the costs indicating a schedule of

quantities and values for the items of work included in his Contract. This detailed breakdown of the costs shall be his Schedule of Values. The Schedule of Values shall be coordinated with the Construction Schedule, subcontractors and suppliers, the Application for Payment form, and other required administrative schedules and forms.

B. Contract Bonds. The Contractor will be reimbursed for his initial cost of the required contract

bond as a separate Item. At the start of the Contract term, the contractor may bill the University for the actual cost of the contract bond. If additional bonding is required for a specific project,

the contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of each required bond. Contractor must attach a copy of the surety company’s paid invoice as evidence of payment.

1.03 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as

certified and paid by the University. Entries and data on the Application for Payment shall match data on the Schedule of Values and the Construction Schedule.

B. The schedule of periodic payments and the specific dates and time frames relative to

Applications for Payment will be provided by the University at the Pre-Construction Conference. Payments will be made not more frequently than monthly.

C. The Contractor shall use AIA Documents G702 and G703, Application and Certificate for

Payment, or another form acceptable to or prescribed by the University. D. Applications for Payment shall be submitted in the manner and format, to the person or

address, and in the number of copies specified by the University at the Pre-Construction Conference.

E. Each Application for Payment shall be signed by a person authorized to sign official Contract

documents on behalf of the Contractor. F. Applications for Payment shall incorporate fully-executed Change Orders and Construction

Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the period covered by the Application for Payment.

G. If the University erroneously overpaid on an item on a previous Application for Payment, the

University reserves the right to correct the overpayment on subsequent Applications for Payment.


H. Prevailing Wage Act Certifications. If prevailing wages are required, the contractor shall comply with all the requirements of the Prevailing wage Act, including the submission of weekly wage reports to the University. An application for payment may be incomplete without the attachment of the certification of the wages paid by the contractor, for the time period of the application for payment. The only authorized form is the Labor & Industry Weekly Payroll Certification for Public Works Projects (LLC-25 REV 10-03) form. Applications for Payment that include payroll certifications using any other form or format may be rejected. Applications for Payment that include payroll certifications that contain employee social security numbers and home addresses may also be rejected. These rules also apply to any subcontractors employed by a prime contractor. One original form is required at time of submission.

I. An Application for Payment will be processed for payment if it is a proper invoice. An

Application for Payment is a proper invoice if it contains: itemization and substantiation of the amount requested, and certification. Certification shall be a signed statement by the Contractor acknowledging that the work covered by the application for payment has been completed in accordance with the contract, that all amounts have been paid to subcontractors and suppliers for work for which previous payments were made by the University, and that the current requested payment is now due. All other requirements, such as deficiencies that arise from statutorily-required submissions, deficiencies that arise from System, University, or contractually-required submissions, and deficiencies that arise from other contractual requirements, will not stop an application for payment from being processed, but instead, will result in withholding of money from the payment.

J. If the University determines that the Application for Payment is not a proper invoice, the

University will notify the Contractor as soon as possible, but no later than seven (7) days from receipt of the Application for Payment, that it is not a proper invoice and as to the reasons why. In this case the Contractor shall be required to submit a new Application for Payment.

K. The Initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at Substantial Completion, and

the Final Application for Payment involve additional requirements, as outlined in paragraphs 1.04, 1.05, and 1.06 below.

1.04 INITIAL PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. The University may reject the Initial Application for Payment if the following items have not been

submitted or completed by the Contractor prior to or in conjunction with the Initial Application for Payment. 1. List of Subcontractors, Principal Suppliers, and Fabricators.

B. The University may reject an Application for Payment if the Preliminary Project Schedule or the

Initial Project Schedule, in accordance with Section 013200, Construction Progress Documentation, are due by the date of that Application for Payment but have not been submitted.

1.05 PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES AT AND AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Requirements for Substantial Completion are found in Specification Section 017700, Closeout

Procedures. After receipt of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor should submit an Application for Payment at Substantial Completion for reduction in retainage. This Application shall reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for designated portions of the work and any previous reductions in retainage that may have been processed.


B. The Application for Payment at Substantial Completion should show 100 percent completion for the portion(s) of the work identified as substantially complete. For that work that is not 100 percent complete, the Contractor shall provide a proposed schedule for completion of any incomplete work and a proposed cost estimate to complete each item of work. The basis of this work is the punch list attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The University shall have the final decision as to the schedule and cost for these items of work.

1.06 FINAL PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES

A. Requirements for Final Completion are found in Specification Section 017700, Closeout Procedures. After receipt of the Certificate of Final Completion, the Contractor should submit a Final Application for Payment.

1.07 PAYMENT PROCEDURES FOR STORED MATERIALS

A. The University will consider making payment for materials or equipment not yet incorporated in

the work, but delivered and suitably stored at the site or at some other location agreed upon. B. Payment will be made under the appropriate Items on the Schedule of Values as part of a

periodic progress payment. C. In order for the Contractor to receive payment for materials or equipment that have been

delivered to the Contractor, paid for, and stored at the Contractor’s place of business or some other storage site, then the University must determine that the materials or equipment are critical to the project. The materials or equipment must be documented on the System's Stored Materials & Bill of Sale Form, or another form acceptable to or prescribed by the University. Payment shall be conditioned upon the Contractor’s submission of the Forms, or other forms or invoices which adequately establish the University’s title to such material or equipment that remain under the custody and control of the Contractor regardless of the exclusions in the insurance policies.

D. Payment will be made only for the invoiced price of the materials. Overhead and profit will not

be paid on stored materials.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900 Attachments: Schedule of Values Form Stored Materials & Bill of Sale Form

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ General Requirements for 2018K112 Section 012900 – Payment Procedures KUFR-0000 Page 4 of 5

SCHEDULE OF VALUES _________________________ UNIVERSITY

ARCHITECT NAME: CONTRACTOR'S NAME:

CONTRACT NUMBER:

ADDRESS:

ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION:

APPROVED: Signature

TELEPHONE NO.

DATE: TYPE OF CONTRACT:

ITEM NUMBER

ITEM DESCRIPTION NUMBER AND KIND OF UNIT

COST PER UNIT

MATERIAL COST LABOR AND OTHER COST

EXTENDED PRICE

I (we) hereby certify that the above is a true and correct breakdown including all materials, accessories, labor, insurance, etc., per contract requirements.

Contractor Title Date

University Representative Approval Title Date

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ General Requirements for 2018K112 Section 012900 – Payment Procedures KUFR-0000 Page 5 of 5

STORED MATERIALS & BILL OF SALE _________________________ UNIVERSITY

PROJECT NUMBER: LOCATION:

CONTRACT NUMBER: CONTRACTOR:

PROJECT TITLE:

MATERIAL/EQUIPMENT

SCHEDULE OF VALUES

STORAGE LOCATION

QUANTITY UNIT WHOLESALE PRICE

EXTENDED WHOLESALE PRICE

TOTAL $

The Contractor has stored certain materials and/or equipment, herein called materials, at a location other than the site of this project The Contractor agrees that: 1. Contractor has good title to the materials, free and clear of all liens and encumbrances, and title is granted to the University; 2. The materials will be used only in the construction of the above referenced contract and will not be diverted elsewhere without the prior written consent of the

University; 3. The materials have been delivered to and are at the places approved for storage, and they are clearly marked and identified as the property of the University and

are stored in a safe and secure manner to protect from damage or loss; 4. The Contractor will pay all expenses in connection with the sale, delivery, storage, protection and insurance of materials granted to the University and will remain

responsible for the materials, which will remain under its custody and control for all losses, regardless of exclusions in insurance policies required under this document. The Contractor has insured the materials against loss of damage by fire (with extended coverage), theft and burglary, with loss payable to the University;

5. The Contractor agrees that the quantities of materials set forth in the Schedule of Values represents the maximum quantities for which it may be entitled to payment under the provisions of the Contract.

Contractor Title Date

University Representative Approval Title Date

_______________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 013100 - Project Management and Coordination KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 MULTIPLE CONTRACTOR COORDINATION

A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall coordinate all work on the project with and by the other

Separate Prime Contractors.

1. The Lead Prime Contractor shall coordinate construction operations that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each and all parts of the work. Where installation of one part of the work is dependent on installation of other work or components, either before or after its own installation, the Lead Prime Contractor shall schedule construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results.

2. Where availability of space is limited, the Lead Prime Contractor shall coordinate the

installation of different work and components to assure maximum accessibility for required construction or installation, and for any required maintenance, service, and repair. The Lead Prime Contractor shall ensure adequate provisions are made to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall be responsible for installing or connecting certain items

that will be furnished by other Separate Prime contractors and bear a direct relationship to the installing contractor’s work. Such items of work include, but are not limited to, through-wall louvers and grills, flashings for floor drains, flashing for vent pipes, access panels, connections for electric motors and devices, and work of similar nature.

C. The Lead Prime Contractor shall coordinate with each Separate Prime Contractor all testing on

the project. D. The Lead Prime Contractor shall coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of the work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the preparation of schedules, the installation and removal of temporary facilities, and Project close-out activities.

E. When necessary, the Lead Prime Contractor shall schedule and chair meetings, and prepare

memoranda for distribution to each party involved, required for coordination of the work by Separate Prime Contractors. Each separate prime contractor shall make themselves available to attend coordination meetings called by the Lead Prime Contractor. Each separate prime contractor shall come prepared with required information and shall actively participate in these meetings.

1.02 PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Within 7 days after notice to proceed, each Separate Prime Contractor shall submit to the

University and to all other Separate Prime Contractors the Contractor's principal staff assignments. The list should include the superintendent and all other management and supervisory personnel in attendance at the site, and at least one primary responsible point of contact at the Contractor’s home office. The information on the list shall include each individual’s duties and responsibilities, their address, and their telephone number(s).


B. All Separate Prime Contractors shall coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Salvage of all materials and equipment involved in the performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the work shall be maximized.

C. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall supervise its own construction activities to ensure that no

part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Excessively high or low temperatures or humidity. 2. Thermal shock. 3. Water or ice. 4. Heavy traffic. 5. Soiling, staining, and corrosion. 6. Misalignment. 7. Excessive weathering. 8. Unprotected storage. 9. Improper shipping or handling. 10. Theft or vandalism.

D. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall, during handling and installation, clean and protect

construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Protective coverings shall be applied where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at substantial completion.

E. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall clean and maintain completed construction as frequently

as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Operable components shall be adjusted and lubricated to ensure operability without damaging effects.

1.03 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings serve to coordinate the Work in an area where two or more Separate

Prime Contractors have Work, or in an area that has limited space for the installation of various components and systems. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended, or that show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.

B. Coordination Drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing, and shall be prepared, formatted,

and processed in accordance with the requirements for Shop Drawings in Specification Section 013300, Submittal Procedures.

C. Refer to Technical Specification sections for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for

mechanical and electrical installations. Other Technical Specifications sections may also identify requirements for Coordination Drawings.

1.04 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

A. In the event that the Contractor determines that some provision or requirement of the drawings, specifications, or other Contract Documents requires clarification or interpretation, the Contractor shall submit an RFI in writing to the University. RFIs may be originated by the Contractor or by any subcontractor or suppliers at any tier, but RFIs shall only be submitted by the Contractor and shall only be submitted on the RFI forms and/or in the manner approved by the University. Each RFI shall be limited to a single subject of inquiry.


B. The Contractor shall clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is sought, why a response is needed, and when it is needed. In the RFI, the Contractor shall set forth their own interpretation or understanding of the requirement, along with reasons why such an understanding was reached. RFIs shall contain, at a minimum, the following information. 1. Project Name and Number 2. Date 3. Name of Contractor 4. Name of Professional and/or Construction Manager 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially 6. RFI subject 7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate 9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate 10. Contractor's suggested resolution; if the Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, the Contractor shall state the impact in the RFI 11. Contractor's signature 12. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, Coordination Drawings, and/or other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation; include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches

C. The University will review all RFIs to determine whether they are RFIs within the meaning of

this term. If the University determines that the document is not a RFI, it will be returned to the Contractor, un-reviewed as to content, for resubmittal on the proper form and via the proper manner. The following will not be considered to be RFIs, and if submitted as RFIs, will be returned without action. 1. Requests for approval of submittals 2. Requests for interpretation of University's actions on submittals 3. Requests for approval of substitutions 4. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents 5. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum 6. Incomplete or inaccurately prepared RFIs

D. Responses to RFIs will be issued within five (5) working days of receipt of the RFI from the

Contractor, unless the University determines that a longer time is necessary to provide an adequate response. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following work day. If a longer time is determined necessary by the University, the University will, within five (5) working days of receipt of the request, notify the Contractor of the anticipated response time. The University's action may include a request for additional information, in which case the University's time for response will start from the time of receipt of additional information.

E. If the Contractor submits an RFI on an activity with five (5) working days or less of float on the

current project schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any time extension due to the time it takes the University to respond to the request, provided that the University responds within the five (5) working days set forth above.

F. Responses from the University will not change any requirement of the Contract Documents,

unless so noted by the University in the response to the RFI. In the event the Contractor believes that a response to a RFI will cause a change to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, within seven (7) days of receipt of the RFI response, give written notice to the University stating that the Contractor considers the response to be a change to the requirements of the Contract. Failure to give such written notice shall waive the


Contractor’s right to seek additional time and/or cost under Article 6, Changes in the Work, of the General Conditions for the Construction Contract.

1.05 PROJECT WEB SITE

None.

1.06 DAILY REPORTS

A. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall submit a Daily Report for each day of the Contract duration. A Daily Report shall be submitted for each non-work day, and it shall indicate that no work took place.

B. Daily Reports are a submittal that shall be provided on a daily basis, not later than the close

of business of the Monday following the work week for the Daily Reports. C. Submittal Procedures (Paragraph 1.03) and Review and Disposition of Submittals (Paragraph

1.04) are not required for Daily Reports. Daily Reports shall be submitted directly to the University, with copies submitted to the Professional. The University will review Daily Reports upon receipt, and will notify the Contractor only if there any problems.

D. The Daily Report shall contain, at least, the following information concerning activities at the

Project:

1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3. Key equipment utilized on site. 4. Activities (keyed to Project Schedule) taking place at the site, to specifically include: a. Features of Work started today. b. Features of Work completed today. 5. Delivery of key materials and equipment to be installed. 6. QC tests conducted. 7. L&I UCC visits or inspections. 8. Special Inspections conducted. 9. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. 10. Accidents and unusual events. 11. Meetings and significant decisions. 12. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses. 13. Meter readings and similar recordings. 14. Emergency procedures. 15. Orders and requests from the University, its agents, and other authorities. 16. Change Orders received, implemented. 17. Any changed, unknown, or concealed conditions encountered. 18. Any disputes or differences that may arise to a dispute. 19. Services connected, disconnected. 20. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 21. Partial Completions, occupancies. 22. Substantial Completions authorized.

E. The Contractor may use his own forms or format for the Daily Report, but it must contain the information listed above.

F. Daily Reports shall include information for all subcontractors working for the Prime

Contractor. The Prime Contractor has the option of requiring his subcontractors to submit Daily Reports on their own activities, and those may be attached to the Prime Contractor's Daily Report.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 013119 - Project Meetings KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 013119

PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE

A. If necessary, a Pre-Construction Conference may be held prior to any work taking place on

site. The purpose of the Pre-Construction Conference is to acquaint the Contractor(s) with University contract administration and policies and to introduce the entire project team to each other.

B. The University will conduct the Pre-Construction Conference at the project site or other

convenient location. Representatives of the University and the Contractor shall attend. Representatives should be familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Contract and the work. At a minimum, the Contractor’s project manager and superintendent shall attend. The Contractor may have his major subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers in attendance at the Conference, although their attendance is not normally necessary. The University’s Professional will normally be in attendance at the Conference.

C. The agenda should include at least the following topics:

1. Contract basics (price, duration/dates, etc.). 2. Key representatives and organization of all parties. 3. Lines of communication. 4. Contracting authorities and agents. 5. Distribution of university procedures and forms. 6. Coordination of prime contractors’ work. 7. Tentative construction schedule and critical work sequencing. 8. Review of critical contract clauses and requirements. 9. Procedures for requests for information. 10. Procedures for change orders. 11. Procedures for applications for payment. 12. Procedures for submittals. 13. Preparation of record drawings/documents, to include shop drawings, product data, and

samples. 14. Use of the premises. 15. Office, work, and storage areas. 16. Utilities. 17. University and facility policies and access. 18. Working hours. 19. Permits and intergovernmental requirements. 20. UCC coordination with the Department of Labor & Industry. 21. Prevailing wage and labor standards. 22. Steel certifications. 23. Equipment deliveries and priorities. 24. Quality control. 25. Disputes, to include third party disputes. 26. Safety and health. 27. Environmental protection. 28. Security. 29. Housekeeping and clean-up.


30. Substantial completion and contract completion. 31. Testing and commissioning. 32. Warranties. 33. Vehicle registration and parking. 34. Restrooms and sanitary facilities. 35. List of subcontractors, principal suppliers, and fabricators submission. 36. Daily reports. 37. Temporary facilities. 38. Cutting and patching responsibilities. 39. Project meetings.

1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Periodic Progress Meetings will normally be held every two weeks during the Contract duration,

but the frequency and schedule will be determined by the University in coordination with the Contractor. The purpose of Progress Meetings is to review status of work to date and plan for future work.

B. Representatives of the University and the Contractor shall attend the Meetings.

Representatives should be familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the project and the work. At a minimum, the Contractor’s project manager and/or superintendent shall attend. The University’s Professional will normally be in attendance at the Meeting.

C. The agenda should include at least the following:

1. Review and approval or correction of minutes of the previous meeting. 2. Review of any special coordination or other meetings held since the previous Periodic

Progress Meeting. 3. Review of outstanding submittals and late submittals. 4. Review of open requests for information. 5. Review of open change orders and change order requests. 6. Review of any tests or inspections that were not successful. 7. Review of progress, in relation to the Project Schedule, since the last Periodic Progress

Meeting. 8. Review of work, in relation to the Project Schedule, planned for the next two weeks. 9. Review of other items of significance that could impact the project or progress. 10. Review of present and future needs of each Contractor and party present.

D. In all cases, the Meeting attendees shall focus on a plan for resolution of open items and issues.

If the project is behind schedule, discussion shall include a determination of how construction that is behind schedule will be returned to schedule, and securing of commitments from parties involved to do so; such discussion shall include whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the project time

E. The University will designate a party to record and publish a record of the Meeting. Normally

this will be the Professional.


1.03 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Prior to the start of work on any new feature of work, pre-installation coordination should take

place that ensures that all parties involved in the feature of work are prepared to accomplish the work in accordance with the Project requirements. Pre-installation coordination may take place during or in conjunction with Progress Meetings, or a separate meeting may take place.

B. Pre-installation coordination should include a check of at least the following:

1. Review of the applicable specifications and drawings. 2. Check to ensure materials and/or equipment to be installed have been submitted and

approved. 3. Check to ensure that materials and/or equipment to be installed are on hand, and that

those on hand are as submitted and approved, to include any applicable steel certifications.

4. Review of any required testing or inspection procedures, and that such tests or inspections are ready to be performed.

5. Examination of the work area to ensure that all preliminary work is complete and in

compliance with the Project requirements. 6. Discussion of procedures for controlling the work, for avoiding common deficiencies in the

work, and achieving standards that meet the Project requirements. 7. Review of safety and health considerations and/or review of the Contractor’s activity hazard

analysis.

1.04 PRE-COMPLETION MEETINGS

A. Prior to the completion of a project, and particularly for larger, more complex projects, specific pre-completion coordination should be accomplished. The purpose of pre-completion coordination is to conduct detailed planning and coordination for the completion of the project, with the goal of ensuring the facility is totally operational and functional and prepared for occupancy in a timely manner. Pre-completion coordination may involve parties, other than the Separate Prime Contractors, who have input or actions required to make the facility ready for occupancy. Pre-completion coordination may take place during or in conjunction with Progress Meetings, or a separate meeting may take place.

B. Pre-Completion coordination may include, at least, the following:

1. Plan for the final work by each Separate Prime Contractor.

2. Tie-ins for permanent utilities.

3. Tie-ins for permanent communications.

4. Tie-ins for fire and safety systems.

5. Delivery and staging of furniture and equipment being provided by the University.

6. Mechanical, electrical, and other system and equipment testing.

7. User training.


8. Commissioning (if applicable).

9. Final inspection procedures.

10. Certificate of Occupancy.

11. Transfer and acceptance procedures.

12. Punchlist procedures.

13. Items due to the University at completion (record drawings, O&M manuals, etc.).

14. Warranty requirements and plan. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013119

2018K112 Section 013200C - Construction Progress Documentation KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 013200C

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALIFICATIONS

The Lead Prime Contractor shall designate an individual who shall be responsible for the Project Schedule.

1.02 SCHEDULING OF WORK

A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling of construction, and for developing, updating, and maintaining a Project Schedule as described in this Section. Other Separate Prime Contractors shall actively participate in schedule development, updating, and maintenance.

B. Separate Prime Contractors shall have their subcontractors and suppliers working on the

project also contribute in developing, updating, and maintaining the Project Schedule. Subcontractor and supplier coordination shall be through their respective Separate Prime Contractor only.

C. The approved Project Schedule shall be used to manage the work, to measure the progress of

the work, and to aid in evaluating time extensions.

D. The approval of the Project Schedule by the University is for assurance that the Project Schedule complies with the requirements of this Section, and that the Project Schedule approximates an acceptable general flow of the Work. Construction means and methods and management of the Work are the responsibility of the Contractors.

E. The Project Schedule shall include signature boxes for signatures by representatives of all

Separate Prime Contractors, certifying acceptance of the Project Schedule. Acceptance of the Project Schedule does not relieve the Contractors of the responsibility for the accuracy of the Project Schedule and for the Contractors' obligations to meet the contractual completion date.

F. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall prosecute its Work to maintain its progress in accordance with the Project Schedule, so that no delays are caused to other Separate Prime Contractors.

G. In the event of disagreement involving the designated Lead Prime Contractor and one or more

of the other Separate Prime Contractors regarding developing, updating, or maintaining the Project Schedule, determinations of the Lead Prime Contractor will control.

H. Failure by any other Separate Prime Contractor to provide full cooperation with the Lead Prime

Contractor in accomplishing any Project Scheduling actions will be sufficient grounds for declaring that Contractor in default.

I. No Contractor may assert any claim whatsoever for any delay or additional costs incurred in

development of the Project Schedule or any related requirement of this Section.


1.03 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

A. Use of Manual Methods. Manual scheduling methods may be used to generate the Project Schedule. Manual scheduling methods means that hand-drawn diagrams and calculations may be used. The diagram may be a hand-drawn Critical Path Method (CPM) or Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) diagram, or a hand-drawn Gantt Chart or bar chart, as appropriate for the Project and the Work involved. Computer-generated schedules, diagrams, and calculations are also allowed.

B. Level of Detail Required. The Project Schedule shall include an appropriate level of detail to

manage the Work and to evaluate the progress of the Work.

C. Reasonable Durations. Reasonable durations are to be determined by the Contractors by consideration of planned crew size/composition, and such durations shall allow the progress of activities to be accurately determined between updates periods.

D. Procurement Activities. Tasks related to the procurement of long-lead materials or equipment

shall be included as separate activities in the Project Schedule. Long-lead materials and equipment are those that have a procurement cycle of over twenty-one (21) days.

E. University Activities. University and others' activities that could impact progress shall be

shown. These activities include, but are not limited to: approvals, inspections, utility tie-ins, University-furnished equipment and property, and any separate Notice to Proceed (NTP) for phasing. UCC-required inspections at the various stages of construction shall be shown.

F. Responsibility. All activities shall be identified in the Project Schedule by the Separate Prime

Contractor responsible to perform the work. Activities shall not belong to more than one Separate Prime Contractor.

1.04 SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS

A. Project Schedule Submission. The Project Schedule shall be submitted for approval within seven (7) calendar days after NTP. The Project Schedule submission shall contain the following items.

1. Project Schedule Diagram. The Project Schedule diagram shall depict and display the

order and interdependence of activities and the sequence in which the work is to be accomplished. The diagram may be a hand-drawn Critical Path Method (CPM) or Precedence Diagram Method (PDM) diagram, or a hand-drawn Gantt Chart or bar chart. The activity name and duration shall be shown on the diagram. Dates shall be shown on the diagram for start of project, any contractually-required interim completion dates, and the contract completion date. The critical path shall be clearly shown.

2. Project Schedule Report Data. The Project Schedule shall contain, or shall be

accompanied with reports that contain, Project Schedule data. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the data shall include Activity Name, Original Duration, Remaining Duration, Early Start Date, Early Finish Date, Late Start Date, Late Finish Date, and Total Float. Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates shall be provided for those activities in progress or completed. If the project has Separate Prime Contractors, a list of all activities sorted according to Separate Prime Contractor shall be provided.

B. Finalization of the Project Schedule. The Project Schedule must be finalized and accepted and

signed by all Separate Prime Contractors, and approved by the University not more than fourteen (14) calendar days after NTP. Failure to finalize the Project Schedule by that date will result in the withholding of all Contract payments until the Project Schedule is finalized.


C. Periodic Project Schedule Updates. Schedule Updates, based on the Project Schedule and all preceding Schedule Updates, and defining the current status of the work and the plan for the remaining work, shall be submitted either monthly or on an agreed-upon periodic basis. The Schedule Update submissions shall contain an updated Project Schedule Diagram and Project Schedule Report Data. All approved time extensions and change orders, and any other schedule adjustments, to include rearranging the flow of the Work and/or changing activity durations, shall be appropriately integrated.

D. Distribution of the Project Schedule and Schedule Updates. The Lead Prime Contractor shall

print and distribute copies of the Project Schedule and any Schedule Updates to the University, the Professional, and all other Separate Prime Contractors. Copies shall also be posted or made available in the Project meeting room and/or temporary field office.

E. Project Schedule Required for Payment. The Contractor shall have submitted the Project

Schedule submissions required as of the date of Application for Payment in order to have the Application for Payment considered for payment by the University.

1.05 SCHEDULE ADJUSTMENTS AND SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

A. Regaining Lost Time. If the Work is behind schedule, the Project Schedule shall be adjusted

by the Contractors by revising the sequence of activities, by increasing shifts and/or manpower, and/or by other means necessary to regain lost time.

B. Schedule No Longer Applicable. If the Contractors perform the work in such a manner that the Project Schedule no longer indicates the actual logic and activity durations being employed for the Work, the Lead Prime Contractor shall develop a revised Project Schedule that reflects the actual management and prosecution of the Work.

C. Requests for Time Extensions. In the event any Separate Prime Contractor requests an

extension of the contract completion date, that Contractor shall furnish a written justification based on the Project Schedule so that the University may make a determination as to whether or not an extension of time should be approved. Only delays in activities which affect critical path activities will be considered for a time extension. Actual delays that are found to be caused by the Contractor's own actions, which result in the extension of the Project Schedule, will not be a cause for a time extension. In no event will the granting of an extension of time to one Separate Prime Contractor automatically entitle any other Separate Prime Contractor to an extension of time.

D. Ownership of Float. Float available in the Project Schedule, at any time, shall not be

considered for the exclusive use of either the University or any Separate Prime Contractor.

E. Short Interval Schedules. At its’ discretion, the University may implement the use of Short Interval Schedules as part of the regularly schedule project meetings to enhance the project team’s coordination and management of the project schedule. If implemented, each separate prime contractor shall prepare Short Interval Schedules for review at project meetings. Interval durations shall be as stipulated by the university, but normally will be 2 to 4 weeks in duration. Short Interval Schedules shall indicate all anticipated activities scheduled to take place by the prime contractor and his sub-contractors during the interval duration stipulated.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013200C

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ General Requirements for 2018K112 Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The University will designate a representative, either an individual or a third party, who will be responsible for reviewing and approving submittals. Normally the University’s representative will be the University’s Professional. Identification of the representative, and the specific submittal transmittal procedures, will be provided by the University at the Pre-Construction Conference.

B. Each Contractor shall designate, not later than the Pre-Construction Conference, an individual

within their firm who will be responsible for approving submittals prior to transmittal to the University's representative.

1.02 SUBMITTAL REGISTER

A. The Submittal Register shall be an organized, comprehensive list for planning and tracking

submittals. B. Within the Project Manual, or prior to the Pre-Construction Conference, the University or its

representative will provide to each Separate Prime Contractor a list of submittals required for the Contract. While this list will be the basis of the Submittal Register, it should not be construed to necessarily be an accurate or complete list. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that all submittals required by the Contract Documents are included in the Submittal Register.

C. Within fourteen (14) days after the Pre-Construction Conference, each Separate Prime

Contractor shall submit to the University's representative a list, with dates, of their submittals required during the first sixty (60) days of construction.

D. Within fourteen (14) days after the Construction Schedule is approved, each Separate Prime

Contractor shall submit to the University's representative a complete Submittal Register for the duration of the construction.

E. The University's representative may provide a specific form and format for the Submittal

Register. In the absence of a form or format being provided, the Register shall contain at least the following information: 1. related technical specification section number 2. name of submittal 3. submittal category (shop drawing, product data, sample, etc.) 4. scheduled date for the submittal 5. scheduled date required for approval

F. The Submittal Register shall be prepared in order of Technical Specification section. The

University's representative may, at its option, request the Register be prepared in chronological order.

G. The University's representative may request or require an electronic or automated Submittal Register, either as a primary or supplemental Register.

H. The Submittal Register shall be coordinated with the Project Schedule, as well as with the list of subcontractors and the Schedule Of Values.


I. Each Contractor shall provide copies of his Submittal Register to the University, its

representative, the other Separate Prime Contractors, the Professional (if the Professional is not the University's representative), and any other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Additionally, a copy shall be made available in the Contractor’s field office.

J. Failure by the Contractor to include on the Submittal Register a submittal required by a

Technical Specification section does not relieve the Contractor from having to make that submittal. Any omission shall be integrated into the Register when the omission is noted.

K. The Contractor and the University's representative shall jointly work together to ensure that the

Submittal Register is updated not less than monthly. Updates and revisions will be distributed to the same parties and posted in the same locations as identified in paragraph III.B.9. above.

1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. The Contractor shall coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with procurement

and construction activities.

1. Each submittal should be transmitted sufficiently in advance of related procurement and construction activities to avoid delay.

2. Each submittal should be coordinated with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other

submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. The Contractor should plan for the possibility of some of the more complex submittals not

being approved the first time they are submitted, and he should plan on additional lead time for at least one re-submittal of such submittals. Typical submittals requiring more than one submittal before approval include structural steel, food service equipment, and HVAC controls.

4. Additional time should be scheduled for different types of submittals for related elements

of the Work that require coordination during review. The University and its representative reserve the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

5. Additional time should be scheduled if a submittal contains a deviation from the Contract

requirements.

B. Submittal processing and review times.

1. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract or in any Technical Specification, a total of fourteen (14) days shall be allowed for review and disposition (approval or disapproval) of a submittal. The fourteen days will start when the University’s representative receives the submittal, and will end when the University’s representative sends the dispositioned submittal back to the Contractor.

2. A re-submittal of a submittal previously not approved shall be considered a new submittal

for processing time. 3. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of the Contractor’s failure to

transmit a submittal to the University's representative sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

C. Each submittal shall be identified and transmitted by use of a transmittal sheet. Unless the

University or its representative provides a form for the transmittal sheet, the Contractor may


use any format acceptable to the University and/or its representative. In any case, the transmittal sheet shall contain at least the following: 1. Contract number and name 2. name and address of Contractor 3. related technical specification section number and title 4. name of submittal 5. type of submittal (shop drawing, product data, etc.) 6. date 7. scheduled date for the submittal 8. scheduled date required for release or approval 9. name and address of subcontractor, supplier, or vendor (as appropriate) 10. Contractor’s certification that information complies with the Contract requirements, and if

there are any deviations (as appropriate) 11. a space for approval/disapproval/comments by the University's representative and date

D. Each submittal shall be reviewed and approved by the Contractor prior to transmittal to the

University's representative. Submittals received directly from sources other than the Contractor, and those that do not have an approval and/or certification by the Contractor, will be returned without action.

E. Each submittal should be packaged individually for transmittal and processing. F. Any deviations from the Contract requirements shall be clearly marked. G. After submittals have been processed, no re-submittal for the purpose of substituting materials

or equipment will be considered unless processed in accordance with Specification Section 016200, Product Options.

1.04 REVIEW AND DISPOSITION OF SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals will be reviewed, marked as to indicate disposition, and returned promptly.

Disposition may include the following:

1. Approved. The submittal is approved; no further action relative to the submittal is required. The Contractor may proceed with the Work.

2. Approved with Comments. The submittal is approved, except for minor corrections or

variations. The Contractor may proceed with the Work but shall include the corrections or variations. No resubmittal is required. Any corrections or variations should be noted on record drawings and files.

3. Partial Approval. A portion of the submittal is approved, but another portion is not approved.

A resubmittal is required only for that portion not approved. The Contractor may proceed with Work represented by that portion of the submittal that is approved, if it is separate and distinct Work, but the Contractor may not proceed with any Work represented by that portion of the submittal that is not approved.

4. Not Approved. The submittal is not approved. A total resubmittal is required. The

Contractor may not proceed with the Work. B. The review and approval of a submittal by the University or its representative is for conformance

with the information given in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the project. Approval does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for compliance with Contract requirements or with statutory or regulatory requirements. Moreover, the Contractor is responsible for dimensions, quantities, details and connections, fabrication, construction methods, and coordination of trades required for satisfactory construction of all Work.


1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Shop Drawings are a specific type of submittal. Shop Drawings include fabrication and

installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates, and similar drawings, and Coordination Drawings. Shop Drawings may include extensions of design.

B. Format.

1. Shop Drawings shall consist of newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale, and shall not simply be reproduced Contract Documents or copies of standard information. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings.

2. Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, Shop Drawings shall be

submitted on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11", but no larger than 30" x 42". 3. Shop Drawings shall contain a space approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title

block to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and to record the review and disposition by the University's representative.

4. Shop Drawings should include at least the following:

a. dimensions b. identification of products and materials included c. compliance with specified standards d. notation of coordination requirements e. notation of dimensions established by field measurement f. identification or highlighting of deviations from the Contract requirements

C. Unless otherwise specified, a Shop Drawing Submittal shall consist of four (4) blue or black

line prints. For Shop Drawings that are required for Operations and Maintenance Manuals, one (1) additional blue or black line print shall be submitted. If agreed upon, electronic drawings on CD may be acceptable in lieu of hard copy drawings. After review and disposition by the University's representative, two (2) regular prints will be returned, and the remainder will be retained by the University's representative and/or the University. One (1) print returned shall be marked and maintained as a "Record Document."

D. Shop Drawings that do not contain an appropriate final stamp by the University and/or its

representative indicating review and disposition shall not be used in connection with the construction.

1.06 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing, and shall be prepared, formatted,

and processed in accordance with the requirements for Shop Drawings.

B. Coordination Drawings serve to coordinate the Work in an area where two or more Separate Prime Contractors have Work, or in an area that has limited space for the installation of various components and systems. Coordination Drawings show the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or function as intended, or that show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.

C. Coordination Drawings may include components previously Submitted as Shop Drawings or

Product Data.


D. Refer to Technical Specification sections for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for HVAC, other mechanical, plumbing, electrical, and related installations. Other Technical Specifications sections may also identify requirements for Coordination Drawings.

1.07 PRODUCT DATA

A. Product Data are a specific type of submittal. Product Data includes printed information such

as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams, templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves.

B. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable

for use, Product Data shall be submitted as Shop Drawings. C. Format.

1. Each copy of printed materials submittal as Product Data shall be marked to indicate applicable choices and options. Where Product Data includes information on several products, some of which are not required, copies shall be marked to indicate the applicable information.

2. Product Data should include at least the following:

a. manufacturer's printed recommendations b. compliance with recognized trade association standards c. compliance with recognized testing agency standards d. application of testing agency labels and seals e. notation of dimensions verified by field measurement f. notation of coordination requirements

D. Unless otherwise specified, a Product Data Submittal shall consist of four (4) copies of the

Product Data. After review and disposition by the University's representative, two (2) copies will be returned, and the other copy will be retained by the University's representative and/or the University.

E. Product Data that do not contain an appropriate final stamp by the University and/or its

representative indicating review and disposition shall not be used in connection with the construction. Installation shall not be initiated until an applicable copy of Product Data is in the installer's possession.

1.08 SAMPLES

A. Samples are a specific type of submittal. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or

fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. Field Samples are a special type of Samples.

B. Samples are submitted for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, and for a final check of

these characteristics with other elements. Samples are also utilized for a comparison of these characteristics between the Submittal and the actual material or product as delivered and installed.

C. Format.

1. Samples shall be submitted as full-size, fully-fabricated samples, cured and finished as specified, and physically identical with the material or product proposed.

2. Samples shall be mounted, displayed, or packaged in the manner specified to facilitate

review of qualities indicated.


3. Samples shall be prepared to match the Professional's Sample, if indicated. 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristics are inherent in the

material or product represented, multiple units (not less than three (3)) that show approximate limits of the variations shall be submitted.

5. Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics from a

range of standard choices, a full set of choices for the material or product shall be submitted.

6. All interior finish Samples requiring coordinated color, texture, and other characteristics

shall be submitted as a group. 7. Samples shall include at least the following:

a. generic description of the Sample b. sample source c. product name or name of manufacturer d. compliance with recognized standards e. availability and delivery time

D. Unless otherwise specified, a Sample Submittal shall consist of three (3) sets. After review and

disposition by the University's representative, two (2) sets will be returned, and the other set will be retained by the University's representative and/or the University.

E. Sets of Samples shall be maintained at the Project site for quality comparisons throughout the

course of construction. Sample sets may be used to obtain final acceptance of the construction associated with each set.

F. Field Samples specified in individual Technical Specification sections are a special type of

Samples. Field Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials, and to establish the standard against which the Work will be compared. Transmittal sheets shall be used to provide a record of review and disposition for Field Samples.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________ General Requirements for 2018K110 Section 013500C - Safety and Health Requirements KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 013500C SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 The Contractor shall comply with Federal OSHA regulations and other related safety and health

regulations. The most stringent standard shall prevail. 1.02 SAFETY AND HEALTH PERSONNEL

A. Definitions.

1. Site Safety and Health Officer (SSHO). The qualified or competent person who is responsible for the on-site safety and health required for the project.

2. Certified Industrial Hygienist (CIH). An individual who is currently certified as a CIH by the

American Board of Industrial Hygiene. 3. Certified Safety Professional (CSP). An individual who is currently certified as a CSP by

the Board of Certified Safety Professionals. 4. Associate Safety Professional (ASP). An individual who is currently certified as an ASP by

the Board of Certified Safety Professionals. 5. Certified Construction Health & Safety Technician (CHST). An individual who is currently

certified as a CHST by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals. 6. Certified Safety Trained Supervisor (STS). An individual who is currently certified as an

STS by the Board of Certified Safety Professionals. 7. Competent Person. A person who is capable of identifying hazardous or dangerous

conditions, as well as the application and use of related equipment, and has the authority to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate any hazards, in relation to a specific area of safety or health. Typical areas include excavation, scaffolding, fall protection, confined spaces, hazardous energy, etc.

8. Pandemic Safety Officer (PSO). An individual who has been identified by the Prime

Contractor as being responsible to convey, implement, and enforce the requirements of the Governor’s guidance for the protection of employees, suppliers, and other personnel at the site. The PSO is also responsible for coordinating with the contractor’s subcontractors.

B. Positions and Requirements for This Contract.

1. The Contractor shall assign an SSHO to be responsible for safety and occupational health management, surveillance, inspections, and enforcement for the Contractor's Work on the Project.

2. The SSHO may be the superintendent or another member of the Contractor’s on-

site staff. While the SSHO duties are secondary to their primary duties, sufficient time and effort shall be put toward accomplishment of SSHO duties. The SSHO shall be on site whenever construction activities are taking place.


3. The SSHO shall have the following experience and meet the following credentials:

Level 1: A minimum of three (3) years safety-related work on similar projects. Completed 10-hour OSHA construction safety class or equivalent within the last three (3) years. Competent person training as needed.

4. The on-site SSHO shall be supplemented by a member of the Contractor’s home-

office staff, or a consultant to the Contractor, who visits the project site on an as-needed basis to provide higher-level monitoring and control of safety and health requirements.

C. The duties and responsibilities of the SSHO shall include, but shall not be limited to, the

following.

1. Ensure compliance with Federal OSHA regulations and other related safety and health regulations.

2. Implement and enforce the Contractor’s safety and health policy and program. 3. Conduct periodic safety and health inspections. 4. Maintain applicable safety and health reference material on the job site.

5. Ensure subcontractor compliance with safety and health requirements. 6. Conduct safety and health-related meetings and training, or ensure that they take place. 7. Conduct accident and mishap investigations and complete required reports. 8. Coordinate with the SSHOs of other Separate Prime Contractors.

9. The SSHO may also hold the responsibilities of the PSO.

1.03 SAFETY AND HEALTH PLAN (SHP)

A. The Contractor shall prepare a SHP, which shall consist of, at least, a copy of the Contractor's overall safety and health program supplemented with project-specific information.

B. The project specific information included in the SHP should be, at a minimum, the following:

1. Administrative responsibilities (identification by name and specific responsibilities of

Contractor personnel) relative to safety and health requirements for this project. 2. Plan for dealing with emergencies, to include but not limited to on-site medical support and

first aid, ambulance service, fire fighting, and evacuation of the project site. 3. Reference to any special plans (Paragraph 1.04 E.) required by the nature of the

Contract/Project or the Work, and any unusual or unique requirements for safety or health for this Contract/Project.

C. Separate Prime Contractors should coordinate their SHPs to ensure consistency. Separate

Prime Contractors must recognize that they may have differing levels of requirements for their SSHOs and for contents of their SHPs.

D. The SHP shall be signed by the person preparing the SHP, the Contractor’s on-site

superintendent/SSHO, and an officer of the Contractor.


E. The SHP shall be completed, and a copy of the SHP shall be submitted, as proof of compliance,

to the University prior to any work taking place on the project site. The Contractor shall maintain copies of the SHP at the project site, and make them readily available to all workers, subcontractors, and the University.

F. The SHP shall be continuously reviewed and revised, as necessary, throughout the life of the

Contract. All revisions shall be submitted to the University.

1.04 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. A multi-employer work site, as defined by OSHA, is one in which many employers occupy the

same site. The University considers the Contractor to be the "controlling authority" for all work site safety and health of his subcontractors. The Contractor is responsible for informing his subcontractors of the safety and health provisions under the terms of the Contract and the penalties for noncompliance, coordinating the work to prevent one craft from interfering with or creating hazardous working conditions for other crafts, and inspecting subcontractor operations to ensure that safety and health responsibilities are being carried out.

B. The Contractor shall provide a location for displaying safety and health information, to include

information such as emergency phone numbers, a map showing the route to the nearest emergency care facility, a copy of the up-to-date SHP, OSHA 300A Form, OSHA Safety and Health Protection-On-The-Job Poster, and any permits required relative to safety and health. The location shall be in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees and visitors.

C. All new employees (both prime contractor and subcontractor) shall be informed of the SHP and

about specific site hazards before they begin work. D. The Contractor shall arrange for emergency medical treatment and evacuation of the project

site for his own workforce. The University has no responsibility to provide these services. E. The Contractor shall prepare and implement any additional specific safety and health plans

required to carry out the work. Such plans include but are not limited to Hearing Protection/Conservation Plan, Hazardous Energy Control Plan (Lockout/Tagout), Respiratory Protection Plan, Hazard Communications Plan, Emergency Response Plan, Site Safety and Health Plan for Asbestos Abatement, or Site Safety and Health Plan for Lead-Based Paint Asbestos Abatement. Any such plans shall be submitted to the University as proof of compliance.

F. The Contractor shall not bring any hazardous material onto the project site without prior written

approval of the University. G. Documents, records, and reports required by this Section, but not specifically required to be

submitted to the University, shall be made available to the University upon request. 1.05 ACCIDENT REPORTING

A. The Contractor shall notify the University, by any reasonable means, as soon as practical, but

not later than four (4) hours after, the occurrence of any accident involving injury or illness, or involving property damage anticipated to be greater than $2,500. Initial notification should provide basic information about the occurrence.

B. The Contractor shall provide to the University, not later than 48 hours after the occurrence, a

follow-up written report containing detailed information. Information should include the Contractor’s name, contract number and title, location where the accident occurred, date and time of accident, names of personnel injured and/or extent of property damage, extent of injury


and/or damage, brief description of accident (to include type of construction equipment used, PPE used, etc.), and actions taken to eliminate the hazard and/or prevent similar accidents.

1.06 CONTRACTOR AND PUBLIC PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall notify the University if he intends to bring flammable materials onto the

site, including information as to the volume and intended use. Only the amount needed for the day shall be stored on site, and any amount remaining at the end of the day shall be removed. When removal is not practical, flammable materials shall be stored in proper containers.

B. The Contractor is prohibited from bringing any radioactive materials on campus without first

obtaining permission from the University Radiation Safety Officer. C. Chemical materials other than potable water shall not be placed into the sanitary or storm

sewers without the permission of the University. D. Open ditches shall be fenced. Where walks cross ditches, bridged walkways shall be provided

with rails on both sides. Bridged walkways shall be adequately lighted at night. E. Temporary walks and roads shall be surfaced by PENNDOT Number 2 or 2A crushed stone if

they are to be in public use. F. Walks and roadways used by both the Contractor and the public shall be kept in a good state

of repair and cleared by the Contractor at least once each day and more often as conditions require.

G. Adequate covering and shielding shall be provided for areas needing protection from

equipment or falling objects, where the public utilizes walkways, roadways, or entrances that are adjacent to construction, pass under construction scaffolding, or pass near building edges.

H. Fire Hydrants shall be maintained accessible for fire fighting purposes. Obstructions shall not

be placed within fifteen (15) feet of fire hydrants. I. Temporary heating units of any type shall be adequately protected and attended. J. The Contractor is responsible for implementing methods to adequately and safely

minimize/eliminate, control, capture, and/or exhaust any incomplete combustion byproducts such as carbon monoxide gas or any other such gas created by construction, vehicles, portable heating devices, etc.

1.07 COVID-19 REQUIREMENTS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

A. The Contractor shall follow all applicable provisions of orders issued by Pennsylvania’s Secretary of Health, including:

1. The Order of the Secretary of Health providing for business safety measures including but not limited to provisions requiring that every person present at a work site wear masks/face coverings, and provisions requiring the establishment of protocols for execution upon discovery that the business has been exposed to a person who is a probable or confirmed case of COVID-19. Note, masks and face coverings will not be provided by the University.

2. The Order of the Secretary of Health providing for building safety measures.

B. The Contractor shall follow applicable guidance from the Department of Health and the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention concerning operations and workplaces.

https://www.governor.pa.gov/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/20200415-SOH-worker-safety-order.pdf

https://www.governor.pa.gov/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/20200405-SOH-Building-Safety-Measures.pdf

https://www.health.pa.gov/topics/disease/coronavirus/Pages/Coronavirus.aspx

https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/community/guidance-business-response.html


C. The Contractor shall follow all provisions included in the Governor's Guidance for Business in

the Construction Industry D. The Contractor shall identify a “Pandemic Safety Officer”. The primary responsibility of the

Pandemic Safety Officer will be to convey, implement, and enforce the social distancing and other requirements of the Governor’s guidance for the protection of employees, suppliers, and other personnel at the site. The Pandemic Safety Officer is also responsible for coordinating with the contractor’s subcontractors. Submit the name and contact information of the Pandemic Safety Officer to the University Project Manager. This may be the same individual named as the Safety Officer if that position is required pursuant to Section 013500 of the contract.

E. In addition to the conditions above, the following recommendations are made concerning

construction activities:

1. It is recommended contractors establish a written Safety Plan for each work location containing site specific details for the implementation of this guidance to be shared with all employees and implemented and enforced by the designated Pandemic Safety Officer.

2. It is recommended that each jobsite have signage posted indicating best practices and safety guidelines for construction sites.

3. It is recommended contractors consult with trade associations and other appropriate organizations for recommendations and guidelines for the construction industry. For example, the Master Builders’ Association of Western Pennsylvania website contains additional guidelines regarding cleaning/disinfection of jobsite, trailers, equipment, etc.

Links: 1.07 A.1. https://www.governor.pa.gov/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/20200415-SOH-worker-safety-order.pdf 1.07 A.2. https://www.governor.pa.gov/wp-content/uploads/2020/04/20200405-SOH-Building-Safety-Measures.pdf 1.07 B. https://www.health.pa.gov/topics/disease/coronavirus/Pages/Coronavirus.aspx; https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/community/guidance-business-response.html 1.07 C. https://www.governor.pa.gov/covid-19/construction-industry-guidance/ 1.07 E.3. https://myemail.constantcontact.com/COVID-19-Cleaning-and-Disinfecting-Information.html?soid=1102658846855&aid=5oS3t596JZw PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013500C

https://www.governor.pa.gov/covid-19/construction-industry-guidance/


https://myemail.constantcontact.com/COVID-19-Cleaning-and-Disinfecting-Information.html?soid=1102658846855&aid=5oS3t596JZw





https://www.health.pa.gov/topics/disease/coronavirus/Pages/Coronavirus.aspx

https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/community/guidance-business-response.html




_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 014500 - Quality Control KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 014500

QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 QUALITY CONTROL CONCEPTS

A. Quality Control Services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports,

performed by the Contractor, independent agencies, and governing authorities during and after the execution of the Work to evaluate that the Work complies with the Contractual requirements. Quality Control Services do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the University or its Professional.

B. Inspection and Testing Services may be required to verify compliance with requirements

specified or indicated, and are considered to be part of Quality Control Services. Such Inspection and Testing Services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract requirements.

C. Specific Quality Control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the

respective Technical Specification Sections for those construction activities. Those Quality Control requirements cover production of standard products as well as customized fabrication, installation, and construction. Requirements for Quality Control Services may also be required by governing authorities.

D. Quality Control Services specified are not intended to limit the Contractor's quality control

procedures to facilitate compliance with Contract requirements, and do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract requirements.

E. Requirements for which the Contractor is to provide Quality Control Services, and which are

also being conducted by the University, its Professional, and/or authorities having jurisdiction, are not limited by provisions of this Section.

1.02 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor.

1. Separate Prime Contractors shall provide those Quality Control Services specified in the Technical Specification Sections, or required by governing authorities, related to their Work, except where they are specifically indicated to be the responsibility of another Separate Prime Contractor, or the responsibility of the University, its Professional, or another entity.

2. The Contractor shall employ qualified individuals and/or qualified contracted testing

laboratories, consultants, or other qualified individuals or firms to conduct their Quality Control Services.

3. Specified Quality Control Services may include specific requirements for Inspection and

Testing Services, and if indicated to be the responsibility of the Contractor, the Contractor shall employ a testing laboratory, consultant, or other qualified individual or firm to perform the inspection or test.


B. University. University inspections and tests are addressed in paragraph 1.05 below. C. Re-testing.

1. The Contractor is responsible for re-inspection or re-testing where results of required

inspections, tests, or similar services prove unsatisfactory and do not indicate compliance with the Contract Document, regardless of whether the original inspection or test was the Contractor's responsibility.

2. The Contractor is responsible for re-inspection or re-testing of construction that is revised

or replaced by the Contractor and where required inspections or tests were performed on original construction, regardless of whether the original inspection or test was the Contractor's responsibility.

3. Responsibility for re-inspection/re-testing includes arrangement, coordination, and cost of,

and any impacts related to the conduct of, such re-inspection or re-test. 1.03 PROCEDURES

A. Any testing laboratory, consultant, or other qualified individual or firm engaged for Quality

Control Services shall be licensed to operate in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. B. Any testing laboratory engaged shall be prequalified as complying with Recommended

Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification by the American Council of Independent Laboratories, and shall specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.

C. If the Contractor is required to engage an Inspection and Testing Service, and the University

has also employed an Inspection and Testing Service for the same or related services, the Contractor shall not employ the same Service engaged by the University, unless otherwise approved in writing by the University.

D. Where Quality Control Services are indicated as the responsibility of the University or its

Professional, the University will furnish to the Contractor the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of those testing laboratories, consultants, or other qualified individuals or firms to be engaged, and a description of the types of inspections and tests they will perform.

E. The Contractor shall cooperate with the University and governing authorities, and any other

entities engaged by either of them, performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and the Contractor shall provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Auxiliary services required include but are not limited to:

1. Providing access to the Work. 2. Furnishing incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests. 3. Providing preliminary design mix or other design data related to the inspections or tests. 4. Taking adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing, or

assisting in taking samples. 5. Providing facilities for storage and curing of test samples, and delivering samples to testing

laboratories. 6. Securing and protecting inspection, sampling, and test equipment at the Project site.


F. Contractors and all entities performing inspections, tests, and similar services shall coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Contractors, the University, and each entity shall coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests. The General Construction Contractor is responsible for coordinating and scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities whenever those activities affect more than one Prime Contractor.

G. Prior to and during inspecting, testing, and similar services, the Contractor responsible for that

inspection, test, or similar service shall protect any construction exposed for or by the inspection or test, or any unfinished construction in the vicinity of the inspection or test. Upon completion of inspections, testing, and similar services, the Contractor responsible for that inspection, test, or similar service shall repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit Qualifications Data for any Inspection and Testing Service that the

Contractor plans to engage to perform inspections, testing, and similar services. Qualifications Data shall include proof of qualifications, in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the Inspection and Testing Service by a recognized authority.

B. The Contractor shall submit a Schedule of Tests and Inspections, in tabular form, which includes the following:

1. Technical Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of inspection and/or test. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of inspection and/or test methods. 5. Number of inspections and tests required. 6. Time schedule or time span for inspections and tests. 7. Entity responsible for performing inspections and tests. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each Quality Control Service.

C. The Contractor shall submit, for the University's records, copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

D. The Contractor shall submit to the University required reports of inspections, tests, and similar

services. Reports from Inspection and Testing Services shall consist of a certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar service, and such reports shall be submitted through the Contractor to the University.

E. The Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of any inspection or test report to the University.

If the inspection or test was required by a governing authority, the Contractor shall submit additional copies of that inspection or test report directly to that governing authority.

F. Reports of each inspection or test shall include, at a minimum, the following:

1. Date of report. 2. Contract number and Project title. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing entity. 4. Identification of product and Technical Specification Section.


5. Dates and locations of samples, tests, and inspections. 6. Names of individuals conducting the inspection or test. 7. Designation of the test method. 8. Complete inspection or test data. 9. Test results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at the time of sampling and testing. 11. Comments or professional opinion as to whether inspected or tested Work complies with

Contract requirements. 12. Recommendations on re-testing. 13. Name and signature of authorizing individual.

1.06 UNIVERSITY INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Inspections and tests which will be the responsibility of the University are identified in the

various Technical Specification sections. These inspections and tests will be performed by an independent entity engaged by the University, or by the University's Professional, without expense to Contractor. The University reserves the right to change, at any time, the inspections and tests for which it will be responsible.

B. Inspections and tests paid for by the University are for the sole benefit of the University. The

inspection and test results will be available to the Contractor for his use. If the Contractor desires additional inspections and tests for his own quality control monitoring and purposes, the Contractor shall pay for those additional inspections and/or tests.

C. The University, at its own expense, may perform any other Quality Control Services it deems

necessary to supplement or verify the Contractor’s Quality Control Services, and to supplement its Contract enforcement activities. The University may either utilize its Professional or employ a testing laboratory, consultant, or other qualified individual or firm to conduct these services.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 015000B – Temporary Facilities and Controls KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 015000B

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall provide those temporary utilities, temporary construction and

support facilities, and security and protection facilities which are common to the Work of all Separate Prime Contractors. Specific exceptions are noted throughout this Section.

B. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall provide the remainder of his own temporary utilities,

temporary construction and support facilities, and security and protection facilities required to perform his own Work.

C. Unless the University requests that it be maintained longer, each temporary facility shall be

removed when it is no longer required. Temporary facilities remaining after Substantial Completion shall only be allowed with the approval of the University.

D. Any Contractor who fails to carry out his responsibilities as set forth in this Section shall be held

responsible for such failure, and the University shall have the right to take such action as it deems proper for the protection of the Work, the Project site, and University property, and shall deduct the cost involved from the amount that Contractor is otherwise due.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Common temporary utilities may include but are not limited to the following, if required:

1. Water service and distribution. 2. Electric power and light. 3. Telephone service.

B. Common temporary construction and support facilities may include but are not limited to the

following, if required: 1. Environmental conditioning (heat, cooling, humidity control, and/or ventilation) necessary

to allow the Work to be carried out without interruption and under the correct conditions. 2. Environmental enclosure/protection of the building as a whole. 3. Sanitary facilities and sanitary waste disposal services. 4. General waste collection and disposal services. 5. Field office. 6. Storage area. 7. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.

C. Security and protection facilities may include but are not limited to the following, if required:

1. Site barricades, warning signs, warning lights, and traffic control for the site. 2. Site enclosure fence. 3. Temporary fire protection. 4. Environmental and site protection.


1.03 INSTALLATION A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall, in coordination with the other Separate Prime Contractors,

prepare a site mobilization plan indicating the proposed number and location of office trailers, the location and dimensions of any storage trailers or storage area, the location and dimensions of any area to be fenced for use by the Contractors, and diagrams of routes of ingress/egress to the site and traffic control on the site. The site mobilization plan shall be submitted to the University for approval prior to mobilization on the site.

B. Temporary utilities and facilities should be located where they will serve the Project and all

Contractors adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Temporary facilities and utilities should be relocated and modified as required as the Work progresses.

C. Temporary utilities and facilities shall be installed and maintained in a manner acceptable to

the University and in compliance with the appropriate code for such temporary installation and construction. Such codes and requirements may include requirements arising from building codes, safety and health regulations, utility company requirements, emergency services rules, and environmental protection regulations. Qualified people shall be used for the installation and maintenance of temporary facilities. Contractors shall arrange with the authorities having jurisdiction with respect to such codes and requirements for required inspections, certifications, and tests. The University may have requirements different from or in addition to those within this Section.

1.04 TEMPORARY UTILITIES

A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall provide an adequate water supply for use by all Separate

Prime Contractors in accomplishing the Work. For reasonable quantities of utilities that are drawn off of University utility infrastructure, the University shall provide them free of charge. Otherwise, the Lead Prime Contractor shall provide reasonable quantities of needed utilities for use by all Separate Prime Contractors in accomplishing the Work.

B. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all common temporary electrical power and circuits and outlets, extended throughout the building, for use by all Separate Prime Contractors in accomplishing the Work. Service should not be less than 120/208 volts single phase. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall provide their own grounded electrical extension cords. If any Contractor requires multi-phase power, that Contractor shall be responsible for providing that power; but he shall coordinate his multi-phase power with the Electrical Contractor. The temporary electrical power system shall not be used for welding operations or for temporary heat.

C. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all common temporary lighting for use by all Separate

Prime Contractors in accomplishing the Work whenever overhead roof deck or flooring has been installed or is present, or when the work area otherwise has insufficient light to support proper construction operations.

D. The responsible Contractor shall provide meters for and pay to the University for all costs for

the consumption of temporary utilities. If any utilities are drawn directly off of the local provider’s infrastructure, the responsible Contractor shall comply with the requirements of that provider and make payment directly to that provider.

E. Any part or parts of permanent utility lines, grounds, and buildings, disturbed or damaged by

the installation and/or removal of temporary utility lines shall be restored to their original condition.


F. The Contractor shall coordinate with the University for a time when a utility can be interrupted, where necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

G. The Contractor shall arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each

temporary utility before use. H. Telephone, data, and other telecommunications services for temporary office and storage

trailers shall be the responsibility of each Contractor.

1.05 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONING A. Prior to closure of the building, each Separate Prime Contractor shall provide, operate, and

maintain, including providing fuel, to supply temporary heat to protect their own portion of the Work.

B. Subsequent to closure of the building, the Lead Prime Contractor shall provide temporary

heating and dehumidification required by construction activities inside the enclosed area. C. Temporary heating units shall have a UL rating and label. Self-contained oil-fired portable

heaters, if used, shall be vented to outside of the structure. Electric resistance heating and gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander-type heating units are not permitted.

D. The permanent HVAC systems shall not be used to supply temporary heat and cooling except

with approval of the University.

1.06 SANITARY FACILITIES

A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall provide and maintain sanitary facilities. B. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water facilities,

provided with toilet tissue and similar disposable materials for each facility. Wash facilities, with cleaning products, shall be supplied with potable water at convenient locations. Safety showers and/or eye-wash fountains shall be provided, as necessary. Drinking water shall consist of bottled-water type drinking water units, with paper cups.

C. Temporary toilets shall be self-contained single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated

recirculation, or combustion type, properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass fiber reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. Temporary toilets shall be provided with toilet tissue and similar disposable materials for each facility, as well as covered waste containers for used material.

1.07 GENERAL WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL

A. Each Contractor shall provide their own dumpsters for demolition materials, construction

debris, and other waste materials. Hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials shall be handled separately from other waste by containerizing properly, and shall be disposed of in a lawful manner. Containers shall be marked appropriately.

B. Burying or burning waste materials on site is not permitted. Washing waste down sewers or

into waterways is not permitted.


C. Waste shall be collected and removed from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Each contractor is responsible for daily removal of all waste and debris generated. If a Prime Contractor or his sub-contractors fail to remove debris daily, the University may direct the Lead Prime Contractor or other third party to remove such debris and will deduct associated costs from the Offending Prime Contractor’s contract amount

D. Hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials are the responsibility of each prime

contractor and shall be handled separately from other waste by containerizing properly, and shall be disposed of in a lawful manner. Containers shall be marked appropriately.

1.08 TEMPORARY OFFICES AND SHEDS

A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall provide a prefabricated, mobile unit(s) or similar job-built

construction office for his own use, and for the Project in general. The unit should provide adequate space for Periodic Project Progress Meetings and other project coordination meetings.

B. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall provide, if required, his own prefabricated, mobile unit(s)

or similar job-built construction office for his own use. C. The Lead Prime Contractor shall provide one or more open common storage areas. Open

storage areas shall be enclosed by a temporary high chain link fence. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall provide his own enclosed storage trailers/facilities.

D. Trailers, mobile units, and storage facilities shall present a clean and neat exterior appearance

and shall be in a state of good repair. E. Open storage areas, if provided, shall be enclosed by a temporary 6-foot high chain link fence.

The fence shall include plastic strip inserts, colored green, so that visibility through the fence is obstructed. Equipment and materials shall not be open to public view with the exception of those items that are in support of ongoing work on any given day. Materials and small equipment shall not be placed or stored outside the fenced area overnight. Materials shall not be stockpiled outside the fence in preparation for the next day's work.

F. Each prime contractor is responsible for the installation of required utilities (e.g. electric, data

etc.) to their construction offices and those of their subcontractors. Each prime contractor is also responsible for any and all usage charges for said utilities.

1.09 CONSTRUCTION AIDS

A. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall be responsible for any construction aids and facilities

required to perform their own work. B. Contractors shall supply, erect, maintain, and operate scaffolding and hoisting facilities and

equipment for their own use. C. Contractors shall supply, assemble, erect, and move into proper location, all derricks, hoists,

lifting apparatus and similar equipment necessary for the execution and installation of their own work.

D. Any Contractor requiring access to the roof shall erect a personnel elevator or ladders, external

to the building, for access to the roof. E. The operators of all equipment shall be properly licensed for equipment in use and shall be

fully experienced in the safe operation of the equipment in use.


F. Contractors shall comply with the terms, regulations, and conditions contained in the latest edition of the Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry Regulations for Construction and Repairs. Contractors shall also comply with OSHA requirements for construction aids and facilities.

1.10 TEMPORARY SECURITY AND PROTECTION

A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall provide, install, and maintain necessary and proper

barricades, warning signs, and lights to limit public access to the Project area.

B. Prior to any construction operations beginning, the Lead Prime Contractor shall install a site enclosure fence. The fence shall be maintained around the perimeter of the site, and shall meet the requirements of the University. The fence shall at a minimum consist of 6 (six) foot high chain link material and 1-1/2-inch dia. galvanized steel pipe posts bases on portable bases that are properly weighted down, and lockable entrance gates.

C. Each Separate Prime Contractor performing excavation and trenching shall be responsible for

protection for his excavation or trench. Excavations and trenches shall not be open overnight or on weekends without the University’s permission.

1.11 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION

A. The Lead Prime Contractor shall install and maintain temporary fire extinguishers of the types

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. B. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall provide additional fire extinguishers of the types needed

for specific work or equipment requiring dedicated fire protection.

1.12 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A. The General Construction Contractor, or the Lead Prime Contractor if there is no General

Construction Contractor, shall be responsible for overall environmental protection of the Project site. All Separate Prime Contractors shall be responsive to the General or Lead Contractor for establishment and maintenance of environmental protection, and all Separate Prime Contractors shall be responsible for environmental protection relative to their own Work.

B. Contractors shall be responsible for any fuel storage and dispensing operations, and any

equipment storage and servicing operations, that they establish and operate. Fuel, lubricants, and oil and their related operations shall be managed in accordance with all Federal, Commonwealth, and local laws and regulations.

C. Contractors shall provide protection for the construction in progress and completed

construction. Protection shall be from exposure, foul weather, moisture, fumes, dust and dirt, and other conditions detrimental to the Work.

D. Contractors shall provide, as required, protection for existing facilities. Protection shall protect

ongoing University operations, personnel, and property from dust, dirt, noise, fumes, and danger from construction operations.

E. Grass located within the boundaries of the construction site shall be mowed for the duration of

the project. F. The General Prime Contractor shall, upon completion of the Work and after removal of trailers,

materials, and equipments, restore the site to the original condition.


1.13 MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS A. Immediately upon beginning of the Work, the Lead Prime Contractor shall provide a location,

easily accessible to all employees and visitors, for displaying all required Equal Employment Opportunity, Labor & Industry, OSHA, and similar documents and posters.

B. Contractors will be required to use the access and haul routes shown on the plans, unless

otherwise permitted in writing by the University. When access or haul routes are not designated on the plans, Contractors must obtain approval from the University for any routes on campus that they intend to use.

C. During construction the Lead Prime Contractor shall provide access and temporarily relocated

roads and sidewalks as necessary to maintain vehicle and personnel traffic. D. The Lead Prime Contractor shall maintain the Project site free of waste materials and debris

on a daily basis. The University reserves the right to require substantial clean-up of the project site, during the course of the work, for any scheduled special events at no additional increase in Contract cost or time.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 015000B

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 016000 – Product Requirements KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 016000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Section are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in

the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry.

B. Products are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the Project

or taken from previously-purchased stock. Within this Section, the term Product shall include material, equipment, system, and terms of similar intent.

C. Named Products are items identified by a manufacturer's product name, including make and

model designation, and indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.

D. Foreign Products are distinguished from Domestic Products, except where defined in the

General Conditions. E. Materials are Products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined, or

otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work. F. Equipment is a Product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that

requires service connections such as wiring or piping, to be incorporated into or as part of the Work.

1.02 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. The Contractor shall provide Products that meet or exceed the quality specified in the Contract

Documents, and that are new, undamaged, and unused at the time of installation, unless otherwise allowed. The Contractor shall produce, upon request, evidence supporting the source of materials used in the Work.

B. Products shall be provided complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other

devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. C. Standard Products, or types of standard Products, that have been produced and used

successfully in similar situations on other projects, shall be provided, when available. D. To the fullest extent possible, Products of the same kind from a single source shall be provided. E. When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more Products for use on

the Project, the Product selected shall be compatible with Products previously selected, even if previously-selected Products were also options.

1. Each Separate Prime Contractor is responsible for providing Products that are compatible

and coordinated with Products of other Separate Prime Contractors.


2. If a dispute arises between Separate Prime Contractors over concurrently-selected and incompatible Products, the University will determine which Products shall be retained and which Products must be replaced.

F. Product Specification Types.

1. Proprietary Specification: Where the Contract Documents specifically state that a single Product, manufacturer, and applicable model number has been approved as a proprietary item by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor shall provide only that Product. No substitution will be permitted.

2. Non-Proprietary Specification: Where the Contract Documents identify two or more

Products, listing the manufacturers and applicable model numbers, the Contractor shall provide one of those named Products, unless a Product substitution has been approved and issued as an addendum during the bidding period or under the procedures listed in Section 016200, Product Options.

3. Design Specification: Where the Contract Documents describe a Product, listing exact

physical characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, the Contractor shall provide a Product that provides the required characteristics and which otherwise complies with the Contract requirements.

4. Performance Specification: Where the Contract Documents describe performance

requirements for a Product, the Contractor shall provide a Product that meets or exceeds the required performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated, and which otherwise complies with the Contract requirements.

5. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where the Contract Documents

only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, the Contractor shall provide a Product that complies with those requirements, and which otherwise complies with the Contract requirements.

G. Visual Criteria.

1. Where the Contract Documents require matching an established sample, the University's

decision will be final as to whether a proposed Product satisfactorily matches the sample. 2. Where there is no Product available in the specified category that satisfactorily matches

the sample and which complies with other Contract requirements, the Contractor shall comply with procedures listed in Section 016200, Product Options, for selection of a substitute Product.

H. Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's

standard colors, patterns, textures...," or a similar phrase, the Contractor shall select a Product and manufacturer that complies with other Contract requirements. The University will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected.

I. Refer to the Contract Special Requirements for Foreign Product Limitations.

1.03 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS

A. Products shall be delivered, stored, and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, or loss, including theft.


B. Delivery shall be scheduled to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

C. The University will not accept delivery of Products on behalf of the Contractor. D. Delivery shall be coordinated with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items

that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, or other losses.

E. Products shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other

packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

F. Products shall be inspected upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents

and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. Damaged and defective items shall be rejected.

G. Products shall be stored at the site in a manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement

of quantity or counting of units. H. Heavy materials shall be stored away from the Project structure in a manner that will not

endanger the supporting construction. I. Products subject to damage by the elements shall be stored above ground and under cover or

in a weather-tight enclosure with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Temperature and humidity shall be maintained within a range required by the manufacturer's instructions.

1.04 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS

A. The Contractor shall inspect both the substrate and conditions under which work is performed.

Installation shall not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Measurements and dimensions shall be verified and re-checked before starting each installation. C. Products shall be installed in a manner that complies with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations for the applications indicated. If manufacturer's instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in the Contract Documents, the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations shall take precedence.

D. Where mounting heights are not indicated, individual Products shall be installed at standard

mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Questionable mounting height decisions shall be referred to the University for final decision.

E. Products shall be anchored securely in place, and shall be accurately located and aligned with

other Work. Attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing work shall be used. Work shall be secured true to line and level, and there shall be allowances for expansion and building movement.

F. Joint widths in exposed work shall be uniform, and shall be arranged to obtain the best visual

effect. Questionable choices shall be referred to the University for final decision. G. Products shall be installed during weather conditions and project status that will ensure the best

possible results. Each part of the completed construction shall be isolated from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.


H. The use of temporary enclosures shall be coordinated with required inspections and tests to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

I. Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned and protected as necessary to ensure freedom from

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. J. Name Plates.

1. Except for required labels and operating data, manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks shall not be attached or imprinted on surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or from the exterior.

2. Required product labels and stamps shall be located on a concealed surface. When

required for observation after installation, required labels and stamps shall be located on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

3. A permanent nameplate shall be provided on each item of service-connected or power-

operated equipment. The nameplate shall be located on an easily-accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain at least the following information and other essential operating data, as applicable:

a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 016200 - Product Options KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 016200

PRODUCT OPTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. The Definitions used throughout this Section are not intended to change or modify the meaning

of other terms used elsewhere throughout the Contract. B. Products shall include products, materials, equipment, or methods of construction. C. Request for Substitution is a proposal made by the Contractor after the award of the Contract for

changes in Products required by Contract Documents. D. The following are not considered to be Substitutions that are subject to this Section:

1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period. If accepted, those substitutions will be published in an addendum to the solicitation and considered to be included in the Contract Documents. Those substitutions are not subject to the requirements of this Section.

2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the University after award of the Contract. 3. Specified options of Products included as such in the Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders

issued by governing authorities. 1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION

A. Requests for Substitution shall use the procedures for Submittals. Specification Section

013300, Submittal Procedures, specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

B. Requests for Substitution should be made in a timely manner. The Request should allow

reasonable time for the University to review and make a decision on the Substitution without impacting the progress of the Work.

C. The Request for Substitution should identify the Product to be replaced, with the specific Technical Specification Section and/or Drawing numbers. Supporting documentation should be provided which shows compliance with the requirements for Substitutions and the following information, as appropriate:

1. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation

procedures. 2. Samples, where applicable or requested. 3. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed Substitution with those of the

Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, durability, performance, and visual effect.


4. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed, including by other Separate Prime Contractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed Substitution.

5. A statement indicating the Substitution’s effect on the Construction Schedule compared to

the schedule without approval of the Substitution, including the effect, if any, of the Substitution on overall Contract Time.

6. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any, in the Contract Price. 7. Certification by the Contractor, including the following:

a. Certification and evidence that the proposed Substitution is equal to or better than, in every significant respect, the item required by the Contract Documents;

b. Certification and evidence that the proposed Substitution will perform adequately in the

application indicated; and c. Waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary

if the Substitution fails to perform adequately. D. In all cases, the Contractor must provide a Substitution that meets any stated salient features or

performance criteria listed in the Technical Specifications. 1.03 ACTIONS ON REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION

A. A Request for Substitution which is incomplete or does not comply with the requirements in

paragraph 1.02 above will be returned to the Contractor without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements.

B. If a decision on the use of a proposed Substitution cannot be made in a timely manner, the

Contractor shall use the specified Product.

1.04 FACTORS FOR CONSIDERATION OF A SUBSTITUTION

A. The Contractor's Request for Substitution will be reviewed by the University and may be considered favorably if all of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the University.

1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Time are not

required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The Request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted.

B. In addition to the conditions in paragraph 1.04 A. above, at least one of the following conditions

must also be satisfied, as determined by the University.

1. The specified Product cannot be provided without impact to the Contract Time. The proposed Substitution will not be considered if the Product cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

2. The specified Product cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the

proposed Substitution can be approved.


3. The specified Product cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with the rest of the Work and its materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed Substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

4. The specified Product cannot be coordinated with the rest of the Work and its materials, and

where the Contractor certifies that the proposed Substitution can be coordinated. 5. The specified Product cannot be warranted as required by the Contract Documents, or the

specified Product adversely affects a warranty or another Product or system, and the Contractor certifies that the proposed Substitution can fulfill the required warranty requirements.

6. The Substitution results in a substantial advantage to the University, in terms of cost, time,

energy conservation, or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities that the University may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the University may include additional compensation to the Professional for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the University or other Separate Prime Contractors, and similar considerations.

C. The University will make a determination if the Substitution can be coordinated with all other

Separate Prime Contractors. Where a proposed Substitution involves more than one Separate Prime Contractor, the Contractor proposing the Substitution shall coordinate the Work with the other Separate Prime Contractors involved, to provide uniformity and consistency, and to assure compatibility of products.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 017123 - Field Engineering KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 017123

FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. To perform any Land Surveying required for the Project, the General Construction Contractor

shall engage a Professional Land Surveyor registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. If there is no General Construction Contractor, the Lead Prime Contractor shall have the responsibility.

B. To perform any Engineering Land Surveys required for the Project, the General Construction

Contractor shall engage either a Professional Land Surveyor registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, or a Professional Engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. If a Professional Engineer is to be used, he shall be competent in Engineering Land Surveys, and the Contractor shall provide to the University evidence of that competence. If there is no General Construction Contractor, the Lead Prime Contractor shall have the responsibility.

C. To perform other field engineering services as required or specified, each Separate Prime

Contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer registered in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. The Professional Engineer shall be of the discipline required or specified, and shall be competent in the services required or specified. The Contractor shall provide to the University evidence of the Professional Engineer’s competence.

1.02 SURVEY CONTROL DATA

A. The Contract Documents will identify existing reference points, such as benchmarks, control

points, and property line corner stakes. If it is missing, the University will provide this data. B. Before proceeding to layout the work, the Contractor shall verify layout information shown on

the drawings in relation to the property survey and existing reference points. The Contractor shall locate and protect existing reference points.

C. Permanent reference points shall be preserved during construction. If necessary in the

prosecution of the work, relocations and replacements shall be executed in accordance with the following requirements.

1. Permanent reference points shall not be changed or relocated without prior written

approval from the University. 2. Requests to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or

locations shall be made in a timely manner so as not to impact the Work. 3. Lost or destroyed permanent reference points shall be promptly reported. Replacements

shall be based on the original survey reference points. D. The Contractor shall establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent reference points on

the site, referenced to data established by original survey reference points. Record of the reference points shall be established and recorded on project record documents with horizontal and vertical data.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 017123 - Field Engineering KUFR-0033 Page 2 of 2

1.03 SURVEY PROCEDURES

A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, the Contractor shall establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the Project.

1. For site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill, and topsoil placement,

and utility slopes and invert elevations, the Contractor shall locate and lay out the Work by instrumentation and similar appropriate means.

2. For building work, the Contractor shall locate and lay out, by instrumentation and similar

appropriate means, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels, control lines, and any reference points required for mechanical, plumbing, and electrical work.

3. Required dimensions shall be calculated and measured within indicated or recognized

tolerances. Scaled drawings should not be measured to determine dimensions. 4. As construction proceeds, every major element shall be checked for line, level, and plumb. 5. Other Separate Prime Contractors and entities engaged in the Work shall be advised of

reference points and marked lines and levels provided.

B. The Contractor shall maintain a surveyor's log of control and other field survey work. The log shall be made available for reference to the University and other Separate Prime Contractors and appropriate entities.

C. The University shall be advised when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized

tolerances are detected. The surveyor’s log shall record deviations from required lines and levels. Project record drawings shall indicate record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.

1.04 CERTIFICATION OF SURVEY

At the completion of the Project, the Contractor shall submit to the University the following items:

A. A certificate signed by the Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer certifying that the location and elevation of the Work complies with the Contract Documents

B. A record of work performed and record survey data

1.05 UTILITIES

A. The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated on the

Contract Documents as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, the Contractor shall investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction, and the locations and invert elevations at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water service piping.

B. The Contractor shall furnish all information necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing

structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other appurtenances located in or affected by the Work. The Contractor shall coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.


_______________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 017329 - Cutting and Patching KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 017329

CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Cutting and patching shall be the responsibility of the Separate Prime Contractor whose work

requires the cutting and patching. The Contractor shall employ competent individuals, approved by the University, to perform the cutting and patching.

B. If the cutting of openings into newly constructed walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings is required

due to lack of coordination between Separate Prime Contractors, or due to ill-timed or defective work by one or more Separate Prime Contractors, the Separate Prime Contractor primarily responsible for the lack of coordination or the ill-timed or defective work shall bear all costs involved in cutting and patching. The University may direct the General Construction Contractor to actually perform the cutting and patching at the expense of the responsible Separate Prime Contractor.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. The University, at their discretion, may require each Separate Prime Contractor to submit a

cutting and patching plan for all, or a portion of, the cutting and patching work to be performed. As part of the plan submittal, the University may require the submission to include detailed descriptions of the procedures and the methods to be used.

B. When a cutting and patching plan is required to be approved prior to the work being performed, the Contractor shall submit the plan well in advance of the work so as to allow adequate time for review and approval without delaying the project schedule. The submittal shall include the following, as applicable.

1. A description of the limits of cutting and patching required, how it is to be performed, and why

it cannot be avoided. 2. A description of the anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction, including

changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in the building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. A listing of products to be used and firms or entities that will perform work. 4. Identification of the dates when cutting and patching is to be performed. 5. Identification of any utilities that will be distributed or affected, including those that will be

relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service, and an indication of how long service will be disrupted.


6. Where the plan involves cutting and patching of structural elements as listed in paragraph 1.09, the plan will include details for all proposed structural elements being used to provide reinforcement of the opening and maintain the structural integrity of the existing element being disturbed. This may include connection details, professional engineering calculations, sizes, and any other information required by the University or its Design Professional, to show how reinforcement is integrated with the original structure and maintains structural integrity. As the engineer of record, the University Design Professional shall have final approval of all methods used.

C. Approval by the University to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive the right of the

University to later require complete removal and replacement of any part of the work found to be unsatisfactory.

1.03 MATERIALS

A. Materials used shall be identical to existing materials. B. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved,

materials used shall match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect.

C. All materials used shall have installed performance equal or greater than that of existing

materials. D. All materials used shall be compatible with adjacent existing materials and shall have no

deleterious effect on the existing construction. 1.04 INSPECTION

A. Before cutting existing surfaces, the Contractor shall examine surfaces to be cut and patched

and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. B. The Contractor shall avoid any unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions, and if unsafe or unsatisfactory

conditions are encountered, corrective action shall be taken before proceeding.

1.05 PREPARATION

A. Work to be cut shall be provided with temporary support. B. Existing construction shall be protected during cutting and patching to prevent damage by cutting

and patching operations. C. Protection from adverse weather conditions shall be provided for portions of the project that might

be exposed during cutting and patching operations. D. Cutting and patching operations shall be conducted so as to avoid interference with use of

adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. E. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or

ductwork that serve the facility and are scheduled to be removed or relocated, until provisions have been made for bypass installations.


1.06 PERFORMANCE, GENERAL

A. Skilled workmen shall be employed to perform cutting and patching. B. Cutting and patching shall be undertaken at the earliest feasible time and completed without

delay. C. Cutting, fitting, and patching for installation of components or the performance of other

construction activities shall be performed so as to restore surfaces to their original condition. D. Openings shall be temporarily covered when not in use. E. Where excavating and backfilling are required, the Contractor shall comply with requirements of

applicable sections of the Technical Specifications. F. For utility services shown or required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, the Contractor

shall ensure the utility service is shut off or not active prior to performing any work on the system. If the utility service requires continued operation during the Work, the Contractor shall by-pass the service before cutting service pipe or conduit. Any pipe or conduit that is to remain shall be sealed with a cap, valve, or plug to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter.

1.07 PERFORMANCE, CUTTING

A. Cutting of existing construction shall be performed using methods least likely to damage elements

to be retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, proposed procedures shall be reviewed with the original installer and shall comply with the original installer's recommendations.

B. Where cutting is required, hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding shall be

used. Hammering and chopping shall not be done. Holes and slots shall be cut neatly to the size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces.

C. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cutting or drilling shall be done from the exposed or

finished side into concealed surfaces. D. A cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or diamond core drill shall be used to cut through

concrete and masonry.

1.08 PERFORMANCE, PATCHING

A. Patching shall be performed with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Patching shall meet specified tolerances.

B. Where feasible, patched areas shall be inspected and tested to demonstrate integrity of the

installation. C. Exposed finishes of patched areas shall be restored, and finished restoration shall be extended

into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

D. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, the final paint coat shall be extended over

entire wall plane (wall corner to corner) containing the patch. The patched area itself shall receive a primer and second coat.


E. Where the removal of walls or partitions extends from the new space into another existing space, the floor and wall surfaces in the new space shall be patched and repaired to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. If uniform color and appearance cannot be achieved, the existing floor and wall coverings in the existing space shall be removed and replaced with new materials.

F. Existing ceilings shall be patched, repaired, or re-hung as necessary to provide an even plane

surface of uniform appearance. G. All patching of surfaces to receive finishes shall be coordinated with the Contractor responsible

for installing finish components or materials. Patching of these surfaces shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Contractor that will be applying the finish materials or components and so as not to require any excessive or undue prep work by said Contractor.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Structural elements shall not receive any cutting and patching that would reduce their load-

carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio without prior approval of the University as indicated in paragraph 1.02. Structural elements include: 1. Foundation construction. 2. Bearing and retaining walls. 3. Structural concrete. 4. Structural steel. 5. Lintels. 6. Structural decking. 7. Stair systems. 8. Miscellaneous structural metals. 9. Exterior curtain wall construction. 10. Equipment supports. 11. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 12. Structural systems of Special Construction in the Technical Specifications. 13. Any item not listed that is deemed to be a structural element by the University design Professional.

B. Safety-related components and operating elements shall not receive cutting and patching in a

manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, result in increased maintenance, or result in decreased operational life or safety. For those components and elements covered by a warranty, the Contractor shall coordinate cutting and patching with the warranting party, and the cutting and patching shall not void the warranty. Safety-related components and operating elements include: 1. Shoring, bracing, and sheeting. 2. Primary operational systems and equipment. 3. Air or smoke barriers. 4. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 5. Membranes and flashings. 6. Roofing systems and membranes. 7. Fire protection systems. 8. Noise and vibration control elements and systems. 9. Control systems. 10. Communication systems. 11. Conveying systems. 12. Electrical wiring systems. 13. Special Construction specified in the Technical Specifications.


C. Visually-exposed components and construction that is exposed on the exterior or exposed in occupied spaces shall not receive cutting and patching in a manner that will reduce the building's aesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. If possible, the original installer or fabricator shall be retained to cut and patch the following categories of exposed work: 1. Processed concrete finishes. 2. Ornamental metal. 3. Matched-veneer woodwork. 4. Window wall system. 5. Stucco and ornamental plaster. 6. Acoustical ceilings. 7. Carpeting. 8. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.

If it is not possible to engage the original installer or fabricator, another recognized, experienced, and specialized firm shall be engaged. For those components and construction covered by a warranty, the Contractor shall coordinate cutting and patching with the warranting party, and the cutting and patching shall not void the warranty.

1.10 CLEANING AND RESTORATION

A. Thorough cleaning shall be performed for areas and spaces where cutting and patching is

performed or used as access. B. Paint, mortar, oils, putty, and items of similar nature shall be completely removed. C. Piping, conduit, and similar features shall be thoroughly cleaned before painting or other finishing

is applied. D. Pipe covering and insulation damaged incidental to cutting and patching shall be restored to its

original condition. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 017329

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 017700 – Closeout Procedures KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 017700

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION INSPECTION

A. Substantial Completion is when the Work is sufficiently completed in accordance with the

Contract and certified by the University, as modified by change orders, so that the project can be used, occupied, or operated for its intended use. In no event shall a project be certified as substantially complete until at least ninety percent (90%) of the Work on the project is complete. The University reserves, at its sole discretion, the right to certify substantial completion for portions of the project.

B. Each Separate Prime Contractor is responsible for requesting and executing a Substantial

Completion inspection. Maximum coordination between the various Separate Prime Contractors is strongly encouraged for the execution of Substantial Completion inspections.

C. Before a Substantial Completion inspection can be held, the following items shall have been

completed by the Contactor and/or been submitted to the University. 1. Completion of start-up, testing, and commissioning checks of equipment and systems. 2. Completion of user training. 3. Completion of Contract Work. 4. Completion of final cleaning. 5. Removal of temporary protection and facilities. 6. Removal of construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements. 7. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. 8. Change to permanent locks, and submission of keys. 9. Submission of testing, test and balance, and commissioning reports. 10. Submission of Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Instructions. 11. Submission of Record Documents. 12. Submission of warranty documents and warranty plan. 13. Submission of spare parts, tools, extra stock, and similar required items. 14. Submission of final meter readings, and measured record of stored fuel(s) (if any). 15. Submission of or coordination for Occupancy permits (UCC). 16. Submission of or coordination for other permits and approvals (boiler inspection, etc.).

D. The Contractor shall submit to the University a written request for a Substantial Completion

inspection. The request shall certify that the items required for a Substantial Completion inspection (paragraph 1.01 C.) have been completed, or shall identify when they will be completed or explain reasons why items will not be complete. The request shall be submitted at least seven (7) days prior to the requested date for the inspection, unless otherwise specified or agreed upon.

E. Within seven (7) days of receipt of a request for a Substantial Completion inspection, unless

otherwise specified or agreed upon, the University will either proceed with the inspection, schedule the inspection to take place within a reasonable period of time, or advise the Contractor of requirements that must be met before the Project can be considered ready for a Substantial Completion inspection.


F. Upon inspection, the University will either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion, advise the Contractor of items that must be completed or corrected before the Certificate will be issued, or advise the Contractor that another Substantial Completion inspection must be requested and take place.

1.02 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL COMPLETION INSPECTION

A. Final Completion is that point in the Contract at which all Work on the Project is complete, and

all other Contract requirements have been completed. Final Completion may or may not involve an inspection.

B. Each Separate Prime Contractor is responsible for requesting Final Completion. Coordination

between the various Separate Prime Contractors is encouraged for the execution of any Final Completion inspections that may be required.

C. Before the Contractor can request Final Completion, the following items shall have been

completed by the Contactor and/or been submitted to the University.

1. Completion of punchlist items. 2. Completion of all items required for Substantial Completion (paragraph 1.01). 3. Completion of any and all other Contract requirements.

D. The Contractor shall submit to the University a written request for Final Completion. The

request shall certify that the items required for Final Completion (paragraph 1.02 C.) have been completed. If an inspection is required, the request shall be submitted at least seven (7) days prior to the requested date for the inspection.

E. Upon receipt of a request for Final Completion, the University will either issue the Certificate of

Final Completion or advise the Contractor of requirements that must be met before the Project can be considered ready for Final Completion.

F. When the University issues the Certificate of Final Completion, the Final Application for

Payment can be processed. 1.03 FINAL CLEANING AND PREPARATION OF THE FACILITY

A. The following paragraphs address final cleaning and preparation generally applicable to most

Contracts. Additional or specific requirements applicable to this Contract may be included in Section 011000, Summary, in specific Technical Specification sections, or in a dedicated Section on Final Cleaning and Preparation.

B. Cleaning.

1. The Contractor shall employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Workers shall be supervised.

2. Each surface, equipment, or unit shall be cleaned to the condition expected in a normal,

commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. 3. Transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows, shall be cleaned.

Glazing compound and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials shall be removed. Chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials shall be replaced. Windows and two-sided glass shall be cleaned on both sides.


4. Exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes shall be cleaned to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Reflective surfaces shall be restored to their original reflective condition. Concrete floors shall be broom clean. Finished floors shall be clean wet-mopped. Carpeted surfaces shall be vacuumed.

5. Surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be wiped to remove excess

lubrication and other substances. Plumbing fixtures shall be cleaned to a sanitary condition. Light fixtures, lamps, switches, and outlet plates shall be cleaned. Construction bulbs shall be replaced with new bulbs.

6. The site, including landscape development areas, shall be cleaned of rubbish, litter, and

other foreign substances. Paved areas shall be broom clean, and all stains, spills, and other foreign deposits shall be removed. Grounds that are neither paved nor planted shall be raked to a smooth even-textured surface.

7. Debris shall be removed from roofs, drainage systems, gutters, and downspouts. 8. The inside of cabinets and other concealed areas shall be cleaned. 9. Labels that are not permanent labels shall be removed. 10. In all cases the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and

preparation, and with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning.

C. Other Preparation.

1. Filters of operating equipment shall be replaced. Strainers of operating equipment and/or

systems shall be cleaned. Ducts, blowers, coils, and similar components shall be cleaned if the system was operated during construction without filters.

2. The Contractor shall engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection, and

rid the Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. 3. The Contractor shall remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of

the Work, workers, and the general public during construction. 4. Waste or excess materials and debris shall be removed from the site and disposed of in a

lawful manner. Such materials shall not be burned, and shall not be buried on University property. Volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials shall not be discharged into drainage systems or onto or into the ground.

5. The Contractor shall arrange with the University for disposition of excess materials of value

that remain after completion of Work and become University property. 1.04 RECORD DOCUMENTS

See Specification Section 017839, Project Record Documents.

1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

See Specification Section 017823, Operation and Maintenance Data.


1.06 USER TRAINING

A. The following subparagraphs address general User Training requirements. The requirements for User Training and any additional or specific requirements related to that User Training, is identified and included in specific Technical Specification Sections.

B. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall arrange for and perform User Training for any equipment

or system installed by that Contractor. Where equipment and systems involve more than one Separate Prime Contractor, the University will designate one Contractor as the lead for the Training. The Lead shall coordinate with the other Separate Prime Contractors involved, and all Contractors shall participate in the Training.

C. User Training shall provide to the University’s operating and maintenance personnel instruction

in proper operation and maintenance or that equipment or system. D. User Training shall be held at mutually agreed upon times and locations. Unless impossible or

impractical, Training should be held at the location of the equipment or the system. E. For equipment or systems that require seasonal operation, separate Training sessions may be

required at appropriate times. F. The Contractor shall engage for the Training instructors who are thoroughly trained and

experienced in the operation and maintenance of the equipment or system involved. The instructors should come from the installers or from the manufacturer.

G. Draft Operating and Maintenance Manuals shall be available for User Training, and shall be

used as the basis of the Training. H. The Contractor shall videotape or digitally record the User Training, in a format suitable to the

University. One (1) copy shall be provided with the Operating and Maintenance Manual. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 017700

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 017823 - Operation and Maintenance Data KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 017823

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 TYPES OF O&M MANUALS

A. Equipment and Systems Manuals shall be provided for plumbing, HVAC, controls, electrical,

fire protection, fire alarm, elevators, and special operating equipment and systems. B. Architectural Products Manuals shall be provided for care and maintenance of architectural

products, including applied materials and finishes. C. Moisture Protection and Weather-Exposed Products Manuals shall be provided for instructions

on inspection, maintenance and repair of products exposed to the weather or designed for moisture-protection purposes.

D. General Products Manuals shall be provided for data and maintenance instructions for those

products that are not assigned to one of the other manuals defined in this section. E. The specific requirements for Manuals are identified in the Technical Specifications.

1.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall prepare Manuals for its own installations. For joint

installations by the General Construction Contractor and another Separate Prime Contractor, the General Construction Contractor shall prepare and submit the Manuals. For joint installations by more than one Separate Prime Contractor other than the General Construction Contractor, the Contractor who is the principal source of information shall prepare and submit the Manuals. In the case of disagreement about which Contractor is the principal source, the University will make a determination.

B. Unless otherwise approved or directed by the University, each Prime Contractor shall

consolidate all Manuals of the different types (types identified in paragraph 1.01) into a single Manual and submittal. The Manual may have more than one volume, depending on the complexity of the system(s) or product(s).

C. For preparation of Manuals, the Contractor shall use personnel thoroughly trained and

experienced in operating and maintenance of the equipment or system involved. Where written instructions are required, the Contractor shall use personnel skilled in technical writing to the extent necessary for communication of essential data. Where drawings or diagrams are required, the Contractor shall use draftsman capable of preparing drawings clearly in an understandable format.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manuals shall be submitted prior to Substantial Completion. In certain circumstances, the

University may allow separate Manuals to be submitted for different equipment, systems, products, or components as soon as that equipment, system, product, or component involved is installed, and tested if appropriate, and determined to be acceptable by the University.


B. The Contractor shall submit one (1) Draft O&M Manual to the University. After review by the University and/or the Professional, the University will return the Manual with any corrections to be made. The Contractor shall make necessary corrections and submit the required number, as identified below, or another number specified by the University, of Final O&M Manuals to the University.

1. Equipment and Systems Manuals: one (1) hard copy, and one (1) electronic copy.

2. Architectural Products Manuals: one (1) hard copy, and one (1) electronic copy.

3. Moisture Protection and Weather-Exposed Products Manuals: one (1) hard copy, and one

(1) electronic copy.

4. General Products Manuals: one (1) hard copy, and one (1) electronic copy. C. For equipment or systems requiring User Training, a Draft O&M Manual for that equipment or

system shall have been complete and shall be provided at the Training.

1.04 O&M MANUAL ORGANIZATION A. Manuals shall be prepared in the form of an instructional manual for use by University operating

and maintenance personnel.

B. The Electronic manual must be in PDF format only. It must include a table of contents, and each item/manual submitted within the O&M manual shall be a separate and distinct document referenced in the table of contents as it is with the hard copy. The university will not accept an electronic manual that has been scanned so that all information is combined into a single document.

C. Hard copy manuals shall be prepared in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable, 3-ring, vinyl-

covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to receive 8-1/2" by 11" paper. The binder spine shall provide a clear plastic sleeve to hold labels identifying the contents. The inside cover of the binder shall provide a pocket to receive additional or folded sheets.

D. When information for the Manuals is of significant volume, Manuals shall be organized into a

set of manageable-sized binders. Where two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data, the data shall be compiled in binders in related groupings. The Project Manual table of contents shall be used as a guide. Instructions for equipment that are similar and/or part of the same or related systems shall be in a single binder, if at all possible. Where necessary, binders shall be cross-referenced to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of the piece of equipment or system.

E. Each binder shall be identified on the front and on the spine with the printed title "OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," the Project name, and the subject matter covered. With multiple-volume sets of manuals, the identification shall indicate the volume number of each binder.

F. When a binder is organized into separate sections for different equipment, systems, products,

or components, heavy paper dividers with celluloid tabs shall be used to separate sections. The tabs shall indicate the section contents. On the divider, a typed description of the product, and major parts of equipment included, shall be provided.

G. Protective transparent plastic jackets designed to enclose diagnostic software shall be provided

for computerized electronic equipment.


1.05 O&M MANUAL CONTENT A. At a minimum, each Manual shall contain the following:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. General information. 4. Copies of each warranty, bond, and/or service contract issued (as applicable).

B. Additionally, each Manual shall contain a combination of the following items necessary to adequately describe and detail the installation of the product and detail its operation and maintenance: 1. Copies of product data. 2. Drawings. 3. Written text.

C. The title page should be provided in a transparent plastic envelope as the first sheet of each Manual. It should provide the following information: 1. Subject matter covered by the Manual. 2. Contract number and name. 3. Date of submittal. 4. Name, address, and telephone number of the Contractor. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of the Professional for the Project.

D. A table of contents shall be provided after the title page. If there are multiple binders for a Manual, a comprehensive table of contents for all binders should be provided in each binder. The table of contents should be typewritten. The table of contents should be arranged systematically according to the Project Manual format, and should include each product identified by product name or other appropriate means.

E. A general information section shall be provided immediately following the table of contents. This section should list each product included in the Manual, identified by product name. With each product, the list should include the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the following:

1. The subcontractor or installer. 2. The maintenance contractor (if applicable). 3. A local source for replacement parts.

F. Product data should be in the form of manufacturer's standard printed data. Only those sheets

pertinent to the part or product installed should be included. Each sheet should be marked to identify the part(s) or product(s) included in the Work.

G. Drawings, shop drawings, or diagrams, as required, should supplement manufacturer's printed

data, to illustrate the relationship between component parts of equipment or systems, or to provide control or flow diagrams.

1. Drawings should be provided with reinforced punched binder tabs and bound-in with the

text. Oversized drawings should be folded to the same size as the text pages so they can be used as a fold-out. For drawings too large to be used practically as a fold out, drawings should be neatly folded and placed in the front or rear pocket of the binder. For drawings provided in the front or rear binder pocket, a typewritten page should be included both in the binder and with the drawings as a cross reference.


2. Record Drawings shall not be used as part of O&M Manuals. H. Written text shall be provided when product data is not available and information is necessary

for proper operation and maintenance, when drawings need supplemental explanation for proper operation and maintenance, and/or when additional information is necessary to supplement data included in the Manual. Written text should be organized in a consistent format, outlined as appropriate, and sequenced logical under separate headings, as appropriate.

I. A copy of each applicable warranty, equipment performance bond or certification, and service

contract shall be provided. Included should be written data outlining procedures to be followed in the event of equipment or system failure, and written data identifying the circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of the warranty or bond.

J. Equipment and Systems Manuals shall contain, in addition to those items identified in

paragraph 1.05, for each piece of equipment or system, the following items. 1. A complete description of each unit and related component parts, to include:

a. Manufacturer’s name, model number, and serial number. b. Equipment or system function. c. Operating characteristics. d. Limiting conditions. e. Performance curves. f. Engineering data and tests. g. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts (spare parts list).

2. For each component part or piece of equipment, printed operating and maintenance

instructions, assembly drawings and wiring diagrams required for maintenance, and a list of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

3. Detailed essential maintenance procedures, including those for routine operations, trouble-

shooting guide, disassembly, repair and reassembly, alignment, adjusting, and checking.

4. Detailed operating procedures, including:

a. Start-up procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulations and control procedures. e. Instructions on stopping. f. Shut-down and emergency instructions. g. Summer and winter operating instructions. h. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. i. Special operating instructions, including testing procedures.

5. Detailed schedule of routine servicing and lubrication requirements, including a list of

required lubricants for equipment with moving parts. 6. For systems requiring controls, a description of the sequence of operation and as-installed

control diagrams by the control manufacturer. 7. Any Coordination Drawings. 8. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve.


9. For electrical and electronic systems, complete circuit directories of panel boards, including electric service, controls, and communication.

K. Architectural Products Manuals shall contain, in addition to those items identified in paragraph

1.05, the following items.

1. Manufacturer's Data, including: a. Manufacturer's catalog number. b. Size. c. Material composition. d. Color. e. Texture. f. Reordering information for specially-manufactured products.

2. Care and maintenance instructions, including:

a. Manufacturer's recommendations for types of cleaning agents to be used and methods

of cleaning. b. Information regarding cleaning agents and methods that could prove detrimental to the

product. c. Manufacturer's recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

L. Moisture Protection and Weather-Exposed Products Manuals shall contain, in addition to those

items identified in paragraph 1.05, Manufacturer's Data which includes: 1. Applicable standards. 2. Chemical composition. 3. Installation details. 4. Inspection procedures. 5. Maintenance information. 6. Repair procedures.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 017836 - Warranties KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 017836

WARRANTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. Within this Section, the term Warranty shall be used to mean warranties of various types,

equipment performance certifications, and similar performance guarantees. B. Within this Section, the term Product shall be used to mean equipment, systems, products,

components, and other similar aspects of the Work that have a manufacturer’s or installer’s warranty.

1.02 GENERAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. Basic construction warranty of work is outlined in the General Conditions of the Contract. B. Requirements for a Maintenance Bond, if required, were outlined in the Invitation for Bids. C. Specific Product warranties are identified in the various Technical Specification sections. D. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall provide the basic construction warranty, shall provide

his own Maintenance Bond, if required, and shall be responsible for any required Product warranties, related to his own Contract.

E. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor

of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.

F. Written warranties made to the University are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not

limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under law. Warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which the University can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies as established by the Uniform Commercial Code (UCC).

G. The University reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selections to products with

warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. H. Where a special warranty is required on the Work or part of the Work, the University reserves

the right to refuse to accept the Work until the responsible entities countersign such warranty. I. Upon determination by the University that Work covered by a warranty has failed, the

Contractor shall replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of Contract. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the University benefits from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

J. When correcting warranted Work that has failed, the Contractor shall remove and replace other

Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.


K. When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, the warranty shall be reinstated by the Contractor by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

L. In the event the Contractor fails to commence and diligently pursue any warranty work required,

the University may have the work performed by others, and after completion of the work, charge the cost of the work, and any reasonable and necessary expenses associated with the work incurred by the University, to the Contractor. In the event sufficient funds are not remaining in the Contract to cover the cost and expenses incurred, the University will have the right to recoup expenses by other legal means.

1.03 WARRANTY PERIODS

Warranties shall commence on the Substantial Completion Date, unless one of the following apply.

A. The Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a warranty commencement date, other than the Substantial Completion Date, for certain Work or portions of Work.

B. By separate agreement between the Contractor and the University, a designated and

completed portion of the Work is occupied or used by the University during the construction period, in which case any warranty related to that Work or portions of the Work shall commence when the occupancy or use begins.

1.04 SUBMITTAL OF PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Written product warranties shall be submitted to the University within fifteen (15) days of

Substantial Completion. If another date is specified per paragraph 1.03 above, written warranties shall be submitted within fifteen (15) days of that other date.

B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or by the Contractor and

a subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer, the Contractor shall prepare a written document for execution by the required parties that contains appropriate terms and identification. A draft of the written document shall be submitted to the University for acceptance prior to final execution.

C. When Operating and Maintenance Manuals are required for warranted construction, an

additional copy of each required warranty shall be provided, as necessary, with each Operating and Maintenance Manual.

1.05 SUBMITTAL OF WARRANTY PLAN

A. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall prepare and submit a Warranty Plan which outlines the

responsibilities and procedures to address warranty issues arising from the Contract and the Work. Each Separate Prime Contractor’s Warranty Plan shall include information relative to his own portion of the Work and to product warranties related to his own Contract.

B. Prior to Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet with the University to develop a

mutual understanding with respect to the requirements of the Warranty Plan. Communication procedures for notification of construction warranty defects, priorities with respect to the type of defect, reasonable time required for Contractor response, and other details deemed necessary by the University for the execution of the warranty shall be established and reviewed at this meeting. Based on the information provided at the meeting, the Contractor shall submit to the University a written Warranty Plan.

C. The Warranty Plan shall generally include all information required to assure that the University

receives all warranties to which it is entitled and can take action with respect to calls against the warranties. The Plan shall be in sufficient detail to render it suitable for use by future


University operations and maintenance personnel, and tailored as appropriate for the specific Contract.

D. The Warranty Plan shall include the following information.

1. The Plan shall identify key personnel associated with the warranty process, to include their specific roles and responsibilities, and their telephone numbers and other means of contact. Key personnel should be from within the organizations of the Contractor, subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers involved. The Contractor may choose to furnish the name, telephone number and address of a licensed and bonded company, other than itself, authorized to directly initiate and pursue warranty work on its behalf. Doing so does not relieve the Contractor of any of its responsibilities in connection with their responsibility for warranting the Work.

2. The Plan shall provide a list of all product warranties and special warranties required by

the Contract Documents. This list shall also provide the status of delivery of each of these warranties.

3. The Plan shall provide a list of each warranted product. This list shall include the following:

a. Name of item. b. Model number. c. Serial number. d. Location where installed. e. Name and phone numbers of manufacturer. f. Name and phone numbers of installer. g. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts. h. Organization, names, and phone numbers of persons to call for warranty service. i. Typical response time and repair time expected for various warranted equipment. j. Term of warranty (starting point and end point of warranty period).

1.06 TEN-MONTH WARRANTY INSPECTION

A. Ten (10) months after the date for Substantial Completion, the University will conduct an

inspection of the facility, and based on the inspection, prepare and provide to the Contractor a list of warranty work items that are required to be replaced or repaired under the terms of the warranty provisions of the Contract. The Contractor may be invited to participate in this inspection, but his participation is not mandatory.

B. Upon receipt of the list of warranty work items, the Contractor shall provide to the University a

response containing his planned actions and dates for those actions relative to the identified warranty work items. The Contractor shall complete all work items not later than twelve (12) months after the date for Substantial Completion.


_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 017839 – Project Record Documents KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 2

SECTION 017839

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Record Documents consist of Record Drawings (As-Built Drawings) and Record Specifications. B. Record Documents shall not be used for construction purposes. During the Work they shall be

protected from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location. C. Record Documents shall have been updated and checked periodically during the Work. D. The Contractor shall provide reasonable periodic access to Record Documents by the

University during normal working hours.

1.02 RECORD DRAWINGS (AS-BUILT DRAWINGS)

A. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall maintain a clean and undamaged set of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings as the Record Drawings. Periodic updating shall pay particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.

B. Record Drawings shall be marked to show where the actual installation varies from the

drawings as originally shown. Markings shall be in red erasable pencil. Other colors shall be used to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work.

C. Where Shop Drawings are used, cross references shall be noted at the corresponding locations

on the Contract Drawings. D. Related Addenda and Change Orders shall be noted where applicable. E. Record Drawings shall be organized into manageable sets of sheets, bound with durable paper

cover sheets, and printed with suitable titles, dates, and other identification on the cover of each set.

F. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit one (1) set of draft (Red Line) Record

Drawings to the University. G. The University and/or the Professional will review the submitted Record Drawings. If the

Drawings are missing changes or other information, they will be returned to the Contractor for correction and proper completion. If the Drawings are satisfactory, the University will have the Professional incorporate the Red Line changes into the electronic format drawings.

H. If agreeable to the Contractor and the University, the Contractor may maintain and submit his

Record Drawings in electronic format.

1.03 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Each Separate Prime Contractor shall maintain a clean and undamaged copy of the Project

Manual (Technical Specifications), including Addenda and Change Orders, as the Record Specifications.

_____________________________________________________________________________________________ 2018K112 Section 017839 – Project Record Documents KUFR-0033 Page 2 of 2

B. During the Work, periodic updating of the Record Specifications shall be done, with particular attention paid to substitutions, selection of options, and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily discerned later by direct observation.

C. Record Specifications shall be marked to show where the actual Work varies from the original

Specifications. Markings shall be in red erasable pencil. Other colors shall be used to distinguish between variations in separate categories of the Work.

D. Related Addenda and Change Orders shall be noted where applicable. E. At the completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit one (1) set of draft Record

Specifications to the University. F. The University and/or the Professional will review the submitted Record Specifications. If the

Specifications are missing changes or other information, they will be returned to the Contractor for correction and proper completion. If the Specifications are satisfactory, the University will have the Professional incorporate the Red Line changes into the electronic format specifications.

G. If agreeable to the Contractor and the University, the Contractor may maintain and submit his

Record Specifications in electronic format.


______________________________________________________________________________ Rev. 9/13 Section 024100 - Demolition KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 024100

DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Demolish designated structures. Section includes removal of designated building equipment and fixtures; removal of designated construction; dismantling, cutting and alterations as indicated and necessary for the completion of the Work; disposal of materials storage of removed materials; identification of utilities; salvaged items; and protection of items to remain as indicated.

1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable code for demolition of structure, safety of adjacent structures, dust

control, service utilities, discovered hazards, and public safety.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300, Submittal Procedures.

1. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of salvageable

items; location and construction of temporary work.

B. Section 017700, Closeout Procedures. 1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities,

subsurface obstructions, and site alterations.

2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Procedures for submittals.

1.04 SEQUENCING A. Section 013100, Project Management and Coordination.

1.05 SCHEDULING

A. Section 011000, Summary.

B. Schedule Work to coincide with new construction and system requirements.

C. Describe demolition removal procedures and schedule.

D. Perform noisy, malodorous, dusty, or disruptive work during hours in accordance with a

schedule agreed upon by the Contractor, Construction Manager, and the System.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with occupied building areas.


B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify the System. Do not resume operations until directed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.

B. Notify adjacent owners of work which may affect their property, potential noise or disruption.

Coordinate with University and Owner.

C. Protect existing landscaping materials and structure which are not to be demolished.

D. At least 7 days prior to disruption of any existing utilities, Contractor shall notify the University Utilities Department, and obtain written approval at least 48 hours prior to disruption. Contractor shall comply with regulations regarding notifying the Pennsylvania “One-Call” system before beginning excavation.

E. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary safeguards, including warning signs and lights, barricades, and similar measures, for protection of the public, Owner, Contractor’s employees, and existing improvements to remain.

F. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.

G. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit

continued Owner occupancy.

H. Prevent movement of structure; provide temporary bracing and shoring required to ensure safety of existing structure.

I. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.

J. Mark location and termination of utilities.

K. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.

3.02 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures or building areas.

B. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses.

C. Maintain egress and access at all times. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks

without University permission.

D. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify University.

E. When a building is to be demolished, without new construction in its place, all foundation walls shall be removed to a point 3'-0" below grade. All basement slabs below the 3'-0" level need not be demolished, but must be broken into approximately 4' square areas or less to allow drainage of water. Require the Contractor to hire the services of a Pennsylvania


licensed surveyor to document the location of all foundations left in place below the 3'-0" location, as well as abandoned utilities, and utilities relocated as required by the demolition work. Survey shall become part of the as-built drawings required of the Contractor at completion of the work.

F. Through the Project Manager, the University must be contacted for a Hazmat determination.

Contractor will be responsible for removal and disposal of all hazardous materials in accordance with governing regulations.

G. Existing utilities that will no longer be in service shall be completely removed where possible.

Where complete removal is not possible, utilities shall be cut and capped. The location of the cuts/caps shall be indicated on the as-built survey provided by the Contractor.

H. Disconnect, remove, cap, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas.

3.03 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

A. Demolish and remove components in an orderly and careful manner, in sequence as outlined in submitted schedule.

B. Remove curbs, walks, and steps at nearest joint.

C. Traffic and street signs, mail boxes, etc., shall be removed and salvaged and reset in the new

work.

D. Existing valve boxes, manholes, etc., in the new sidewalks shall be adjusted up or down to within one quarter of one inch (1/4”) below finished grade. Manner of adjustment shall be acceptable to the University.

3.04 CLEANUP

A. Remove demolished material from site as work progresses.

B. Leave areas of work in clean condition.

C. Establish lawn areas where steps are not going to be replaced.

D. Install new concrete steps where steps are to be replaced.

E. All demolition debris shall be removed from the University property and disposed of by lawful

means. Backfill of buildings shall be with clean fill, compacted to at least 95% minimum density for cohesive material and 95% relative density for cohesion less material. Area shall be top soiled and seeded or planted with sod unless otherwise directed. Top soiling, seeding and sodding shall be in accordance with Section 329000.

F. Removed demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site.

G. Remove materials as Work progresses. Upon completion of Work, leave areas in clean

condition.

H. Remove temporary Work. END OF SECTION 024100

Rev. 9/13 Section 033000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 15

SECTION 033000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage; concrete reinforcement and

accessories; cast-in-place concrete; concrete curing; concrete finishes; and quality assurance.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ACI 212.4r – Guide for the Use of High-Range Water-Reducing Admixtures (Superplasticizers) in Concrete.

B. ACI 301 – Structural Concrete for Buildings. C. ACI 305R – Hot Weather Concreting. D. ACI 306R – Cold Weather Concreting. E. ACI 315 – Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. F. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. G. ACI 347R – Guide to Formwork for Concrete. H. ANSI/ASTM A 53 – Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. I. ANSI/ASTM A 185 – Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. J. ANSI/ASTM A 615 – Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel. K. ANSI/ASTM C 31 – Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. L. ANSI/ASTM C 33 – Concrete Aggregates. M. ANSI/ASTM C 39 – Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. N. ANSI/ASTM C 42 – Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. O. ANSI/ASTM C 94 – Ready Mixed Concrete. P. ANSI/ASTM C 143 – Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. Q. ANSI/ASTM C 150 – Portland Cement. R. ANSI/ASTM C 172 – Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. S. ANSI/ASTM C 173 – Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. T. ANSI/ASTM C 231 – Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. U. ANSI/ASTM C 260 – Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. V. ANSI/ASTM C 494 – Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. W. ANSI/ASTM C 618 – Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a

Mineral Admixture in Concrete. X. ANSI/ASTM C 1064 – Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland Cement Concrete. Y. ANSI/ASTM D 1752 – Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for

Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. Z. ANSI/ASTM D 2103 – Polyethylene Film and Sheeting. AA. ANSI/ASTM E 329 – Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in

Construction. BB. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) – Manual of Standard Practice. CC. Corps of Engineers CRD C572 – Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop.


1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The Contractor shall retain and pay for the services of an independent concrete testing service to establish concrete mix proportions and to perform the concrete testing specified. The testing service shall meet the requirements of ASTM E 329 and shall comply with National Bureau of Standards Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory. Contractor shall provide a storage box for concrete cylinders.

B. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301 unless more stringent requirements are specified

herein. Maintain copy of ACI 301 on-site.

C. Obtain materials from same source throughout the work.

D. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 347R. The Contractor is responsible for the safety, design, strength and adequacy of all shores, false-work, posts, footings and other supports used in connection with the work.

E. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

F. Furnish materials in manufacturer’s packaging with applicable instructions.

1.04 TESTS

A. The Contractor shall construct suitable enclosures for storage of the cylinders, and include

provisions to maintain the temperature between 60 and 75 degrees F.

B. Testing and analysis of concrete will be performed under provisions of Section 01 45 00, Quality Control. As a minimum, the type and number of tests specified below shall be performed.

1. Sampling of fresh concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C 172, except as modified

for slump to conform to ASTM C 94.

2. Slump testing shall conform to ASTM C 143. One test shall be made for each load of concrete and one test for each set of test specimens. Concrete failing to meet slump requirements will be rejected. one test at point of discharge for each day’s pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

3. Air content testing shall conform to ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231. One test shall be

made for every third load of concrete at the point of discharge and one test for each set of test specimens. one for each day’s pour of each type of a-r-entrained concrete.

4. Concrete temperature shall be tested hourly when air temperatures are below 40 degrees

F or above 80 degrees F and when any test specimen is made. Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1064.


5. Compression test specimens shall be cylinders made, stored, and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31. One set of five test specimens shall be made for each day’s pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. or 250 sf plus additional sets for each 50 cu. Yd. or 2500 more than the first 25 cu. Yd or 1200 sf of each concrete Class I, II and IV placed in any one day. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 39. Test one specimen at seven days, one at 14 days, and two specimens at 28 days. One specimen shall be retained in reserve for later testing if required. Testing Service shall keep statistical records of strength behavior of concrete throughout the duration of the work. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

6. Finished surfaces shall be tested for compliance with tolerances specified in ACI 301 and

flatwork shall conform to Class B tolerance. Tests shall be made at locations of noticeable irregularities, but no less than one test shall be made for each 500 square feet of concrete surface.

C. Test results shall be reported in writing directly from testing laboratory to Architect, Structural

Engineering, ready-mix producer, and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for all test ages. For both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

D. If, in the opinion of the Professional, additional tests are required to verify compliance with

these specifications, the testing service shall take additional tests as directed by the Professional. Costs of additional tests shall be the responsibility of the Contractor only if results indicate defective work otherwise the University shall bear the cost. Additional testing shall consist of load testing per ACI 318, coring and testing cylinders per ASTM C 42, testing of field-cured specimens per ASTM C 31, as directed by the Professional.

E. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yards, University may

waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided. F. Non-destructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other non-destructive device may

be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. G. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test

results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by University. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

H. Testing In-Place Concrete Floors for Flatness: For floors, use ASTM E 1155, “Test Method

for Determining FF Floor Flatness and FL Floor Levelness Numbers.”


1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Shop Drawings of reinforcing steel under provisions of Section 013300, Submittal Procedures. Dimensions shall be shown on plans and Sections to indicate clearances and laps. Indicate reinforcement sizes, spacings, locations and quantities of reinforcing steel, bending and cutting schedules and supporting and spacing devices. Indicate location of all contraction, expansion and construction joints on reinforcing drawings. The Contract Drawings may not be reproduced in whole or part as a Shop Drawing. Shop Drawings shall be checked prior to submittal.

B. Submit product data and manufacturers’ instructions for specified products under provisions

of Section 013300, Submittal Procedures. Manufacturers’ product data shall be submitted for review to verify all pertinent data to substantiate conformance with the specifications.

C. Pour Schedules: Submit concurrently with the steel reinforcing drawings six copies of

concrete pour schedules showing sequence of pours.

D. Submit strength test results, statistical and historical strength test data, trial batch mix designs and other test information specified for each proposed mix design.

E. Submit certification from the ready-mix plant that the concrete mixes being supplied meet the

requirements of the Specification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CONCRETE MIXES

A. Concrete Mix Design: Four mix designs are required for this Project. The mixes shall be

designated as follows:

Class I: Typical structural concrete. Class II: All interior slabs on grade. Class III: Use for fill in over-excavated areas and for mud slabs. Class IV: Lightweight concrete, use for elevated slabs.

B. Criteria:

1. Class I:

a. 28 Day Strength: 4,000 psi minimum. b. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. c. Minimum Cement Content: 590 pounds per cubic yard. d. Admixtures:

(1) HRWR Admixture. (2) Air entraining for exterior work.

e. Slump: 3 inch plus or minus 1 inch at truck discharge prior to addition of HRWR Admixture.

f. Cement: Type I or II. g. Coarse Aggregate: Size 57. h. Air Content: 5 to 7 percent for exterior work; 3 plus or minus 1 percent for interior

slabs subject to vehicular traffic.


2. Class II:

a. 56 Day Strength: 4,000 psi minimum. b. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50 to 0.55. c. Admixtures:

(1) Water Reducing. d. Slump: 4 inch plus or minus 1 inch at truck discharge. e. Cement: Type II. f. Air Content: 2 percent maximum. g. Coarse Aggregate: Nominal maximum size 1 inch and blended to achieve a well

graded aggregate mix.

3. Class III:

a. 28 Day Strength: 2,000 psi minimum. b. Slump: 5 inch maximum. c. Cement: Type I or II.

4. Class IV:

a. 28 Day Strength: 4,000 psi. b. Weight: 100 pcf maximum. c. Maximum Slump: 4 inch. d. Cement: Type I or II.

2.02 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN PROPORTIONS

A. Concrete mix proportions may be selected by either the field experience method or the

laboratory trial batch method of ACI 301.

B. Jobsite mixing is permitted only for small quantities of non-structural concrete. All other concrete shall be ready-mixed concrete complying with the recommendations of NRCMA and requirements of ASTM C 94. All concrete materials, including water, shall be added at the batching plant except for high-range water reducer which may be added at the batch plant or Site. No water shall be added at the Site unless allowed per the Hot Weather Requirements section of this Specification.

C. Air-entrained concrete shall be used where concrete is exposed to weather. Admixtures are

permitted at the discretion and approval of the design professional.

2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II Portland for Class I, III, and IV, Type II for all Class II, grey color. Only one brand of cement shall be used for all work.

B. Coarse Aggregate Class I, III and IV: ASTM C 33, size No. 57, washed natural aggregate,

free of clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, and fine materials.


C. Coarse Aggregate Class II: All aggregates shall conform to ASTM C 33 and ASTM C 330. Nominal maximum aggregate size shall be 1 inch. Aggregates shall be blended as required to achieve a uniform gradation across all sieve sizes. Aggregates may be blended at the concrete supplier plant or pre-blended at the quarry location to meet the specified gradation. Gradation shall be between 8 percent and 22 percent retained on each sieve size for larger size aggregation, between 8 percent and 15 percent for the No. 30 and No. 50 sieves, and between 1.5 percent and 5.0 percent for the No. 100 sieve.

D. Fine Aggregates: ASTM C 33, natural sand, except for Class II which shall meet the grading

requirements of ACI 302.1R with a fineness modulus between 2.70 and 3.0. The total blend of all CA and FA gradations for Class II shall meet the requirements of Paragraph 3.

E. Water: Potable.

2.04 ADMIXTURES: shall conform to ASTM C 494 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.

A. Use only one manufacturer as a source for all admixtures. Admixtures of various

manufacturers within a particular mix will not be permitted.

B. Water Reducing Admixtures: Conform to ACI 212.4R and ASTM C 494 unless more stringent requirements are specified herein.

C. Air Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260.

D. Fly Ash: Fly ash is not permitted. E. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than

0.05 percent chloride ions by weight of cementitious material are not permitted. F. Certification: Written conformance to the abovementioned requirements and the chloride ion

content of the admixture will be required from the admixture manufacturer and shall accompany the mix design when submitting for review.

2.05 REINFORCING STEEL AND ACCESSORIES

A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615, 60 ksi yield grade deformed billet steel bars; uncoated

finish. Reinforcing shall be cold bent to the shapes indicated. The use of heat to bend is prohibited. Do not re-bend in field without permission of the Professional.

B. All hooks, unless otherwise noted, shall conform to diameters and dimensions of “ACI

Standard Hooks”.

C. All reinforcing bars shall conform to the dimensions indicated and be within the fabricating tolerances established by CRSI.

D. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: Plain type, ASTM A 185; in flat sheets; galvanized finish.

E. Reinforcing bar supports shall comply with CRSI “Manual of Standard Practice for Reinforced

Concrete Construction”.


2.06 FORM MATERIALS

A. Formwork may be omitted for foundations provided earth is firm and stable and concrete surfaces will not be exposed to view. Excavations shall be cut neat and accurate to size. Loose and unstable materials shall be compacted or removed.

B. Plywood: BB grade, Class I.

C. Form Release Agent: VOC compliant and of a type which will not stain or adversely affect

concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent finishes. 2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Bonding and Repair Materials:

1. Bonding Compounds: Rewettable; the compound shall be polyvinyl acetate, type. Use

only in areas not subject to moisture.

2. Epoxy Bonding Compound: The compound shall be a 2 component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive compound suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces.

3. Patching Mortar: Free-flowing, polymer-modified cementitious coating.

4. Underlayment Compound: Free-flowing, self-leveling, pumpable cementitious base

compound.

B. Non-Shrink Grout:

1. The non-shrink grout shall be non-metallic.

C. Waterstops: extrude polyvinylchloride, Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C-572.

D. Expansion Joint Fillers (PMF): Self expanding cork, Type III, conforming to ASTM D 1572, 3/8 inch thick unless otherwise indicated on plans.

E. Expansion Joint Sealant: A non slag, flexible, urethane sealant.

F. Sleeves: Hot-dipped galvanized schedule 40 or 80 steel pipe conforming to ASTM A 53,

Grade B or schedule 40 PVC.

G. Vapor retarder shall be a high performance under-slab vapor retarder. Vapor retarder shall meet the following minimum requirements:

1. Thickness: 10 mil.

2. Classification per ASTM E 1745: A, B, and C requirements.

3. Tensile Strength (ASTM E 154, Section 9): 50 to 55 lbs/inch.

4. Puncture Resistance (ASTM D 1709, Method B): 3,000 to 3,500g.

5. Permeance (ASTM E 154, Section 7/ASTM E 96, Procedure B): .035 to .040 U.S.

perms.


2.08 CURING MATERIALS

A. Curing and Sealing Compound: The compound shall have 30 percent solids content minimum, and have test data from an independent testing laboratory indicating a maximum moisture loss of 0.030 grams per square centimeter when applied at a coverage rate of 300 square feet per gallon.

B. Dissipating Resin Curing Compound: The compound shall be a dissipating resin type

compound. The film must chemically break down in approximately 8 weeks. Use on floors where resilient tile will be laid.

C. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 2103, 6 mils thick, clear.

D. Sealer/Dustproofer: The compound shall be a water-based acrylic latex system, 20 percent

solids content minimum with a maximum moisture loss of 0.034 gm/cm2 when applied at a coverage rate of 200 square feet per gallon.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify lines, levels, and measurements before proceeding with formwork.

B. Verify anchors, anchor bolts, seats, plates, sleeves, reinforcement, reglets, anchor slots and

other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, and held securely. Verify dimensions using drawings provided by supplier of embedment. Bring discrepancies to the attention of the Professional prior to proceeding with placement of concrete.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Hand-trim sides and bottoms of earth forms; remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete.

Provide 2 inches additional width for earth forms when used in lieu of temporary formwork.

B. Minimize form joints. Symmetrically align joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of mortar.

C. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit stripping, so that concrete is not damaged during

its removal.

D. Provide ¾ inch chamfer strips on external corners of interior curbs.

E. Do not place conduits or pipes closer than three diameters on center. Concrete reinforcement shall not be cut, interrupted or relocated in any way due to placement of pipes, conduits or other embedded items.

F. Apply a heavy coat of bituminous or asphaltic paint to aluminum or other metal items not

compatible with and embedded in or in contact with concrete work. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF SHRINKAGE AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS

A. Locate and form shrinkage and construction joints where indicated on Drawings. Reinforcing

shall not be interrupted at construction joints. Keyways shall be 1/3 the thickness of the member unless otherwise indicated.

B. Install water-stops continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints watertight.


C. Set top screed to required elevations. Secure to resist movement of wet concrete.

D. Install expansion joint cover anchorage in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Set anchorage so that cover will be flush with floor finish.

E. Install joint fillers and sealants in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Use primers

of type recommended by joint filler and sealer manufacturer.

F. Install joint covers after adjacent construction activity is complete. 3.04 PLACING CONCRETE

A. Notify Professional at least 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.

B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 except as hereinafter modified.

C. During hot weather, comply with the requirements of ACI 305, except as modified in

paragraph “HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS”.

D. Maximum temperature of all concrete at delivery to the Site shall be 75 degrees F.

E. During cold weather, comply with the requirements of ACI 306, except as modified in paragraph “COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS”.

F. Ensure reinforcement, embedded parts, and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete

placement.

G. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as specified in ACI 318 unless indicated otherwise.

H. Prior to placing concrete, insure that surfaces and forms to receive concrete are clean and

prepared.

I. Excavation shall be cleared of loose soils, rocks, debris, water and ice. Areas which have sloughed shall be tamped firm. Dry soils shall be made damp immediately prior to placement.

J. Forms shall be cleared of wood, sawdust, dirt, debris, water and ice.

K. Convey concrete from mixer to placement location as rapidly as possible by methods which

will not cause segregation or loss of ingredients. Use chutes, buckets, conveyors or buggies to convey concrete. Limit freefall of concrete to a height of five feet.

L. Deposit concrete as close as possible to its final location. Place concrete continuously or in

layers not exceeding 18 inches such that cold joints will not be formed between successive layers. Maintain reinforcement, forms, and embedded items in their proper positions during placing operations. Tighten forms as necessary to prevent leakage. Vibrate immediately after placement.

M. Deposit and consolidate concrete in slabs in a continuous operation. Concrete shall be

placed in a single layer continuously between construction joints.

N. Saw cut contraction joints at an optimum time after finishing and not more than 24 hours after finishing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cutting ¼ into depth of slab thickness. Fill cut with approved Epoxy Crack Filler.


O. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within ½ inch of finished slab surface.

P. A delivery ticket indicating the truck number, date, and time that mixing was started shall be

submitted to the testing lab technician with each batch at time of delivery. 3.05 HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Hot weather conditions are deemed to exist when the temperature in the forms is 75 degrees

F or above, or a combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity impairs the quality of fresh or hardened concrete. Take protective measures for mixing, transporting and placing concrete in accordance with ACI 305.

B. The temperature of the concrete at the place of discharge may not exceed 85 degrees F.

1. If ice is used to lower temperature, place crushed, shaved or chipped ice directly into the

mixer as part or all of the mixing water. Mix until ice is completely melted.

2. Record the concrete temperature at the time of discharge.

C. Do not add water that will cause the proportions to exceed the maximum water-cement ratio hereinbefore specified.

1. Notify the Professional before adding any water to the concrete mix.

2. Record the amount of water added to the concrete at the jobsite.

D. Discharge concrete within 45 minutes or 100 revolutions, whichever occurs first, after the first

mixing of cement and aggregates.

E. Placing and Curing:

1. Place concrete promptly upon arrival.

2. Provide at least one standby vibrator for each 3 vibrators in use.

3. Protect concrete from direct sunlight. Keep forms covered and moist by means of water sprinkling or the application of continuously wetted burlap or cotton mats for a minimum of 24 hours.

4. When forms are removed, provide wet cover to the newly exposed surfaces to avoid

exposure to hot sun and wind.

5. Continue specified water curing methods for 10 days. Leave covering in place 4 additional days. Do not permit alternate wetting and drying cycles.

6. For slabs on grade, beam, and deck concrete, and other horizontal placements, protect

the surface between finishing operations using one or more of the following methods:

a. Careful use of a fog nozzle.

b. Spreading and removing polyethylene sheeting between finishing operations.


3.06 COLD WEATHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Cold weather is defined any time when the daily temperature is 40 degrees F or lower during placement and during the protection period.

B. Protect concrete surfaces from freezing for at least 24 hours after placement. C. All surfaces in contact with newly-placed concrete including formwork, reinforcement and

sub-grade must be above 35 degrees F. D. Place concrete at a temperature of not less than 55 degrees F. Mix concrete at a

temperature between:

1. 60 degrees F and 70 degrees F when outside air temperature is above 30 degrees F.

2. 65 degrees F and 75 degrees F when outside air temperature is between 0 degrees F and 30 degrees F.

3. 70 degrees F and 80 degrees F when outside air temperature is below 0 degrees F.

E. Follow concrete placement with tarpaulins or other readily movable coverings, so only a few

feet of concrete is exposed to the outside air at any time.

F. Maintain the temperature and moisture conditions specified in all parts of the newly-placed concrete by covering, insulating, housing or heating. Arrange for protection methods in advance of placement.

G. Maintain concrete at a temperature of not less than 50 degrees F nor more than 70 degrees

F for a period of 3 days after placement. H. Do not remove forms during the initial protection period. I. Protect insulation against wetting that will impair its insulating value using moisture-proof

cover material. Keep insulation in close contact with concrete. J. Construct enclosure to withstand wind and snow loads and be reasonably air-tight. Provide

sufficient space between the concrete and enclosure to permit free circulation of heated air. K. Use vented heaters. Do not permit heaters to heat or dry concrete locally. L. Maintain relative humidity above 40 percent within heated enclosures before construction

supports are removed. M. Monitor temperature to ensure concrete is kept within specified limits recording time and

concrete temperature every 8 hours. N. Assure concrete has developed necessary strength before removing forms. Provide

additional test cylinders with the same protection as the structure they represent to verify concrete strength before construction supports are removed.

O. If water curing is used, terminate at least 12 hours before end of temperature protection

period. Permit concrete to dry.


P. After the required protection period, gradually reduce the concrete temperature within an enclosure or insulation at a rate not to exceed 20 degrees F per day until the outside temperature has been reached.

Q. Apply membrane-forming curing compound to concrete surfaces during the first period of

above-freezing temperatures after forms are stripped and before air temperature rises to 50 degrees F. Apply membrane-forming curing compound to slabs as soon as finishing operations are completed, except where live steam curing is used.

3.07 GRADE SLAB FLOOR FLATNESS/LEVELNESS

A. Grade slab floor areas are designated Random Traffic Floors. Any floor slab section

composed of a typical single column bay contained within this area shall be designated a random traffic grade slab and shall be considered subject to local FF and FL criteria. All random traffic grade slabs shall conform to the following ACI 302.1 F – number requirements:

1. Specified Overall values FF 36/FL 25.

2. Minimum local values FF 20/FL 16.

3. No point on the floor shall deviate more than ¾ of an inch from the finished floor elevation

shown on the plans. B. Floor tolerance compliance tests shall be conducted at the Contractor’s expense within 24

hours of placement for each newly installed slab section. Tests shall be completed prior to removal of forms and shoring. Testing to be in accordance with ASTM E 1155 using a Type II apparatus or an F-meter. Actual F numbers shall be calculated and supplied to Professional within 24 hours of data collection, excluding holidays and weekends. Daily logs of actual measurements shall be maintained until conclusion of the project.

C. All grade slab sections measuring at or above both the specified minimum local F values

shall be accepted. All slab sections measuring below either one or both of the specified minimum local F values shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the University.

3.08 ELEVATED SLAB FLOOR FLATNESS

A. Elevated slab floor areas are designated Random Traffic Floors. Any elevated floor slab

section composed of a typical single column bay contained within this area shall be designated a random traffic elevated slab and shall be considered subject to local FF criteria. All random traffic elevated slabs shall conform to the following ACI 302.1 FF – number requirements:

1. Specified Overall value FF 25.

2. Minimum local value FF 20.

3. No point on the floor shall deviate more than ¾ of an inch from the finished floor elevation

shown on the plans.


B. Floor tolerance compliance tests shall be conducted at the Contractor’s expense within 24 hours of placement for each newly installed slab section. Test shall be completed prior to removal of forms and shoring. Testing to be in accordance with ASTM E 1155 using a Type II apparatus or an F-meter. Actual F numbers shall be calculated and supplied to professional within 24 hours of data collection, excluding weekends and holidays. Daily logs of actual measurements shall be maintained until conclusion of project.

C. All elevated slab sections measuring at or above the specified minimum local FF value shall

be accepted. All elevated slab sections measuring below the specified minimum local F value shall be remedied by grinding and re-topping at no cost to the University.

3.09 FINISHING

A. Provide concrete surfaces to be left exposed and visible in final work with smooth rubbed

finish.

B. Fill form tie holes, cavities, stone pockets, and honeycombed areas with mortar before concrete is thoroughly dry. A minimum of mixing water shall be used for mortar, and trial batches shall be made to determine best proportions for good color match.

C. Remove projections and fins which will affect finishing operations and appearance. Grind

areas as necessary to achieve a smooth, dense surface. D. Finish Unformed Concrete Surfaces.

1. Finish tops of walls and other similar unformed surfaces with the same finish as adjacent formed surfaces insofar as possible.

2. All interior concrete slabs shall receive a monolithic trowel finish.

E. Exterior flatwork shall be given a broom finish after floating.

3.10 INTERIOR EXPOSED CONCRETE SLABS

A. All interior exposed concrete slabs are to receive a sealer. Cure slabs and install sealer in

accordance with sealer manufacturer’s requirements.

3.11 SHORE AND FORM REMOVAL AND REUSE

A. Forms and shores shall not be removed until concrete has achieved sufficient strength for side form removal, and not until concrete has obtained 67 percent of design strength for shore removal.

B. In cold weather, all forms must remain in place for at least five days.

3.12 CURING CONCRETE

A. Curing operations shall begin immediately after completion of finishing operations. Curing shall continue uninterrupted for a minimum of seven days, unless specified otherwise. Rapid drying of the completion of the curing period shall be prevented, and at no time during curing shall the concrete temperature drop below 50 degrees F.


B. All concrete surfaces shall be cured using one of the following methods:

1. Ponding, continuous sprinkling, or fog mist.

2. Two thicknesses of absorptive cover, kept continuously wet.

3. Covering with waterproof paper, polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene-coated burlap.

4. Approved membrane-forming curing compound.

5. Leaving the forms in place for the specified curing time.

C. Curing methods used shall be applied immediately after final set has taken and finishing is complete. For larger flat work areas (those greater than 500 square feet) commence curing behind finishers.

D. Wood forms left in place during curing period shall be kept continuously wet. If forms are

removed before end of curing period, one of the previously specified curing methods shall be employed and continued for the remainder of the curing period.

3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Patching of defective areas in lieu of removal and replacement shall be performed after

obtaining the approval and direction of the Professional. All costs associated with repair of defective concrete shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, at no additional cost to the University.

B. All structural repairs shall be made after conferring with the Professional as to method and

procedure.

3.14 EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Concrete failing to meet specification requirements for air content, temperature and a slump which is beyond the specified slump limits shall be rejected.

B. Concrete suspected of being deficient in strength shall be load tested in accordance with ACI

318, core drilled in accordance with ASTM C 42, or removed and replaced, as determined by the Professional.

C. Where directed, at least three cores shall be made in suspected area. Core and test cores in

accordance with ASTM C 42.

D. Cost of additional testing shall be the responsibility of the University if suspect work is found to be satisfactory. If work is found to be defective, all costs for testing, repair, and replacement shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, including all other work affected or required by corrections to concrete work. No extensions of time shall be granted due to correction of defective work.

E. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three

consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test results falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.


F. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

3.15 APPROVED INSPECTION COMPANIES

A. Approved companies offering full service inspection including foundation, concrete, and

structural Steel are:

1. Valley Forge Laboratories, Inc. Six Berkley Road Devon, PA 19333-1397 2. Pennoni Associates, Inc. 2041 Avenue C Suite 100 Bethlehem, PA 18017 3. Craig Testing Laboratories, Inc. PO Box 427 5435 Harding Way Mays Landing, NJ 08330 4. Earth Engineering Inc. 115 West Germantown Pike East Norriton, PA 19401 (Sub out structural steel testing to Lieb Inspection and Testing, Inc.) 5. GeoSystems Consultants, Inc. 514 Pennsylvania Avenue Fort Washington, PA 19034 (**Foundation testing and inspection only)

END OF SECTION 033300

Rev. 9/13 Section 040000 - Masonry KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 10

SECTION 040000

MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes brick, concrete masonry units; reinforcement, anchorage, and

accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A153/A153M – Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. B. ASTM A615/A615M – Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. C. ASTM A641 – Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. D. ASTM C27 – Fireclay and High-Alumina Refractor Brick. E. ASTM C90 – Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. F. ASTM C126 – Ceramic Glazed Structural Clay Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry

Units. G. ASTM C129 – Non-load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. H. ASTM D226 – Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. I. MSJC (Masonry Standards Joint Committee) Code – ACI (American Concrete Institute)

530/ASCE (American Society of Civil Engineers) 5/TMS (The Masonry Society) 402 – Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures.

J. MSJC Specification – ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 – Specifications for Masonry Structures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit data for masonry units and fabricated wire reinforcement wall tie anchors and other accessories.

C. Samples: Submit four samples of face brick, units to illustrate color, texture and extremes of

color range of each indicated brick.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Perform work in accordance with MSJC Code and MSJC Specification.

B. Hot and Cold Weather Requirements: MSNC Specification.

1.05 MOCK-UP

A. Section 014500 – Quality Control.


B. Construct an exterior cavity masonry wall into a panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high, which includes masonry, mortar and accessories, structural backup, thru-wall flashings, end dam flashing, wall insulation and architectural precast concrete coping as specified. Mock-up shall be constructed of full size components as specified.

C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up shall be approved by the Professional prior to building wall construction. E. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work. F. Mock-up to be removed from site when directed.

1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Section 013119 – Project Meetings.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing Work.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Section 016000 – Product Requirements.

B. Accept units on site. Inspect for damage.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Section 013100 – Project Management & Coordination.

B. Coordinate the masonry work with insulation work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide one of the following unless indicated otherwise:

1. Glen-Gery Brick.

2. Substitutions – Section 016200 – Product Options.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Face Brick: Face brick shall be red; color and texture to be approved by the University.

University standard face brick is Glen-Gery 53DD unless otherwise approved.

B. Special Brick Shape: Shaped to profile indicated; surface texture on exposed sides and ends.

C. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C90, Type I – Moisture

Controlled normal weight.


D. Hollow Non-Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): ASTM C129, Type I – Moisture Controlled light weight.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Size and Shape: Nominal modular size of 16 face inches thickness.

Provide special units for 90 degree corners, bond beams, lintels, and bull-nosed corners. F. Provide fire rated classified CMU where required. G. Provide bull-nose concrete masonry units for all outside corners where units do not receive

finish covering other than paint or coating. H. Brick Splits: ASTM C27; 9 inch by 4-1/2 inch by 1-1/4 inch high; shall withstand temperatures

up to minimum 2,000 degrees F; color shall be as selected by Professional from manufacturer’s standards.

I. All mortar additives, where required, shall contain no more than 0.1% chloride ions and shall

be certified as such by the contractor. J. Provide mortar color to match existing adjacent construction. Coordinate with the University. K. Ground-face block is desirable in high-traffic areas.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; steel wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 3 after fabrication, 3/16 inch side rods with No. 9 inch cross ties.

B. Multiple Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Ladder type; with moisture drip; adjustable type, steel

wire, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A641 Class 3 after fabrication, 3/16 inch side rods with 3/16 inch cross ties.

C. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, 60 ksi yield grade, deformed billet bars, galvanized

finish. D. Strap Anchors: bent steel shape, 1 x 8 inch size x 1/8 inch thick, hot dip galvanized to ASTM

A153/A153M B2 finish. E. Masonry Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, 1 x 8 inch size x 16 gage thick, hot dip

galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M B2 finish. F. Mortar and Grout: As specified. G. Thru-Wall Flashings: 7 oz/sq ft rolled sheet copper bonded to fiber reinforced asphalt treated

Kraft paper. Provide adequate thru-wall flashing, with weep holes in masonry at 16” o.c. H. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories,

cement fused joints. I. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding;

½ inch wide x by maximum lengths. J. Building Paper: ASTM D226, No. 30 asphalt saturated felt.


K. Weeps: Preformed plastic hollow tubes. L. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials. M. Steel Lintels: As specified.

N. Triangular Masonry Ties: Steel, 3/16 diameter, triangular shaped wire, complete with weld-

on anchor rods or anchor straps, hot-dipped galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M B2 finish.

O. Dovetail Anchors: Galvanized steel sheet fabricated from 0.034 inch material complete with dovetail slot, anchor and filler strip.

P. Brick Vent: Extruded aluminum assembly of 6063-TS alloy with minimum thickness of 0.125

inch; 18 x 14 aluminum insect screen; baked enamel finish, color shall be a custom color to match adjacent brick, 1 inch overlapping blades at 45 degree angle; waterstop, drainable; with wall depth extension for ductwork connection.

Q. Brick Ties: 3/16 inch diameter adjustable hook with two prongs and a receiver, designed for

brick veneer anchorage to steel stud and sheathing backup; hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153.

R. Vapor Barrier: As specified. S. Self Adhered Membrane Flashing: Shall be manufactured of a 40 mil thick waterproofing

membrane consisting of a self-adhering rubberized asphalt laminated to a high density polyethylene film. Membrane shall conform to puncture resistance of 40 pounds minimum; tensile strength of 1,200 psi. Provide membrane in width to allow one pass of membrane; provide longest length membrane roll as achievable. Provide manufacturer’s recommended primer where recommended by manufacturer.

T. Cavity Drainage Fabric: Manufactured of high density polyethylene or recycled polyester,

woven into a 90 percent open mesh design; ½ inch thick, height of mesh shall be 10 inches with a continuous bottom 3 inch row and 7 inch high dovetails.

U. Overflow Outlet: Cast bronze material; satin finish; consisting of one-piece cast nozzle, wall

flange and inlet threaded connection. Coordinate pipe inlet size with Plumbing Contractor for pipe size. Outlet shall have three holes in flange for attachment to building face, nozzle shall extend from building face minimum 4 inch, with curved lip.

2.04 PRECAST CONCRETE LINTELS

A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, complying with requirements below.

B. Concrete Lintels: Precast units made from concrete matching concrete masonry units in

color, texture, and compressive strength and with reinforcing bars indicated or required to support loads indicated. Cure precast lintels by same method used for concrete masonry units.

C. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in

Division 3 Section “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. C. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. D. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied to other sections.

B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure provides permanent support.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.

B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form bed and head joints of uniform

thickness. C. Coursing of Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Bond: Running.

2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.

3. Mortar Joints: Concave. D. Coursing of Brick Units:

1. Bond: Running unless noted otherwise.

2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.

3. Mortar Joints: Concave.

E. Placing and Bonding:

1. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints.

2. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.

3. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.

4. Remove excess mortar as work progresses.

5. Interlock intersections and external corners.


6. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace.

7. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, un-

chipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.

8. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled, cement parging is required, and where resilient base is scheduled.

9. Isolate masonry from vertical structural framing members with a movement joint.

10. Isolate top of masonry from horizontal structural framing members and slabs or decks

with compressible joint filler.

11. Provide brick ties, masonry ties and straps as indicated and as required to anchor all face brick to framing system, masonry backup and concrete masonry units to structural framing whether shown or not. Provide where masonry is adjacent to or constructed around every steel column. Provide anchors at 16 inches on center both horizontally or vertically unless noted otherwise.

12. Provide an open space not less than ½ inch in width between masonry and structural

members, unless indicated otherwise. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

F. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with anchors as indicated to comply with the

following requirements.

1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener.

2. Insert slip-in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at

each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards.

3. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing.

4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and

down.

5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches oc vertically and 24 inches oc horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.

G. Install brick splits where indicated. Loose lay in metal tray; butt ends together, no mortar.

Lay in stack bond pattern. Cut bricks as required to fit tight in metal pan.

H. Weeps and Vents: Provide weeps and vents in outer wythe at 24 inches oc horizontally above through-wall flashing and shelf angles. At lintels, provide weeps and vents in outer wythe at 16 inches oc.


I. Cavity Wall: Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weeps. Build inner wythe ahead of outer wythe to receive cavity insulation and air/vapor barrier. Install cavity drainage fabric in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations at bottom of all cavities, over opening headers, and at all through wall flashing.

J. Joint Reinforcement and Anchorage – Single Wythe Masonry:

1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc.

2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.

3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.

4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.

5. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc.

K. Joint Reinforcement and Anchorages – Cavity Wall Masonry:

1. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches oc.

2. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below

openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.

3. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls.

4. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.

5. Attach to structural steel members. Embed anchorages in every second block joint.

6. Reinforce joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches oc. L. Masonry Flashings:

1. Extend flashings horizontally through outer wythe at foundation walls, above ledge or

shelf angles and lintels, under parapet caps, at bottom of walls, and cut flush with face of exterior wall.

2. Turn flashing up minimum 8 inches and bed into mortar joint of masonry backing.

3. Lap end joints minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.

4. Turn flashing, fold, and seal at corners, bends, and interruptions.

5. Provide flashing end dams at all windows, openings, doors, penetrations through

flashing, etc. End dams shall be minimum 2 inches high.

6. Apply self adhered membrane flashing at all stud and sheathing backup walls and where indicated. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide primer where required.


M. Lintels:

1. Install loose steel or precast lintels where indicated over openings.

2. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel or precast concrete lintels are not scheduled or indicated.

3. Openings up to 42 inches wide: Place two, No. 4 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom

web, unless indicated otherwise.

4. Openings from 42 inches up to 78 inches wide: Place two, No. 5 reinforcing bars 1 inch from bottom web, unless indicated otherwise.

5. Openings over 78 inches: Reinforce openings.

6. Do not splice reinforcing bars.

7. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement.

8. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

9. Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing temporary supports.

10. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening, unless indicated otherwise.

N. Grouted Components:

1. Reinforce bond beam with 2, No. 4 bars, 1 inch from bottom web, unless indicated

otherwise.

2. Lap splices bar diameters required by code.

3. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement.

4. Place and consolidate grout fill without displacing reinforcing.

5. At bearing locations, fill masonry cores with grout for a minimum 12 inches both sides of opening.

O. Control and Expansion Joints:

1. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.

2. Form control joint in concrete masonry units with a sheet building paper bond breaker

fitted to one side of the hollow contour end of the block unit. Fill the resultant core with grout fill. Rake joint at exposed unit faces for placement of backer rod and sealant.

3. Form control joints in face brick as required for compressible joint fillers, fully open joint

full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than ½ inch.

4. Fill control joint with backer rod and sealant in concrete masonry units.


5. Form expansion joint by omitting mortar and cutting unit to form an open space.

6. Indicate masonry expansion joints at proper spacing and locations. P. Built-In Work:

1. As work progresses, install built-in metal door and glazed frames, fabricated metal

frames, window frames, plates, and other items to be built-in the work and furnished by other sections.

2. Install built-in items plumb and level.

3. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids

solid with grout or mortar.

4. Do not build in materials subject to deterioration. Q. Cutting and Fitting:

1. Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other

sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.

2. Obtain approval from the Professional prior to cutting or fitting masonry work not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired.

R. Give attention to parapet design. Ensure proper waterproofing at back sides of parapets.

Metal copings are preferred, rather than cast stone, brick, or concrete copings when design permits.

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Section 014500 – Quality Control.

B. Maximum Variation from Alignment of Columns: ¼ inch. C. Maximum Variation from Unit to Adjacent Unit: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Variation from Plane of Wall: ¼ inch in 10 ft and ½ inch in 20 ft or more. E. Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼ inch per story non-cumulative; ½ inch in two stories or

more. F. Maximum Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 ft and ¼ inch in 10 ft; ½ inch in 30 ft. G. Maximum Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 ft. H. Maximum Variation from Cross Sectional Thickness of Walls: ¼ inch. I. Maximum Variation for Steel Reinforcement:

1. Plus or minus ½ inch when distance from centerline of steel to opposite face of masonry is 8 inches or less.


2. Plus or minus 1 inch when the distance between 8 and 24 inches.

3. Plus or minus 1-1/4 inch when the distance is greater than 24 inches.

4. Plus or minus 2 inches from the location along the face of the wall.

3.05 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace existing face brick and limestone masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pressure clean brick in accordance with Brick Industry Association Technical Notes 20.

Utilize the pressurized water cleaning method with appropriate cleaning solution. C. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and

completely fill with mortar. Point-up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance.

3.06 CLEANING

A. Section 017700 – Closeout Procedures.

B. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses. C. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. D. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. E. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.


Rev. 9/13 Section 055000 - Metal Fabrications KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 055000

METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 36/A 36M – Carbon Structural Steel. B. ASTM A 53 – Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless Steel

Pipe. C. ASTM A 123 – Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. D. ASTM A 153/A 153M – Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A 283/A 283M – Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. F. ASTM A 307 – Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi tensile Strength. G. ASTM A 500 – Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Round

and Shapes. H. ASTM A 569 – Steel, Carbon, Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality. I. AWS D 1.1 (American Welding Society) – Structural Welding Code. J. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) – Painting Manual.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage,

size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A 2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the work, verifying AWS qualification

within the previous 12 months.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


B. Accept metal fabrications on-site in labeled shipments. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect metal fabrications from damage by exposure to weather.

1.04 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS – STEEL

A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B.


C. Plates: ASTM A 283. D. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade B Schedule 40. E. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304. F. Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for

exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring indicated items to other types of construction.

G. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307 galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M for galvanized

components. H. Welding Materials: AWS D 1.1; type required for materials being welded. I. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fast-curing, lead and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd

primer complying with MP1 #79. J. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20 Type II organic zinc rich. K. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without

failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to

comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. The following is a list of principal items only. Refer to drawings for items not specifically

scheduled.

B. Ledge and Shelf Angles, Plates not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of masonry; prime paint finish, size as indicated, galvanized at all exterior locations.

C. Lintels: Size as indicated, minimum bearing 8 inches on ends, galvanized at all exterior

locations.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to Site.

B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds


D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;

consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related

components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

G. Galvanize steel items embedded in concrete or installed in exterior construction.

2.04 METAL LADDERS

A. Comply with ANSI A143.3, unless otherwise indicated.

B. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1 C. Space Side-rails: 18 inch apart unless otherwise indicated. D. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches with welded or bolted

brackets, made from same metal as ladder. E. Fit rungs in centerline of side-rails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. F. Provide non-slip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide

granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.

G. Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners. H. Prime interior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.

2.05 METAL BOLLARDS

A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe ¼ inch wall-thickness steel shapes, as indicated. Cap bollards with ¼ inch thick steel plate.

B. Fabricate bollards with 3/8 inch thick steel base-plates for bolting to concrete slab where

indicated. Where bollards are to be anchored to sloping concrete slabs, angle base-plates for plumb alignment of bollards.

2.06 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to

complete the work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.


C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.07 FACTORY APPLIED FINISHES – STEEL

A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.

B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime paint items with one coat except where galvanizing is specified. D. Galvanized Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123. Provide

minimum 1.25 oz/sq. ft. galvanized coating. E. Galvanized Non-Structural Items: Galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 123. Provide

minimum 1.25 oz/sq. ft. galvanized coating.

2.08 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.

B. Maximum Offset between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation from Plant: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

2.09 INTERIOR DECORATIVE BAR GRILLES

A. Grilles shall be of aluminum construction. Finish shall be manufacturer’s standard 2-part polyurethane paint system. Color shall be as selected by Professional from manufacturer’s full range of available colors.

B. Grille core construction shall be 1/8 inch thick blades, straight bar, ½ inch on center with 0

degree deflection. Provide support bars at 12 inches on center. C. Fabricate grilles of core construction with flanged angle frame, overall size as indicated.

Provide multiple sections to form overall size. D. Complete with fastening lug brackets or angles for hidden fasteners. E. Unit shall be tested to provide minimum 67 cfm/foot for a 4 foot wide grille at a duct pressure

of 200 fpm. F. Fasteners: As required for substrate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean strip primed steel items to bare metal where Site welding is required.

B. Supply steel items required to be embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate sections.

C. All exterior miscellaneous steel shall be galvanized and prime painted, ready for field

finishing.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.

B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

C. Field weld components indicated on Shop Drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D 1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to Site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not galvanized, except surfaces to be in

contact with concrete. G. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal

fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

H. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,

masonry, or similar construction. I. Corrosion Protection: Coated concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact

with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.04 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,

including manufacturers’ written instructions and requirements.


3.05 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS

A. Anchor bollards to existing construction with expansion anchors bolts. Provide four ¾ inch bolts at each bollard, unless otherwise indicated. Embed anchor bolts at least 4 inches in concrete.

B. Anchor bollards in concrete in formed or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches deep and ¾ inch larger than OD of bollard. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with non-shrink, non-metallic grout; mixed and place to comply with grout manufacturer’s written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch, toward bollard.

3.06 INSTALLING INTERIOR DECORATIVE BAR GRILLES

A. Install where indicated on drawings. Secure with manufacturer’s hardware or manufacturer’s

recommended hardware.

B. Secure plumb and level. Align multiple sections for bars to align.

C. Locate grille colors where indicated.


A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: ¼ inch per story or for every 12 feet in height whichever is greater, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: ¼ inch.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: ¼ inch.

3.08 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair

galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000

Rev. 9/13 Section 055200 - Metal Railings KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 055200

METAL RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes stainless steel pipe and tube handrails and railing systems.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASTM for railing-related terms apply to this Section.

1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: In engineering handrail and railing systems to withstand structural loads indicated,

determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on ASTM standards.

B. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Engineer, fabricate, and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM for structural performance based on the following: 1. Testing performed in accordance with ASTM.

2. All applicable building codes which have jurisdiction.

3. Prevent deterioration by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with

incompatible materials.

4. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of handrails and railings to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, connections and other detrimental effects. Base design calculation on actual surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss.

5. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.

B. Product data for each type of product specified.

C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of handrails and railings including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of work.


D. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on components indicated below that are of the same thickness and metal indicated for final unit of Work.

1. 6-inch long sections of each distinctly different linear railing member including handrails,

top rails, posts, and balusters.

2. Fittings and brackets.

3. Welded connections.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain handrails and railing systems of each type and material from a single manufacturer.

B. Contractor Responsibility: Engineer handrails and railing systems to meet all State and local codes.

1.06 STORAGE

A. Store handrails and railing systems in clean, dry location, away from uncured concrete and

masonry, protected against damage of any kind. Cover with waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene sheeting; allow for air circulation inside the covering.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurement before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.

1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows:

1. Mount handrails only on completed portions of the work. Do not support handrails

temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering handrails and railing systems that may be incorporated in the Work include but are not limited to the following stainless steel pipe and tube railing systems:

1. Blum: Julius Blum & Co., Inc. 2. Braun: J.G. Braun Co. 3. Crane Veyor Corp. 4. Moultrie Manufacturing Co. 5. Newman Bros., Inc. 6. Sterling Factories, Inc. 7. Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. 8. Wagner: R & B Wagner, Inc.


2.02 METALS

A. General: Provide metal forms and types that are free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit. Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting seam marks, roller marks, stains, discoloration, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

B. Stainless Steel: Alloy and temper recommended by stainless steel producer and finisher for

type of use and finish indicated on plans.

C. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

2.03 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT

A. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory pre-packaged, non-shrink, non-staining,

hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is recommended for exterior use by manufacturer.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement:

a. “Super Por-Rok”; Minwax Construction Products Division. b. “Quikrete”; Quikrete Companies. c. “Crystex”; L&M Construction Chemical, Inc.

2.04 WELDING MATERIALS, FASTENERS, AND ANCHORS

A. Welding Electrodes and Filler Metal: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as

recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other Construction: Select fasteners of the type, grade,

and class required to produce connections that are suitable for anchoring railing to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loading.

1. For stainless steel railings provide fasteners fabricated from type 304 stainless steel.

C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components: Use fasteners of same basic metal as

the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of handrail and railing components and

for their attachment to other work, except where otherwise indicated.

D. Cast-In-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, load imposed within a safety factor of 4, as determined by testing per ASTM conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory.

1. Cast-in-place anchors.


2.05 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of hollow members, post spacing, and anchorage, but not less than those required to support structural loads.

1. Pipe hand railing size shall be 1-1/4” IPS (1.66 O.D.).

B. Preassemble railing systems in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and

assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows:

1. By bending.

D. Form simple and compound curves by bending pipe in jigs to produce uniform curvature for

each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of pipe throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of pipe.

E. Welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connection of members by

welding. For connections made during fabrication, weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion

resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around

5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that

no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent.

F. Non-Welded Connections: Fabricate railing systems and handrails for connection of

members by means of railing manufacturer’s standard concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using epoxy structural adhesive where this

represents manufacturer’s standard splicing method.

G. Welded Connections for Stainless Steel Pipe: Fabricate pipe handrails and railing systems for connection of members by concealed internal welds, which eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer’s standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.


H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide manufacturer’s standard wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnection of handrail and railing members to other construction.

I. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting handrails and railing systems to

concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loadings imposed by handrails and railing systems. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

J. For railing posts set in concrete, provide preset sleeves of steel, not less than 6 inches long

and inside dimensions not less than ½ inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with steel plate forming bottom closure.

K. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs from exposed cut edges.

L. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated.

Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

M. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware,

screws, and similar items.

N. For handrails and railing systems that are exposed to exterior or to moisture from condensation or other sources, provide weep holes or other means for evacuation of entrapped water in hollow sections of railing members.

O. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

P. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at the

edge of open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated for connection to, and centered between each railing post.

2.06 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application

and designations of finishes.

B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.

Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. Provide finishes as designated on drawings.

2.07 INTERIOR HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

A. Material: Steel pipe, ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise required

by structural loads.

B. Finish: Wear-resistant paint, gloss finish.


2.08 EXTERIOR HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS

A. Material: Type 304 stainless steel or aluminum tube or pipe, ASTM B 429, alloy 6063-T6.

B. Finish:

1. Stainless Steel: Bright, directional polish; No. 4 finish.

2. Aluminum: Factory-applied baked enamel finish. Field-applied finishes are not acceptable.

C. All fasteners shall be stainless steel. Fasteners shall be concealed as much as design will

allow.

D. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Sterling Fabricated Systems 2. Julius Blum & Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation

of anchorages, such as sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete as masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Details and connections shall be carefully made and fitted, with special care exercised to

produce a thoroughly neat appearance; make pieces in accordance with detail shop drawings; members shall be true to length so assembling may be done without fillers, except where required by details; allow no projecting edges or corners where different members are assembled; do mitering and blocking precisely.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints.

C. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of

handrails and railings. Set handrails and railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free from rack.

D. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of handrails and railing components that have been

finished after fabrication and are intended for field connection.

E. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of ¼ inch in 12 feet.

F. Align rails so that variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed ¼ inch in 12 feet.

G. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where

necessary for securing handrails and railings to in-place construction.


H. Railing system shall be fabricated to match details and shall meet OSHA standards. Provide additional intermediate rails where indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, the top of the top rail shall be 34" above walking surface and the centerline of the second rail shall be installed 8" below the centerline of the top rail. Top railing for stairs shall not be more than 34" nor less than 30" above tread. Provide minimum 3" clearance on single pipe stairway handrails supported on brackets from a wall.

I. Post spacing for walks and ramps shall be adequate to meet loading requirements, but shall

not exceed 6'-0" o.c. maximum, or as shown on drawings. Post spacing for stairs shall be adequate to meet loading requirements, but shall not exceed 8'-0" o.c. maximum.

J. All connections shall be continuously fillet welded and ground smooth.

K. Posts shall not interrupt the continuation of the top rail at any point along the railing, including

corners and end terminations. The top surface of the top railing shall be smooth and shall not be interrupted by projecting fittings.

L. Provide for expansion and contraction in railings. Expansion joints must align with those in

the structure to which the handrail is attached. Post spacing shall be located 1'-0" maximum to the right or left of expansion and contraction joints.

M. Railings and connections shall be capable of withstanding a concentrated load of at least 200

pounds applied in any direction at any point on the rail.

N. Handrail post shall be base flange mounted unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Stringer

connections shall be as detailed on drawings.

O. Design mounting flange and anchoring system to meet the loading requirements with a minimum safety factor of 4.

P. Permanent setting in concrete shall have posts set in openings cast in concrete and set in

non-shrink, expanding grout. Any damage to concrete stairs or walks shall be repaired by Contractor at no expense to the University.

Q. Contractor to verify dimensions on site prior to fabrication.

R. Erect handrails and railings to correct lines and levels, plumb and true, in correct relation to

adjoining work. Secure parts in rigid, durable manner. Provide concealed connections wherever possible.

S. Provide anchors and inserts in sufficient number for proper fastening of stainless steel items;

embed anchors in concrete so as to accurately align metalwork at proper level.

3.03 ANCHORING POSTS

A. Adjust handrails and railing systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at interval indicated but not less than that required by design loading.

B. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After

posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer’s directions.


1. Non-shrink, non-metallic grout or anchoring cement.

C. Leave anchorage joint exposed, wipe off surplus anchoring material, and leave 1/8-inch buildup, sloped away from post. For installations exposed on exterior or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout manufacturer’s directions.

3.04 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Non-welded Connections: Use manufacturer’s standard mechanical or adhesive joints for

permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws with plastic filler cement colored to match finish of handrails and railing systems.

B. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints at locations indicated but not further apart than

required to accommodate thermal movement. Provide slip-joint internal sleeve extending 2 inches beyond join on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint within 6 inches of post.

3.05 ANCHORING RAIL ENDS

A. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with round flanges connected to rail ends and

anchored into wall construction with post-installed anchors and bolts.

B. Anchor rail ends to metal surfaces with oval or round flanges.

1. Connect flanges to rail ends using non-welded connections.

2. Blot flanges to metal surfaces.

3.06 ATTACHMENT OF HANDRAILS TO WALLS

A. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.

B. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural

loads.

C. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows:

1. Use type of bracket with pre-drilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.

2. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable.

3. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts with square heads.

3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, followed by rinsing with clean water.


3.08 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railing systems and handrails from damage during construction period by use of temporary protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so that no evidence

remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.


Rev. 9/13 Section 061000 – Rough Carpentry KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 061000

ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Utility shelving. 4. Wood furring.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless

otherwise indicated.

B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction.

C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS - Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component

materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used, net amount of preservative retained, and chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.

2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.

3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of

treatment.

B. Steel Certifications: Provide steel certifications for ferrous metal fasteners, hardware, accessories and other miscellaneous steel products covered by the Pennsylvania Steel Act.


C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For the following, showing compliance with building code in

effect for Project:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Power-driven fasteners. 3. Powder-actuated fasteners. 4. Expansion anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors. 6. Building wrap.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities

having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.


A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air

circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

1. Pressured Treated Wood:

a. “Advanceguard”; Osmose (770-233-4200). 2.02 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the

American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.

3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for

moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-

inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.


B. Wood Structural Panels:

1. Plywood: DOC PS 1.

2. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated.

3. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction

Guide: Residential & Commercial."

4. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. 2.03 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: All lumber that is not in contact with the ground

and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX).

1. The following preservative chemicals are not permitted:

a. Chromated copper arsenate (CCA). b. Ammoniacal, or amine, copper quat (ACQ).

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and

15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by

the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in

contact with masonry or concrete.

2. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the

following:

1. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Blocking. 3. Cants. 4. Nailers. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds.


B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species:

1. Mixed southern pine; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north); NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; NELMA. 5. Northern species; NLGA.

C. For exposed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of

the following species and grades:

1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine;Premium or 2 Common (Sterling)] grade; NELMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Western red cedar, A grade; NLGA or WWPA.

D. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or Hem-fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or Spruce-pine-fir, Construction or 2 Common; NELMA, NLGA,

WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA. 5. Northern species, No. 2 Common grade; NLGA. 6. Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Commongrade; WCLIB or WWPA.

E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots

capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.05 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements

specified in this Article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.

D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads

and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6);

with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.


H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that

is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and

fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too

small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber

and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,

complying with the following:

1. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer and the building code.

E. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.

F. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and

fill holes with wood filler. 3.02 WOOD, GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to

shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with

surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement.


C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.03 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA

Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Underlayment:

a. Screw to subflooring. b. Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends.

3.04 SHEATHING TAPE APPLICATION

A. Apply sheathing tape to joints between sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing.

Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. END OF SECTION 061000

Rev. 9/13 Section 062000 - Finish Carpentry KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 062000

FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 REFERENCES

A. ANSI A 208.1 – Wood Particleboard. B. AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) – Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards

Illustrated. C. NEMA LD 3 (National Electric Manufacturer’s Association) – High Pressure Decorative

Laminates. D. NBS PSI – (National Institute of Standards and Technology) – Construction and Industrial

Plywood. E. NBS PS20 – (National Institute of Standards and Technology) – American Softwood Lumber

Standard.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, assembly details, profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and accessories, to a minimum scale of 1/1/2 inch to 1 foot.

C. Product Data:

1. Submit solid surfacing manufacturer’s product data.

2. Submit laminate manufacturers product data for plastic laminate selections.

3. Submit product data for hardware, grommets as specified.

D. Samples:

1. Submit two samples of wood trim 10 inch long; wood panels, 12 inch square.

2. Submit two samples of selected laminates, solid surfacing, panels and shop finishes.

E. Certification: Submit copy of fabricator’s AWI Quality Certification Program license.


A. Perform work in accordance with AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) Architectural

Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated. Grade as indicated.

1.04 PRE-INSTALLTION MEETING

A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work.




B. Protect work from moisture damage.


A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.07 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated

and adjacent components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Finish schemes indicated represent a portion of the complete building finish scheme. A finish scheme must be selected in its entirety for all finishes specified for the project.

B. Selection of materials from multiple finish schemes will not be acceptable. Choose one

complete scheme. C. No substitutions will be allowed.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. High Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, GP50 for horizontal surfaces, GP28 for vertical surfaces, CL20 for cabinet liner surfaces, BK20 for undecorated backing sheets, PF42 for post forming, thru color.

B. Wood Particleboard: ANSI A 208.1 Type 1; composed of wood chips or sawdust, medium

density, made with water resistant adhesive; sanded faces. C. Hardwood Lumber PS20: AWI Grade premium grade, maximum moisture content of 6-8

percent. D. Softwood Plywood: PS 1 Grade C-D softwood plywood core; type of glue recommended for

application. E. Solid Surfacing: Cast, non porous, filled polymer with through body color conforming to matte

finish with a glass range of 5-20.

F. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.

G. Interior Wood Railings and Wood Caps: Clear, kiln-dried hard maple, for clear finish.


H. Solid Surfacing Integral Vanity Bowl: As manufactured by same manufacturer as solid surfacing material; conform to ANSI Z124.3 and 124.6; same material as solid surfacing; comply with ADA standards.

I. Homasote: Homasote panels shall be a finely sanded, soft-textured formal dehyde-free tack-

board surface; of 100 percent recycled wood fiber; 3/8 inch thick; available in 4’ x 8’ sheets; square edges; 31 pounds per panel. Panels shall have a Class A fire rating and be fire resistant.

J. Interior Decorative Bar Grilles: As specified in Section 055000, Metal Fabrications. K. Teak Wood: Tectona Grandis species; clear grade. All material shall be surfaced smooth on

four sides with eased edges, kiln dried, free of knots. L. Stainless Steel: Sheet, strip, plate and flat bars shall conform to ASTM A 666; pipe shall

conform to ASTM A 312, Schedule 40; all material shall be free of surface blemishes. M. Wood trim shall be hardwood such as maple or oak. Avoid use of softwoods.

2.03 HARDWARE

A. General: Manufacturer’s standard, but not less than ANSI 156.9 Type 2 (Institutional), satin finish stainless steel or dull chrome finish on brass, bronze, or steel.

B. Hinged Door Hardware: Hinged doors shall be mounted with heavy duty N.S.F. approved

hinges with Component Hardware Group, Model No. P62-1010 pulls, or equal. Catchers shall be heavy-duty magnetic type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Drawer Hardware: Slides shall be 200 pounds minimum capacity per pair, 300 series

stainless steel, full extension, side-mounting, self-closing type, with stainless steel ball-bearings and positive stops; Component Hardware Group Series S52, or equal. Pulls shall be Component Hardware Group, Model No. P62-1012 or equal.

D. Sliding Door Hardware: Sliding doors shall be mounted on large, quiet ball bearing rollers in

14-guage stainless steel overhead tracks, and be removable without the use of tools. Bottom of cabinet shall have stainless steel guide-pins and not channel tracks for doors.

E. All hardware shall be identified with manufacturer’s name and number, so that broken or

worn parts may be replaced. F. All furniture, casework, cabinets, etc., included under this Section which includes installed

locks shall be furnished with not less than 10 copies of each key used.

2.04 SHELVING

A. Shelving shall be ¾ inch thick plywood shelves with plastic laminate covering where indicated or painted surface.

B. Adjustable Standards and Brackets: Surface mounted, 5/8 inch wide, slotted, BHMA No.

BB4071, zinc plated steel. Brackets shall be zinc plated steel, width for shelves. C. Provide two standards per 4 feet length of shelving, unless indicated otherwise.


D. For constructed shelving and shelving units, construct from lumber as specified in Section 061000, Rough Carpentry.

E. Heavy Duty Support Brackets: Shall conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.16, B04041, powder-

coated steel. F. Heavy Duty Hanging Support Bracket: Shall conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.16, B04051,

powder-coated steel.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive for High Pressure Decorative Laminates and Solid Surfacing: Waterproof type recommended by material manufacturer to suit application.

B. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application. C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. D. Lumber for Shimming, and Blocking: Softwood lumber of pine species. E. Veneer Edge Band: Standard wood veneer edge band matching face veneer. F. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. G. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color. H. Casework Grommets: Shall be a black plastic desk style grommet; round design; two part to

complete close opening; create pass-thru for wires and cable; minimum 3 inch diameter. I. Scale Support Arm: Chrome plated steel rod, minimum ¼ inch diameter with raised knob

end, minimum 10 inch extension from wall; complete with wall mount bracket with two holes for minimum 3/16 inch diameter fasteners; style PKV3 as manufactured by Knape & Volt or approved equal.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate to AWI Premium standards, unless noted otherwise. Fabricate caps and rails to

AWI Section 300, Premium Standards.

B. Shop assembles work for delivery to Site, permitting passage through building openings. C. Fit exposed sheet material edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece for full length

only. D. Cap exposed high pressure decorative laminate finish edges with material of same finish and

pattern. E. Shop prepare and identify components for book match grain matching during Site erection. F. When necessary to cut and fit on-site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide trim for scribing and Site cutting.


G. Apply high pressure decorative laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners.

H. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse face of high pressure decorative laminate finished

surfaces. I. Fabricate and install molding, panels and other trim where indicated. J. Solid surfacing material installation and fabrication shall be by a trained personnel and

Certified as a Commercial Installer of specified product to be used. K. All fabrication and installation of solid surfacing material, and all components attached to or

installed in or through shall be in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. L. Fabricate wood railings to profile indicated. M. Solid surface back and side splashes shall be size as indicated, adhere with silicone

adhesive; straight cut. N. Homasote panels shall be fastened to walls, in sizes, and locations indicated. Cut, handle

and finish panels as recommended by manufacturer.

2.07 FABRICATION – CABINETS

A. Exposed Stock: May be glued-up for width, and slight discoloration or variance in grain will be allowed. Use of plywood in lieu of solid stock will be allowed if visible edges are banded. When intended for a transparent finish, the face of softwood plywood may be more than one piece of well-joined veneer reasonably matched for color and grain. Pitch pockets, circular patches or open defects will not be acceptable. Softwood or hardwood plywood for an opaque finish may contain sound defects which shall not be visible after two coats of paint are applied.

B. Semi-Exposed Portions: May be of other species than exposed portions. Unless otherwise

specified, semi-exposed material, except drawer sides, backs, and bottoms, may be any combination of the following:

1. Sound, dry lumber which may be glued-up for width and with slight stain or other minor

blemishes.

2. A-B INT-APA rotary cut Douglas fir plywood.

3. Economy grade hardwood plywood. Drawer sides and backs shall be sound, dry lumber with slight stain or other minor blemishes. Drawer bottoms may be rotary cut Douglas fir plywood A-D INT-APA or 1/8 inch tempered hardboard.

C. Visible Edges: Semi-exposed plywood shall be edge banded.

D. Cabinet Ends and Divisions: Solid stock shall be not less than ¾ inch in thickness. Plywood

ends and divisions shall not be less than 5/8 inch in thickness.


E. Shelves: Minimum of ¾ inch thickness. Shelves with unsupported spans over 3 feet in length shall be a minimum of 1 inch thick. Shelves with supports 3 feet or less oc at front and back or at least two-thirds of the depth of the shelf may be a minimum of ¾ inch thick.

F. Adjustable Shelves: Supported by metal standards and brackets. G. Open Ends: Skeleton frames against walls will not be permitted. H. Web Frames: Mortised and tenoned or grooved and stub tenoned or doweled and glued, and

sanded. I. Cabinet Bodies: ¾ inch stock. Construction in general, design permitting, shall consist of

solid vertical members of lumber or plywood, with intermediate web frames, and with web frames or continuous stretchers at front and back under counter tops. Web frames and stationary shelves shall be dadoed into vertical members of the cabinet body. When banks of drawers operate on metal side runner guides, intermediate web frames will be required only at 2 feet maximum spaced intervals.

J. Bottoms: Minimum ¾ inch thick and shall be dadoed into exposed ends. Bottoms may

extend beyond concealed ends, or shall be dadoed into concealed ends if the end runs through. Bottoms of upper cabinets shall conform to the thickness requirement for shelves as noted above. Horizontal members of the face frame shall not be considered as support.

K. Face Frames: Not less than ¾ inch thickness, with members mortised and tenoned or

doweled and glued, with joints tight and true. Face frames shall be fully glued and nailed to cabinet bodies.

L. Backs: At least ¼ inch plywood or 1/8 inch tempered hardboard, rabbeted into exposed ends

and securely attached to cabinet bodies. Joints in back shall occur only at nailable divisions, or shall be splined and reinforced. Exposed backs or partition, island or peninsula cabinets shall be of plywood, ¾ inch minimum thickness, ¾ inch solid stock, or of plywood 3/8 inch minimum thickness secured to a mortised and tenoned or doweled frame having members not exceeding 16 inches oc in one direction. Counter fronts shall be similarly constructed.

M. Drawer Fronts: Dove-tailed or lock-jointed and glued and nailed or stapled to sides. Backs

shall be dove-tailed or lock-jointed or dadoed and glued into sides. Bottoms shall be plowed into the fronts and sides and securely attached to the backs, either by plow or by gluing and nailing or stapling. Drawer bodies shall be of solid stock except plywood fronts may be used, provided they are edge banded. Minimum thickness for fronts shall be ¾ inch, for sides and backs ½ inch.

N. Drawers: Equipped with metal full extension side runner guides capable of supporting 50

pounders per pair. All drawers shall be neatly fitted for smooth operation. Stops shall be provided at the back of both sides of all drawers.

O. Surface Nailing: Through unfinished counter tops is permitted only if the top is of softwood.

Hardwood or other counter tops shall be attached with concealed metal clips or similar fastenings.


P. Doors: Of such type and design as indicated. Sliding doors shall be installed on suitable track with sheaves or hangers of a type optional with the manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. Provision shall be made to receive door catches. Hinges flush doors shall stop against the bottom of the cabinet and a continuous stop shall be provided at the top of the door opening. Sliding doors shall have a continuous vertical filler stop in the opening behind the face frame and in front of the rear sliding door.

Q. Scribing: Provision shall be made as required for scribing, or scribe molds shall be provided

for face frames, cabinet ends, exposed tops and bottoms of upper cabinets. R. Nailing Strips: Not less than ½ inch thickness shall be provided at top and bottom of case

backs. S. Laminated Plastic Tops and Splashes:

1. Edge covering shall be self edged, rolled, no drip, with integral coved backsplash, conventional square backsplash, and top of splash shall be square with self edge. Where self-edge trim is used, the top laminate may extend over the edge laminate and be beveled.

2. Core material for tops and splashes shall be ¾ inch minimum thickness and shall be

rotary cut or other close grained hardwood plywood with minimum voids in the second ply.

3. Surface material shall be high pressure plastic laminate conforming to NEMA

specifications. Tops and splashes shall be a minimum of 1/16 inch or .050 inch post forming grade. Backing sheets shall be a minimum of .020 inch.

4. The laminated plastic covering shall be glued to the core with Type II (Water Resistant)

adhesive at 15 pounds per square inch minimum pressure, or with contact cement applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and using a minimum of 50 pounds per square inch pressure measured at the glue line.

5. Exposed edges of core material shall be neatly and entirely covered by a trim. Where

tops are subject to excessive moisture, edges shall be sealed before metal trim or sink rim is installed.

. 6. Metal trim, when used, shall be of a type which will resist stain and corrosion.

7. Joints shall be neatly and carefully made. Care shall be taken to make joints watertight,

and connecting surfaces shall be flush within the manufacturing tolerances of the process used. Tops which require a field joint shall, if practicable, be joined with blot-up type metal fasteners.

8. Exposed edges shall be eased.

9. The underside of tops with plywood or particle board core shall have a one coat

application of sealer.

10. Plastic tops requiring more than one sheet of laminate shall have the plastic pre-matched to minimize color variation and shall be fabricated from 8-foot minimum lengths or the longest sheet lengths available.


11. Where back splashes are required, square end splashes at wall or closed end shall also be furnished. Splashes shall match backsplash height except where indicated otherwise or where job conditions do not permit.

2.08 EXTERIOR WOOD BENCH

A. Bench shall be constructed of solid teak wood species material.

B. Construct benches with mortise and tenon joinery, wooden dowels and marine grade brass or

stainless steel fasteners where required. C. Remove all tool marks and stretch marks or blend into finish on exposed stainless steel

surfaces. D. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated

for exposed stainless steel finishes free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each metal piece.

2.09 SHOP FINISHING

A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

B. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations. C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler which matches surrounding surfaces

and of types recommended for applied finishes. D. Stain, seal, and varnish exposed to view surfaces. E. Seal internal surfaces and semi-concealed surfaces. F. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials. G. Stainless steel finish shall be No. 6, dull finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this Section are placed and ready to receive this work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI quality standard, to match fabrication.

B. Renovation Work: Finish carpentry shall match adjacent construction unless otherwise

approved by the University.

C. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.


D. Install work as indicated and as required for proper attachment. Assemble railings at goosenecks, corners and splices with rail bolts and glue.

E. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not

use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. F. Install hardware and accessories as required. G. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts.

After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non-shrink, non-metallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer’s written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.

H. Preparation for Site Finishing:

1. Set exposed fasteners. Apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth.

2. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 099000, Painting and Coating.

3. Before installation, prime paint surfaces of items or assemblies to be in contact with

cementitious materials.


A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch.

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.


Rev. 9/13 Section 075700 – Coated Foamed Roofing KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 075700

COATED FOAMED ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Spray-applied, polyurethane foam insulation. 2. Elastomeric roof coatings on both new and existing roofing. 3. Mineral granules. 4. Patching of existing roofing from renovations due to M&E equipment. 5. Trench-type roof drain.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking, curbs, cants, and nailers. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for foam stops, roof penetration

flashings, and counterflashings. 3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Watertightness: Provide coated foamed roofing that is watertight and will not permit the

passage of water.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide polyurethane foam, elastomeric coatings, and miscellaneous roofing materials that are compatible with one another and able to bond to substrate under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by coated foamed roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Roofing System Design: Provide a coated foamed roofing system that is identical to systems

that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift pressure calculated according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 165 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 130 lbf/sq. ft. 3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 90 lbf/sq. ft.

D. FMG Listing: Provide roofing system and component materials that comply with

requirements in FMG 4450 for steel roof decks and FMG 4470 for roof covers as part of a foamed roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings.

1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A- 120. 2. Hail-Resistance Classification: MH.


1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Samples for Verification: For coated foamed roofing, prepared on Samples of size indicated

below:

1. Samples, 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm), on rigid backing, showing polyurethane foam of thickness required and stepped coatings in colors required to illustrate buildup of coated foamed roofing.

C. Qualification Data: For SPFA-qualified Installer and applicators.

D. Steel Certifications: Provide steel certifications for ferrous metal fasteners, plates,

accessories and other miscellaneous steel products covered by the Pennsylvania Steel Act.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for coated foamed roofing.

F. Field quality-control reports.

G. Maintenance Data: For coated foamed roofing to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is approved, authorized, or licensed by roof

coating manufacturer for installation of manufacturer's product over polyurethane foam.

1. Engage an installer who participates in and who has fulfilled requirements of the SPFA Accreditation Program for company accreditation and individual applicator accreditation for personnel assigned to work on Project.

2. Applicator shall have experience with installing the specified roof system on projects of

similar size and complexity. Applicator shall have installed successfully in the last five years, 600,000 square feet of work as specified in this section. Provide list of referenced projects identifying project names, locations, dates and Owner’s telephone number. At time of bid submission, provide verification that applicator is currently approved by the roofing manufacturer of the Products specified to install the roofing system and products specified.

3. Installer Qualifications for the Existing Roofing Work: A qualified installer who is

approved, authorized, or licensed by the BASF Corporation for installation of manufacturer's product over polyurethane foam.

4. Installer shall provide the following documentation for each employee working on the site:

a. Certification of Chemical Health & Safety training conducted by either the Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance or the Center for Polyurethanes Industry (CPI).

b. Certification of completion of the OSHA 10 Hour Construction Safety Course.


B. The University will provide an independent representative to ensure the conformance of the application to these construction documents.

C. The roof coating manufacturer may retain the right to perform a post-job moisture survey, at

no expense to the Owner or Contractor.

1. If during the course of this survey wet foam is discovered, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to remove and replace the wet area at his own expense prior to warranty issuance.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to Division 01 Section "Quality

Requirements" for testing indicated.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain polyurethane foam materials from single source or producer and coating products from single, coated foamed roofing manufacturer.

F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide coated foamed roofing systems with the fire-

test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical systems per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes

of 75 and 450, respectively; ASTM E 84. 2. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108; Class A. 3. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, determined for coated polyurethane foam roofing

as part of a roof assembly.

G. Comply with recommendations in NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Spray Polyurethane Foam Roofing."

H. Comply with recommendations in SPFA AY 104, "Spray Polyurethane Foam Systems for

New and Remedial Roofing."

I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to coated foamed roofing including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Structural load limitations. b. Construction schedule. Verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,

equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. c. Certifying procedures. d. Surface preparation specified in other Sections. e. Substrate condition and pretreatment. f. Minimum curing period. g. Forecasted weather conditions. h. Special details and sheet flashings. i. Installation procedures. j. Testing and inspection procedures. k. Protection and repairs.



A. Deliver materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and

within the temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

C. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install coated foamed roofing until roof

openings, curbs, and parapets, if any, are complete and roof drains, vents, and other roof penetrations are in place.

B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather

conditions permit roofing work to be performed according to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Apply materials within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended

by roofing material manufacturers, but not below 50 deg F (10 deg C).

2. Apply materials within range of relative humidity recommended by manufacturer of each component, but not when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, nor when temperatures are less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above dew point.

3. Do not apply materials to damp or wet surfaces.

4. Do not apply primers, polyurethane foam, or coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when

such weather conditions are imminent during the application and curing period.

5. Do not apply polyurethane foam when wind conditions result in surface finish textures not complying with requirements.

6. Do not apply coatings when wind conditions prevent uniform coating application.

7. Under no conditions should the polyurethane foam or silicone be sprayed when wind

speeds exceed 25 MPH. 1.07 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or

damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. Verify the existing warranty prior to performing any cutting and patching.

B. Special New Warranty: Coated foamed roofing manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace coated foamed roofing that does not comply with requirements or that does not remain watertight within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.


2. The warranties shall be comprehensive with no preparation and no cap for repairs. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 POLYURETHANE FOAM

A. Polyurethane Foam: Rigid cellular polyurethane, spray applied, produced by the catalyzed

chemical reaction of polyisocyanates with polyhydroxyls, with stabilizers, fire retardants, and blowing agents added; and complying with ASTM C 1029, Type III, as certified by a qualified independent testing agency; and 90% minimum closed cell content in accordance to ASTM D-2856.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. BASF Corporation. b. Bayer Systems.

2. In-Place Density: 2.8 to 3.0 lb/cu. ft. (44.9 to 48.1 kg/cu. m); ASTM D 1622.

3. Thermal Conductivity: 0.16 BTU’s/in per sq. ft. Per F per inch (aged) “K” factor

according to ASTM C-177.

4. Water Vapor Permeability: 1.5 Perm/In. according to ASTM D-355.

5. Surface-Burning Characteristic: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less.

2.02 SILICONE COATINGS

A. Silicone Coatings: Provide Low Odor, Low VOC Liquid silicone elastomeric coating system,

complying with ASTM D 6694 and specifically formulated for coating spray polyurethane roofing.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide silicone

rubber coating, which is completely compatible with the polyurethane foam to which it is applied. Manufacturer of silicone rubber coating shall provide a letter stipulating its acceptability by polyurethane foam manufacturer proposed on project.

2. Base-Coat and Topcoat Composition: One- or two-component silicone. If two coats, provide contrasting color between coats.

3. Base Coat Topcoat Color: Bark Gray.

4. Topcoat Color: Light Gray.

5. Permeance: Minimum 5.0 perms (286 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) at 20 mils (0.5 mm) thick per

ASTM E 96.


2.03 SUBSTRATE BOARD

A. Thermal Barrier: Glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board, ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, 1/4 inch (6 mm).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Dens Deck” as

manufactured by G-P Gypsum Corporation or a comparable product from one of the following:

a. USG - Securock b. National Gypsum.

B. Thermal-Barrier Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates

complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FMG 4470, and designed and sized for fastening thermal barrier to substrate.

2.04 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Primer: Polyurethane foam manufacturer's standard factory-formulated primer.

B. Mineral Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules, No. 11 screen size with 100 percent

passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and 98 percent of mass retained by No. 40 (0.42-mm) sieve.

1. Color: Light gray.

2. Manufacturers: Provide granules as manufactured by either 3M Company or provide low dust roofing granules as manufactured by SESCO, or an equivalent grade approved by GE Roofing systems.

C. Sealant: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Use NT, Grade NS, Type M, multicomponent urethane, and

as recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions and for compatibility with roofing materials.

D. Sheet Flashing, Trench-type Roof Drain and Accessories: Types recommended by coated

foamed roofing manufacturer, provided at locations indicated and as recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which coated foamed roofing will be

applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements. Begin installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and substrates are dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after minimum concrete curing period recommended by coated

foamed roofing manufacturer.

C. Test concrete substrate for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.


3.02 SUBSTRATE BOARD

A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

1. Fasten thermal barrier to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in

FMG's "Approval Guide" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten thermal barrier to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions.

3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare substrate according to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written

instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, dew-free, and dry substrate for coated foamed roofing application.

B. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, curing compounds, and other contaminants from

substrate.

C. Cover and mask adjoining surfaces not receiving coated foamed roofing to prevent overspray or spillage affecting other construction. Close off roof drains, removing roof-drain plugs when no work is being done or when rain is forecast.

1. Remove masking after polyurethane foam application and remask adjoining substrates

before coating.

D. Prime substrate if recommended by coated foamed roofing manufacturer.

E. Fill, cover, or tape joints and cracks in substrate that exceed a width of 1/4 inch (6 mm). Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks before applying polyurethane foam.

3.04 POLYURETHANE FOAM APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply polyurethane foam according to ASTM D 5469 and coated foamed

roofing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fill irregularities and areas of ponding.

2. Apply the required full thickness of polyurethane foam in any specific area on same day.

3. Apply only the area of polyurethane foam that can be covered on same day with required base coating.

4. Apply polyurethane foam to avoid overspray beyond immediate area of work.

B. Apply polyurethane foam in lift thicknesses not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) and not more than

1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

C. Uniformly apply total thickness of polyurethane foam indicated, but not less than 1-1/2 inch (32 mm), to a surface tolerance of plus 1/4 inch (6 mm) and no minus.


D. Apply polyurethane foam to roof penetrations, terminations, and vertical surfaces as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, extend polyurethane foam at least 4 inches (100 mm) above elevation of adjacent roof field.

E. Surface Finish: Provide finished surface of polyurethane foam within the following range of

surface textures as defined by ASTM D 5469:

1. Texture: Smooth to orange peel.

F. Remove and replace polyurethane foam not complying with minimum surface-texture limitations. Remove defective thickness and prepare and reapply polyurethane foam with acceptable, uniform results.

G. Slope: Maintain a minimum of 1/4 inch per foot positive drainage to the drains from all points

on the roof. 3.05 COATING APPLICATION

A. Allow polyurethane foam substrate to cure for a minimum of two hours and remove dust, dirt,

water, and other contaminants before applying coating.

B. Apply coating system to polyurethane foam, according to roof coating manufacturer's written instructions, by spray, roller, or other suitable application method.

C. Apply base coat and one or more topcoats to obtain a uniform, seamless membrane free of

blisters and pinholes. Apply each coat at right angles to preceding coat, using contrasting colors for successive coats.

1. Apply base coat on same day as polyurethane foam is applied and allow it to cure.

2. Apply topcoat(s) after removing dust, dirt, water, and other contaminants from base coat.

3. Silicone Coating: Apply base coat and topcoat to a minimum dry film thickness of 22

mils.

D. Apply coating system at wall terminations and vertical surfaces to extend beyond polyurethane foam by 4 inches (100 mm), minimum.

E. Mineral Granules: Apply mineral granules over wet topcoat using pressure equipment at the

rate of 0.5 lb/sq. ft. (2.45 kg/sq. m). Remove excess granules after topcoat has cured.

F. Sealant: Apply sealant to perimeter and other terminations where indicated or required by coated foamed roofing manufacturer.

G. Aggregate: Apply aggregate uniformly over coated polyurethane foam at coated foamed

roofing manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 6 lb/sq. ft. (29 kg/sq. m) and a minimum thickness of 3/4 inch (19 mm). Spread with care to prevent puncturing coating and to minimize damage to substrate foam.


3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Testing agency will identify, seal, and certify samples of materials taken from Project site,

with Contractor present.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for any product characteristics specified or cited in coated foamed roofing manufacturer's product data.

a. 2 core samples will be required for roof areas up to 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m), and

1 core sample will be required for each additional 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m) or part thereof.

b. Slit-test samples will be taken to determine number of coats applied and dry film thickness of coating.

B. Correct deficiencies in, or remove, foam or coatings that do not comply with requirements; fill

and repair substrates and reapply materials.

C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with requirements.

D. Refill cores, repair slits, and recoat test areas.

3.07 REPAIR AND RECOATING

A. Repair and recoat coated foamed roofing according to ASTM D 6705 and coated foamed

roofing manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Where indicated, provide an application of silicone coating to the existing foam roofing in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

3.08 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING

A. Cure coatings according to coated foamed roofing manufacturer's written instructions, taking

care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. Do not permit traffic on uncured coatings.

B. Protect coated foamed roofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction

period.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


Rev. 9/13 Section 099000 – Painting and Coating KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 099000

PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY.

A. Section includes surface preparation and field application of paints and other coatings. 1.02 REFERENCES.

A. ASTM D 16 – Terminology Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D 4442 – Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-

Base Materials. C. NACE (National Association of Corrosion Engineers) – Industrial Maintenance Painting. D. NPCA (National Paint and Coatings Association) – Guide to U.S. Government Paint

Specifications. E. PDCA (Painting and Decorating Contractors of America) – Architectural Specifications

Manual. F. SSPC (Steel Structures Painting Council) – Steel Structures Painting Manual.

1.03 DEFINITIONS.

A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.04 SUBMITTALS.

A. Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit data on all finishing products. C. Samples:

1. Submit two paper chip samples, 1 x 1 inch in size illustrating range of colors available for each surface finishing product scheduled.

2. Submit two paper chip samples 6 x 6 inch in size of selected color and finish.

D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Submit special surface preparation procedures, and

substrate conditions requiring special attention. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.


B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces.


1.06 QUALIFICATIONS.

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum three

years documented experience.

1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING.

A. Section 013119 – Project Meetings.

B. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this Section.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING.


B. Deliver products to Site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

C. Container Label: Include manufacturer’s name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

D. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of

90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer’s instructions.

1.09 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS.

A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow when relative humidity is outside the

humidity ranges, or moisture content of surfaces exceed those required by the paint product manufacturer.

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees

F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candle measured mid-height at substrate surface.

1.10 SEQUENCING.

A. Sequence application to the following:

1. Do not apply finish coats until paintable sealant is applied.

2. Back prime any exposed wood trim before installation of trim.


1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS.


B. Supply 1 gallon of each color and type along with manufacturer’s color name and formula; store where directed.

C. Label each container with building name, color, type, and room locations in addition to the

manufacturer’s label.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS.

A. Manufacturers, colors and finish schemes indicated represent a portion of the complete building finish scheme. A finish scheme must be selected in its entirety for all the finishes indicated for that scheme within the building.

B. Selection of materials from multiple finish schemes will not be acceptable. Chose one

complete scheme.

C. Manufacturers, colors and sizes are indicated on the drawings.

D. No substitutions will be allowed.

E. Approved paint vendors include: 1. Sherwin Williams 2. ICI – Glidden 3. Duron

2.02 COMPONENTS.

A. Use low-sheen or semi-gloss paint for walls, and gloss paint for metals. Avoid flat paints

except for ceilings.

B. Coatings: Heavy-textured coatings where wall surface defects are significant and must be covered. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Prepare coatings:

1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogenous coating.

2. For good flow and brushing properties.

3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not

specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality.

D. Patching Materials: Latex filler, compatible with overcoat systems.

E. All paint and coating materials shall be compatible with undercoats and overcoats and over substrate. Paints and coatings shall be of suitable type for exposure.

F. No lead-containing paints shall be used, unless authorized in writing by the University.


G. Use low VOC where possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION.

A. Section 013100 – Project Management and Coordination.

B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

D. Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

E. Measure moisture content of any wood surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not

apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:

1. Wood: 12 percent.

2. Masonry, Concrete and Unit Masonry: 12 percent.

3. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.

F. Examine existing metal surfaces to determine base material.

3.02 PREPARATION.

A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. Remove or

repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.

C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes.

D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium or tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

E. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply

coat of etching primer.

F. Uncoated Metal Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned.

G. Previously Painted Surface: Remove all loose, flaking paint, dirt, and other surface

contamination. Properly prepare surface to receive new paints and coatings as recommended by paint and coating manufacturer. Scuff existing painted surfaces to remove any gloss or shine.


3.03 APPLICATION.

A. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

B. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than

preceding coat unless specified otherwise.

C. Sand metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying the next coat.

E. Apply to film thickness as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.04 CLEANING.

A. Section 017700 – Closeout Procedures. B. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place is closed metal containers,

and remove daily from site.

3.05 SCHEDULE – INTERIOR SURFACES.

A. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Enamel Finish: Except where indicated for epoxy coating, provide Semi-gloss, Alkyd, Enamel Finish. Two coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat.

a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler, minimum dry film thickness 5.0 mils,

with no open pores in block.

b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat, minimum dry film thickness 1.2 mils.

c. Finish Coat: Interior, semi-gloss, odorless, alkyd enamel, minimum dry film thickness 1.5 mils.

B. Concrete Masonry Units:

1. Epoxy Finish: Gloss.

a. Primer: Acrylic primer, minimum dry film thickness 1.5 mils.

b. First and Second Coats: Epoxy, minimum dry film thickness per coat of mils.

C. Gypsum Drywall Systems:

1. Enamel Finish: Except where indicated for epoxy coating, provide Low Luster Acrylic

Enamel Finish. Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.

a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer, minimum dry film thickness 1.2 mils.

b. First and Second Coats: Interior, low-luster, acrylic-latex enamel, minimum dry film thickness 2.8 mils.


D. Ferrous Metal:

1. Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer.

a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, alkyd-based rust-inhibiting primer, minimum dry film thickness 1.5 miles.

b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat, minimum dry film thickness 1.3mils.

c. Finish Coat: Interior, semi-gloss, odorless, alkyd enamel, minimum dry film thickness

1.3 mils.

E. Zinc-Coated Metal:

1. Semi-gloss, Alkyd Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer.

a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer, minimum dry film thickness 1.2 mils.

b. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat, minimum dry film thickness 1.2 mils.

c. Finish Coat: Interior, semi-gloss, alkyd enamel, minimum dry film thickness 1.4 mils.

F. Cotton or Canvas Covering Over Insulation:

1. Odorless Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: One coat over primer.

a. Primer: White, interior latex-based primer as specified for Gypsum Drywall Systems.

b. Finish Coat: Low Luster acrylic enamel as specified for Gypsum Drywall Systems.

G. Wood Work – Paint Finish:

1. Semi-gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer.

a. Primer: White, interior latex-based primer.

b. Undercoat: Interior, semi-gloss alkyd enamel, minimum dry film thickness 1.2 mils.

c. Finish Coat: Interior, semi-gloss alkyd enamel, minimum dry film thickness 1.4 mils.

3.06 SCHEDULE – EXTERIOR SURFACES.

A. Ferrous Metal: 1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer, dry film thickness not less than

3.0 mils.

a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer.

b. First and Second Coats: Exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.


B. Exterior Soffit Board/Wood: 1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer, dry film thickness not less than

3.0 mils.

a. Primer: Exterior grade compatible primer.

b. First and Second Coats: exterior full-gloss alkyd enamel.


Rev. 9/13 Section 220000 - Plumbing KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 220000

PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section describes basic plumbing materials and methods to include concrete work, protection of piping, inspections and tests, fireproofing and electrical work.

1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300, Submittal

Procedures. All equipment and fixtures shall be provided with principal dimensions. B. No equipment shall be ordered and no work shall be done until these drawings have been

reviewed.

C. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following:

1. All plumbing fixtures.

2. Sprinkler system calculations, drawings and components.

1.03 DEFINITIONS A. “Contractor”, when used in this section of the specifications, refers to the respective separate

contract for the Plumbing/Fire Protection Contractor.

B. The term “Final Connections”, when used separately, shall mean to provide all material, equipment appurtenances and electrical disconnects and mechanical shut-offs required to supply service to equipment furnished and set in place by others.

1.04 INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The drawings which accompany the specifications are herein designated Contract Drawings,

and are for the purpose of illustrating the general character and extent of the work and are subject to modifications by Architect or Engineer and Owner as may be found necessary or advisable either before or during the prosecution of work, and the Contractor shall conform to and abide by whatever supplementary drawings and explanations which may be furnished by the Architect or Engineer for the purpose of illustrating the work. The Architect or Engineer shall decide as to the meaning or intention of any portion of the respective specifications and drawings.

B. All work that may be called for in the specifications and not shown on the drawings, or shown

on the drawings and not called for in the specifications, shall be executed and provided by the Contractor as if described in both. This shall include all materials, devices, methods peculiar to the machinery, equipment, apparatus, or systems as described herein.

C. Drawings and specifications are the basis upon which the Contract will be based. Actual

dimensions and substrate conditions shall be checked at the job site before ordering materials or doing any work depending on such dimensions.


D. Contract drawings for Plumbing and Fire Protection work are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, ducts, conduit, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and outlets. The drawings are generally indicative of the work to be installed, and it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings or accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and arrange all his work accordingly, furnishing such offsets, hangers, fittings, traps, valves, or other devices as may be required to meet such conditions.

E. All trades shall follow the Contract Drawings in laying out their work, familiarize themselves

with all conditions affecting their work, and verify clearances in which their work will be installed.

1.05 COOPERATION

A. All contractors shall work in conjunction with the General Contractor, each other and the

Owner in order to facilitate the proper and intelligent execution of the work. B. If the contractors fail to agree on a location of their work, the Engineer’s decision will be final.

In the case of interference or lack of access for operation and maintenance of equipment, the Engineer is to decide which equipment shall be relocated, regardless of which apparatus was installed first.

C. All plumbing and fire protection equipment shall be installed so as to preserve access to all

valves, traps, junction boxes and other equipment.

D. In general, piping shall be exposed in equipment rooms, and concealed in all finished rooms. Where piping is exposed, it shall be run so as to allow maximum head-room consistent with proper pitch. No piping shall cross below the head of any window or door unless shown otherwise.

E. Exposed piping, and/or appurtenances indicated on the inside of the building, shall be

installed parallel to the building lines. All piping shall be kept as close as possible to the ceilings and walls, and columns, to take up the minimum amount of space.

F. All work shall be arranged and installed as high as possible to prevent obstruction of window

areas, and to give adequate clearance and access for operation and maintenance.

1.06 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work required under these specifications and the accompanying drawings, include all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for extension of, and providing and installing all plumbing and fire protection work, as shown on the drawings, and/or required and specified herein, excepting only items noted as being done by other contractors.

B. It is the intent and purpose of these specifications and the accompanying drawings to cover

and include under each item, material, machinery apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install, equip, adjust and put in perfect operation, the respective portions of the installation specified, and to so interconnect various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and properly operating whole.


C. Any apparatus, machinery, material and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portions of the installation in a substantial manner and in compliance with requirements stated, implied, or intended, in this specification, shall be furnished without extra cost. This shall include all materials, devices or methods peculiar to machinery, apparatus, or system, furnished or installed by the Contractor.

1. Domestic cold, hot water, hot water re-circulating and connections to all plumbing fixtures

and other special equipment requiring water connections.

2. Soil, waste and vent piping, with connections to all plumbing fixtures and other special equipment requiring soil, waste and vent connections, and connections to sanitary sewers where shown.

3. All plumbing fixtures except as indicated otherwise.

4. Insulation of piping and equipment as specified.

5. All miscellaneous pipe fittings, valves, hangers, anchors, sleeves, plates, flashings, and

appurtenances, etc., necessary for a complete installation, leaving same ready for service.

6. All testing and adjusting of the various systems.

7. Final connection to equipment provided under other contracts.

8. Cutting and Patching.

9. Certain alterations in the existing building.

10. Roof drains and rain water conductor piping and connections to storm sewers where

shown.

11. Natural gas piping to all mechanical equipment.

12. Extension of fire protection system.

1.07 ORDINANCES AND SANITARY LAWS

A. All work shall be executed according to the requirements of all state and local ordinances and regulations governing this installation. Installation shall also meet the minimum standards as set forth in the latest BOCA National Plumbing Code/1993 and those of OSHA, and the contents of these specifications and/or drawings shall not be construed to conflict therewith.

B. Provisions of equipment and installation thereof shall comply with the requirements of Code

for Energy Conservation as adopted by the Pennsylvania Department of energy.

1.08 PERMITS AND FEES

A. The Contractor shall give all requisite notices, obtain and pay for permits and pay all deposits and fees necessary for the installation of work under this contract.



A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the building and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the drawings.

1.10 LINES AND GRADES

A. The Contractor shall lay out his work and establish heights and grades in strict accordance

with drawings, the building and site grades, and shall be responsible for the accuracy of same.

1.11 DRAWINGS

A. Before starting his work, the Contractor shall examine the architectural and the plumbing

drawings and the site and if any discrepancies occur between them or between them and these specifications, he shall report same to the Architect in writing and obtain written instructions for changes in the work.

1.12 WORKMANSHIP AND METHODS

A. All work under this contract shall be completed in a first class workmanlike manner and shall

conform to the best standards of the industry. B. All materials and equipment referred to herein shall conform to the grade and quality

specified hereinafter under “Materials and Methods” and their respective headings.

1.13 REPAIR AND DAMAGE

A. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, make good to the Professional’s satisfaction, any damage to his work from the action or elements or any other causes due to neglect on the part of the Contractor.

1.14 CEILING REPLACEMENT

A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to replace all acoustic ceiling panels which are

removed in order to install or balance the system. Dirty and/or damaged panels shall be replaced with new panel identical in design, material and size as the remainder of the ceiling. If the panels have hold down clips, it shall be this Contractor’s responsibility to replace the hold down clips.

1.15 CLEAN UP

A. Daily and when directed by the Architect or Owner, this Contractor shall remove all waste and

debris resulting from his work. This Contractor shall immediately remove water present in any area resulting from leaking fittings, broken pipes, etc. or caused by defective materials or improper installation performed under this contract.

B. Upon completion of his work, and when directed by the Architect Engineer Professional, this

Contractor shall remove all dirt, foreign materials, stains and fingerprints from all equipment, fixtures, panels, plates etc. installed under this contract. Internal areas of all equipment must be cleaned of all construction dust etc prior to pre-final and/or final inspection.


1.16 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING

A. Trenching and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 312333, Trenching and Backfilling.

2 GUARANTEE

1. The Contractor shall guarantee that materials and workmanship used in the erection of this installation area as herein specified, and he shall make good any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship which become apparent within one year from date of acceptance of completed work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 QUALITY

A. All material and equipment shall be new, of standards specified herein. B. All equipment offered under these specifications shall be limited to products regularly

produced and recommended for service rating in accordance with engineering data or other comprehensive literature made available to public and in effect at the time of opening of bids.

C. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions for type and

capacity of each piece of equipment used.

D. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears. Couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded. Protection facilities shall comply with Department of Labor and Industry and/or other governing regulations.

2.02 SMOKE AND FIRE STOPPING

A. The Plumbing Contractor shall be responsible for sealing around all new piping, sleeves, and

appurtenances which penetrate floors, walls, smoke or fire partitions. Sealing system shall be U.L. listed so as to maintain the integrity of the smoke/fire rating of the penetrated structure. Refer to Architectural Drawings for structure smoke/fire rating. Openings shall be sealed with a fire barrier caulk or putty with intumescing action upon heating.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDATIONS

A. Install material and equipment per manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.02 CUTTING, PATCHING AND FINISHING

A. Cutting and patching shall be in accordance with Section 017329, Cutting and Patching.

B. This Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, patching, and finishing of existing construction for the proper installation of his equipment and materials to be installed in the existing portion of this project. This will also be required for the removal of the existing equipment and materials. All cutting shall be kept to an absolute minimum consistent with the requirements of the projects. Cutting, patching and finishing shall be done by workmen skilled in this type of work. All patching shall be done utilizing materials of the same quality and texture as the adjacent undisturbed areas. All finishing shall match the undisturbed


adjacent areas perfectly and to the satisfaction of the Architect. Painting of the final finished areas will be the responsibility of the General Contractor.

C. No cutting shall be done which may affect the building structurally or architecturally without

first securing the approval of the Architect. Cutting shall be accomplished in such a manner so as not to cause damage to the building or leave unsightly surfaces which cannot be concealed by plates, escutcheons or other construction. Where such unsightly conditions are caused, this Contractor shall be required, at his own expense, to repair the damaged areas.

D. Cutting of the construction excessively, or cutting carelessly done, shall be repaired to match

the original work by this Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Architect who will make final decision with respect to excessive or careless cutting work.

E. This Contractor shall seal all openings he has made in plenum spaces, fire rated floors,

ceilings or partitions after his work has been installed. The sealing system shall have a fire rating equal to or greater than the rating of the floor, ceiling or partition penetrated.

F. Where present equipment is removed and unused openings remain in walls, floors, partitions,

etc., this Contractor shall properly patch all such openings except as hereinafter specified under “Work by Others.” All patching and repairing shall be done by workmen skilled in this type of work and shall match present or new finishes.

G. Cutting, patching, and repairing of openings in the existing exterior walls and roof shall be by

the General Contractor.

3.03 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment where indicated and/or required for demolition. All such material removed shall not be reused in new construction work unless specifically noted and approved, and all material shall become the property of the Contractor. Contractor shall dispose all removed equipment and materials not intended for re-use, off site in accordance with all applicable Federal, State and Local Regulations. The Contractor shall consult the “Special Conditions” included in these specifications for additional information, and the “Special Conditions” shall govern should there be a discrepancy.

3.04 PROTECTION OF PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. All open ends of piping shall be closed as soon as erected with approved plugs or caps. B. All piping having finished, polished or chromium plated surfaces shall be carefully covered to

protect the finish against damage.

C. All plated piping for equipment shall be made up with non-marring wrenches and great care must be taken that this material is not scarred or defaced. Connections shall be made in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s details, and outlets being accurately located to a template, properly coordinated with plumbing and other pipe work.

3.05 INSEPECTIONS, TESTS AND ADJUSTING

A. After drainage pipes have been placed in the various trenches, they shall be inspected by the

Architect and the local Plumbing Inspector. No pipe shall be covered or concealed in any manner until approved.


B. The interior soil, waste, drain and vent piping must have the opening plugged where necessary and the piping system above the various floors filled with water to the level of the roof or top of vent pipes and allowed to stand at least 30 minutes for inspection, after which, if the lines prove tight, the water shall be drawn off and the fixture connected. Each vertical stack with its branch waste and vent pipes may be tested separately by inserting plugs at base of verticals in lieu of filling entire system in the building with water at one time. All equipment shall be isolated prior to test.

C. At the completion of all water pipe work, and before any covering is applied, the water supply

systems shall be tested and proved tight at hydrostatic pressure of 200 pounds per square inch, held for not less than two (2) hours.

D. All water piping run in chases or concealed in any manner in the building, shall be tested to

the above pressure and proven tight before the pipes are concealed or covered in any way.

E. At the completion of the work, the hot water shall be adjusted for uniform circulation. All flush valves and other parts of the work shall be adjusted for quiet operation. All automatic control devices shall be adjusted for proper operation.

F. This Contractor shall comply will all rules and regulations of the Governing Codes pertaining

to tests; furnishing and installing all test fittings to complete the above tests.

3.06 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. All piping shall be installed so as not to interfere with any electric lighting outlet which must be accurately centered and located. Special attention shall be given to this provision as regards piping on ceilings which must be kept a sufficient distance from the outlets to permit the installation of the lighting fixtures and their reflectors.

B. All piping within the building shall be run concealed as far as it is possible in the finished

portions of the building. This Contractor shall locate all necessary chases for installation by General Contractor

C. All soil and vent stacks shall be supported at their base and at each floor and all such piping

shall be rigidly secured.

D. No pipe shall pass in front of or interfere with any opening, door or window. Head room in front of openings and doors shall in no case be less than top of openings. All piping must be installed in a neat and orderly fashion and sequence.

E. Special conditions of the installation of piping are noted on the drawings or detailed.

Contractor is to take particular care to make installation as intended and required

F. Extension and alteration of the existing piping system, and the removal of certain piping, shall be done as directed and/or required, and generally as indicated on the drawings and elsewhere in these specifications.


Rev. 9/13 Section 230000 - HVAC KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 230000

HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 STIPULATIONS

A. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular, such

reference shall apply to as many such items as are required to complete the installation.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The work to be done under these specifications and the accompanying drawings, includes but is not limited to:

1. Removal and/or alteration of certain items of equipment, ductwork and piping.

2. Installation of:

a. Forced hot water piping system. b. Heat exchanger. c. Steam and condensate piping. d. Packaged air cooled chiller. e. Pumps. f. Chilled water piping system. g. Gas fired boiler including chimney and accessories. h. Propylene glycol for chilled water system. i. Expansion tanks. j. Insulation. k. Controls. l. Air handling and distribution equipment. m. Air tempering equipment. n. Ductwork. o. Grilles and diffusers. p. Air cooled condensing unit. q. Refrigerant piping. r. Automatic Temperature Control System.

B. Any other auxiliary apparatus necessary for a complete forced air, hot water and chilled water

heating and cooling system as described excepting work to be done by other contractors.


A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all measurements at the building and shall be responsible for the correctness of same. No extra compensation will be allowed on account of difference between actual dimensions and measurements and those indicated on the drawings.


1.04 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings are prepared as diagrammatic only, intended to convey the nature and scope of work required. It is not possible to show all offsets, bends and elbows required but shall be followed as closely as actual construction of the building and the work of other trades will permit. The contractor is responsible for providing all lengths of ductwork, piping, fittings and accessories required for complete and operable systems. All changes from these drawings necessary to make the work conform to the building as constructed and to fit the work of other trades, or to conform to the rules of the city or municipal bodies having jurisdiction shall be made by this Contractor and at his sole expense.

1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS

A. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 013300 of the

specifications. Certified performance data shall be provided with each of the operating equipment. All equipment shall be provided with the principal dimensions.

B. Contractor shall also furnish a drawing showing the layout of the temperature control system

and schematic diagram showing the operation.

C. No equipment shall be ordered and no work shall be done until these drawings have been reviewed and approved.

D. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the followings:

1. Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units. 2. Air Handling Unit. 3. Exhaust Fans. 4. Air Conditioning Units. 5. Air Cooled Condensing Units. 6. Packaged Air Cooled Chiller. 7. Cabinet Heaters. 8. Unit Heaters. 9. Gas Fired Boiler. 10. Sheet Metal Ductwork. 11. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. 12. Automatic Temperature Control System and Components. 13. Pumps. 14. Heat Exchanger. 15. Expansion Tanks. 16. Air Separators.

1.06 MANUFACTURERS AND SUBCONTRACTORS LIST

A. Before ordering any material or equipment unit, and not later than fifteen (15) working days

after signing of contracts, submit a list of manufacturers, Subcontractors and suppliers showing make, type, manufacturer’s name and trade designation of all materials and equipment proposed for use under this contract. Prepare list by reference to specifications.


1.07 CLEAN UP

A. Daily and when directed by the Architect, this Contractor shall remove all waste and debris resulting from his work. This Contractor shall immediately remove water present in any area resulting from leaking fittings, broken pipes, etc., or caused by defective materials or improper installation performed under this contract.

B. Upon completion of his work or when directed by the Architect this Contractor shall remove

all dirt, foreign materials, stains and fingerprints from all equipment, fixtures, panels, plates etc. installed under this contract. Internal areas of all equipment must be cleaned of all construction dust, etc., prior to pre-final and/or final inspection.

1.08 CEILING REPLACEMENT

A. It shall be the responsibility of the HVAC Contractor to replace all acoustic ceiling panels

which are removed in order to install or balance the system. All panels shall be clean and undamaged when replaced. Dirty and/or damaged panels shall be replaced with new panels identical in design, material and size as the remainder of the ceiling. If the panels have hold down clips, it shall be this Contractor’s responsibility to replace the hold down clips.

1.09 ORDINANCES

A. All work shall be done in accordance with SMACNA, NFPA and ASHRAE standards and all

federal, state and local codes and ordinances. B. Contractor is hereby specifically alerted to requirements of Act No. 287 of General Assembly

of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, which imposes specific duties on Contractor “to protect public health and safety by preventing excavation or demolition work from damaging underground lines used in providing electricity, communication, gas, oil delivery, oil product delivery, sewage, water or other service.”

1.10 CUTTING, PATCHING AND FINISHING

A. Cutting and patching shall be in accordance with Section 017329 of the specifications.

B. This Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, patching, and finishing of existing

construction for the proper installation of his equipment and materials to be installed in the existing portion of this project. This will also be required for the removal of the existing equipment and materials. All cutting shall be kept to an absolute minimum consistent with the requirements of the projects. Cutting, patching and finishing shall be done by workmen skilled in this type of work. All patching shall be done utilizing materials of the same quality and texture as the adjacent undisturbed areas. All finishing shall match the undisturbed adjacent areas perfectly and to the satisfaction of the Architect.

C. No cutting shall be done which may affect the building structurally or architecturally without

first securing the approval of the Architect. Cutting shall be accomplished in such a manner so as not to cause damage to the building or leave unsightly surfaces which cannot be concealed by plates, escutcheons or other construction. Where such unsightly conditions are caused, this Contractor shall be required, at his own expense, to repair the damaged areas.

D. Cutting of the construction excessively, or cutting carelessly done, shall be repaired to match

the original work by this Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Architect who will make final decision with respect to excessive or careless cutting work.


E. This Contractor shall seal all openings he has made in plenum spaces, fire rated floors, ceilings or partitions after his work has been installed. The material used for sealing the openings shall have a fire rating equal to or greater than the rating of the floor, ceiling or partition material.

F. Where present equipment is removed and unused openings remain in walls, floors, partitions,

etc., this Contractor shall properly patch all such openings except as hereinafter specified under “Work by Others.” All patching and repairing shall be done by workmen skilled in this type of work and shall match present or new finishes.

G. Cutting, patching, and repairing of openings in the existing exterior walls and roof shall be by

the General Contractor.

1.11 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment where indicated and/or required. All such material removed shall not be reused in the new construction work unless specifically noted or approved, and all material shall become the property of the Contractor who shall remove the unused equipment from the site unless specifically noted otherwise on the drawings. (The Heating Contractor shall consult the “Special Conditions” included in these specifications for additional information, and the “Special Conditions” shall govern should there be a discrepancy).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 QUALITY

A. All material and equipment to be furnished under this contract shall be new and shall conform

to the grade, quality and standards specified herein. Major items of equipment shall be the latest standard product as advertised in printed catalogs by reputable manufacturers for the purpose intended and shall have replacement parts available.

B. All equipment or apparatus of any one system must be the product of one manufacturer,

products of a number of manufacturers which are suitable for use in a unified or assembled system.

C. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction for type

and capacity of each piece of equipment

D. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded. Protection facilities shall comply with Department of Labor and Industry, OSHA and/or other governing regulations.

2.02 GUARANTEE

A. Contractor shall guarantee that the materials and workmanship used in the erection of this

installation are as herein specified, and he shall make good any defects due to faulty materials or workmanship which become apparent within one year from date of acceptance of completed work.

B. All compressors associated with any cooling equipment shall be provided with an extended 5

year warranty to include all required parts and labor.


2.03 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions shall be in accordance with Division 1, Section 016200 of the specifications. In the event that the incorporation into the work of an approved substituted item will require revisions or additions to the contractual requirements, the Contractor shall bear the cost of such revisions or additions to the work of all trades, and shall pay for all architectural or engineering services required at no change in the contract sum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS

A. Contractor shall obtain all inspections required by all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or

public authority having jurisdiction shall obtain certificates of such inspections and submit same to the Architect and pay all fees, charges and other expenses in connection therewith.

B. When the entire installation is completed and ready for operation and service and before final

acceptance, this Contractor shall operator the apparatus for one day, when directed, for the purpose of testing the performance of the entire system.

C. All defects made manifest by these tests shall be immediately and promptly made good by

this Contractor.

3.02 INSTRUCTIONS FOR OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Instruction for operation of equipment shall be given by this contractor for a period of eight (8) hours within two weeks after the building has been turned over to the Owner. Where special equipment is installed, The Contractor shall obtain the services of a properly qualified representative of the manufacturer who shall present himself at the building and instruct the operating personnel. This supervision shall be included in the contract price. The Contractor shall provide one video (VHS format) copy of all training sessions.

B. Upon completion of work, Contractor shall, in co-operation with Automatic Temperature

Control manufacturer, provide a complete written set of instructions mounted under plexi-glass, which shall exactly describe the required operations; such shall be mounted where directed. A separately mounted set of instructions for chilling equipment and chilled water system shall be mounted near the chiller

C. At conclusion of project, Contractor shall deliver to Owner all necessary operating and

maintenance manuals for equipment under this contract. Refer to Division 1, Section 01 77 00 of the specifications for requirements.


Rev. 9/13 Section 230553 – Identification for HVAC KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 230553

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes but is not limited to the provision and installation of all items listed

below: 1. Shop drawings. 2. Piping identification. 3. Valve identification. 4. Equipment identification. 5. Control devices and equipment identification.

B. Identification of mechanical products installed under Division 23.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASME A13.1 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) – Scheme for the Identification of

Piping Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification and a valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer’s name and model number.

C. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures,

and installation.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; including valve tag numbers.


A. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and

accessories.

B. Communicate with the Department and obtain his requirements for compliance with existing standards, color selections and other areas of coordination specified in this section. Data shall be included with submittals.



A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES, TAGS, STENCILS AND PIPE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton Name Plate Company. 2. W.H. Brady Co. 3. Lem Products Inc.

B. Nameplates:

1. 1-1/2 x 4 inches Engraved Aluminum Nameplates with black enamel background and

natural aluminum borders and letters. Size of letters shall be selected to suit each application.

2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color.

C. Metal Tags:

1. Brass with stamped letters: tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter with smooth edges.

D. Information Tags:

1. Clear plastic with printed “Danger,” “Caution,” or “Warning” and message: size 3-1/4 x 5-

5/8 inches with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

E. Tag Chart: 1. Typewritten letter size list of applied tags and location in anodized aluminum frame.

F. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: ½ inch high letters.

2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1 inch high letters.

3. Over 6 inches Outside Diameter of Insulation or Pipe: 1-3/4 inches high letters.

4. Ductwork and Equipment: 1-3/4 inches high letters.

G. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 099000, Painting and Coating, semi-gloss enamel, colors and lettering size conforming to ASME A13.1.


H. Plastic Pipe Markers: 1. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe

covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

I. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings.

J. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:

1. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil.

thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

K. Ceiling Tacks: 1. Description: Steel with ¾ inch diameter color-coded head.

2. Color code as follows:

a. HVAC equipment: Yellow. b. Fire dampers/smoke dampers: Red. c. Plumbing valves: Green. d. Heating/cooling valves: Blue.

L. Labels:

1. Aluminum, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches, adhesive backed with printed identification.

2.02 PIPING IDENTIFCATION

A. After all other specified work is performed on piping systems, all exposed and concealed piping shall be identified by means of pipe markers.

B. Pie markers shall be Opti-Code Pipe markers, pressure sensitive type or an approved equal.

C. Except as otherwise specified herein marker and legend colors shall comply with ANSI and OSHA Standards.

D. Pipe marker legends and background colors shall be coordinated with Department’s existing

standards and approved by Department.

E. Include markings for heat traced piping.

F. Furnish flow arrows to indicate direction of flow. Furnish two sets of arrows if flow can be in both directions.

2.03 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify all valves and control valves and devices installed under this Division of the

Specifications and include tag charts therefore. Attach valve tags to valves with brass “S” hooks or brass jack chain.


B. Where possible, modify existing valve tag charts to include new valve tag identification. Otherwise, provide new valve tag charts for tagged valves. Give a duplicate set to the Department.

C. Charts for tagged valves shall be provided as follows:

1. Prepare charts and insert each chart into a separate aluminum frame with plastic window,

Style No. A11P. Locate and install where directed by Department.

2. Prepare a duplicate set of charts and insert each chart into a separate plastic protective envelope consisting of two sheets of clear vinyl plastic laminated around all edges with a black opaque vinyl frame and having grommeted holes on all four sides, Style No. P. Include a length of nickel plated chain for each chart assembly. Give charts to Department.

3. Each chart shall include the following:

a. Identification number. b. Abbreviated service identification from Key to Symbols on Drawings. c. Location (floor, col. No., etc.). d. Purpose.

D. All valves to be identified shall be tagged with Style 2070 anodized aluminum tags with numbers and lettering on the tags corresponding to those on the charts. Tags shall not be smaller than 2 inches in diameter. All tags shall be of the same color as pipe marker legends on pipe in which valve is installed.

E. Tags, chart frames and plastic covers shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer.

F. Tags shall be coordinated with the Department’s existing tag system and shall be approved by the Department.

2.04 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. All mechanical equipment including Department furnished shall be identified by the name and

identification shown in the Schedules on the Drawings. Nameplates shall be 1-1/2 x 4 inches Engraved Aluminum Nameplates with black enamel background and natural aluminum border and letters. Size of letters shall be selected to suit each application. Nameplates shall be securely and permanently mounted.

B. Submit a nameplate schedule for approval.

C. Nameplates shall be coordinated with the Department’s existing nameplate system and shall be approved by the Department.

2.05 CONTROLS IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide tagging and labeling on control devices similar to as specified for valves.

B. Provide stenciled painted labels on the bottom or sides of all piping or insulation of piping,

minimum of 2 inches high, to indicate location of all control devices.

2.06 AIR VENT IDENTIFICATION


A. Provide stenciled painted labels on the bottom or sides of all piping, minimum of 2 inches high, to indicate location of all air vents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 099000, Painting and Coating.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Apply stencil painting in accordance with Section 099000, Painting and Coating. B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and paintings.

C. Nameplates: Install with sheet metal screws, drive rivets, or “pop” rivets, cement or adhesive

will not be accepted.

D. Metal Tags: Install with brass “S” hooks or brass chain.

E. Controls: Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with nameplates.

F. Valves: Identify all valves in main and branch piping with tags. Each tag shall be stamped

showing valve identification number and function or position (N.O., N.C., Balancing, Modulating, etc.).

G. Pipe markers shall be applied in the following locations:

1. At changes in direction. 2. At each valve. 3. At each tee or lateral. 4. At each point of exit and entry where pipe passes through walls, floors, partitions, or

ceilings. 5. Every 50 feet on straight runs of pipe.

H. Provide an arrow marker adjacent to each pipe marker with the arrow showing direction of flow and pointing away from pipe marker. Use double headed arrows or an arrow on each side of pipe marker if flow can be in both directions.

I. Apply markers where view is unobstructed and legend can be easily read. Apply markers in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Band the ends of all markers with banding tape of same color as marker.

J. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above

buried pipe.

K. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Located in corner of panel closest to equipment.

L. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.


Rev. 9/13 Section 230700 - HVAC Insulation KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 230700

HVAC INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes but is not limited to the provision and installation of all items listed

below:

1. Piping insulation. 2. Piping insulation jackets and accessories. 3. Equipment insulation. 4. Equipment insulation accessories. 5. Ductwork insulation. 6. Ductwork insulation accessories. 7. Acoustical duct liner.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B209 – Aluminum and Aluminum-alloy Sheet and Plate. B. ASTM C534 – Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation, Sheet and

Tubular Form. C. ASTM C547 – Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation. D. ASTM C553 – Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation. E. ASTM C612 – Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. F. ASTM C795 – Thermal Insulation for use over Austenitic Stainless Steel. G. ASTM C921 – Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulations. H. NAIMA (North American Insulation Manufacturers Association) – National Insulation

Standards. I. NFPA 255 – Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. J. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.


A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with three years

minimum experience .

B. Materials: Flame spread smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255 and UL 723.

C. Insulation Materials: Insulation materials must be manufactured at facilities certified and registered with an approved registrar to conform to ISO 9000 quality standards.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials

and thickness for each service, and locations.

B. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.


C. Manufacturer’s Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 013100, Project Management and Coordination: Delivery, storage and handling

requirements.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer’s identification, including product density and thickness or approved waterproof sheeting installed by the Contractor. Any water damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department.

C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and

mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Provide one year manufacturer warranty for manmade fiber.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 INSULATION

A. Manufacturers:

1. Johns Manville. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Armstrong.

B. Pipe Insulation.

1. Type A: Glass fiber insulation; ASTM C547; “k” value of 0.24 per inch at 75 degrees F;

noncombustible.

2. Type B: Closed cell; ASTM C534 elastomeric flexible, “k” value of 0.27 at 75 degrees F.

3. Type C: Glass fiber insulation; ASTM C795; “k” value of 0.26 at 100 degrees F; noncombustible, suitable for use over austenitic stainless steel.

4. Type D: Rigid rock wool; ASTM C547; rigid molded, asbestos free, noncombustible rock

(volcanic) wool with resin binder, “k” value of 0.57 at 550 degrees F, suitable for temperature up to 900 degrees F.


5. Type E: Calcium silicate meeting ASTM C533; Type 1, asbestos free, color coded gold throughout; “k” value of 0.42 at 300 degrees F, suitable for temperatures up to 1200 degrees F.

C. Pipe Insulation Jackets.

1. Interior Applications:

a. Vapor Barrier Jackets: High density, white Kraft reinforced with fiberglass yarn bonded to aluminum foil vapor barrier with self-sealing adhesive joints. (All service jacket).

2. Interior Applications: Exposed areas (areas not in chases or above ceilings).

a. Totally sealed (permaweld) 30 mil thick PVC insulation jacket.

3. Exterior Applications:

a. See: Aluminum Jackets. Insulation on exterior piping shall have an aluminum jacket.

D. Pipe Insulation Accessories.

1. Valve and Fitting Covers: Insulated Zeston pre-molded PVC type ASTM C921.

2. Adhesives: Waterproof type compatible with insulation and PVC jackets.

E. Equipment Insulation.

1. Type A: Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C612, Class 3; “k” value of 0.23 at 75 degrees F; with

high density, white Kraft reinforced with fiberglass yarn laminated to aluminum foil vapor barrier type facing.

2. Type B: Flexible elastomeric sheet; ASTM C534, “k” value of 0.27 at 75 deg. F.

F. Equipment Insulation Accessories.

1. Vapor Barrier Coating: Non-flammable, fire resistant, polymeric resin, compatible with

insulation.

2. Adhesives: Waterproof type compatible with insulation.

G. Ductwork Insulation (Exterior of Ductwork).

1. Type A: Flexible glass fiber; ASTM C533; “k” value of 0.25 at 75 degrees F; minimum 1.5 PCF density; with high density, aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn laminated to Kraft paper (FSK Jacket).

2. Type B: Rigid glass fiber; ASTM C612, Class 1; “k” value of 0.22 at 75 degrees F;

minimum 4.25 PCF density interior of building and 6.00 PCF density exterior of building; with high density, white Kraft reinforced with fiberglass yarn laminated to aluminum foil vapor barrier type facing. (All service jacket).

3. Type C: Flexible elastomeric sheet; ASTM C534, “k” value of 0.27 at 75 deg. F. 4. Insulation on exposed ductwork shall be rigid board type.


5. Insulation on exterior ductwork shall have several coats of mastic or PVC jacket.

H. Ductwork Insulation Accessories.

1. Adhesives: Waterproof type compatible with insulation.

2. Outdoor Jacket: PVA mastic, 2 coats, 1 at 2 gallons per 100 square feet, 1 at 5 gallons per 100 square feet, with reinforced glass cloth.

3. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 723.

4. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage, self-adhesive pad.

5. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.

I. Acoustical Duct Liner.

1. Duct liner shall meet ASTM C1071 with the air surface coated with a acrylic coating

treated with an EPA registered anti-microbial agent proven to resist microbial growth as determined by ASTM G21 and ASTM G22 and be a rigid fiberglass plenum liner board with a smooth back coating on the side toward the air stream.

2. Duct liner shall be suitable for air velocities to 5000 fpm, temperatures of 250 degrees F

mean temperature, and a NRC (Noise Reduction Coefficient) of 0.75 for 1 inch thickness in accordance with ASTM C423, mounting Type A. All properties including erosion resistance, surface burning characteristics, thermal conductivity, and sound absorption characteristics shall be in accordance with ASTM C1071.

J. Acoustical Duct Liner Accessories.

1. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive, waterproof type, ASTM E84 and E162.

2. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, welded with integral or press on head.

K. Aluminum Jackets and Accessories.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Childers Products Inc. b. R.P.R. Products Inc. c. Premetco Inc.

2. Aluminum Jackets:

a. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.016 inch thick; factory attached moisture barrier;

crimped finish.

3. Aluminum Jacket Bands:

a. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 thick aluminum.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 013100, Project Management and Coordination.

B. Surfaces prepared to receive insulation shall be clean, dry, and free from extraneous

materials.

C. Do not apply insulation until systems have been tested, are free from leaks, and have been approved.

D. Do not apply insulation to piping hat is to be electrically traced until tracing system has been

installed, tested and approved.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

B. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations.

D. On exposed piping (areas not in chases or above ceilings), located insulation and cover

seams in least visible locations.

E. On insulated piping conveying fluids below ambient temperature, (insulation with vapor barrier), insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints as specified. Seal any open ends with outdoor vapor-barrier coating.

F. On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less,

do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel and seal ends on insulation at such locations.

G. On insulation piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at

equipment.

H. On piping systems that are heat traced provide insulation with one-size oversized inner diameter to accommodate electric heat trace. Provide internal stand-offs as required.

I. Provide an insert, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation, between support

shield and piping, but under the finish jacket on piping to prevent insulation from sagging at support points. Inserts shall be cork or other heavy density insulating materials suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory fabricated inserts may be used. Insert lengths shall be as follows:

1. 1-1/2 – 2-1/2 inch diameter = 10 inches long. 2. 3 – 6 inch diameter = 12 inches long. 3. 8 – 10 inch diameter = 16 inches long. 4. 12 and over inch diameter = 22 inches long.

J. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

K. Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.


L. Insulate circulating pumps, humidifier bodies, heat exchangers, chiller evaporators and heads. Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation, if necessary. Secure insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wire, or bands.

M. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface.

On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.

N. Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal insulation around such.

O. When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.

P. Insulate entire air supply and exterior return air duct systems including fittings, joints, flanges,

fire dampers, duct coils and expansion joints. Interior return air and all exhaust are duct system does not required insulation. Supply air duct systems located in air conditioned spaces do not require insulation.

Q. Duct insulation terminating at insulated and un-insulated sheet-metal and equipment

surfaces, supports, damper fittings, access doors, walls, and similar penetration and construction points shall be sealed with outdoor vapor-barrier coating. Where lengths exceeding 24 inches are involved, secure with mechanical fasteners and speed clips spared on 18 inch centers, insulation shall be flashed with glass-cloth tape and sheet-metal trimming. Glass-cloth tape shall provide not less than 3 inch overlap, shall be in two layers, and shall be imbedded in not less than 1/16 inch dry-film thickness of outdoor vapor-barrier coating. Sheet metal trimming shall be installed after glass-cloth jacket is in place.

R. Type “A” flexible fiberglass insulation shall be secured to the duct with adhesive or

mechanical fasteners. Joints shall be sealed with sealing tape or adhesive.

S. Type “B” rigid fiberglass board insulation or Type “C” flexible elastomeric sheet shall be secured to the duct with adhesive or mechanical fasteners.

T. On exterior ductwork apply two coats of PVA mastic at rates previously specified. Embed reinforcing cloth into wet tack coat, smooth out all wrinkles and overlap all seems at least 2 inches. When complete and dry finish thickness of PVA mastic shall not be less than 1/16 inch. The mastic shall be applied so that the thickness is uniform throughout.

U. Insulate generator exhaust piping with Type “D” rigid rock wool insulation or Type “E” calcium

silicate; exhaust piping exterior of the building shall also be covered with aluminum jacket.

1. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.

2. Insulation for generator exhaust piping shall be secured to piping with aluminum jacket

bands.

V. Provide wall thimble where generator exhaust piping penetrates exterior wall. Provide flashing, welded to thimble (interior and exterior faces of wall).


W. Line all ductwork where noted on drawings with one inch acoustical duct liner.

1. Adhere with adhesive for 100 percent coverage and secure liner with mechanical fasteners on 15 inch centers maximum on top and side of ductwork with dimension exceeding 12 inches. Seal and smooth joints. Do not use nail-type fasteners. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive. Metal housings shall be provided at all leading edges of the liner.

X. Insulate all exterior steam, condensate, chilled, heating, make-up and condenser water piping

as specified fir interior piping. Valves and fittings shall be covered with mitered sections of pipe insulation. All piping, valves and fittings shall be covered with watertight fabricated aluminum jacketing system. Jacketing shall be as follows:

1. All miscellaneous accessories including straps, seals, screws, caulking mastic,

waterproofing PVA mastic, and reinforcing glass cloth shall be in complete conformance with the jacketing manufacturer’s recommendation.

2. The jacketing shall be lapped with seams located on the underside, sealed with caulking

mastic, and strapped tightly to provide a waterproof covering throughout. Use screws in addition to straps, when necessary, to produce a tight fit. On vertical lines use screws at every circumferential joint. Space screws not over 6 inches apart with a minimum of two screws per joint. Stiffen the exposed longitudinal edge of jacketing by bending a one-inch hem on the edge. Lap all joints against the weather so that water will run off the lower edge.

3. Use caulking mastic to seal circumferential laps on horizontal lines, longitudinal laps on

vertical lines, and the lap formed where jacketing meets PVA mastic waterproofing. Also, seal any opening in the jacket where there is a possibility of water entering.

4. In order to prevent galvanic action that could cause corrosion, the aluminum jacketing

shall not come in direct contact with any other metal.

5. Waterproof valves, flanges, fitting covers and irregular shapes with PVA mastic.

6. Paint PVA mastic waterproofing and exposed metal parts such as un-insulated valves, flanges, and fittings with one coat of high-heat-resistant aluminum paint. Painting shall be in accordance with Section 099000, Painting and Coating.

Y. If Type “B” insulation is utilized for piping exterior to the building, insulation must be painted with 2 coats of manufacturer’s standard coating to eliminate ultraviolet deterioration. Insulation shall be wiped clean with denatured alcohol prior to coating.

Z. Insulation on ductwork and piping “exposed to view” in occupied spaces (offices, laboratories,

corridors, etc.) shall be painted in accordance with Section 09 90 00, Painting and Coating.

AA. Identify piping in accordance with Section 230553, Identification for HVAC Piping and equipment.


3.03 MINIMUM INSULATION THICKNESS SHALL BE AS FOLLOWS: SYSTEM PIPE SIZE TYPE THICKNESS Chilled and Exterior Condenser Up to 1” A or B ½” Water and Make-up Water 1-1/4” to 2” A or B ¾” 2-1/2” and Larger A or B 1” Low Pressure Steam, 2” and Smaller A or C 1-1/2” Steam Condensate, 2-1/2” to 6” A or C 2” Pumped Condensate 8” and Larger A or C 3-1/2” Heating Water All A or C 1-1/2” High and Medium Pressure 2” and Smaller A or C 2-1/2” Steam and Steam Condensate, 2-1/2” to 4” A or C 3” Clean Steam and Clean 6” and Larger A or C 3-1/2” Steam Condensate Boiler Feedwater, Chemical Up to 2” A or C 1” Feed, Make-up Water and 2-1/2” and Larger A or C 1-1/2” Boiler Blowdown Refrigerant Suction All B 1” Refrigerant Hot Gas All B 1” (personnel protection only) Refrigerant Liquid All B 1” (winter operation only) Condensation Drains All A or B ½” Ductwork and Plenums -- B or C 1” Exposed to View Lined Ductwork -- Acoustical 1” Concealed Ductwork -- A, B or C 1-1/2” Exterior Ductwork -- B 2” Air Separators and -- A or B 1-1/2” Expansion Tanks (Cold Systems) Air Separators and -- A 1-1/2” Expansion Tanks (Hot Systems)


SYSTEM PIPE SIZE TYPE THICKNESS Chiller Evaporator -- A or B 1-1/2” And Heads Circulating Pumps -- A or B 1-1/2” Heat Exchangers, -- A 1-1/2” Flash Tanks, and Humidifier Bodies Generator Exhaust System All D or E 4” (For ductwork and piping exposed to ambient conditions in mechanical rooms, penthouses or outside, increase insulation thickness by ½ inch for all ductwork and piping except chilled water piping which shall be increased by 1 inch.)

3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation.


Rev. 9/13 Section 232200 - Steam & Condensate Piping and Pumps KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 232200

STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING AND PUMPS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes but is not limited to the provision and installation of:

1. Pipe and pipe fittings. 2. Valves. 3. Steam piping system. 4. Steam condensate piping system.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASME – Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, Sec 9 – Qualification Standard for Welding and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brazing Operators.

B. ASME B16.3 – Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300. C. ASME B16.18 – Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. D. ASME B16.22 – Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. E. ASME B31.1 – Code for Power Piping. F. ASME B31.9 – Building Services Piping. G. ASTM A53 – Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. H. ASTM A234 – Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and

Elevated Temperatures. I. ASTM B32 – Solder Metal. J. ASTM – B88 – Seamless Copper Water Tube. K. ASTM F708 – Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. L. AWS A5.8 – Brazing Filler Metal. M. AWS D1.1 – Structural Welding Code. N. MSS SP58 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Materials, Design and Manufacturer. O. MSS SP69 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Selection and Application. P. MSS SP89 – Pipe Hangers and Supports – Fabrication and Installation Practices.

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. When more than one piping system material is selected, ensure systems components are compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, unions, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

B. Use unions, flanges, and downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

Use dielectric unions where joining dissimilar materials. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections.

C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM B31.9 unless indicated

otherwise. D. Use butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.


E. Use butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Welders Certificate: Include welder’s certification of compliance with AWS D1.1.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Welders: Certify in accordance with AWS D1.1.

1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system. B. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

welders. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9 and applicable state labor

regulations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE STEAM PIPING (150 PSIG MAXIMUM)

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 80, black seamless for all sizes.

1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3 malleable iron class 250 or ASTM A234 forged steel welding type,

Class 300.

2. Joints: Threaded, or AWS D1.1 welded.

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASTM B16.22 wrought copper fittings.

2. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and solver, with melting range 430 –

535 degrees F.

2.02 MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM B16.3 malleable iron Class 125, or ASTM A234 forged steel Class 125.

B. Joints: Threaded, or AWS D1.1, welded.

2.03 LOW PRESSURE STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 80, black, seamless for all sizes. 1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3 malleable iron Class 125, or ASTM A234 forged steel Class 125.

2. Joints: Threaded, or AWS D1.1, welded.


PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Whenever work is suspended during

construction, protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Route piping in an orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls, and floors.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or

connected equipment.

F. Inserts: Provide inserts for placement in concrete work.

G. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

H. Slope steam piping one inch to 40 feet (0.25 percent) in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of pipe level.

I. Slope steam condensate piping one inch in 40 feet (0.25 percent). Provide drip trap

assembly at low points and before control valves. Run condensate lines from trap to nearest condensate receiver. Provide loops vents over trapped sections.


Rev. 9/13 Section 260000 - Electrical KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 260000

ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish and install all electrical wiring, systems, equipment and accessories in accordance

with the specifications. Provide electrical work, including all materials, necessary to connect related equipment described in other Divisions into complete and operable systems.

B. All feeder and branch power circuits shall have copper conductors and sized accordingly to

meet NEC voltage drop requirements. The conduit and raceways shall be sized accordingly.

1.02 MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

A. References to the National Electrical Code (NEC), Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) are a minimum installation requirement standard.

1.03 STANDARDS

A. All materials and equipment shall be listed, labeled or certified by Underwriters Laboratories,

Inc., where such standards have been established. Equipment and material, which are not covered by UL Standards, will be accepted provided equipment and material is listed, labeled, certified or otherwise determined to meet safety requirements of a nationally recognized testing laboratory. Equipment of a class which no nationally recognized testing laboratory accepts, certifies, lists, labels, or determines to be safe, will be considered if inspected or tested in accordance with national industrial standards, such as NEMA, or ANSI. Evidence of compliance shall include certified test reports and definite shop drawings.

1. Listed: Equipment is “listed” if of a kind mentioned in a list which:

a. Is published by a nationally recognized laboratory which makes periodic inspection of

production of such equipment.

b. States that such equipment meets nationally recognized standards or has been tested and found safe for use in a specified manner.

2. Labeled: Equipment is “labeled” if:

a. It embodies a valid label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a nationally recognized

testing laboratory such as Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

b. The laboratory makes periodic inspections of the production of such equipment.

c. The labeling indicates compliance with nationally recognized standards or tests to determine safe use in a specified manner.


3. Certified: Equipment is “certified” if:

a. Equipment has been tested and found by nationally recognized standards to be safe for use in a specified manner.

b. Production is periodically inspected by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

c. It bears a label, tag, or other record of certification.

4. National recognized Testing Laboratory:

a. A testing laboratory which is approved, in accordance with OSHA regulations, by the

Secretary of Labor.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS (PRODUCTS AND SERVICES)

A. Manufacturers Qualifications: The manufacturer shall regularly and presently produce, as one of the manufacturer’s principal products, the equipment and material specified for this project, and shall have manufactured the item for at least three (3) years.

B. Product Qualification:

1. Manufacturer’s product shall have been in satisfactory operation on three installations of

similar size and type, at this project, for approximately three (3) years.

C. Service Qualifications: There shall be a permanent service organization maintained or trained by the manufacturer which will render satisfactory service to this installation within four hours of receipt of notification that service is needed. Submit name and address of service organizations.

1.05 MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS

A. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly

engaged in the manufacture of such items, or which replacement parts should be available. Items not meeting this requirement, but which otherwise meet technical specifications, and merits of which can be established through reliable test reports or physical examination of representative samples, will be considered.

B. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment is required, such units shall be the

product of a single manufacturer.

C. Equipment Assemblies and Components:

1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer.

2. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit.

3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the

intended service.

4. Constituent parts which are similar shall be the product of a single manufacturer.

D. All factory wiring shall be identified on the equipment being furnished and on all wiring diagrams.


1.06 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Equipment voltage ratings shall be in accordance with the requirements of the specifications and the drawings.

B. Prior to construction, written approval shall be obtained by the Contractor for any equipment

that differs from the requirements of the specifications.

1. The Contractor shall furnish drawings showing all installation details, shop drawings, technical data and other pertinent information as required.

2. Approval by the System of the equal equipment does not relieve the Contractor of the

responsibility of furnishing and installing the equipment at no additional cost to the System.

3. Any other items required for the satisfactory installation of the equal equipment shall be

furnished and installed at no additional cost to the System. This includes but shall not be limited to additions or changes to branch circuits, circuit protective devices, conduits, wire, feeders, controls, panels and correlation with other work, subject to the jurisdiction and approval of the System.

1.07 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION

A. Equipment and material shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical

damage, dirt, moisture, cold and rain. B. During installation, equipment, controls, controllers, circuit protective devices, etc., shall be

protected against entry of foreign matter; and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing, operating and painting.

C. Damage equipment shall be replaced.

D. Painted surfaces shall be protected with factory installed removable heavy Kraft paper, sheet

vinyl.

1.08 WORK PERFORMANCE

A. Arrange, phase and perform work to assure a neat and workman like installation. B. This Contractor must coordinate his work with that of the other contractors so that the work of

all the trades will be performed in an orderly manner and with the least possible interference. In case interference with the work of other contractors should occur, the decision of the Engineer as to changes to be made in the work shall be final.

C. This Contractor will be held responsible for the proper installation of all materials and

equipment required for a complete installation within the intent and meaning of the Contract Documents.

D. This Contractor must thoroughly familiarize himself with the specifications and the job site so

that he clearly understands his responsibility in relationship to the work to be performed under this Contract. This Contractor must perform and plan his work so as to permit the use of the building at the earliest possible date and minimize interference with the existing building operations.


E. Wherever the installation is contingent upon field dimensions, the Contractor shall verify the dimensions prior to final release of the item to be manufactured.

F. Work to be performed in existing construction or which will affect the electrical service,

switching, and power outages, shall be closely coordinated with the System to keep interruption of operations at a minimum. The System shall determine the switching and interruption times after the request from the Contractor. A reasonable advance notice is required from the Contractor to the System for coordination purposes. Contractor’s request for power outages and the System’s approval shall be documented in writing.

G. Unless otherwise directed, when demolition or removal is indicated on the Drawings or in the

specification Sections, it shall mean the complete removal from the System’s property and disposal by the Contractor (refer to Section 013100).

H. Items to be retained by the System shall include the following:

1. All telephones and communications equipment.

2. All light fixtures.

3. Electrical equipment at the discretion of the System.

1.09 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION AND REQUIREMENTS

A. Working spaces shall not be less than specified in the National Electrical Code for all

voltages specified. B. Inaccessible Equipment:

1. Where the System determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not

conveniently accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed at no additional cost to the System.

2. “Conveniently Accessible” is defined as being capable of being reached without the use

of ladders, or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping, and ductwork.

C. Equipment and Material:

1. New equipment and material shall be installed, unless otherwise specified.

2. Equipment and material shall be designed to assure satisfactory operation and operating

life for environmental conditions where being installed. NEC and other code requirements shall apply to the installation in areas requiring special protection as explosion-proof, watertight and weatherproof construction.

1.10 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. In addition to the requirements of the National Electrical Code, install an identification sign

which will clearly indicate information required for use and maintenance of items such as panel-boards, cabinets, motor controllers (starters), safety switches, separately enclosed circuit breakers, control devices and other significant equipment. Refer to Section 260553, Identification for Electrical Systems.


B. Nameplates shall be laminated black phenolic resin with a white core with engraved lettering, a minimum of 3/16-inch long high. Nameplates that are furnished by the manufacturer as a standard catalog item, or where other method of identification is herein specified, are exceptions.

1.11 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300, Submittal Procedures.

1.12 DEMOLITION

A. The Contractor shall remove from the job site, all existing electrical conduit, wire, equipment,

etc. unless noted otherwise.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 260000

Rev. 9/13 Section 260553 – Identification for Electrical Systems KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 260553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Nameplates.

2. Wire markers.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.

2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color

coding, tag number, location, and function.

B. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and installation.

1.03 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years documented experience.


A. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer’s identification, including product density and thickness.

C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical

damage, by storing in original wrapping.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Seton Identifications Products. 2. Thomas & Betts 3. Panduit Corp.

B. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white contrasting background color.

C. Letter Size:

1. 1/8 inch high letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.

2. ¼ inch high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

D. Minimum Nameplate Thickness: 1/8 inch.

2.02 WIRE MARKERS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Seton Identifications Products. 2. Panduit Corp. 3. W.H. Brady Inc.

B. Description: Cloth tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.

C. Legend:

1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.02 EXISTING WORK

A. Install identification on existing equipment to remain in accordance with this section.

B. Replace lost nameplates and markers.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.

B. Nameplate Installation:


1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.

2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside

panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive.

5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panel-board in finished locations.

6. Install nameplates for the following:

a. Main Substation. b. Panel-boards. c. Transformers. d. Service Disconnects. e. Automatic Transfer Switches. f. Motor Control Center. g. Existing Fire Alarm Control Panel.

C. Wire Marker Installation: 1. Install wire marker for each conductor at panel-board gutters, pull boxes, outlet and

junction boxes, and each load connection.

2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the cable run.

3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation.


Rev. 9/13 Section 270000 - Communications KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 28

SECTION 270000

COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

A. MDF/MCF/MDC - Main Distribution Frame / Main Cross-Connect Frame / Main Data Closet. MDF will be used in this document.

B. IDF/ICF/DC - Intermediate Distribution Frame / Intermediate Cross-Connect Frame / Data

Closet, consisting of station wire terminals, riser cable terminals, and various equipment. IDF will be used in this document.

C. UTP - Unshielded Twisted Pair (telecommunications station cable).

1.02 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide a complete, tested, cable distribution system for data network (local area network), voice and CATV systems. The data distribution system shall include fully terminated fiber optic backbone and UTP station cables. The voice system shall include fully terminated UTP station cables. The CATV system shall include fully terminated station cables.

B. Fiber Optic Riser Cables: Fiber optical cables shall be installed from the Main Distribution

Frame (MDF) to fiber optic termination enclosures in each Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) Data Room.

C. UTP Cables: UTP cables shall be routed to each data outlet location as indicated on the

contract drawings.

D. Provide specific details consistent with the contract documents as required completing shop drawings for data cable systems including detailed documentation for Professional review and detailed documentation of as-built conditions.

E. All network electronics including Ethernet switch and MAN (Metropolitan Area Network)

Equipment will be furnished by the Owner and installed by Nortel Networks as specified under this contract. Nortel Networks shall be the sole source provider of devices and implementation as directed by the University. This authorization sets a standard and consistency on University WAN/LAN and is desired for technical ability and experience with networking infrastructure that is required for the successful installing integrator to meet. Nortel Networks must employ a significant engineering staff with extensive network installation experience in hardware electronics as well as the operating systems and network management software. Reference of comparable size and scope must be provided that has been completed in the past twelve months within the educational market space. Nortel Networks Professional Services must have the capability to provide for a four-hour onsite response time should any technical problems arise after the installation is complete.


The design and implementation must be approved by the University Information Technology Services Division including planning design, installation, testing and configuration all network electronics associated with this project. The following is a list (example) of Owner supplied equipment that Nortel Networks is responsible for during the installation, testing and configuring process. All MDF Core Equipment and IDF Switches must be approved by the Information Technology Services division of Kutztown University.

MDF Core Equipment Examples:

• Passport 8610 10 slot chassis. • 8001PS power supplies. • Passport 8000 Enterprise routing switch software. • Passport 861SF Routing Switch Module. • Passport 8608GBE Routing Switch Module. • 1-port 1000Base-SX Gigabit interface converter. • Optical Shelf supports two optical MUX’s. • 1-port 1000Base Gigabit interface converter, 1530nm. • 1-port 1000Base Gigabit interface converter, 1570nm. • 1-port 1000Base Gigabit interface converter, 1610nm. • Optical 4-port MUX, 1490nm, 1530nm, 1570nm, 1610nm.

IDF Switch Examples:

• Bay Stack 470-48T switch. • Ethernet Routing Switch 5510-48T. • Ethernet Routing Switch 5520-48T-PWR. • 5500-SRC Stacking Cable. • 1-Port 1000Base-LX Small Form Factor Pluggable GBIC.

F. All Nortel telephone equipment except handsets will be furnished by the Owner, installed,

cross connected, tested and programmed by this Contractor including; remote shelf (as needed), emergency telephones, all cross connects and testing. Telephone handsets not in contract. The installer must be approved by the existing systems management to install, terminate and program the following equipment associated with the telephone system and not void the existing PBX maintenance services contract. The following is a list of Owner supplied telephone equipment that the Contractor is responsible for installing and configuring. (Items per project specifications). 1. Remote fiber Multi-IPE Assembly. 2. Ringing Generator AC.

3. IPE Package AC. 4. Module side covers. 5. Pedestal/top cap package. 6. Overhead cable tray kit. 7. Fiber remote Multi-IPE interface. 8. AC/DC power converter. 9. Analog message waiting line cards. 10. Local fiber multi-IPE assembly.


1.03 APPLICABLE STANDARDS

Materials and equipment shall be manufactured, installed and tested as specified in the latest editions of applicable publications, standards, rulings and determination of:

A. ANSI – American National Standards Institute. B. TIA/EIA – Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Alliance.

C. FCC – Federal Communications Commission.

D. NEC – National Electric Code.

E. NFPA 70 – National Fire Protection Association.

F. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, B.2, B.3 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling

Standard.

G. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

H. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A - The Administration Standards for the Telecommunications

Infrastructure of Commercial Building.

I. ANSI/TIA/EIA-607 - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.

J. ANSI/TIA/EIA-526-7 - Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber

Cable Plant- OFSTP-7.

K. ANSI/TIA/EIA/-526-14A-Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant-OFSTP-14.

L. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-61. “FOTP-61, Measurement of Fiber or Cable Attenuation Using an

OTDR”.

M. ANSI/TIA/EIA-455-171-D “Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Cables”.

N. ANSI/TIA/EIA-604-X “Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standards” (FOCIS).

O. IEEE 802.3 “Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection” and all Applicable Supplements A through Z. Current Edition.

P. ATM Forum Standard for 155 Mb/s ATM over UTP (AF-PHY-0015.000, 9/94).

Q. BICSI TDMM (Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual) Current Edition at Time of

Bid.

R. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) – Standard of Installation.

S. NEMA 250 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) – Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

T. FCC Part 15 (addresses electromagnetic radiation).


U. FCC Part 68 (connection of premise equipment and wiring to the network).

V. ANSI/ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association.

W. ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials.

X. IEEE – Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.

Y. SCTE or NCTI CATV Certification.

Z. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

AA. UL – Underwriters Lab.

BB. BICSI – Building Industry Consulting Services International. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. All work shall be performed in accordance with the latest revisions of the following standards and codes:

1. Uniform International Conference of Building Officials.

2. Building Code (ICBO); Regional Office.

B. Governing Codes and Conflicts: If the requirements of this section or the Project Drawings

exceed those of the governing codes and regulations, then the requirements of this section and the Drawings shall be construed to permit work not conforming to all governing codes and regulations.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualifications: The Contractor shall submit a company description, company certifications and resumes including all information required in Qualifications Section 1.9. 1. The Contractor shall have a BICSI certified RCDD on staff or payroll. A copy of the

certification shall be submitted with the Contractors bid documents.

B. Furnish the following in a single consolidated submittal:

1. The name of the person who will act as the Contractor’s official contact with the Department.

2. Electrical permits (where applicable). The Contractor shall obtain all required permits

and provide copies to the University.

3. Product Data:

a. Complete manufacturer’s product literature for all cable; Fiber Optic and UTP.

b. Equipment racks, patch panels, wire management, cable supports, cable labels, outlet devices and other products to be used in the installation.


4. Shop Drawings. The Contractor shall submit scaled drawings of all IDF/MDF backboard layouts showing hardware frame placements. The name/number of the room shall be included. The Contractor must show dimensions for LAN network equipment.

5. Category 6 and fiber optic cable test result forms.

6. Test report format and field test report format to include wire map, insertion

loss/attenuation (UTP/fiber), OTDR trace (fiber), length, NEXT, ACR, PSACR, PSNEXT, ELFEXT, PSELFEXT, RETURN LOSS, PROPAGATION DELAY and DELAY SKEW.

7. Qualifications:

a. The successful bidder shall be thoroughly familiar with the cabling methods set forth

in the latest release of the BICSI TDMMs (Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manuals) and unless otherwise specified, shall supervise the installation in accordance with the recommendations and practices outlined in the latest release of the BICSI TDMM.

b. The Telecommunications contractor must be an approved Ortronics Certified Installer

at a Plus tier (CIP, CIP-Gold, CIP-Platinum, and multi-site/national contractors) and Berk-Tek Certified OASIS Integrator. A copy of the company certification documents must be submitted with the quote in order for such quote to be valid. The Telecommunications contractor is responsible for workmanship and installation practices in accordance with the Ortronics CI/CIP Program and Berk-Tek OASIS Program. Ortronics/Berk-Tek will extend a NetClear 25-year Static, Dynamic and Applications Warranty to the end user once the Telecommunications contractor fulfills all requirements under Ortronics and Berk-Tek OASIS Program. At least 30 percent of the copper installation and termination crew must be certified by Berk-Tek and Ortronics or by BICSI with a Technician Level of training. Also, at least 20 percent of the optical fiber installation and termination crew must be certified by Berk-Tek and Ortronics or other approved organizations in Optical Fiber installation and termination practices.

c. The successful bidder shall have at least five (5) years’ experience installing and

servicing Telecommunication systems, and shall provide a list of completed projects equivalent in size and complexity to this project, with names and telephone numbers.

d. The successful bidder shall submit in writing a list of qualified technicians assigned to

this project, including relevant manufacturers training programs completed by each, and years of related experience of each.

e. The successful bidder shall maintain an office or competent technical presence with

appropriate testing equipment and replacement parts within a 60 mile radius from this project.

f. Contractor must have an RCDD (Registered Communication Distribution Designer)

act as Project Manager/Engineer and be a full-time staff employee of the Telecommunications contractor.


1.06 FUNCTION AND OPERATION

A. The intended function of the data communications cable system is to transmit data signals from a central location where the network infrastructure is in place to the individual data outlet locations. Upon completion of the work outlined in this specification, the system shall be capable of transmitting data signals at a rate of 1000 Mbps (Category 6).

B. The multimode optical fiber cable system shall be capable of transmitting signals with a

minimum bandwidth of 200 MHz at both 850 nm and 1300 nm. The cumulative signal loss, through connectors, jumpers, couplers, and fiber cable, shall be less than 2.0 dB (based on 2 connector pairs and 90 meters of optical fiber cable). This loss may vary slightly because link must meet the maximum channel loss (budget) specified by the data application to be run.

C. Station cable, from the MDF/IDF to the work area, shall be installed in accordance with

EIA/TIA-568B specified installation practices and the manufacturer specified installation practices.

D. Station cable shall be capable of transmitting a signal at 1000 Mbps with acceptable

attenuation and cross-talk measurements. The entire work station cable system, including patch panels, cable, and telecommunications outlets shall be tested for Category 6 standards.


A. As a condition for project acceptance, the Contractor shall submit the following for review and approval: 1. Complete manufacturer product literature and samples (if requested) for all pre-approved

substitutions to the recommended products made during the course of the Project.

2. Records:

a. All records shall be created by the Installation Contractor and turned over at the completion of work. The format shall be computer based and both hard and soft copies shall be part of the As-built package. The minimum requirements include:

(1) Cable records must contain the identifier, cable type, length, termination

positions at both ends, manufacturer and part number.

(2) Connecting hardware records must contain the identifier, type of hardware and the amount of positions.

(3) Connecting hardware positions records must contain the identifier, type of

position, and the cable identifier attached to it.

(4) Test Documentation on all cable types shall be included as part of the As-built package.

(5) As-built drawings (AutoCAD 2000 and hard copy).

(6) Cable/Termination Record (electronic and hard copy).


3. Reports: a. Cable Reports.

b. Cross-connect Reports.

c. Connecting Hardware Reports.

4. As-built label schedule in MS EXCEL of MS ACESS format, 2 hard copies and 2

electronic copies.

5. Component informational matrix, to include component name; component model number, serial number and configuration; location and telecommunication room component is served from.

6. The Communication Systems installer shall provide a twenty-five (25) year manufacturer

warranty. This warranty shall include defects in material and workmanship. The warranty period shall begin at the date of the University's acceptance of the work. Quality and workmanship evaluation shall be solely by the University and designated representatives.

7. All documentation shall be presented in binder form.

1.08 QUALIFICATIONS

A. The University reserves the right to exercise its discretion to require the Contractor to remove from the project any such employee judged by the University to be incompetent, careless, or insubordinate.

B. The selected Telecommunication Systems installer must be licensed and bonded in the state.

C. The Contractor must be a certified installer having attended factory training and have current

certification of the selected manufacturer’s structured cabling system. The Contractor must have been certified for no less than two (2) years, with technicians trained and certified by the manufacturer. The Contractor will completely warrant his work, both in labor and materials, for a period of not less than one (1) year after completion. The Contractor shall provide the warranties from the manufacturer as called out in these specifications. A copy of the installer’s certificate shall be submitted with the bid package and kept on file.

D. The Contractor, sub-contractors, and service organizations shall be no greater than 60 miles from the project site.

E. The Contractor shall designate in writing to the University a dedicated, full time foreman as a contact for problem resolution, job coordination, additions, changes, etc., who shall be present in the field at all times during the performance of the work. The Contractors foreman shall have full authority to represent the Contractor in making decisions and executing the work in an acceptable manner.

F. All clean up activity related to work performed will be the responsibility of the Contractor and must be completed daily before leaving the facility.

G. The Contractor must have BICSI registered Installers and Technicians on staff and assigned to this project. The project shall be staffed at all times with a minimum of 25% BICSI registered telecommunications installers.


1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE

A. Convene minimum one week prior to commencing work of this section. 1.10 COMMUNICATION OUTLET CLASSIFICATIONS

A. Class 1 - Contains: (1) Category 6 Data Outlet and Category 6 Cable. Install in 2-gang faceplate.

B. Class 2 - Contains: (1) Category 6 Phone Outlet and Category 6 Cable. Install for wall mounted phone.

C. Class 3 -Contains: (1) Category 6 Data Outlet and Category 6 Cable. (1) Category 6 Phone Outlet and Category 6 Cable.

D. Class 4 - Contains: (1) Category 6 Data Outlet and Category 6 Cable. (2) Category 6 Phone Outlet and Category 6 Cable.

E. Class 5 - Contains: (2) Category 6 Data Outlet and Category 6 Cable.

F. Class 6 - Contains: (2) Category 6 Data Outlet and Category 6 Cable. (1) Category 6 Phone Outlet and Category 6 Cable. G. Class 7 - Contains: (1) Category 6 Data Outlet and Category 6 Cable. (1) Category 6 Phone Outlet and Category 6 Cable. (1) “F”-Type Connector and RG6/U Coaxial Cable. Install in 2-gang faceplate.

H. Class 8 - Contains: (2) Category 6 Data Outlet and Category 6 Cable. (1) Category 6 Phone Outlet and Category 6 Cable.

(1) “F”-Type Connector and RG6/U Coaxial Cable. Install in 2-gang faceplate.

I. Class 9 - Contains: (3) Category 6 Data Outlet and Category 6 Cable. (1) Category 6 Phone Outlet and Category 6 Cable. (1) “F”-Type Connector and RG6/U Coaxial Cable.

J. Where outlets are shown in surface raceway, install outlets in double gang faceplate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. All materials including cable, terminating hardware and components shall be verified and tested by both ETL for channel compliance and a UL Certified lab for compliance of the component performance levels as specified this document.

B. All products shall be new, and brought to the job site in original manufacturer’s packaging.

Electrical components (including innerduct) shall bear the Underwriter’s Laboratories label. All communications cable shall bear flammability testing ratings as follows:

1. CM Communications Cable.

2. CMP Plenum Rated Communications Cable.


3. CMR Riser-rated Communications Cable.

C. Initial Cable Inspection: The Contractor shall inspect all cable prior to installation to verify that it is identified properly on the reel identification label, that it is of proper gauge, containing the correct number of pairs, etc. Note any buckling of the jacket, which would indicate possible problems. Damaged cable or any other components failing to meet specifications shall not be used in the installation.

2.02 HORIZONTAL CABLING

A. Manufacturers - ISO 9001 Certified.

1. Berk-Tek LanMARK 2000 Model No. 10032251.

2. Substitutions: Not Permitted.

B. Description: Unshielded twisted pair cable, Category 6, CMP listed, for use with IEEE Std. 802.3 network, and EIA/TIA-568-B compliant using 4 pairs, 24 AWG solid copper conductors all FEP insulated, colored plenum rated jacket, meeting or exceeding the Category 6 requirements. Use green jacketed cable for data cables. Use white jacketed cable for voice cables.

C. All 4 pair station cables shall:

1. Conform to EIA/TIA 568-B - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard,

Horizontal Cable Section.

2. Be part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program.

D. Horizontal cabling shall meet or exceed the specifications for a Category 6 permanent link, and the following electrical and mechanical specifications:

Frequency

(MHz) Attenuation

(dB) Power-Sum NEXT

(dB) 1.0 21.9 62.0 4.0 3.5 61.8 8.0 5.0 57.0 10.0 5.5 55.5 16.0 7.0 52.2 20.0 7.9 50.7 25.0 8.9 49.1

31.25 10.0 47.5 62.5 14.4 42.7

100.0 18.6 39.3 200.0 27.4 34.3 250.0 31.1 32.7

DC resistance: 28.6 /1,000 ft (9.38 /100 m) max. Mutual Capacitance 14 pF/1000 ft (4.6 Nf/100m), max. Characteristic Impedance

100 ±15 from 1-100 MHz


E. In addition to the Category 6 requirements for individual products, the end-to-end interconnected and installed channel shall meet or exceed the following requirements:

Frequency

(MHz) Power-Sum ELFEXT

(dB) Return Loss

(dB) 1 60.3 19 4 48.2 19

10 40.3 19 16 36.2 18 20 34.4 17.5 25 32.3 17

31.25 30.4 16.5 62.5 24.3 14 100 20.3 12 200 14.2 9.0 250 12.3 8.0

F. The copper cabling provided for each data outlet shall be one 4 pair UTP Category 6 cable

per jack. For example, where multiple jacks are indicated at a single location, each jack shall have its own dedicated 4 pair UTP cable.

G. The Category 6 4 pair UTP cable must be UL Performance Level Tested. Each 1000-foot

spool must be individually tested with test results affixed. 2.03 HORIZONTAL CABLING (Outlets)


1. Single modular inserts for voice/data ports shall be Ortronics TracJack, 8 position, 8 conductors, dual reactance technology, universal T568-A/B, 45-straight exit and Clarity 6, P/N OR-TJ600-42 (red) for voice and P/N OR-TJ600-45 (green) for data.

2. Faceplates shall be Ortronics double gang, 8-port, TracJack series, P/N OR-40300554-

13 (electrical ivory).

B. Data Outlets - Category 6 modular jack with 2-gang bezel and straight module insert. Provide quantity of data outlets at the locations as indicated on the drawings. Provide blank inserts for unused openings in bezel. Provide duplex receptacle inserts for mounting data outlets in surface raceway.

C. Jacks shall be Category 6, 8-position modular jack with contacts plated with at least 50 micro-

inches of gold and a termination cap providing strain relief. Jacks shall provide dual color code to allow both T568A and T568B wiring on the same jack, and shall provide a cutting ledge to automatically trim wires during termination. Jacks shall meet TIA/EIA-568-B requirements for Category 6 connecting hardware and additional performance criteria listed.

D. Faceplates shall be double gang unless noted otherwise and match manufacturer style for 8

position modular jack outlets at all locations. Faceplates shall contain enough openings for all cables. Color of devices and cover plates shall match other wiring devices in area or as directed by Professional.


E. Where outlets are installed in surface raceway, jacks must be compatible with the surface raceway faceplate and the surface raceway depth. Faceplate color shall match raceway color. Where outlets are installed in floor boxes, jacks must be compatible with the floor box faceplate or mounting strap. Keystone style jacks are acceptable in floor boxes.

F. All terminating hardware for 4 pair Category 6 cabling shall:

1. Conform to TIA/EIA 568B - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard,

Horizontal Cable Section.

2. Be part of the UL LAN Certification and Follow-up Program.

3. Meet or exceed the specifications for Category 6 Channel.

H. All terminating hardware for 4 pair Category 6 cables shall meet or exceed the following electrical specifications:

Frequency

(MHz) NEXT (dB)

Attenuation (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

1 75 .1 30 4 75 .1 30 8 75 .1 30 10 74 .1 30 16 69.9 .1 30 20 68 .1 30 25 66 .1 30

31.25 64.1 .11 30 62.5 58.1 .16 28.1 100 54 .20 24.0 200 48 .28 18.0 250 46 .32 17.0

I. Additional electrical and mechanical specifications are:

1. Insulation resistance: 500 MW minimum.

2. Dielectric withstands voltage: 1,000 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum, contact-to-contact and

1,500 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum from any contact to exposed conductive surface.

3. Contact resistance: 20 mW maximum.

4. Current rating: 1.5 A at 68 degrees F per IEC Publication 512-3. 2.04 FIBER OPTIC CABLE SPECIFICATIONS


1. Berk-Tek Model No. PDR6B036-024EB3515/25-012AB1010 (for 12SM/24MM laser optimized 62.5um).

B. Description: ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B, 24-strand, laser optimized 62.5/125 micron multimode and

12-strand, 8.3 micron single mode optical fiber, plenum rated, hybrid backbone cable. Each with color-coded PVC buffer. Installed between IDF and MDF.


C. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-B, 4-strand laser optimized 62.5/125 micron multimode and 2-strand, 8.3 micron single mode optical fiber, plenum rated, hybrid horizontal cable. Installed between workstation outlets and IDF/MDF. Berk-Tek P/N ICP004-3515/25

2.05 FIBER OPTIC CABLE TERMINATIONS


1. Ortronics Model No. OR-205KAS9FA-62 (MM) and OR-205KAS9FA-09 (SM).


B. Use type SC fiber optic connectors.

C. Optical Fiber Termination Units used in the data closets shall provide termination modular

patch panels for SC-type connectors and be of sufficient size and capacity to terminate 100 percent of the fiber count of the fiber optic cables. Patch panels must be installed in 19-inch rack. Provide all termination accessories, enclosures, and testing for a complete fiber optic distribution system.

2.06 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS (SINGLE MODE)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ortronics Model No. OR-61150D08003M99C.

2. Substitutions: Permitted depending on critical circumstances and with authorization approval by personnel from Kutztown University Information Technology Services division.

B. Product Description: TIA/EIA-568-B and ISO/IEC 11801 compliant 8.3/125 micron single mode duplex fiber optic patch cord with SC – SC / ST – SC / ST – ST connectors. All patch cords must be consistent with existing infrastructure.

C. Rating: Fiber optic patch cords shall:

1. Be available in standard length of 3 meters and/or appropriate for interconnecting to

existing infrastructure, and shall meet or exceed standards as defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and ISO/IEC 11801. This must be approved by the Kutztown University Information Technology Services division.

2. Utilize duplex fiber cable that is 8.3/125 micron singlemode, OFNR riser grade, and

meets the requirements of UL 1666.

3. Utilize cable where the attenuation shall not exceed wavelength or 1.0 dB/km at 1310 nm or 155 nm.

4. Utilize Angled Physical Contact (APC) type polish.

5. Terminated connectors shall exhibit maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB with an average of

0.3 dB when tested at either 1310 nm or 1550 nm wavelengths for 8.3/125 nm.

6. Have a minimum return loss of 40 dB (53 dB typical) at both 1310 nm and 1550 nm.


7. Be made by an ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer.

8. Be UL 1666 approved. 2.07 FIBER OPTIC PATCH CORDS (MULTIMODE)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ortronics Model No. OR-61150D62003M99C.

2. Substitutions: Permitted depending on critical circumstances and with authorization approval by personnel from Kutztown University Information Technology Services division.

B. Product Description: TIA/EIA-568-B and ISO/IEC 11801 compliant, laser optimized 62.5/125 micron multimode duplex fiber optic patch cord with appropriate connectors for interconnection with existing infrastructure

C. Rating: Fiber optic patch cords shall:

1. Be available in standard length of 3 meters, and shall meet or exceed standards as

defined in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B and ISO/IEC 11801.

2. Utilize duplex fiber cable that is laser optimized 62.5/125 micron multimode, OFNR riser grade, and meets the requirements of UL 1666.

3. Utilize cable where the attenuation shall not exceed 3.5 dB/m @850 nm wavelength or

1.0 dB/km @ 1300 nm.

4. The connectors shall include a ceramic ferrule.

5. Terminated SC connectors, which exhibit a maximum insertion loss of 0.50 dB with an average of 0.30 dB when tested at either 850 nm or 1300 nm wavelengths for laser optimized 62.5/125 nm.

6. Have a minimum return loss of 20 dB (25 dB typical) at both 850 nm and 1300 nm.

7. Be made by an ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer.

8. Be UL 1666 approved.

2.08 COPPER PATCH CORDS


1. Ortronics Model No. OR-MC605-06 (5’ green patch cord) OR-MC607-06 (7’ green patch cord) OR-MC609-06 (9’ green patch cord) OR-MC615-06 (15’ green patch cord)



B. Product Description: Patch cord assemblies shall be Ortronics Clarity category 6 engineered using center tuned technology. Patch cord assemblies shall be green in color, must have the same rating as the horizontal wiring, i.e., shall meet or exceed the specifications for Category 6 performance, and shall be factory-manufactured in 5 foot, 7 foot, 9 foot, and 15 foot lengths.

C. Provide two (2) patch cords for each data outlet; (provide 20 percent in 5-foot lengths, 30

percent in 7-foot lengths, 30 percent in 9-foot lengths, and 20 percent in 15-foot lengths). Provide copper patch cord assemblies at the MDF/IDF and workstation outlets as required to make all interconnections between patch panels and hubs and/or Ethernet switch.

2.09 MDF/IDF TERMINATION HARDWARE – COPPER PATCH PANEL


1. Ortronics Model No. OR-PHD66U48.


B. The Category 6 data horizontal cables shall be terminated on Category 6 8-position modular, RJ-45, jack patch panels with circuit board construction in all MDF/IDF locations. The panels shall have rolled upper and lower edges for rigidity and shall provide front and rear side labeling visible after the cables and cords are installed. The 8-position modular jack patch panels shall be rack mounted with cable management panels above and below each patch panel. The contractor is responsible for all wall brackets, patch panels, and cable management panels for all MDF/IDF layouts and equipment rack configurations. Provide 48 port panels (T568B wired, EIA/TIA-568-B). Provide quantity as required to terminate a minimum of 25 percent spare ports in patch panels.

C. Cable Manager: The cable manager shall have 5 rings and provide the capability to organize

and contain up to ninety-six (96) patch cords on the front of the panel. The front of the panel shall provide five (5) high capacity 1.7 x 3.5 inch horizontal distribution rings to reduce stress on stored cables to retain optimal cable geometry. All distribution rings shall have radius edges to protect cables from nicks and tears. The cable manager shall be no more than 2 rack unit high, and shall fit a standard 19-inch rack. Ortronics model no. OR-808004818.

D. Vented Equipment Shelf: One shelf shall be installed on each rack in each wiring closet. Ortronics model no. OR-604045081

2.10 MDF/IDF TERMINATION HARDWARE – FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL


1. Fiber optic patch panels shall be Ortronics Model No. OR-615MMC-72P-00.

2. Multimode connector panels shall be Ortronics Model No. OR-615SCDSM6.

3. Singlemode connector panels shall be Ortronics Model No. OR-615SCDSM6C.



B. For the MDF connection to the Campus Backbone fiber, provide two (2) fiber optic patch panels capable of terminating up to 48 fibers each, one (1) for multimode fiber and one (1) for single-mode fiber. Provide pre-loaded connector panels (each with 6 duplex SC connections) for both multimode and single mode fiber. Install connector housings in the data rack located in the data closet. Provide blank covers for unused openings in closet connector housings.

C. Each MDF connection to each IDF- intrabuilding backbone cable, provide fiber optic patch

panels to separately terminate single mode and multimode fiber. Provide pre-loaded connector panels (each with 6 duplex SC connections) for multimode fibers and single mode fibers. Install connector housings in the data rack located in the data closet. Provide blank covers for unused openings in closet connector housings.

D. Each IDF- horizontal cable, provide fiber optic patch panels capable of terminating up to 144

fibers each. Provide separate patch panels for multimode fiber and single-mode fiber. Provide pre-loaded connector panels (each with 6 duplex SC connections) for multimode fibers and single-mode fibers. Install connector housings in the data rack located in the data closet. Provide blank covers for unused openings in closet connector housings.

2.11 FLOOR MOUNTED RACK

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ortronics Model No. OR-60400169.


B. Product Description; Free standing, floor mounted 7 feet x 19 inches steel equipment rack with horizontal and vertical cable management. Racks are to be permanently bolted to the floor. Where cable runway is provided above the rack, provide additional bracing between rack and cable tray.

C. Construction: Aluminum with protective finish.

D. Accessories: provide vertical and horizontal cable management channels with channel

retainers and Velcro ties.

E. Provide one rack mountable 8 outlet surge strip. Provide outlet strip with minimum 10-foot long cord.

F. Provide ground terminal block/lug for each rack.

G. Provide appropriate mounting hardware, and j-bolt/runway connector kits.

H. Vertical cable management racks to be installed between floor mounted racks.

I. The hole spacing should be 1/2", 1/2", 5/8".

J. Individual patch panels can have a maximum of 48 ports.

K. All patch panels shall have their own cable management above and below them. In the event

there is more than one rack in the wiring room the racks shall have vertical cable management devices separating them with management of the cables in both the front and rear of the racks.


L. All racks shall have the bottom 2 1/2 feet open for air circulation. 2.12 RACK MOUNTED UPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. APC (American Power Conversion) Model: SUA1500RM2U.

2. Best Model No. 0520-1425-RU.

3. Tripplite Model No. SMART 1400RM.


B. Product Description; Rack mounted uninterruptable power supply, minimum capacity 1400

VA with monitoring software. 2.13 COAXIAL CABLE

A. Manufacturer: 1. Berk-Tek Model No. 10057996.


B. Description: RG-6 quad-shield, plenum rated type (CMP), flexible coaxial cable, 75-ohm

characteristic impedance, with solid 18-gauge copper-clad steel wire inner conductor, solid polyethylene dielectric core, with black jacket.

C. Terminations/connectors for RG-6 cable shall be HEX crimped. D. Provide RG-6 cable from each outlet shown on the drawings back to the Data Closet. E. Provide duplex receptacle inserts for mounting outlets in surface raceway. Shall be Ortronics

Model No. OR-63700006-00, TracJack F-Connector 2.14 INTER BUILDING BACKBONE CABLE – VOICE

A. Manufacturers – ISO 9001 certified.

1. BerkTek Power Sum.


B. Product Description: Conductors are solid annealed copper. Insulated with a PVC skin over expanded polyethylene conductors are twisted to form pairs, and fully color coded. Jacket is fire resistant FR PVC plastic. Cables conform to TIA/EIA-568-B. UL listed CMR shall be rated Category 3 or higher.

C. Accessories: Provide cable straps and associated hardware.

D. Installation: All backbone cable shall be neatly installed and properly trained. Secure cable

with straps as recommended by cable manufacturer and installed per industry standards.


E. Termination: Utilize existing splice case in manhole specific to location, for connection to Campus Backbone Distribution System. Existing cable from this splice case will be removed during the demolition phase of this project. Properly seal splice case to provide a complete termination system impervious to water. Secure splice case to manhole structure. Properly train cables in manhole to maximize clear working space.

F. Testing: Test all circuits between the terminal boards for opens, shorts, grounds, and

impedance to ensure integrity of the telephone cable.

G. Lightning protection required where necessary. See section 2.16 for further details.

2.15 MDF/IDF TERMINATION HARDWARE – VOICE

A. Manufacturers: 1. Ortronics Model No. OR-110ABC6100.


B. Product Description: Modular, high-density, 110 style cross-connect wiring blocks. Blocks

are to be rack mounted with vertical cable management system. Wiring blocks are to be mounted on the plywood backboards in the MDF’s and IDF’s, as indicated on the drawings. Install blocks as per manufactures recommendations and industry standards.

C. Construction: Fire retardant, molded plastic termination blocks with legs. D. Accessories: Provide vertical and horizontal cable management channels with channel

retainers and Velcro ties. Provide matching grounding kit. E. Ground termination blocks to telecommunications grounding busbar with #6 AWG copper

cable. F. Provide quantity of termination blocks as required to properly terminate all the cables as

indicated on the drawings. Provide an additional 30% for future growth G. Provide appropriate mounting hardware, label holders, labels, cable managers and covers.

2.16 BUILDING ENTRANCE PROTECTION

A. Manufacturers:

1. Circa. 2. Substitutions: Not Permitted.

B. Provide solid state 5-pin protectors, 300V nominal clamping voltage, with 350 mA heat coils

for sneak current protection. Provide 10 spare protectors. C. Provide additional 110 style cross-connect wiring blocks required to connect Building

Entrance Protection to the voice cabling system.


2.17 EMERGENCY TELEPHONES

A. Manufacturers: 1. Gai-Tronics Corporation Model No. 298-003, or similar product as manufactured by

2. Viking. 3. Ramtech.

4. Rath Microtech.


B. Provide flush mount line powered phone with brushed, stainless steel finish. Provide surface

mount in finished areas. Surface mount unit must not exceed ADA requirements for space intrusion. Provide all back boxes.

C. Product Description: Sealed metal keypad ideal for access control or similar local calls.

Microphone and speaker located for optimal performance. Large emergency activation button capable of remote programming and auto answer. Auxiliary output for activation of peripheral equipment. ADA compliant installation must be followed to include proper height and include a Braille Help tag.

D. Provide a complete system, terminated and tested for proper operation. The contractor must

test the phones in conjunction with the Public Safety department. The contractor must provide location and proper phone number to the University Public Safety department.

E. Power Fail phones require a complete copper connection from the location to the University

main PBX. If this, or any other phone, is to be used as a power fail transfer phone then a copper connection must be made back to the main PBX. Cost is to be included into the project.

F. Emergency phones are wired like a normal phone.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. The contractor shall provide 2-inch conduit sleeves above ceilings between firewalls in corridors and areas where data outlets are located, and elsewhere where required to install data cabling where cable tray and conduit systems are not installed.

B. Any penetration through fire rated walls (including those in sleeves) will be resealed with an

Underwriter Laboratories (UL) approved sealant. Contractor shall also seal all floor, ceiling, and wall penetrations in fire or smoke barriers and in the wiring closets.

C. Cable Lubricants: Lubricants specifically designed for installing communications cable may

be used to reduce pulling tension as necessary when pulling cable into conduit. After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue.


D. Recommended Products:

1. Twisted-pair cable: Dyna-Blue, American Polywater

2. Optical fiber cable: Optic-Lube, Ideal

E. The Contractor shall replace or rework cables showing evidence of improper handling including stretches, kinks, short radius bends, over tightened bindings, loosely twisted and over twisted pairs at terminals, and sheath removed too far (over 1 inch).

3.02 LABELS

A. The labeling plan shall be as follows: by the Contractor and approved by University. The Contractor will label all outlets following the detailed shop drawing design, using permanent/legible typed or machine engraved labels. Terminals in the data closets shall be labeled by the Contractor using designation strips as applicable to terminal hardware. All copper/fiber terminals for riser cables in the data closets shall correspond to terminal numbering in the MDF. All fiber cables must be labeled per the Kutztown University standards, which will be provided to the contractor by personnel from Kutztown University Information Technology Services division.

B. The labels on IDF horizontal cabling and terminals shall be numerically sequential. Outlets

shall be labeled to match the labels on the corresponding terminal position.

1. The first three numbers are the room designation consistent with the codes in the current building/room standards document.

2. Each cable will be labeled with a hyphen and a number to designate the number of the

cable.

3. The following is an example of Office 111 having two drops. These cables will be terminated in Data Closet 166.

a. In the wiring closet the cable labels would look similar to:

(1) 111-1 for the first cable.

(2) 111-2 for the second cable.

b. In the office each of the wall plates should look similar to:

(1) 166Pn-P for the first wall plate. This label should be placed in close proximity to the outlet jack.

(2) 111-n where n denotes the drop in the office. This label should be placed on the

box so that the user easily sees it. The number represented by n starts a 1 and is incremented by one for each subsequent drop. The number 1 drop is the first drop on the left side after entering the room and increments clockwise.

(3) 166Pn-P for the second wall plate.


(4) 111-n where n denotes the drop in the office.

Where n denotes the patch panel number and p denotes the port on the patch panel. Such that an outlet with one connection going to patch panel 2 port 8 in room 111 would look like: 166P2-8 111-1

C. The labels on Intra Building and Inter Building backbone cabling will begin with two letters

designating the Building Name followed by a hyphen followed by a 4 digit number followed by a hyphen followed by a D for data; V for voice; C for CATV; MMF for multi-mode fiber; SMF for single mode fiber; F for a fiber bundle consisting of more than one type of fiber. Personnel from the Information Technology Services division at Kutztown University will determine the starting number of the first cable.

D. A floor plan clearly labeled with all outlet jack numbers shall be included in the as-built plans. E. All labels shall correspond to as-built and to final test reports. F. All labels will be placed no closer than 4 inches and no further than 5 inches from the area

where the individual pairs or fibers are broken out from the main bundle. In the case of composite cable, the labels will be placed no closer than 2 inches and no further than 3 inches from the point where both the fiber and copper are broken out of the main jacketing. In the case of the composite cable both the fiber and the copper are to be labeled along with the composite jacket itself.

3.03 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. All Category 6 and Fiber Optic cable shall be installed by individuals trained in low voltage data cable system installation.

B. All Category 6 4-pair UTP cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to

change performance specifications. The Contractor shall not over tighten Velcro wraps or over bend the Category 6 UTP cable.

C. Where an outlet is surface mounted, surface raceway shall be used to cover the horizontal

cable or as indicated on the drawings. D. All wiring shall be placed in cable tray or basket tray where available. All wiring shall be

organized in such a manner to allow easy access to existing wiring and facilitate future installations.

E. All wiring and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available

space in coordination with other uses. All wiring and associated hardware shall be placed so as to not impair the use or capacity of other building systems, equipment, or hardware placed by others (or existing).

F. All wiring placed in ceiling areas must be tied or clamped. When wire is placed in ceiling

areas or other non-exposed areas fasteners, shall be placed at random intervals no greater than 60 inches and preferably on 48 inch centers. Cable sag between supports shall not exceed 12 inches. Attaching wire to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. At all runs of twenty or more cables, provide J-hooks at 60 inch (maximum) centers to hang cable where conduit or a tray system is not indicated on the drawings.


G. All low voltage cable shall be routed to avoid light fixtures (18 inches minimum spacing), sources of heat (12 inches minimum spacing) power feeder conduits (12 inches minimum spacing). Low voltage cabling must be spaced a minimum 120 inches (10 feet) from bus duct.

3.04 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION

A. All runs of fiber optic cable between data closets shall be installed in 1-1/4 inch orange innerduct with pulltape in a 4 inch conduit (EMT) or as indicated on the drawings. Provide a nylon pull string and or muletape along with the orange innerduct in the conduit. EMT shall be run to the data rack, turned down above the data rack, and terminated with a plastic bushing. Data closets that stack shall have 4-inch conduit (EMT) sleeves between floors or as indicated on the drawings, sleeves shall have plastic bushings. All innerduct shall be properly secured in the data closets. Innerduct shall be secured within 12 inches of the entering or exiting conduits or sleeves and secured every 3 feet on plywood backboards with appropriate straps. When routing in a cable tray or basket tray, secure with Velcro wraps every 4 feet. All innerducts shall be kept parallel with all surfaces and maintaining acceptable bend radiuses when making transitions.

B. Conduit and cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

industry standards. Care shall be taken to avoid kinking the cable or applying excessive tension during the installation process.

3.05 STATION HARDWARE

A. Eight (8) position modular jack Pin Assignments: 1. Pin connections for data station 8 position modular jacks and patch panels shall match

EIA/TIA-568-B modular jack recommendation T568B that is both 1000 BaseT and ISDN compatible.

2. Pin connections at data jack panels shall match pin connections at outlets with straight

through wiring. 3.06 BACKBOARD CABLING/EQUIPMENT RACK CONFIGURATION

A. All cabling shall be routed so as to avoid interference with any other service or system, operation, or maintenance purposes such as access boxes, ventilation mixing boxes, network equipment mounting, access hatches to air filters, switches or electrical panels, and lighting fixtures. Avoid crossing areas horizontally just above or below any riser conduit. Lay and dress cables to allow other cables to enter the conduit/riser without difficulty at a later time by maintaining a working distance from these openings. Provide a minimum of 36 inches for a service loop to the patch panel.

B. Cable shall be routed as close as possible to the ceiling, floor, or corners to ensure that

adequate wall or backboard space is available for current and future equipment and for cable terminations. Cables shall not be Velcro wrapped to existing electrical conduit or other equipment. Minimum bend radius shall be observed.

C. Lay cables via the shortest route directly to the nearest edge of the backboard from the

mounted equipment or block. Lace or Velcro wrap all similarly routed cables together, and attach by means of clamps screwed to the outside edge(s) of the backboard vertically and/or horizontally, then route via “square” corners over a path that will offer minimum obstruction to future installations of equipment, backboards, or other cables.


D. Do not over tighten Velcro wraps on Category 6 station cable. Observe Category 6 cable bend radius and TIA/EIA conduit fill ratios (40 percent).

3.07 CABLE TESTING

A. This Contractor shall test all cabling to the parameters identified in the specification and to parameters required by cabling system manufacturer.

B. Before requesting a final inspection, the Contractor shall perform a series of end-to-end

installation performance tests. The Contractor shall submit for approval a proposal describing the test procedures, test result forms, and timetable for fiber optic and all copper plant wiring.

C. Acceptance of the sample test procedures discussed below is predicated on the Contractor’s

use of the recommended products (including but not limited to twisted pair cable, patch panels, and outlet devices specified in the Products paragraph) and adherence to the inspection requirements and practices set forth. Acceptance of the completed installation will be evaluated in the context of each of these factors.

D. Test Criteria: The system shall be tested to Category 6 compliance. The test path shall

include workstation jacks, station cables, patch panels, and adapter cables.

E. The Contractor shall test.

1. All station drop cable pairs from termination patch panels to outlet device 8-position modular jacks.

2. All backbone cabling.

F. All horizontal and backbone category 6 UTP cable shall be tested in both directions for the parameters listed below using a Level III hand-held tester. These parameters are defined in ANSI/EIA/TIA-568-B.1. Tests must show a “PASS” to be accepted.

1. Wire Map 2. Length 3. Insertion Loss 4. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss 5. Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss 6. Equal-level-far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT) 7. Power sum equal-level-far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT) loss 8. Return Loss 9. Propagation Delay 10. Delay Skew

G. All video coax cables shall be tested for the parameters listed below using a Level IIE or III

hand-held tester. Tests must show a “PASS” to be accepted.

1. Continuity 2. Shorts 3. Opens 4. Length


H. When errors are found, the source of each error shall be determined, corrected, and the cable re-tested. All defective components shall be replaced and retested. Defective components not corrected shall be reported to the University Information Technology Division with explanations of the corrective actions attempted.

I. Test records shall be maintained using the test results forms outlined below. The form shall record closet number, riser pair number or outlet ID, outcome of test, indication of errors found (e.g., a, b, c, d, or e) cable length, re-test results after problem resolution and signature of the technician completing the tests.

J. Test results for each 4 pair, Category 6 UTP cable must be submitted with identification to

match labels on all patch panel ports and 8 position modular jacks, and identification to match as-builts associated with that cable.

K. An independent contractor not associated with the cable installer will conduct the testing and

submit the test results.

L. Work Station Cable: The results of the workstation cable tests shall be provided in the form of printouts from the test equipment.

3.08 FIBER OPTIC TESTING SPECIFICATIONS

A. Each fiber strand shall undergo bi-directional testing, at both wavelengths for signal attenuation losses. (Multimode fiber is tested at 850nm and 1300 nm. Single mode fiber is tested at 1310nm and 1500nm). Each fiber strand shall be tested using a certified OTDR.

B. Test Equipment: Light Source and Level III Power Meter manufactured by Microtest,

Wavetek, Tektronix, or Noyes Fiber Systems. C. All testing shall be performed by trained personnel. D. All installed fiber optic cable EIA 455-171 Method D procedures will be adhered to.

(Bi-directional) E. Connector loss shall not exceed 0.5 dB per termination. F. The Fiber Optic Cable loss shall not exceed 3.5dB per kilometer tested at 850nm and 1.5dB

per kilometer tested at 1300nm for laser enhanced 62.5/125 multimode fiber. The Fiber Optic Cable loss shall not exceed 1.5dB/kilometer tested at 1310nm and 1.5dB/kilometer tested at 1550nm for laser enhanced 8.3/125 single mode fiber.

G. The contractor is responsible for obtaining minimum loss in fiber connections and polishing

per manufacturer’s specifications. H. An independent contractor not associated with the cable installer will conduct the testing and

provide the test results documentation. 3.09 DOCUMENTATION

A. The installer contractor shall provide documentation for the as-built drawings.

B. The testing contractor shall provide documentation for the test results.


C. Fiber Test Results: The results of the fiber testing shall be recorded on a form entitled “Fiber Attenuation Test Results”. Hand written results are not acceptable. Copies of test results are not acceptable. Only original signed copies will be acceptable.

3.10 ACCEPTANCE

A. Acceptance of the Data Network System shall be based on the results of testing, functionality, and the receipt of documentation. With regard to testing, all fiber segments and all copper cables must meet the criteria established above. With a minimum regard to functionality, Contractor must demonstrate to University that 1000 Mbps data signals can be successfully transmitted, bi-directionally, from the MDF to and from some number of individual data outlets. The number of outlet locations to be tested shall be determined by the University Information Technology Services Division. With regard to documentation, all required documentation shall be submitted to the University Information Technology Services Division.

3.11 MINIMUM WARRANTY

A. The Cabling System shall meet the performance requirements of the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B standard. The warranty on the material, services, and operation of the cabling system to this specification must be for a period of 25 years and cover connecting hardware against defects in material and workmanship.

B. The warranty must include the following statements regarding the cabling system:

1. “Will support and conform to TIA/EIA-568-B” specifications covering ANY CURRENT OR

FUTURE APPLICATION which supports transmission over a properly constructed horizontal cabling system premises network which meets the channel and/or permanent link performance as described in TIA/EIA-568-B.

2. “Will be free from defects in material or faulty workmanship”.

3. Warranty shall guarantee that cabling infrastructure will support 1000 Base-T.

C. The warranty must be provided by either the cable manufacturer or the hardware

manufacturer, and must be fully executed prior to project closeout.

3.12 TELECOMUNICATION ROOM REQUIREMENTS

A. Objective: To define minimum considerations for Data Communications Wiring Rooms

B. Considerations:

1. Occupancy

2. Size

3. Power

4. Lighting

5. Security


6. Location

7. Layout

8. Environment

9. Fire Protection

10. Documentation

11. Infrastructure

12. Labeling

13. National and International Standards

C. Occupancy: The wiring room shall be a dedicated space that is not shared with other trades. The wiring room access shall be through key ABM7. The wiring room shall provide termination points for voice, video, and data. No other devices or services are to be housed in the wiring room.

D. Size: The minimum wiring room dimensions shall be 14’ x 14’ with a minimum ceiling height

of 9’. As a rule of thumb each Primary Wiring room will require 1.25 square feet per drop with all other wiring rooms requiring 0.9 square foot per drop. In all cases there must be a minimum of 128 square feet of unobstructed wall space. All of the walls are to be covered with 4’ x 8’ x 3/4” one side finished fireproof plywood painted in accordance with the University standard. The plywood shall begin at the floor or within 6” of the floor and extend upwards for an additional 8’. Floors shall be anti-static VCT.

E. Power:

1. The electronics in the wiring room supports the underlying infrastructure; therefore, the

electrical supply supporting the wiring room shall be fed from separate sources and shall be on the building emergency power supply. There shall be a minimum of 4 quad outlets per wiring room. The actual amount will depend on the electronics that supports the wiring room and this shall be coordinated through the University Information Technology. The outlets shall be coordinated with the placement of the racks so that there are no cords run across pathways in the wiring room. All racking is to be grounded in accordance with NEMA standards.

2. All electronics shall be supported by an UPS system capable of maintaining the system

for a minimum of 120 minutes in the event of a power failure. Along with the 120 minutes up time the UPS shall be sized to support the current draw of the electronics plus an additional 50% capacity. Only the electronics can plug into the UPS system. The UPS will be SNMP manageable.

F. Lighting: All lighting must be incandescent. Under NO CIRCUMSTANCES is fluorescent

lighting permitted inside the wiring room. All lighting must be positioned so that the physical plant does not obstruct the illumination. Lighting shall be controlled by motion sensitive devices so that the wiring room is illuminated when someone enters and returns to dark upon their exit. The minimum acceptable light output is 50 foot candles at 3 feet above the floor.


G. Security:

1. The door lock on this room shall be on the separate (ABM7) key system. The wiring room contains Information Technology Services equipment only. It shall be keyed so the Vice President for Information Technology controls access to the wiring rooms. In the event that someone requests an additional key, that request must pass through the Vice President for Information Technology.

2. In the event that a wiring room is entered the Vice President for Information Technology

and Public Safety Department shall receive notification that the area’s security has been breached. All wiring rooms shall be windowless. In the event a window is present it must be covered by a security gate that can only be operated from within the wiring room.

H. Location: All wiring room locations must conform to EIA/TIA 568, EIA/TIA 569, EIA/TIA 607,

and EIA/TIA 606 standards. The wiring room must be located physically so that the farthest point served by the wiring room does not exceed 300 feet.

I. Layout: Using University specified standard components, all cabling is to be supported from

the point it enters the wiring room to the point it terminates or is stored for future termination. Physical components are to be secured with industry standard devices in accordance with the manufacturer’s directives. Prior to any construction activity in a wiring room, detailed drawings and worksheets shall be forwarded to the University Information Technology Division, for review and approval.

J. Environment: Each wiring room shall be cooled with a filtered air source that provides a

positive atmospheric pressure to prevent the introduction of airborne particulate matter into the wiring room. The wiring room must maintain humidity 30% - 55% and temperature of 65° - 75°F or as specified by the manufacturer of the equipment placed in the wiring room. A monitoring system shall be in place to inform the Public Safety Department, the University Information Technology Division, and the tradesperson responsible for maintaining the environment. Dust migration must be less than 100 micrograms/cubic meter/24 hour period. Floors shall be anti-static VCT.

K. Fire Protection: The wiring room shall be equipped with a fire detection system and a form of

fire extinguishing system. Sprinkler system must be offset from all network equipment in order to prevent damage in case of leaks or accidental discharge.

L. Documentation:

1. Upon completion of the wiring room 3 copies of all test results, as built drawings and any other pertinent documentation shall be provided. This shall be provided in both hard copy and electronic media. One copy shall be forwarded to the Director of Physical Facilities and two copies shall be forwarded to the University Information Technology Services Division. The wiring room will not be considered complete until the documentation is reviewed and accepted by both the Director of Physical Facilities and the University Information Technology Services Division.


M. Infrastructure:

1. The University has standardized on several pieces of hardware for the support of the infrastructure. Each rack shall be a standard 19" by 84" rack, unless otherwise noted. The racks shall be aluminum and with a clear finish. The hole spacing should be 1/2", 1/2", 5/8". Individual patch panels can have a maximum of 48 ports. All patch panels shall have their own cable management above and below them. In the event there is more than one rack in the wiring room the racks shall have vertical cable management devices separating them with management of the cables in both the front and rear of the racks. All racks shall have the bottom 2 1/2 feet open for air circulation. All of the racks shall be secured to the floor in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications and have a cable runway to support the cabling from the point of entry to the rack. The cable runway shall reach to the wall and be secured at the walls and secured to the ceilings at intervals as recommended by the manufacturers. In all cases the ONLY acceptable cable tie is a Velcro device. Voice Cabling shall be broken out and attached to the Plywood covered wall. The voice cable shall be supported with the use of D rings places in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. The cable shall terminate in cross connect blocks that are attached to the plywood and all cross connections shall be supported with wire spools in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. The design plans along with a bill of materials shall be presented to the University Information Technology Services Division for approval prior to beginning any work.

2. In the event coaxial cable is part of the infrastructure: The cable must be separated and placed onto one of the plywood walls. It shall be attached in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. Fiber optic cable that is not terminated shall be coiled and secured with a service loop that is consistent with the standards in the next section of this document.

3. It is important to note: UNIVERSITY POLICY IS NOT TO CUT EXCESS FIBER! Excess

fiber will be coiled and marked in accordance with EIA/TIA 568 A/B standards. Fiber will be marked with labels designating it as fiber optic cable in accordance with the standards in the next section of this document.

4. The above paragraphs DO NOT describe a bill of materials; the University has selected

several vendors' products that meet University specifications. However, the University Information Technology Services Division shall be provided with cut sheets and consulted with the current document. In all cases the University Information Technology Services Division shall approve the plan for cabling and construction of the wiring room.

N. Labeling: All labeling will be done consistent with the current standards document. In the

event a contractor wishes to substitute a different material, samples must be submitted to and prior written approval must be obtained from the University Information Technology Division before using the alternate material.

3.13 WIRELESS NETWORKS

A. All wireless network electronics including WLAN (Wireless Local Area Network) and LAN

(Local Area Network) Equipment will be furnished by the Owner and installed by a University approved vendor as specified under this contract. Cisco Systems should be the sole source provider of devices and implementation as directed by the University. Deviation of the above is subject to approval by Kutztown University Information Technology. This authorization sets a standard and consistency on University WAN/LAN and is desired for technical ability and experience with the current wireless networking infrastructure.


B. Wireless site surveys and integrator must be approved by Kutztown University Information Technology Services Division. The approved integrator must be a certified wireless installer. The integrator must provide references of wireless projects of comparable size and scope that have been completed in the past twelve months.

C. Specifications:

1. Assign "strong" passwords to access points.

2. Turn SSID broadcasting "on".

3. Utilize static IP addresses.

4. Turn WEP "off".

5. Utilize dynamic key exchange mechanisms.

6. Ensure NIC and access point firmware is up-to-date.

7. Implement mutual authentication mechanisms.

8. Minimize radio wave propagation in non-user areas.


Rev. 9/13 Section 310000 - Earthwork KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 310000

EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preparing and grading sub-grades for concrete, paving, and seeding.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Excavation consists of the removal of material encountered to sub-grade elevations and the

reuse or disposal of materials removed.

B. Sub-grade: The uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below sub-base, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

C. Borrow: Soil material obtained off-site when sufficient approved soil material is not available

from excavations.

D. Sub-base Course: The layer placed between the sub-grade and base course in a paving system.

E. Base Course: The layer placed between the sub-base and surface pavement in a paving

system.

F. Unauthorized excavation consists of removing materials beyond indicated sub-grade elevations or dimensions without direction by the University. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by the University, shall be at the Contractor's expense.

G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, paving,

concrete, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface.

H. Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground

services within building lines.


A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Testing and Inspection Service: It is recommended that geotechnical reports be provided for

areas where new construction will take place. Employ a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to classify proposed on-site and borrow soils to verify that soils comply with specified requirements and to perform required field and laboratory testing.

C. Stone Sub-base Materials: To be conformance with the Pennsylvania Department of

Transportation Publication 408/90.



A. All excavation for Kutztown University projects shall be unclassified excavation, meaning that whatever material is encountered during excavation must be removed. If the soils reports indicate large quantities of rock at the elevations of the building footings, this procedure may be modified, with the permission of the Project Manager. The Contractor shall stop excavation if anything of archaeological value is encountered.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied by the University or

others except when permitted in writing by the University and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided.

1. Provide a minimum 48-hours' notice to the University and receive written notice to proceed

before interrupting any utility.

2. Locate all existing utilities before proceeding with any work. Contractor will be responsible to repair any damage done to existing utility lines.

C. The Contractor may be required to hire a Soils Engineer approved by the Professional to

perform inspection and testing of all earthwork. Soils Engineer shall be a Professional Engineer licensed in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and possess professional liability insurance in the minimum amount of $500,000. Soils Engineer shall provide all field and laboratory services required to:

1. Test and evaluate all samples of proposed fill materials to determine optimum moisture

density relationship in accordance with ASTM D 1557.

2. Test all samples to assure compliance with gradation requirements of this Specification. Grain size analysis shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D 422.

3. Determine depth of topsoil stripping.

4. Inspect all proof rolling and determine the presence of any local soft pockets.

5. Inspect excavation in natural soil to determine if bearing stratum meets design criteria.

6. Inspect and test compacted fill to determine compliance with Specifications. Field

densities shall be determined by ASTM D 1556M, ASTM D 2167 or ASTM D 2922.

7. Keep written records of all tests and field instructions, and summaries of these reports shall be mailed weekly to the Professional, University, University Code Official, and Contractor. Final written summaries shall be provided upon completion of work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide approved borrow soil materials from off-site when sufficient approved soil

materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM; free of rock or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation and other deleterious matter.


C. Unsatisfactory Soil Materials: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT.

D. Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials.

E. Stone Sub-base Material: Shall be in accordance with PADOT 2A aggregate.

F. Engineered Fill: Stone Sub-base material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by

settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Locate and protect all existing utilities before proceeding with the work.

B. Protect sub-grades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide

protective insulating materials as necessary.

C. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.02 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding

on prepared sub-grades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect sub-grades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.

3.03 EXCAVATION

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

B. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to required sub-

grade elevations regardless of the character of material and obstruction encountered.

3.04 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS

A. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations.

3.05 EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under paving to required cross sections, elevations, and grades.

B. Remove all existing stone sub-base as required.

3.06 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE

A. Notify University when excavations have reached required sub-grade.


B. When University determines that unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted stone sub-base material. 1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the

Contract provisions for changes in Work, under the replacement of soft and yielding sub-grade.

C. Reconstruct sub-grades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by the University, at no additional cost to the University.

3.07 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation with compacted stone sub-base material. This additional stone sub-base will be done at no additional cost to the University.

3.08 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable

borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind-blown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of

remaining trees.

3.09 BACKFILL

A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Concrete formwork removal.

2. Removal of trash and debris from excavation.

3. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.

3.10 FILL

A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills.

1. Plow strip, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material

will bond with existing surface.

B. When sub-grade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill, break up ground surface to depth required, pulverize, moisture condition or aerate soil and re-compact to required density.

C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location listed below.

1. Under grass, use satisfactory excavated or borrows soil material.

2. Under paving, use sub-base material.


3.11 COMPACTION

A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations. Place

backfill and fill uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Percentage of Maximum Dry Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under paving and concrete compact all sub-grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at

95 percent maximum dry density.

2. Under lawn or unpaved areas, compact the top 6 inches below sub-grade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent maximum dry density.

D. Contractor shall employ the services of an independent geotechnical engineer who shall verify

that the sub-grade is compacted to proper density. Submit all test results to the University for their review. All areas which show deficient compaction requirements shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the University.

3.12 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes.

Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades.

2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish sub-grades to required elevations.

C. The Contractor shall do all grading to bring the work area to the final grades indicated on the

drawings or back to original existing condition.

3.13 SUBBASE COURSES

A. Under paving, place sub-base course material on prepared sub-grades. Place base course material over sub-bases to pavements.

1. Compact sub-base courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross

sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of ASTM D 4254 relative density.

2. Shape sub-base and base to required crown elevations and cross slope grades.

3. When thickness of compacted sub-base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer. When thickness of compacted sub-base or base course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.



A. Testing Agency Services: Allow testing agency retained by the Contractor to inspect and test each sub-grade and each fill or backfill layer. Do not proceed until test results for previously completed work verify compliance with requirements.

B. When testing agency reports that sub-grades, fills, or backfills are below specified density,

scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, re-compact and retest until required density is obtained.

3.15 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep

free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the University; reshape and re-

compact at optimum moisture content to the required density.

C. Settling: Where settling occurs during the Project correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and

eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.

3.16 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off the University's property.


Rev. 9/13 Section 311100 - Clearing and Grubbing KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 4

SECTION 311100

CLEARING AND GRUBBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION.

A. The Work of this section includes, but is not limited to:

1. Contractor’s staging area. 2. Clearing. 3. Grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling soil. 5. Debris disposal.

B. Related Work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 310000 – Earthwork. 2. Section 312333 – Trenching & Backfilling. 3. Section 329000 – Planting.

C. Definitions:

1. Clearing is defined as the removal of trees, brush, down timber, rotten wood, rubbish, any

other vegetation, and objectionable material at or above original ground elevation not designated to be saved; clearing also includes removal of fences, walls, guard posts, guard rail, signs, and other obstructions interfering with the proposed work.

2. Grubbing is defined as the removal from below surface of the natural ground of stumps, roots and stubs, brush, organic material, and debris.

1.02 JOB CONDITIONS.

A. The Contractor may clear all obstructions within the permanent and construction rights-of-

way or property except those specifically indicated on the Contract Drawings or specified to be saved or restored.

B. Obstructions specifically designated to be saved or restored will be marked by the Architect.

1.03 SUBMITTALS.

A. Burning Permits: Burning will not be permitted on site.

B. Permits for Disposal of Debris:

1. Arrange for disposal of debris resulting from clearing and grubbing to locations outside the Owner’s property and obtain written agreements with the owners of the property where the debris will be deposited.

2. Submit two copies of the agreement with each property owner releasing the Owner from

responsibility in connection with the disposal of the debris.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS.

A. Temporary Construction Fencing:

1. Temporary fencing shall be 6 ft. high. Fencing shall be firmly attached to posts placed on 6 ft. centers. Posts shall have a 2 ft. depth of bury in grass areas. Provide supports for posts in paved areas, to be approved by Architect. Temporary chain link fence shall be made of galvanized #9 gauge mesh fabric with openings approximately 2 inches square. Fence fabric shall be secured to galvanized metal railings and posts sized to provide adequate tension and support.

B. Wood Tree Guards:

1. Wood posts: 2” x 4” 2. Wood stringers: 2” x 2”

C. Wrapping Materials:

1. Burlap: AASHTO M182, Class 1. 2. Krinkle-kraft waterproof paper: 4” width.

D. Tree Wound Dressing: Antiseptic and waterproof, asphalt base.

E. Stone.

1. AASHTO #67 stone.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION.

A. Mark areas to be cleared, the areas to be grubbed, and items to be saved with stakes, flags,

paint or plastic colored ribbon for the approval of the Architect.

B. Protect benchmarks, utilities, existing trees, shrubs and other landscape features designated for preservation with temporary fencing or barricades satisfactory to the Architect.

C. No material shall be stored or construction operation carried on within 10 ft. of any tree to be saved or within the tree protection fencing.

D. When a private enclosure fence encroaches on the work area, notify the property owner at least 5 days in advance of the clearing/grubbing operations to permit the owner to remove it, construct a supplemental fence, or make sure other arrangements as may be necessary for security purposes; in failure of the property owner to reasonably proceed with the work required to secure his property, carefully remove the fence, in whole or in part, and neatly pile the materials onto the owner’s property.


3.02 UTILITY RELOCATIONS.

A. Inform utility companies, individuals and others owning or controlling facilities or structures within the limits of the work which have to be relocated, adjusted or reconstructed in sufficient time for the utility to organize and perform such work in conjunction with or in advance of the Contractor’s operations.

B. Comply with the provisions of Act 187.

3.03 CLEARING.

A. Confine clearing to within the permanent and construction rights-of-way or property.

B. Fell trees in a manner that will avoid damage to trees, shrubs, and other installations which are to be retained.

3.04 GRUBBING.

A. Grub areas within the construction limits to remove roots and other objectionable material to

a minimum depth of 8”.

B. Remove all stumps within the cleared areas.

3.05 STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING TOPSOIL.

A. Strip topsoil to whatever depth it may occur from areas to be excavated, filled, or graded and stockpile at a location shown on the plans or approved by the Architect for use in finish grading.

B. The topsoil is the property of the Owner and shall not be used as backfill. Topsoil shall not be removed from the site unless otherwise authorized by Architect.

3.06 DEBRIS DISPOSAL

A. Trees, logs, branches, brush, stumps, and other debris resulting from clearing and grubbing

operations shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally disposed.

B. Do not deposit or bury on the site debris resulting from the clearing and grubbing work.

C. Debris may not be burned on site.

3.07 RESTORATION

A. Repair all injuries to bark, trunk, limbs, and roots of remaining plants by properly dressing, cutting, tracing and painting, using approved arboricultural practices and materials.

B. Replace trees, shrubs and plants designated to be saved which are permanently injured or die during the life of the Contract as a result of construction operations with like species acceptable to the project Owner.

C. Remove protective fences, enclosures and guards upon the completion of the project.


D. Restore guard posts, guard rail, signs and other interferences to the condition equal to that existing before construction operations.

E. Remove all stone within Contractor’s staging area. Replace topsoil and restore disturbed

areas to a condition equal to or exceeding condition before construction. Restore grassed areas in accordance with Section 329000, Planting. Contractor shall fine grade as necessary, apply fertilizer, sow grass seed, and mulch.


Rev. 9/13 Section 312333 – Trenching and Backfilling KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 6

SECTION 312333

TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1. Trench excavation, backfill and compaction.

2. Support of excavation.

3. Pipe bedding requirements.

4. Control of excavated material.

5. Restoration of unpaved surfaces.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 311100 – Clearing and Grubbing.

2. Section 310000 – Earthwork.

3. Section 329000 – Planting.


A. Testing Agency: Density testing shall be performed by an independent soils testing

laboratory engaged and paid for by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. B. Referenced Standards:

1. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PENNDOT):

a. Regulations Governing Occupancy of Highways by Utilities (67 PA Code, Chapter

459). b. Publication 408 Specifications, 1994 as amended. c. Pennsylvania Test Method, PTM 106. d. Pennsylvania Test Method, PTM 402. e. Publication 203, Work Zone Traffic Control.

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ATSM):

a. D698 Test for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort. b. D1556 Test for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method. c. D2922 Test for Density of Soil and Soil Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods.


C. Density Testing:

1. Conduct a minimum of two (2) density tests per pipeline section. Conduct one (1) test in the lower half of the trench and one (1) test in the upper half of the trench at locations as directed by the Architect during backfilling operations. If any test fails, the Contractor shall take remedial steps to correct the compaction and rerun the test until compliance with the density requirements are shown. A density test that fails does not count toward the number of tests to be taken. The cost of the initial test and any required retesting is the responsibility of the Contractor.

2. Determine density by ASTM D1556 or ASTM D2922.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 013300. B. Certificates:

1. Submit, prior to delivery of material to the job site, a Statement of Compliance from the

materials supplier, together with supporting data, attesting that the composition analysis of pipe bedding and select material stone backfill materials meets specification requirements. Should a change in source of materials be made during construction, submit a new Statement of Compliance from the new source for approval before the material is delivered to the job site.

2. Submit certified density testing results from the soils testing laboratory.

C. Compaction Equipment List: Submit a list of all equipment to be utilized for compacting,

including the equipment manufacturer’s lift thickness limitations. D. Agreements with Property Owners: Prior to storing or disposing of excavated materials on

private property, submit a copy of the written agreement with the property owner.

1.04 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Classification of Excavation: All excavation work performed under this contract is UNCLASSIFIED, and includes excavation and removal of all soil, shale, rock, boulders, fill, and all other materials encountered of whatever nature.

B. Control of Traffic: Employ traffic controls measures in accordance with Pennsylvania

Department of Transportation Publication 202, “Work Zone Traffic Control.” C. Protection of Existing Utilities and Structures:

1. Take all precautions and utilize all facilities required to protect existing utilities and

structures. In compliance with Act 187 of the General Assembly of Pennsylvania, advise each Utility at least 3 working days in advance of intent to excavate, do demolition work or use explosives and give the location of the job site. Request cooperative steps of the Utility and suggestions for procedures to avoid damage to its lines.

2. Advise each person in physical control of powered equipment or explosives used in

excavation or demolition work of the type and location of utility lines at the job site, the Utility assistance to expect, and procedures to follow to prevent damage.


3. Immediately report to the Utility and the Architect any break, leak or other damage to the lines or protective coatings made or discovered during the work and immediately alert the occupants of premises of any emergency created or discovered.

4. Allow free access to Utility personnel at all times for purposes of maintenance, repair and

inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE BEDDING MATERIAL

A. Type II Bedding Material: Crushed stone or gravel aggregate conforming to AASHTO No. 8 as specified in Section 703.2, Publication 408 Specifications.

2.02 BACKFILL MATERIAL

A. Select Granular Material Backfill: Crushed stone or gravel aggregate conforming to Select

Granular Material, Section 703.3, Publication 408 Specifications B. Suitable Backfill Material:

1. From top of pipe bedding material to 24” over top of pipe:

2. Material excavated from the trench if free of stones larger than 2” in size and free of wet,

frozen, or organic materials.

a. From 24” above pipe to sub-grade elevation:

3. Material excavated from the trench if free of stones larger than 8” in size and free of wet, frozen, or organic materials.

C. Unsuitable Backfill Material: Where the Architect deems backfill material to be unsuitable

and rejects all or part thereof due to conditions prevailing at the time of construction, remove the unsuitable material and replace with select material stone backfill as specified in paragraph 2.02.A or suitable foreign backfill material.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL

A. Safety Fencing:

1. Safety fencing shall be 4 ft. high. Fencing shall be firmly attached to posts placed on 6 ft.

centers. Posts shall have a 2 ft. depth of bury. Temporary fence shall be made of flexible high density orange polyethylene for maximum visibility and strength, two-inch square mesh design, non-conducting, non-toxic, and resistant to acid and corrosion.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 CUTTING PAVED SURFACES

A. Where excavation includes breaking a paved surface, make cuts in a neat uniform fashion

forming straight lines parallel with the centerline of the trench. Cut offsets at right angles to the centerline of the trench. Saw cut concrete and bituminous surfaces; saw cut other hard surfaces or make straight cuts with jackhammer. No paving shall be broken except that which has been previously cut.


B. Protect edges of cut pavement during excavation to prevent raveling or breaking; square edges prior to pavement replacement.

3.02 BLASTING

A. No blasting will be permitted.

3.03 TRENCH EXCAVATION

A. Topsoil Stripping and Stockpiling: Strip topsoil encountered during trench excavation to its

full depth and stockpile for reuse. B. Depth of Excavation:

1. Gravity Pipelines:

a. Excavate trenches to the depth and grade shown on the profile drawings for the

invert of the pipe plus that excavation necessary for placement of pipe bedding material.

C. Width of Excavation:

1. Excavate trenches to a width necessary for placing and jointing the pipe and for placing

and compacting bedding and backfill around the pipe.

2. Shape trench walls completely vertical from trench bottom to at least 24” above the top of the pipe.

3. Where rock is encountered in the sides of the trench, remove the rock to provide a

minimum clearance between the pipe and rock of 6”.

3.04 SUPPORT OF EXCAVATION

A. Support excavations with sheeting, shoring, and bracing or a “trench box” as required complying with Federal and State laws and codes. Install adequate excavation supports to prevent ground movement or settlement to adjacent structures, pipelines or utilities. Damage due to settlement because of failure to provide support or through negligence or fault of the Contractor in any other manner shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.

B. Withdraw shoring, bracing, and sheeting as backfilling proceeds unless otherwise directed by

the Architect.

3.05 CONTROL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Keep the ground surface within a minimum of 2’ of both sides of the excavation free of excavated material.

B. In areas where pipelines parallel or cross streams, ensure that no material slides, is washed,

or dumped into the stream course. Remove cofferdams immediately upon completion of pipeline construction.


C. Maintain accessibility to all fire hydrants, valve pit covers, valve boxes, curb boxes, fire and police call boxes, and other utility controls at all times. Keep gutters clear or provide other satisfactory facilities for street drainage. Do not obstruct natural watercourses. Where necessary, provide temporary channels to allow the flow of water either along or across the site of the work.

D. Provide temporary barricades to prevent excavated material from encroaching on private

property, walks, gutters, and storm drains.

E. Do not place or store excavated material on private property without a written agreement signed by the property owner.

3.06 DEWATERING

A. Keep excavations dry and free of water. Dispose of precipitation and subsurface water clear

of the work. B. Maintain pipe trenches dry until pipe has been jointed, inspected, and backfilled, and

concrete work has been completed. Prevent trench water from entering pipelines under construction.

C. Intercept and divert surface drainage away from excavations. Maintain storm drainage

facilities, gutters, and natural surface watercourses open and in operation. Provide and install temporary facilities to maintain excavations free of water as required. Design surface drainage systems so that they do not cause erosion on or off the site, or cause unwanted flow of water. When mechanical equipment is utilized to control water conditions, provide and maintain sufficient standby units onsite.

D. Comply with Federal and State requirements for dewatering to any watercourse, prevention

of stream degradation, and erosion and sediment control. Comply with the Sediment and Erosion Control Plan.

3.07 PIPE BEDDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Type II Bedding:

1. Provide Type II bedding for all pipe materials, unless otherwise authorized by the

Architect.

B. Shape recesses for the joints or bell of the pipe by hand. Assure that the pipe is supported on the lower quadrant for the entire length of the barrel.

3.08 PIPE LAYING

A. Lay pipe as specified in the appropriate Section of these Specifications for pipeline

construction.

3.09 BACKFILLING TRENCHES

A. After pipe installation and inspection, backfill trenches from trench bottom or from the top of pipe bedding material, whichever is greater, to 12” above the crown of the pipe with specified backfill material hand placed and carefully compacted with hand-operated mechanical tampers in layers of suitable thickness to provide specified density around and under the haunches of the pipe. Backfill and compact the remainder of the trench with specified backfill material.


B. Exposed Joints for Testing:

1. The Contractor has the option to test the pipe prior to backfilling the trench. If this option is selected, install reaction blocks where required and place 2’ of thoroughly compacted backfill over the pipe leaving pipe joints partially exposed.

2. If the Contractor elects to completely backfill the trench prior to testing, he shall be

responsible for locating and uncovering leaks which may cause the test to fail.

C. Lift Thickness Limitations:

1. In no case shall maximum lift thickness placed exceed the maximum limits specified by the manufacturer’s recommendations. However, if the equipment manufacturer’s lift thickness recommendation is followed and the specified density is not obtained, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, remove, replace, and retest as many times as is required to obtain the specified density.

2. Compact each layer of backfill to 95% of the standard proctor maximum dry density as

determined by ASTM D698.

3. Lift thickness limitations specified for state highways, shoulders, or embankments govern over the compaction equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Notwithstanding the specified requirements for trench backfill compaction, trenches that settle

below the surrounding grade prior to final completion shall be filled to surrounding grade level with appropriate materials.

3.10 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

A. Excavated material remaining after completion of backfilling shall remain the property of the Contractor, removed from the construction area and legally disposed.

3.11 RESTORATION OF UNPAVED SURFACES

A. Restore unpaved surfaces disturbed by construction to equal the surface condition prior to

construction. B. Restore grassed areas in accordance with Section 32 90 00, Planting.

3.12 SAFETY FENCING

A. Safety fencing shall be installed around all trenching and excavation not confined within the

chain link construction fencing. B. Safety fencing shall be installed around any trenching or excavation within the chain link

construction fencing that is required to be open for a period of three (3) days or more. END OF SECTION 312333

Rev. 9/13 Section 321216 – Asphalt Paving KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 321216

ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY


1. Asphalt materials. 2. Aggregate materials. 3. Aggregate base. 4. Asphalt paving base course, binder course, and wearing course. 5. Asphalt paving overlay for existing paving. 6. Surface slurry.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials:

1. AASHTO M17 - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 2. AASHTO M29 - Standard Specification for Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving

Mixtures. 3. AASHTO M140 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt. 4. AASHTO M208 - Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. 5. AASHTO M288 - Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway

Applications. 6. AASHTO M320 - Standard Specification for Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder. 7. AASHTO M324 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for

Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 8. AASHTO MP1a - Standard Specification for Performance-Graded Asphalt Binder.

B. Asphalt Institute:

1. AI MS-2 - Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot- Mix Types. 2. AI MS-19 - Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual. 3. AI SP-2 - Superpave Mix Design.

C. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C1371[-2004a] - Standard Test Method for Determination of Emittance of

Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers. 2. ASTM C1549[-2004] - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near

Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer. 3. ASTM D242 - Standard Specification for Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 4. ASTM D692 - Standard Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving

Mixtures. 5. ASTM D946 - Standard Specification for Penetration-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in

Pavement Construction. 6. ASTM D977 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt.


7. ASTM D1073 - Standard Specification for Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures.

8. ASTM D1188 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Coated Samples

9. ASTM D2027 - Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt (Medium-Curing Type). 10. ASTM D2397 - Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt. 11. ASTM D2726 - Standard Test Method for Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non-

Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures. 12. ASTM D2950 - Standard Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by

Nuclear Methods. 13. ASTM D3381 - Standard Specification for Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in

Pavement Construction. 14. ASTM D3515 - Standard Specification for Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving

Mixtures. 15. ASTM D3549 - Standard Test Method for Thickness or Height of Compacted Bituminous

Paving Mixture Specimens. 16. ASTM D3910 - Standard Practices for Design, Testing, and Construction of Slurry Seal. 17. ASTM D6690 - Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied, for

Concrete and Asphalt Pavements. 18. ASTM E408[-1971(1996)e1] - Standard Test Methods for Total Normal Emittance of

Surfaces Using Inspection-Meter Techniques. 19. ASTM E903[-1996] - Standard Test Method for Solar Absorptance, Reflectance, and

Transmittance of Materials Using Integrating Spheres. 20. ASTM E1918[-1997] - Standard Test Method for Measuring Solar Reflectance of

Horizontal and Low-Sloped Surfaces in the Field. 21. ASTM E1980[-2001] - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of

Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces.

D. PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest Edition.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit product information for asphalt and aggregate materials.

2. Submit mix design with laboratory test results supporting design.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.04 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN SUBMITTALS

A. Division 1 - Sustainable Project Requirements: Requirements for sustainable design

submittals.

B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified sustainable design requirements.

1. Sustainable Sites Certificates:

a. Certify paving materials solar reflectance index.


2. Materials Resources Certificates:

a. Certify recycled material content for recycled content products. b. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site.

C. Product Cost Data: Submit cost of products to verify compliance with Project sustainable

design requirements. Exclude cost of labor and equipment to install products. 1. Provide cost data for the following products:

a. Products with recycled material content. b. Regional products.


A. Mixing Plant: Conform to PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest Edition.

B. Obtain materials from same source throughout.

C. Perform Work in accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest Edition.

D. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.06 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years

documented experience.

1.07 AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Do not place asphalt mixture between November 1 and March 1 without specific consent of

owner.

B. Do not place asphalt mixture when ambient air or base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, or surface is wet or frozen.

C. Ideally, asphalt mixture shall be placed when temperature is not more than 15 degrees F less

than initial mixing temperature. At no time will asphalt mixture be placed when material temperature is less than 200 degrees F.

D. Compaction shall be completed before mix temperature cools to 185 degrees F.

2 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 SUSTAINABILITY CHARACTERISTICS

A. Division 1 - Sustainable Project Requirements: Requirements for sustainable design

compliance.

B. Sustainable Sites Characteristics:


1. Paving Surfaces: Minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) of 29, calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980. a. Reflectance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E903, ASTM E1918, or ASTM

C1549. b. Emittance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E408 or ASTM C1371.

C. Materials and Resources Characteristics:

1. Recycled Content Materials: Furnish materials with maximum available recycled content.

2. Regional Materials: Furnish materials extracted, processed, and manufactured within 500

miles of Project site.

2.02 ASPHALT PAVING MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: In accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408.

B. Aggregate for Base Course Mix: In accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408.

C. Aggregate for Wearing Course Mix: In accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408.

D. Fine Aggregate: In accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408.

E. Mineral Filler: Finely ground particles of limestone, hydrated lime or other mineral dust, free of

foreign matter.

F. Primer: In accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408.

G. Tack Coat: In accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408.

H. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): Processed material obtained by milling or full depth removal of existing asphalt concrete pavements.

2.03 ASPHALT PAVING MIX

A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly.

B. Base Course: Conforming to PENNDOT Publication 408 Superpave Asphalt Mix Design, HMA

Base Course 25 mm mix, PG 64-22.

C. Binder Course: Conforming to PENNDOT Publication 408 Superpave Asphalt Mix Design, HMA Binder Course 19 mm Mix, PG 64-22.

D. Wearing Course: Conforming to PENNDOT Publication 408 Superpave Asphalt mix Design,

HMA Wearing Course 9.5 mm mix, PG 64-22.

E. Reclaimed Asphalt Content: Maximum 20 percent by weight.

F. Paving Surfaces: Minimum solar reflectance index (SRI) of 29, calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980.


1. Reflectance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E903, ASTM E1918, or ASTM C1549.

2. Emittance: Measured in accordance with ASTM E408 or ASTM C1371.

G. Sealant: ASTM D6690, Type II or Type III; hot applied type.

2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements.

B. Submit proposed mix design of each class of mix for review prior to beginning of Work.

C. Test samples in accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest Edition, Section 409.

3 PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for installation examination.

B. Verify utilities indicated under paving are installed with excavations and trenches backfilled

and compacted.

C. Verify compacted subgrade and subbase is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads.

1. Proof roll subbase with minimum of two perpendicular passes to identify soft spots.

2. Remove soft subbase and replace with compacted fill as specified. Verify gradients and

elevations of base are correct.

D. Verify manhole frames and structures are installed in correct position and elevation.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare subbase in accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest Edition.

3.03 DEMOLITION

A. Saw cut and notch existing paving as indicted on Contract Drawings.

B. Clean existing paving to remove foreign material, excess joint sealant and crack filler from

paving surface.

C. Repair surface defects in existing paving to provide uniform surface to receive new paving. 3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Sub-base:

1. Aggregate Subbase: Install as specified in Section 321123, Aggregate Base Course.

2. Prepare subbase in accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest Edition.


B. Primer: 1. Apply primer in accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest Edition.

C. Tack Coat:

1. Apply tack coat in accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest Edition.

D. Single Course Asphalt Paving:

1. Install Work in accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest Edition, Section 409.

2. Place asphalt within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.

3. Place asphalt wearing course thickness indicated on Contract Drawings.

4. Compact paving by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude paving from

position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

5. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish without roller marks.

E. Double Course Asphalt Paving:

1. Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat.

2. Place binder course to thickness indicated on Contract Drawings.

3. Place wearing course within 24 hours of placing and compacting binder course. When

binder course is placed more than 24 hours before placing wearing course, clean surface and apply tack coat before placing wearing course.

4. Place wearing course to thickness indicated on Contract Drawings.

5. Compact each course by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude paving

from position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

6. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.

F. Asphalt Paving Overlay

1. Apply tack coat to existing paving surface.

2. Place wearing course to thickness indicated on Contract Drawings.

3. Compact overlay by rolling to specified density. Do not displace or extrude paving from

position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment.

4. Perform rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks.


3.05 TOLERANCES A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Tolerances.

B. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/4 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge.

C. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch.

D. Variation from Indicated Elevation: Within 1/2 inch.


A. Division 1 - Quality Requirements: Requirements for inspecting, testing.

B. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting, and balancing.

C. Take samples and perform tests in accordance with PENNDOT Publication 408, Latest

Edition, Section 409. 3.07 PROTECTION

A. Division 1 - Execution Requirements: Requirements for protecting finished Work.

B. Immediately after placement, protect paving from mechanical injury for 16 hours or until

surface temperature is less than 140 degrees F. END OF SECTION 321216

Rev. 9/13 Section 321313 - Concrete Paving KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 321313

CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior Portland cement concrete paving for the following:

1. Curbs 2. Walkways 3. Ramps 4. Steps

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming

accessories, admixtures, joint systems, curing compounds, and others if requested by University.

C. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when

characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

D. Laboratory test reports for evaluation of concrete materials and mix design tests.

E. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by University.

Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with requirements.


A. Concrete Standards: Comply with provisions of the following standards, except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings."

2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete."

3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "manual of Standard Practice."

4. ASTM C260; "Standard Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete".

B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment.


C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materials evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.

D. All new concrete defaced by vandalism or other means shall be removed and replaced to the

satisfaction of the University at no extra cost to the University. Protect all new concrete to prevent vandalism.

E. All concrete items shall be constructed per the local authorities’ requirements.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required. Provide directional signs, barricades, construction fencing, etc., as directed by the University.

B. Provide sidewalks that are rated for vehicular loading at locations determined by University

personnel. C. Driveways and sidewalks will be constructed assuming a dual function as service vehicle

access ways and shall be minimum 8" thick concrete on minimum 6" crushed gravel or crushed stone base per KU Standard Detail S-8.

D. Locate sidewalks to suit locations where pedestrians would normally walk, rather than strictly

in accordance with symmetry of design. Coordinate with the University. E. Exterior stairs, regardless of the number of risers, shall be provided with handrails in

accordance with Section 055200. Additionally, each step shall be a non-slip nosing installed on the leading edge. This nosing shall be a high contrast color (black) to provide better definition between the step edge and concrete riser.

F. Standard widths of sidewalks:

1. Secondary walks for pedestrian use only shall be a minimum of 10'-0" wide or match

adjacent sidewalk width, whichever is greater.

2. Primary walks shared by pedestrians and emergency vehicles shall be a minimum of 15'-0" wide.

G. All sidewalks shall be designed to not exceed a 2% cross slope. Running slopes, landings,

railings shall comply with ADA Accessibility requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal framed plywood, or other acceptable panel type materials to provide full depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves.

2. Forms shall be profiled to suit field conditions.

B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of

350 mg/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.


2.02 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Pain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82.

C. Welded Steel Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185.

D. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for

spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.

1. Use supports with sand plated or horizontal runners where base material will not support

chair legs. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.

1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer.

B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, and as follows. Provide aggregates from a single source.

1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch. 2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 3. Water: Potable.

2.04 ADMIXTURES

A. Provide concrete admixtures that contain no more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. No admixtures containing calcium chloride are permitted.

B. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other

required admixtures.

1. Air Entraining Admixture:

a. Darex AEA or Daravair; W.R. Grace & Co. b. Sealtight AEA; W.R. Meadows, Inc. c. Sika AER; Sika Corp.

C. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

1. Water Reducing Admixture:

a. WRDA; W.R. Grace & Co. b. Plastocrete 161; Sika Corp.


D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.

1. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: a. WRDA 19 or Daracem; W.R. Grace & Co. b. Sikament 300; Sika Corp.

E. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.

1. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture:

a. Daraset; W.R. Grace & Co. b. Accel-Set; Metalcrete Industries.

F. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.

1. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture:

a. Daratard-17; W.R. Grace & Co. b. Plastiment; Sika Corporation.

2.05 CURING MATERIALS

A. Clear Waterborne Membrane Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

B. Provide material limited to a maximum solvent content of 0.75 lbs per gallon.

1. Acceptable Clear Waterborne Membrane Forming Curing Compound Manufactures:

a. VOCOMP-20; W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.06 SEALING MATERIALS

A. Clear water base acrylic concrete sealer: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

2.07 CONCRETE MIX

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal weight concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

1. Do not use the Owner's field quality control testing agency as the independent testing

agency.

B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28-Day): 3000 psi.

2. Water Cement Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.46.


3. Slump Limit at Point of Placement: 3 inches.

a. Slump limit for concrete containing high range water reducing admixture (superplasticizer): Not more than 8 inches after adding admixture to site verified 2-to-3-inch slump concrete.

C. Add air entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent:

1. Air Content: 6.0 percent for 1-inch maximum aggregate.

D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor

when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.

E. Consider the use of admixtures which are advisable because of anticipated temperature

ranges during cure, and which will improve the properties of concrete. Each admixture shall be certified by the manufacturer to contain no more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by pass of cement and to be compatible with other admixtures.

2.08 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Verify gradients and elevations of base.

B. Proof roll prepared sub-base surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

C. Remove loose material from compacted sub-base surface immediately before placing

concrete.

D. Moisten substrate to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete. 3.02 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances:

1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.


C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required ensuring separation from concrete without damage.

D. Place joint filler in joints, vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to form work.

E. Place joint filler between paving components and other appurtenances.

3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position

during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

3.04 JOINTS

A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed

joints, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and finishing each

edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool.

C. Isolation and Expansion Joints: Form isolation and expansion joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Locate expansion joints at intervals as shown on the standard detail.

2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. Place top of joint filler flush with finished

concrete surface.

3. Furnish joint fillers in one piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other

temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-

coat one half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.


3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from sub-base surface before placing concrete. Do not place

concrete on surfaces that are frozen.

C. Moisten sub-base to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

D. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and

placing concrete.

E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

1. When concrete placing is interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint.

F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading,

rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an

internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.

G. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a

smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

H. Cold Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect

concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C),

uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

I. Hot Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot weather conditions exist.

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to

below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.


2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog spray forms and sub-grade just before placing concrete. Keep sub-grade moisture

uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

4. All curbs by driveways and parking areas shall be concrete.

5. Do not use exposed aggregate finish on concrete walks where salting or snow removal will be required.

3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power driven floats, or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture.

1. Medium to Fine Textured Broom Finish: Concrete pavements shall be given a medium-

to-fine textured finish, and two coats of a curing and sealing compound. Draw a soft bristle broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform fine line texture finish. The concrete surface shall be broom-finished for increased slip resistance.

B. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, steps, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a jointing tool. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture

loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete

surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound as follows:

1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

E. Sealing Method: Seal concrete after it has cured a minimum of 24 hours as per the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply two coats.


3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. Contractor shall employ a qualified independent testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Contractor shall take four (4) compression samples from each truck load of concrete that is placed. One of the samples shall be tested at seven days and another shall be tested at 28 days. Contractor shall cooperate with all testing agency requirements.

B. Test results will be reported in writing to University, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor

within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests.

C. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete at the

Contractor's expense when test results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by University. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

3.09 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete that is broken, damaged, vandalized, or defective, or does not meet the requirements of this Section, at no additional cost to the University. Exclude traffic from concrete for at least fourteen (14) days after placement. Remove surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. Protect concrete from vandalism with construction fencing, sheathing, directional signs, barricades, etc., as directed by the University.

B. Protect concrete from damage.

C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. D. Graffiti Protection: Wet concrete pavements shall be protected from graffiti. If graffiti is

present, concrete shall be removed by Contractor and replaced at Contractor’s expense. 3.10 STAMPED CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT SYSTEMS

A. Stamped Cement Concrete Pavement Systems: Bomanite Corporation is the preferred

manufacturer. Installer shall be approved by manufacturer. Coordinate patterns and colors with the University at the pre-final design submission. Surfaces shall be sealed or coated with skid-resistant products.


Rev. 9/13 Section 329000 - Planting KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 9

SECTION 329000

PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1. Furnishing and planting trees, shrubs, vines, perennials and groundcover, including required planting accessories, preparation of planting beds and transplanting of landscape materials, all as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein.

B. Work not included:

1. Finish grading, fertilizing, seeding, and mulching of grass seeded areas.

1.02 REFERENCES A. Codes and Regulations of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania. B. ANSI Z60.1 - Standard for Nursery Stock. C. Bailey's Standard Cyclopedia of Horticulture. D. Standardized Plant Names, American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature.

1.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection of Plants:

1. Arrange for inspection of plants; inspection of trees having over 2" caliper, including evergreens, will be made by the Architect at the nursery prior to digging.

2. Plants will again be examined after delivery to the project site, prior to planting;

Architect's approval of plants at the nursery or upon delivery will be for quality, size and variety only, and will not in any way impair the right of rejection for failure to meet other requirements during progress of the work or at time of inspection for final acceptance; final acceptance will be made at the project planting site.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates:

1. Submit certified nursery reports attesting that the materials meet or exceed specification requirements.

2. Submit certificate stating fertilizer, lime analysis content and percentage of each.

B. Samples: Submit 1 cubic foot mulch.


1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Mark plants for identification; attach legible labels to each bundle of plants and to each

species and variety of separate plants in any one shipment before delivery to the project site. B. Each species shall be packed as required by soil and climatic conditions at the time of

digging, and considering conditions of shipment and time consumed in transit and delivery. C. Move balled and burlapped plants with root systems as intact solid units and with balls of

earth firmly wrapped; plants with cracked, broken, or loosely wrapped balls will be rejected; handle plants from bottom of ball; protect plant roots, balls and tops from sun or drying winds until final planting; avoid sun scalding the balls.

D. Protect roots of bare-root plants with approved nursery packing material, properly dampened,

during delivery and storage at the project site; where there is unavoidable delay in planting, or when directed by the Architect, "heel-in" bare-roots plants; prior to heeling-in, all bare-rooted plants shall be puddled; the heeling-in operation will then consist of placing the plants, properly spread, in a trench and covering the roots with moist topsoil; plants stored in a shed shall have their roots protected at all times with moist straw or other acceptable material.

E. Plant material which has heated or "sweated" by reason of tight packing or poor ventilation

will be rejected. F. Deliver manufactured materials and products to the project site in their original unopened

containers or wrappings, clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name.

G. Comply with all local, State and Federal laws relative to the shipping of plants. H. All planting stock, if not planted immediately, shall be heeled-in or suitably stored; stock left

out of the ground unprotected overnight, or left with roots exposed to the sun, or otherwise unprotected during transit, unloading, heeling-in or planting shall be rejected if such lack of protection has resulted in injury to the plants.

1.06 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Planting Season:

1. Deciduous Trees and Shrubs: October 15 to May 15.

2. Evergreen Trees: March 1 to May 15; August 1 to September 15.

3. Seedlings and Seedling Transplants: March 1 to May 15. B. The planting periods may be extended or reduced according to prevailing weather and soil

conditions at the discretion of the Architect; do not plant bare-root plants during periods of freezing temperatures; preparations for planting may commence prior to the specified seasons if the plant location stakeout has been approved.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Extend warranty requirements of the General Conditions to cover the entire planting

operation, including the one year guaranty period.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANTS A. Planting Stock:

1. All plants shall be true to type and name in accordance with the latest edition of Standardized Plant Names, official code of the American Joint Committee on Horticulture Nomenclature, and each bundle or each plant, when not tied in bundles, shall be labeled properly.

2. All plants shall have a well-branched, vigorous and balanced root and top growth and,

unless otherwise specified, shall be No. 1 Grade conforming to "American Standard for Nursery Stock" of the American Association of Nurserymen (AAN). They shall be free from disease, injurious insects, mechanical wounds, broken branches, decay or any other defect. Trees shall have reasonably straight trunks with well balanced tops and a single leader. Deciduous plants, other than those specified as container grown, shall be dormant.

B. Nursery Grown Stock: All stock shall be nursery grown, in a State certified nursery; the

material shall have been growing at least 2 full growing seasons in a climate comparable to that of the work.

C. Roots: All main roots which are damaged or broken shall be pruned with clean oblique cut

immediately above point of damage. D. Balled and Burlapped Stock:

1. Plants designated "B" and "B" in the Specifications shall be balled and burlapped; all such plants shall have a ball formed from firm earth from the original and undisturbed soil in which the plant was growing; the ball shall be wrapped with untreated burlap or similar approved material, tightly secured with biodegradable lacing so as to hold the ball firm and intact; any "B" and "B" stock arriving with broken or loose balls or of "manufactured" earth will be rejected.

2. The diameters and depths of balls on "B" and "B" stock shall be in accordance with the

AAN Standard, for the size and species or variety specified, and shall be, in every case, sufficiently large to include the necessary root system.

E. Bare-Root Plants: Bare-root plants shall have a well-branched root system characteristic of

the species; root systems shall be live, moist fibrous, free from rot and mold, and shall meet the minimum root spread for bare-root plants in accordance with the AAN Standard.

F. Container Grown Plants: The provisions of the AAN Standard shall govern, except container

grown plants shall have been growing for at least 1 year but not more than 2 years in the same container; when removed from containers, plants shall show no evidence of being or having been root bound; only groundcover plants shall exhibit a "pot-bound" root condition.


2.02 SOIL MATERIALS AND CONDITIONERS A. Topsoil:

1. Weathered surface soils (A Horizon), or amended un-weathered topsoil (B Horizon), or blend of both, free from hard fragments and stones larger than 1 inch across the greatest dimension, objectionable salts, noxious woods and plants, partially disintegrated debris, or other materials inferior to the surface soils or that would be toxic or harmful to plant growth.

2. Grading Analysis:

Sieve Minimum Percent Passing 2" 100 1/2" 90 1/4" 80 #10 70

B. Peat:

1. A natural product obtained from fresh water sites or sedge peat and reed peat in which the organic matter consists of incompletely decomposed plant residues containing a negligible amount of woody matter.

2. Evenly moist at the time of mixing, delivered to the project site in a workable condition

and free of lumps. C. Manure: Mushroom manure free from clumps and foreign material larger than 1 inch and

substances toxic to plant growth and noxious weed seed.

1. Organic Matter: 20% minimum

2. Water Holding Capacity: 120% minimum

3. pH: 6.0 D. Fertilizer:

1. 16-8-16 Fertilizer in 4-ounce, 8-year release, heat-sealed polyethylene packets. 2. Commercial grade, uniform in composition, and conforming to applicable State and

Federal regulations.

E. Planting Mixtures:

1. For backfilling plant pits of deciduous trees, shrubs and vines:

a. Four parts by volume of topsoil and one part of decomposed stable manure, all mixed by hand or rotary mixer.

2. For backfilling plant pits of evergreen and broadleaf plants:

a. Four parts by volume of topsoil and one part of peat humus, all mixed by hand or

rotary mixer.


2.03 MANUFACTURED MATERIALS A. Membranes:

1. Shall be a multi-use woven flat ribbon polypropylene yarn with a facing of polypropylene, needle-punched fiber, with positive permeability.

2. Chopped glass building insulation is not acceptable.

B. Mulch:

1. Processed hardwood bark, ground or shredded, fibrous in nature, free from foreign materials and substances toxic to plant growth and noxious weed seed. Aged a minimum of 2 years.

2. Bark flakes and chunks (including cambium material) not smaller than 1/4" nor larger than

2" in any dimension and not decomposed.

3. Mushroom manure free from clumps and foreign material larger than 2" and substances toxic to plant growth and noxious weed seed to be used for all groundcover plant beds.

a. Organic Matter: 20% minimum

b. Water Holding Capacity: 120% minimum

c. pH: 6.0

C. Trunk Wrapping Material:

1. Two thicknesses of crinkled paper cemented together with bituminous material; minimum 4" wide and a 33% stretch factor.

2. Lightly tarred medium to coarse sisal yarn tying twine.

D. Stakes and Guys:

1. Wood Stakes: Rough sawn red or white cedar, southern yellow pine, or approved hardwoods; free from knots, rot or other defects that will impair strength or render stakes unfit for the intended purposes; cedar stakes may be peeled or unpeeled.

2. Ground Anchors: 4" universal iron type, 4" auger type, or wooden "deadmen".

3. Turnbuckles: Galvanized steel, nominal 1/8" x 6".

4. Wire: #12 gauge galvanized steel.

5. Chafing Guards: New or used 2-ply reinforced rubber or plastic hose; use all the same

color on the project. E. Tree Wound Dressing: Antiseptic and waterproof, black in color, and with an asphalt base;

containing no coal-tar, creosote, oils, kerosene, turpentine, or other materials harmful to the living tissue of trees.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION A. Observe precautionary measure to protect existing lawn and paved areas, trees, plants, and

beds against damage during the planting operation. B. Mark outlines on the ground for locations of planting beds; stake locations of individually

placed plants, and obtain approval of the Architect before starting excavation. C. Mark outlines on the ground for locations of individual plant pits, trenches and planting beds,

and obtain approval of the Architect before starting excavation. D. Salvaging Topsoil: Strip or otherwise remove approved topsoil from selected areas indicated

on the Contract Drawings; transport and deposit the topsoil in storage piles as shown on plans or at locations designated by the Architect.

3.02 EXCAVATION FOR PLANTING

A. Excavate pits, trenches and beds with vertical sides and flat bottoms to the dimensions

indicated. B. When soil conditions unfavorable to plant growth are encountered, dig holes sufficiently large

to permit the placing of additional amount of topsoil around and beneath the root system not to exceed 2 times the diameter of the root spread.

C. Excavate pits for bare-root plants and trees to diameters at least 12" larger than the

maximum spread of the roots and to minimum depth of at least 12" below the roots of the plant as placed.

D. For balled or potted plants, excavate pits to diameters at least 24" larger and minimum depth

to at least 6" deeper than size of ball or container. E. Excavate beds for groundcover plants to length and width indicated, with minimum depth of

6"; uniformly spread 3" of humus and thoroughly incorporate to a depth of 6". F. Where impervious soil or rock is encountered at the bottom of the pit, break up and loosen

the pit bottom to an additional depth of 12". G. Remove rocks and other underground obstructions to a depth necessary to permit proper

planting; if underground utilities, construction, or solid rock ledges are encountered, alternate locations must be selected and approved by the Architect.

H. Dig plant pits for balled and burlapped and bare-root plants prior to removing plants from

temporary storage; not more than 1 week shall elapse between digging of pits and placement of material.

I. Where pits are dug by augering, scarify the glazed, compacted pit sides prior to planting.

3.03 PLANTING A. Set plants plumb and straight with allowance for settlement so that plants bear the same

relationship to finished grade as they did in the nursery.


B. Place fertilizer packets, equally spaced 6 to 8 inches deep, beside the roots or root-balls of all planted trees and shrubs in the following quantities:

Green & Deciduous Trees Packets

8' to 10' Height and Whips 1 1" to 2" Caliper 2 2-1/2" to 3-1/2" Caliper 4 3-1/2" to 4" Caliper 5 4" to 5" Caliper 6

Flowering Trees Packets

5' to 10' Height 2

Shrubs Packets

12" to 24" Spread or Height 1 24" to 63" Spread or Height 2 3" to 5' Height 3

C. Place balled plants and trees in the pit and tamp planting mixture to fill voids around the base of the ball to a height of one-half of the depth of the ball; remove ball wrapping material from the top one-third of the ball; complete backfilling with planting mixture in 6" layers and settle with water; backfill mix shall be worked in and thoroughly tamped around the ball or roots in a manner that will fill all voids and eliminate air pockets; care shall be taken to avoid breaking or damaging roots during backfilling and tamping.

D. When backfilling is 2/3 completed, burlap or other decomposable wrapping shall be laid back

or cut off and removed; plants shall be thoroughly watered and, when water has been absorbed, backfilling shall be completed; water plants thoroughly again. If "plastic burlap" is used to contain root balls, remove completely prior to planting.

E. Open and remove containers of potted plants in a manner so as to prevent damage to plant

or root system; scarify the root ball to loosen fibrous roots; place plant in pit and carefully tamp planting mixture to fill voids under and around the ball; then backfill with planting mixture in 6" layers and settle with water.

F. Place bare-root plants in the pit with root system properly spread out and planting mixture

worked along the roots; remove damaged roots with a clean cut, then backfill with planting mixture in 6" layers and settle with water.

3.04 STAKING AND GUYING

A. All deciduous trees 7' or more in height and up to 2-1/2" caliper shall be supported. B. Stake or guy trees as shown on the Standard Details immediately upon backfilling; pre-

position ground anchors prior to attaching guy wires.

3.05 WRAPPING A. Unless otherwise directed, spirally wrap the trunks of deciduous trees between the lowest

main branches and the ground line, overlapping the wrap 1-1/2", within 4 days after planting; tie wrapping in at least 5 places including top, middle and bottom.


3.06 MULCHING A. Prior to mulching, edge plant beds and individual plants using a sharp nursery spade to

provide a clear cut division between the planted area and the adjacent areas; shape plant beds as indicated on the Contract Drawings; individual plant beds shall be circular and at least 1 ft. greater than the diameter of the pit.

B. Uniformly and continuously mulch plant beds to a loose depth of 4" or as indicated on the

Contract Drawings, placed on a glass fiber mat.

C. Within tree and plant pits, mat shall be cut to diameter required to cover entire pit and stapled to soil.

D. Place the mat on a continuous strip with minimum cutting; where cutting is necessary or to

join adjacent strips, overlap a minimum of 2" and anchor with staples.

3.07 EDGING A. All planting areas occurring in lawn area shall have a neat, clean edge cut into the turf

between the planted area and the lawn. The edging shall be cut with a sharp nursery spade and shall follow the shape of plant beds shown in the drawings.

3.08 WATERING

A. Thoroughly water all plants and maintain satisfactory moisture conditions during the life of the

Contract. To ensure proper growth, all newly planted material shall be kept moist, but not saturated, for a period of 60 days after final inspection and acceptance by owner.

3.09 PRUNING

A. Tops: The tops of all deciduous stock shall be pruned at the time of planting or immediately

thereafter; pruning operations shall conform to the best horticultural practices with due regard to natural form and growth characteristics of the individual species; a single terminal leader shall be preserved when pruning deciduous shade trees; unless otherwise directed, all deciduous plants shall have approximately 1/3 of the potential leaf-bearing surface removed; all cut surfaces 1" or more in diameter shall be painted with an acceptable tree paint.

3.10 MAINTENANCE AND REPLACEMENT

A. Contractor shall be responsible for keeping all plants in healthy, growing condition until

acceptance. B. During planting and until final acceptance, maintain plants and work incidental thereto by

replanting, plant replacement, watering, pruning, shearing, spraying, weeding, re-guying, rewrapping and by performing other operations of care for promotion of root growth and plant life so that work is in satisfactory condition at the completion of the Contract.

C. During the guaranty period, promptly replace plants that are dead or are in unhealthy,

unsightly or badly impaired condition; replace with healthy plants as soon as it is reasonably possible; do not make replacements in any season definitely unfavorable for planting.

D. When any plant is replaced during the guarantee period, the guarantee period for the

replaced plant shall be one (1) year from the date the plant was accepted by the Architect.


E. At the conclusion of the Contract guaranty period, the Owner will make an inspection of the work to determine condition of plants; plants then not in a healthy growing condition, as determined by the Architect, will be noted; remove plants noted to be unhealthy, unsightly, or damaged from the project site immediately and replace as soon as seasonal conditions permit with healthy plants of the same kinds and sizes as originally specified; make such replacements in the same manner as specified for the original planting, and at no additional cost to the Owner; any replaced plant shall have a one (1) year guarantee period beginning on date of replacement.

F. Unwrapping: Remove wrapping near end of guaranty period when directed by the Architect;

repair minor damage areas covered by wrapping.

3.11 RESTORATION A. Any damage done to the lawn and seeded areas shall be repaired to a condition generally

recognized as acceptable and to the satisfaction of the Architect; additional cost required for restoration work shall be at Contractor's expense.

3.12 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Request inspection for final acceptance at least 10 days before end of guaranty period. B. Final acceptance will be upon completion of all work in accordance with these specifications,

and upon final inspection by the Architect.


Rev. 9/13 Section 329219 - Seeding KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 7

SECTION 329219 SEEDING PART 1 - GENERAL Strict compliance with the requirements of this section is very important to the

University. Work not complying with these requirements will be rejected by the University.

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1. Placing topsoil.

2. Soil conditioning.

3. Finish grading.

4. Seeding.

5. Maintenance.

6. Sod. B. The Erosion and Sediment Control Plan lists specific seeding restoration requirements. C. Related Work specified elsewhere:

1. Section311100 - Clearing and Grubbing.

2. Section 310000 - Earthwork.

3. Section 312333 – Trenching & Backfilling.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A qualified installer with a minimum of 5 years experience, whose work has resulted in

successful lawn establishment.

1. Installer’s Field Supervision. Installer is required to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when planting is in progress.

B. Soil and soil supplement testing shall be performed by a Soils Testing Laboratory engaged

and paid for by the Contractor and approved by the University Representative. C. Collect soil samples under the direction of the University Representative. D. Reference Standards:

1. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PENNDOT); Publication 408 Specifications, 1994 as Amended.

2. Pennsylvania Seed Act of 1965, Act 187, as Amended.


3. Pennsylvania Soil Conditioner and Plant Growth Substance Law, Act of December 1, 1977, P.L. 258, No. 86(3P.S.68.2), as Amended.

4. Pennsylvania Agricultural Liming Materials Act of 1978, P.L. 15, No. 9(3P.S.132-1), as

Amended.

5. Rules for Testing Seeds of the Association of Official Seed Analysts.

1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates:

1. Prior to use or placement of material, submit a Statement of Compliance from the materials suppliers, together with supporting data, attesting that the composition of the following products meets specification requirements.

a. Fertilizer - Analysis content and percent of each.

b. Lime - Analysis content and percent of each.

c. Seed mixture(s) - State percentage of mixtures, purity, germination and maximum

weed seed content of each grass mixture.

2. Submit certified soil sample analyses, including laboratory's recommended soil supplement formulation, topsoil analysis - State pH, texture, organic content, and macro nutrients.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Seed:

1. Deliver seed fully tagged and in separate packages according to species or seed mix.

2. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit or storage will not

be accepted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TOPSOIL A. All topsoil stripped from the site and stockpiled may be reused provided the following

requirements are met:

1. Have a pH of between 6.0 and 7.0; contain not less than 2% nor more than 10% organic matter as determined by AASHTO T194.

2. Fertile friable loam, sand loam, or clay loam which will hold a ball when squeezed with

the hand, but which will crumble shortly after being released.

3. Free of clods, grass, roots, or other debris harmful to plant growth. Free of pests, pest larvae, and matter toxic to plants.

4. Salvaged topsoil shall comply with the requirements of Section 801 of the Pennsylvania

Department of Transportation Publication 408 Specifications and have a corrected pH of 6.0 to 7.0


5. Furnished topsoil shall comply with the requirements of Section 802 of the Pennsylvania Department of Transportation Publication 408 Specifications.

B. When topsoil stripped from the building site meeting the above requirements is not available, Contractor shall provide topsoil from off-site sources.

2.02 SEED

A. Fresh, clean, dated material from the last available crop and within the date period specified,

with a date of test not more than 9 months prior to the date of sowing. B. Percentage of pure seed present shall represent freedom from inert matter and from other

seeds distinguishable by their appearance. C. All seeds will be subject to analysis and testing. D. Seed mix in accordance with Erosion and Sediment Control Plan. E. Individual species shall be a combination of improved certified varieties with no one variety

exceeding 50% of the component. Individual species comprising 20% or less of the total seeding mixture may be of one variety. All varieties utilized shall have a mean quality rating of 7.0 or higher as listed in Table 1, for the Pennsylvania, University Park, high maintenance test plot, the USDA National Turfgrass Evaluation Program, 301-504-5125, http://hort.unl.edu/ntep.

F. Provide turfgrass sod within 50 feet of buildings. Contact the University for directions

regarding other areas to receive sod instead of seed. On slopes, provide “sod nails” or other means to hold sod in place.

TABLE 1 - GRASS SEED AND SEEDING RESTORATION

Restoration Basic Starter Seed Mix & Sowing Rate Condition Topsoil Lime* Fertilizer Fertilizer (% By Weight) Temporary N/A 100#/ N/A 10-6-4 @ 100% Annual Ryegrass Cover** 1,000 40# per Sow 1# per 1,000 sq. ft.

sq. ft. 1,000 sq.ft. March thru May/August thru September Lawns Yes 4 tons/ 10-20-20 10-6-4 @ 20% Kentucky Blue Grass (Poa pratensis)

acre 1,000# 40# per 60% Tall Fescue (Festuca arundinacea) per/acre 1,000 sq.ft. 20% Perennial Ryegrass (Lolium perenne)

Sow 6# per 1,000 sq. ft. March thru May/August thru September

* Unless a lesser rate is indicated by soil tests. ** Unless otherwise specified in the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan.

2.03 FERTILIZER

A. Liquid formulations may be used in lieu of dry formulations, provided the rate of application is adjusted to apply the same quantities of nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium per unit area as specified for dry formulations.

B. Basic Dry Formulation Fertilizer: Analysis 0-20-20 and as defined by the Pennsylvania

Fertilizer Law.

http://hort.unl.edu/ntep


C. Starter Fertilizer: Analysis 10-5-5 or 12-6-6 and 12-18-10 or 18-24-10 as defined by the Pennsylvania Fertilizer Law.

D. Contractor must submit soils samples to an approved laboratory for fertilizing

recommendations. Recommendations shall be submitted to Owner for his review and decision relating to modifying the application rate as shown on the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan.

2.04 LIME

A. Raw ground limestone conforming to Section 804.2(a), Publication 408 Specifications. B. Provide all lime in accordance with application rates shown in the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan, or as recommended by the soil test laboratory.

2.05 INOCULANT A. Inoculate leguminous seed before seeding with nitrogen fixing bacteria culture

prepared specifically for the species. B. Do not use inoculants later than the date indicated by the manufacturer. C. Protect inoculated seed from prolonged exposure to sunlight prior to sowing. D. Re-inoculate seed not sown within 24 hours following initial inoculation.

2.06 EROSION CONTROL FABRIC A. Shall be a knitted construction of yarn with uniform openings interwoven with strips of

biodegradable paper, furnished in rolls with 4-mil opaque polyethylene base as protection for outdoor storage.

B. Fabric 0.2 pound per square yard.

2.07 JUTE MATTING A. Shall be heavy weight, minimum 0-9 pound per square yard, jute mesh with 1" opening.

2.08 FABRIC/MATTING ANCHORS A. Staples for fastening fabric to ground shall be minimum 11 gauge wire, "U" shaped,

with a 1" crown and 6" legs.

2.09 MULCHING MATERIALS A. Mulches for seeded areas shall be one, or a combination, of the following:

1. Wheat or oat straw; thoroughly threshed.

a. Cured to less than 20% moisture content by weight.

b. Containing no stems of tobacco, soybeans, or other coarse or woody material, free of mature seed bearing stalks or roots of prohibited or noxious weeds.


2. Wood Cellulose:

a. Containing no growth or germination-inhibiting substances.

b. Green-dyed and air-dried.

c. Packages not exceeding 100 pounds.

d. Moisture Content: 12% 3%

e. Organic Matter (Dry oven basis): 98.6% 0.2%

f. Ash Content: 1.4% 0.2%

g. Minimum Water-Holding Capacity: 100%

B. Mulch Binders:

1. Emulsified Asphalt AASHTO M140, Grade SS-1

2. Cut Back Asphalt AASHTO M81, RC 250

3. Non-asphaltic Emulsion - Natural Vegetable Gum Blended with Gelling and Hardening Agents

4. Polyvinyl Acetate Emulsion Resin, Containing 60% (+ 1%) Total Solids by Weight

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TIME OF OPERATIONS

A. Conduct seeding operations during the times specified in the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE

A. "Hard pan" or heavy shale:

1. Plow to a minimum depth of 6".

2. Loosen and grade by harrowing, discing, or dragging.

3. Remove surface stones over 3" in any dimension and other debris.

B. Loose loam, sandy loam, or light clay:

1. Loosen and grade by harrowing, discing, or dragging.

2. Remove surface rocks over 3" in any dimension and other debris.


3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Place topsoil and spread over the prepared sub-grade to obtain the required depth and grade elevation. Final compacted thickness of topsoil not less than 4 inches.

B. Roller weighing over 120 pounds per foot of width shall not be used for compaction.

C. Remove all materials unsuitable or harmful to plant growth, and legally dispose off site.

D. Do not place topsoil when the sub-grade is frozen, excessively wet, or extremely dry; do not

handle topsoil when frozen or excessively wet.

E. Finish surface of topsoil shall be smooth, even and true to lines and grades with no ponding areas.

3.04 TILLAGE

A. After seed bed areas have been brought to proper compacted elevation, thoroughly loosen to a minimum depth of 5" by discing, harrowing, or other approved methods.

B. Do not work top-soiled areas when frozen or excessively wet.

C. Liming:

1. Distribute limestone uniformly at the rate indicated by the soil test.

2. Thoroughly incorporate into the topsoil to a minimum depth of 4" as a part of the tillage

operation.

D. Basic Fertilizer:

1. Distribute basic fertilizer uniformly at the rate indicated by the soil test.

2. Incorporate into soil to depth of 4" by approved methods as part of tillage operation. 3.05 FINISH GRADING

A. Remove unsuitable material larger than 1" in any dimension.

B. Uniformly grade surface to the required contours without the formation of water pockets.

C. Distribute starter fertilizer at the rates indicated on the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan.

D. Incorporate starter fertilizer into the upper 1" of soil. 3.06 SEEDING

A. Uniformly sow specified seed mix by use of approved hydraulic seeder, power-drawn drill, power-operated seeder or hand-operated seeder.

B. Do not seed when winds are over 15 mph.

C. Upon completion of seed covering, roll the area with a roller, exerting a maximum force of 65

pounds per foot width of roller.


D. See Table 1, Grass Seed and Seeding Restoration, information in Section II.A.B. 3.07 MULCHING

A. Mulch within 24 hours of seeding.

B. Place straw mulch in a continuous blanket at a minimum rate of 3 tons per acre.

C. Anchor straw mulch by use of twine, stakes, wire staples, plastic nets, or asphalt or chemical mulch binder. Apply binders by the manufacturer’s method and rate.

D. Apply wood cellulose fiber hydraulically at a rate of 320 pounds per 1,000 square yards;

incorporate as an integral part of the slurry after seed and soil supplements have been thoroughly mixed.

E. Protect structures, pavements, curbs, and walls to prevent asphalt staining.

F. Do not spray asphalt and chemical mulch binders onto any area within 100 feet of a stream

or other body of water. 3.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance of seeded work.

B. Maintenance includes watering, weeding, three initial mowings, cleanup, edging, and repair of washouts or gullies.

C. Keep seeded areas moist to a depth of 3" for a period of 24 days following seeding.

D. Those areas which do not show a prompt catch of grass within 24 days of seeding shall be

reseeded until complete stand of grass occurs.

E. When the grass reaches an average height of 3", cut to a height of 2"; irregularities or depressions which show up at this time shall be leveled and reseeded.

F. Contractor shall remove unwanted weed growth which may occur during grass germination.

Remove by hand or herbicide. If herbicides are used, the area to which herbicides are applied shall be reseeded until a complete stand of grass occurs.

G. Contractor's maintenance shall continue until all areas are grassed and free from bare spots

or off-color areas, and turf areas are accepted. H. Mow once per week for a six week period, and cleanup, edging, and repair.


Rev. 9/13 Section 329223 - Sodding KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 5

SECTION 329223

SODDING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY


1. Preparation of subsoil. 2. Placing topsoil. 3. Fertilizing. 4. Sod installation. 5. Maintenance.

1.02 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Sodded Areas:

1. Basis of Measurement: By square yard. 2. Basis of Payment: Includes preparation of subsoil, placing topsoil, sodding, watering and

maintenance to specified mowings.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials:

1. ASTM C602 – Standard Specification for Agricultural Liming Materials.

B. Turfgrass Producers International:

1. TPI – Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding.

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Weeds: Vegetative species other than specified species to be established in given area.

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit data for sod grass species, fertilizer, mulch, and other accessories.




B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, cutting method and maximum grass height; types, application frequency, and recommended coverage of fertilizer.


A. Sod: Root development capable of supporting its own weight without tearing, when

suspended vertically by holding upper two corners.

1.08 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Sod Producer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section approved by sod producer.



B. Deliver sod on pallets or in rolls. Protect exposed roots from dehydration.

C. Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours.

1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE


B. Maintain sodded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and

exhibits vigorous growing condition for two cuttings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SOD

A. Sod Growers:

1. Sporting Valley Turf. 2. Lehigh Valley Turf. 3. Substitutions: Section 016000 – Product Requirements.

B. Sod: TPI defined field grown standard grade; cultivated grass sod; type indicated below; with

strong fibrous root system, free of stones, burned or bare spots; containing no more than 5 weeds per 1000 sq ft.

1. Kentucky Bluegrass Blend Grass Type: 100 percent.


2.02 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural soil, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, taken from drained site; free of subsoil, clay, or impurities, plants, weeds and roots; pH value of minimum 6.0 and maximum 7.0.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Fertilizer: Commercial grade; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of elements derived

from organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate deficiencies of topsoil recommended by soil analysis.

B. Lime: ASTM C602, Class O agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium

carbonate equivalent. C. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter capable of inhibiting vigorous growth of

grass. D. Wood Pegs: Softwood, sufficient size and length to anchor sod on slope.

2.04 HARVESTING SOD

A. Machine cut sod flat or in rolls in accordance with TPI.

2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 014500 - Quality Control: Testing, inspection and analysis requirements. B. Analyze to ascertain percentage of nitrogen, phosphorus, potash, soluble salt content,

organic matter content, and pH value. C. Provide recommendation for fertilizer and lime application rates for specified sod grass

species as result of testing. D. Testing is not required when recent tests are available for imported topsoil. Submit these test

results to testing laboratory. Indicate, by test results, information necessary to determine suitability.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify prepared soil base is ready to receive the Work of this section.

3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL

A. Prepare sub-soil and eliminate uneven areas and low spots. B. Maintain lines, levels, profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes

into level areas. C. Remove foreign materials and undesirable plants and their roots. Do not bury foreign material

beneath areas to be sodded.


D. Remove contaminated subsoil. E. Scarify sub-soil to depth of 4 inches where topsoil is to be placed. F. Repeat cultivation in areas where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has

compacted subsoil. 3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL

A. Spread topsoil to minimum depth of 6 inches over area to be sodded. B. Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen sub-grade. C. Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading. D. Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas and to ensure positive drainage.

3.04 FERTILIZING

A. Apply lime at application rate recommended by soil analysis. Work lime into top 6 inches of

soil. B. Apply fertilizer at application rate recommended by soil analysis. C. Apply fertilizer after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod. D. Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod. E. Lightly water soil to aid dissipation of fertilizer.

3.05 LAYING SOD

A. Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod. B. Lay sod within 24 hours after harvesting to prevent deterioration. C. Lay sod tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12 inches

minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces. D. Lay smooth. Align with adjoining grass areas. E. Place top elevation of sod 1/2 inch below adjoining edging, paving and curbs. F. On slopes 6 inches per foot and steeper, lay sod perpendicular to slope and secure every

row with wooden pegs at maximum 2 feet on center. When using “big roll”, lay sod parallel to slope. Drive pegs flush with soil portion of sod.

G. Do not place sod when temperature is lower than 32 degrees F. H. Water sodded areas immediately after installation and for ten (10) consecutive days after

placement. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil.


3.06 MAINTENANCE – PER PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

A. Mow grass 2 times to maintain at maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at each mowing.

B. Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary. C. Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming. D. Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out. E. Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides. Remedy damage resulting from improper use of

herbicides. F. Immediately replace sod on areas showing deterioration or bare spots. G. Protect sodded areas with warning signs during maintenance period.


Rev. 9/13 Section 334000 - Storm Drainage Utilities KUFR-0033 Page 1 of 3

SECTION 334000

STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION


1. Storm Drainage Piping. 2. Inlets. 3. Manholes. 4. Drainage Channels and Swales.

B. Related Work specified elsewhere:

1. Section 310000 – Earthwork. 2. Section 312333 – Trenching & Backfilling.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). B. Pennsylvania Department of Transportation (PENNDOT):

1. Form 408 Specifications, 1994 Edition. 2. Publication 72, Standards for Roadway Construction.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit certification attesting that materials meet or exceed the specification requirements. B. Submit detailed shop drawings of inlets and end-walls. Drawings to be sealed by a

Professional Engineer registered in the state where work is located.

C. All storm drainage plans and designs must be submitted to the Township for approval. It is recommended that this occur prior to the preliminary design submission.

1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Precast Concrete Units:

1. After fabrication and curing, transport the units to the job site. Protect until required for

installation.

2. Handle to avoid damage to surfaces, edges and corners and to avoid creation of stresses within the units.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SUBBASE AGGREGATE

A. Select Granular Material – Section 703.3, Form 408 Specifications.

2.02 CONCRETE

A. Section 033000.

2.03 INLET

A. 6” square polished brass grate, with adaptor for 6” ductile iron storm pipe.

B. Grates shall have maximum 3/8” openings. Road grates shall be bicycle safe; Campbell Foundry Company #2617, or approved equal.

2.04 FILTER FABRIC

A. Spun bounded continuous filament polypropylene soil stabilization and filter fabric; equivalent

opening size 70-100 U.S. Standard Sieve. B. Rot, mildew and insect resistant; non-raveling; approximately 15 mils thick, 4.0 oz/yd2, 1200

psi breaking strength.

2.05 FILTER BLANKET STONE

A. Size 2A, Section 703.2 PENNDOT Form 408 Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 TRENCHING, BEDDING AND BACKFILL

A. Conform to the requirements specified in Section 312333.

3.02 PIPE LAYING

A. Clean and inspect pipe before lowering into the trench; start pipe laying at the low end and proceed upgrade, unless otherwise approved by the Architect; bed the pipe for its full length.

B. Lay bell and spigot pipe with the spigot inserted the full depth of the socket and with the bell

end upgrade.

C. Replace broken or otherwise damaged pipe, and keep pipe clean of deposits and debris; piping, as laid, shall be approved by the Architect before the trench is backfilled.

3.03 CONSTRUCTION

A. Locate inlets as indicated on the Contract Drawings; perform excavation as specified in

section 024100. B. Construct inlets as shown on Contract Drawings and as per manufacturer.

C. Construct drainage channels and swales to the lines and grades and cross-sections indicated

on the Contract Drawings.


D. Provide an adequate number of exterior storm drains that resist clogging.

E. Provide slot drains at the end of long sidewalk runs with grade toward building.

F. The top of lawn grates shall be set 1/2" below finished grade level to facilitate drainage. Lawn grates shall be round.

3.04 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill structures only after examination by the Professionals. B. Perform backfilling and compaction as specified in Section 312333.


Facilities Construction, Renovation & Repair Contract No ...

Documents

Transcript of Facilities Construction, Renovation & Repair Contract No ...